Financial Bid

Government of Rajasthan
Water Resources Department
Bidding Document
(Single Stage-Two Envelopes Bid)
VOLUME-II
(FINANCIAL BID)
For
Planning,Design and Construction of Zawar Anicut with feeder

channel and tunnel for diversion of water to Daya Dam Tehsil -
Sarada, Udaipur District in the State of Rajasthan India on
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (E.P.C) single
Responsibility turn-key basis
,including8 years O&M.
E-NIB No.22 /2023-24

Cost Rs 14296.00 Lakhs
Financial Bid
August -2023
Additional Chief Engineer

Water Resources Zone,
Udaipur (Raj.)
VOLUME II
Section-V : Procuring Entity‟s Requirements
Part A : Project Profile

Part B : Scope of Work
Part C : Technical specifications
Section-VIA : General Conditions of Contract
Section-VIB : Special Conditions of the Contract/ Contract Data
Section-VIC : Contract Forms
Section – VII: Price Bid
Section – VIII: Payment Schedule
Section –IX: Indicative Activity Schedule of Project
VOLUME III
Indicative Drawings
Section-V : Procuring Entity’s Requirements
VA: PROJECT PROFILE
INTRODUCTION
The daya dam and the canal system have been constructed during
1978 to 1980. This lies in the som sub basin of Mahi basin. The location of the reservoir is on general uplands.
The dam is a earthen dam of length of 1130m and 26.56m height (NOF) from the bed level of the main nallah
to the top of the dam. The spill arrangement consist of a ogee weir and bye wash of total length 150.0 m. The
reservoir has a design capacity of 11.23 Mcum and covers an area of 700 hac. at full tank level (FTL). The
gross catchment area is 100.35 Sqkm, all free.
The canal system comprises of 1 main canal of which supply to a CCA of 1800.40 hac.
(GCA 2655.26 hac.) covering 10 villages to various extents.
The Daya irrigation project was constructed with the aim to provide irrigation facilities to
the tail end command area of Jaisamand RMC, which was deprived from irrigation facilities due to
following reasons.
 The sill level of Jaisamand RMC is 2.75m above the project’s sill level i.e. at LMC of Jaisamand
 The inflow in tank is reduced due to change in rainfall pattern.
 715.00 Mcft water at jaisamand lake is reserved for drinking purpose for Udaipur city and
Sarada, Salumber tehsil of district Udaipur.
Thus the Daya main canal was design with consideration of water requirement for command
area of Jaisamand RMC beyond Ch 486 (14.58 km.) at this point 10.11 km. long Daya’s LMC join Jaisamand
RMC. The tail command area of Jaisamand RMC consist direct outlets and 3 minor viz Sarsiya, Jhadol &
Dingri minor.
The canal system of Daya provides irrigation facilities of 1800.40 hac. covering 10 villages
to various extent.
The Gross storage capacity of the dam is 437.17 Mcft, live storage capacity is 396.60 Mcft and
dead storage capacity is 40.57 Mcft. Daya dam does not receive sufficient water from its own catchment.
The Zawar anicut proposed on Tidi river near village Singatwara. This anicut is proposed for
augmentation of water deficit in Daya dam. There is sufficient surplus water available in Tidi river. Project
envisaged to divert surplus mansoon water to Daya dam.
There is nearly 250 Mcft water can be diverted through an open channel of nearly 3060 m
length & nearly 4000 m long tunnel through gravity, the total length of feeder channel with tunnel will be
about 7060 m.
Administrative and Financial Sanction: -
Construction of Zawar Anicut with feeder channel and tunnel for Diversion of water to Daya dam
Tehsil:- Sarada Distt. Udaipur has been sanctioned administratively by Government vide No. 2324-
DSTS999967-110 Dated: 26/05/2023 for Rs.19999.87 Lacs.

The work is included in Honorable Chief minister budget announcement of year 2023-24.
LOCATION OF SITE :-
Zawar anicut
The site of the proposed Zawar anicut is near village Singhatwara in tehsil Sarada, district
Udaipur at a distance of ½ Km from Singhatwara village. The site is approachable by a pucca road from
village Singhatwara on the Oda - Tidi road and is at a distance of 30 Km by road from Udaipur via Tidi.
The co-ordinates are latitude 24°-22’-12” North and longitude 73°-43’-31” East.
Daya Dam
The Daya irrigation project is located near village Daya and approachable from Sarada by road. It is
located at about 7 km distance from the road beyond the village Sarada in North direction. The latitude and longitude of
site are 24°-10’-45” North , 73°-48’-30” East respectively. The dam site is on main road from Udaipur to Salumber.
Building Work-
To provide the accommodation and working space new office buildings need to be constructed. In this work total
new Plinth Area comes to about nearly 2125 m2. This includes construction of new office building and rest house at,
udaipur and office building at tunnel site .Also contractor has to construct Inspection Hut cum laboratories 2 nos (Each
of size 10 m x 7 m) Provision of sanitary work, electrical work, water supply.
Road Work-
It is proposed to construct approach road from inlet to outlet also to interconnect every shaft, so motorable road with
bituminous top is proposed.Tentative length of road is 2.5 km with village road.
Lighting Work-
Adequate lighting shall be provided at the face and at any other point where work is in progress at equipment
installations, such as pumps,fans and transformers .A minimum illumination of 100 lux shall be provided atZawar
Anicut, tunnel and shaft headings during work also along the length of both tunnels also adequate lighting shall be
provided.
Miscellaneous Works-
It is proposed to have fully automatic and fail-safe operation of real time rainfall data acquisition from four AWS
which are to be installed in the free catchment of the demand inflow received from local distributaries. The scope of
work covers conceptualisation, design, pre-dispatch inspections, supply, installation, pre-commissioning test,
commissioning tests, commissioning, trial run and maintenance of the entire Instrumentation and Control
(PLC)/SCADA system and operation & maintenance for 08 (Eight) years. The complete system including AWS
installed in catchment. Also Work includes installation, operation & maintenance for 08 (Eight) years of various
instruments at tunnel site. With it special provision of electrical charges for the eight years and construction and
maintenance of communication system of tunnel.
Operation &Maintenance (O & M) of Dam for 08 years:-
It includes maintenance of all the constructed infrastructure for 08 years. With it firm will provide the pumping sets,
diesel drivel generator, diesel work agents, surveyors, supervisors, security guard, electrician, gauge reader and beldar.
BENEFITS OF PROJECT:-
With assured water supply, a sense of security does increase in the minds of the people and health and sanitation
level goes up. The inclusion of indirect and second ary costs and benefits is very important element in the economic
justification of the project, particularly in a state like Rajasthan facing severe scarcity of water resource as surplus
monsoon water flows down unutilized and as such, one of the most important purpose of the project is to absorb the
unused water resource and under used factors of production and increase their efficiencies.
PROVISION TAKEN IN ESTIMATE-
The following major provisions has been taken in the estimate-
 Preliminary survey.
 Construction Zawar anicut across Tidi river in village Singhatwara.
 Construction of Feeder channel of length 3060m with cut & cover.
 Construction of D shape tunnel of 4000m length.
 Construction of Aqueduct.
 Construction of VRBs.
 Construction of Superpassage.
 Construction of Watch & ward quarters.
 Construction of Road.
 O&M for 8 years.
Miscellaneous Work including Scada work, various instrumentation for at tunnel inlet/outlet, Electrification Charges
work and Communication System of tunnel.
BASIS OF ESTIMATION-
The Estimation of above bid is based on Water Resources district Udaipur BSR 2022, PWD Building BSR 2022 and
PHED BSR 2022.
SECTION V B: SCOPE OF WORK (PROJECT)
Under this agreement, the scope of the project starts for Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder
channel and related structures like VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type cut and
cover,watch and ward quarters and repair of other office buildings and construction
of roads mean and includes but not limited to:
A. Survey, investigation, planning and designing for Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder channel
and related structures like VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type RCC cut and
cover,watch and ward quarters and Constructuion and repair of other office buildings and
construction of roads etc. as described in bid.
B. Construction of Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder channel and related structures like
VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,watch and ward quarters and
construction and repair of other office buildings and construction of roads as described in
bid.
C. Construction of non-residential buildings and repair of other office buildings.
D. Identification & diversion of forest land required for execution of the project components.
E. Identification of private, government land and underground mining area
required for the project components, for temporary & permanent acquisition as per
Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation
and Resettlement Act 2013 & Rules 2016.
F. All other activities/infrastructural works, works related to the project as described in the bid.
G. Operation & Maintenance & management of the project components created
under this agreement for Eight years after completion of the project construction,
supply of all spares.
The broad scope of work consists following principal activities but not limited to:
Principal Activities
A. Survey, investigation, planning and designing of Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder
channel and related structures like VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type
RCC cut and cover,watch and ward quarters and Construction and repair of
other office buildings and construction of roads as described in bid.
a. SURVEY
(i) Review of survey data available with department, collection of maps & revenue
records, digitization of maps, carrying out survey activities required like
construction of Pucca benchmark muttam, transfer of Benchmarks either by
DGPS or using double levelling,
(ii) Survey work in grid at defined interval using Total station /DGPS instrument,
preparation of Block level plan showing all permanent features/utilities
including trees, for planning of tunnels
alignment and superimposing it on digitized map and developing contours at
interval desired by Engineer in charge.
(iii) Transfer of tunnels alignments from map to the ground and taking levels by
auto level or DGPS, Developing L-section and cross section.
(iv) Grid survey for all structures.
(v) Transfer of Anicut alignment from map to the ground and taking levels by auto
level or DGPS, Developing L-section and cross section.
(vi) Any other survey required for technoeconomic & feasible planning. Design of
the entire project components and as required by the employer or
representatives.
(vii) Fixing of permanent bench marks along the Dams alignment,its submergence
area & well /school/ prominent structures, by DGPS in the complete working
area to verify the field levels at every half km.
b. Investigations
(i) Conducting Geological investigation for foundation investigation for structures
like Anicut,Superpassge,twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,Aqueduct,
,VRBs and feeder channel and tunnel including NX Boring (dia. 54.7 mm)
with diamond coring bits in all type of strata encountered including i.e.
overburden, soft& quartzite rock, hard & quartzite rock etc, including taking
out of core and arranging core in proper order in suitable core boxes, including
SPT/Plate load test for bearing capacity, soil classification, dispersivity,
swelling pressure and other soil investigations as directedby owner.
(ii) The Department consultant for the Geotechnical investigations shall be
Geological Survey of India through its representative. Foundations
investigations, geological mapping for All the structures including anicut
Superpassge,twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,Aqueduct, tunnel
work,VRBs and feeder channel open excavation, classification of strata as &
when required etc shall bedone through GSI. The charges for obtaining such
consultation from GSI including it lodging & boarding charges etc. shall be
borne by the contractor.
c. Planning & designing

(i) Detailed planning, hydraulic & structural design of the Superpassge,twin barrel
box type RCC cut and cover,Aqueduct, VRBs and feeder channel and tunnel
work, service road etc. as described in bid for the given hydraulic parameters, ,
including all accessories on any standard software including details of all
aspects of civil, hydraulic design for Safe & smooth operation/ monitoring
and control of the system, as per the approved alignment.
(ii) Cross sections of tunnels at different locations, cut and cover, aqueduct section
etc..
(iii) Detailed planning, hydraulic & structural design of Anicut,tunnel structures
such as, shaft, twin barrel box type RCC Cut & Cover, Aqueduct,
VRBs,superpassages and service road etc. as described in bid
(iv) General arrangement drawings for, Anicut,tunnel structures such as, shaft, twin
barrel box type RCC Cut & Cover, Aqueduct, VRBs,superpassages and service
road etc. office buildings, field lab,service road. With infrastructural works.
(v) General arrangement drawings for anicut alignment along with all
ancillarywork and infrastructural works.
(vi) Planning and design of HT/LT lines network to meet power requirement of
project, buildings, site offices & others infrastructural points by connecting it to
the nearest 33 KV Grid station in the project area/nearby area of the project
with dedicated lines of adequate length.
(vii) Design of all related HEM works for the entire project.
If there is any discrepancy or data gap in the available contour map, digitized cadastral map
etc, contractor will verify the data from field by conducting survey by total station/DGPS, land
details as per revenue,mining and Forest department. At the time of execution of work, in
case survey of any additional area is required, the same shall be done by the contractor
without any cost.
Design & drawing of Anicut,Superpassge,twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,Aqueduct,
for tunnel work,VRBs and feeder channel,service road etc. as described in bid will be as per
design criteria of Water Resources Department, PWD, PHED, relevant I.S. Codes, CPHEEO
Manual, I.R.C. Publications, circulars issued by the Water Resources Department from time to
time and getting its approval from competent authorities.
Any requirement of work whether requested by the owner or otherwise whether specifically
described in the contract or not but are necessary or required for the proper completion and
functioning of the project/works in accordance with the contract including of any gaps and
deficiencies in the works shall be considered in the scope of the work, and shall not entitle
the contractor for any extra payment.
B. Main Construction activity:

Construction of Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder channel and related
structures like VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type RCC cut and
cover,watch and ward quarters and construction and repair of other office
buildings and construction of roads etc. as described in bid.
Tunnel
The Tunnels will be 4.0 m dia D shaped designed for discharge of 14.05 cumecs
under gravity flow conditions with longitudinal slope of 1 in 1500.Rock stabilization such as
50 mm shotcreting,Rock/anchor bolts, grouting permanent steel support, 30 cm RCC lining of
M 20 grade concrete along whole length should be done with 2 shafts of 45 m depth should be
constructed for connecting tunnel to upper ground with 4 vehicle pockets at suitable interval
along the length of the tunnel and as advised by the competent authority i.e., Owner in
consultation with Bidders/Owners design consultant (ODC/BDC). During vetting/approval of
design of tunnel the hydrology require review and same is to be got done by the
bidder/Contractor at no extra cost.
All other parameters i.e. Tunnel levels, road and buildings shown in the drawings are tentative
and shall be finalized by the ODC after design & drawings submitted by the contractor to ODC
for vetting. All the works are to be executed by the contractor as per Designs & drawings of
main components of tunnel vetted by the relevant Directorates of ODC and finally approved
by the owner (Additional Chief Engineer Water Resources Zone, Udaipur). Any
modifications/alterations suggested by the approving authority shall be implemented and the
contractor is not entitled for any extra payment on account of these changes and the bid price
quoted by the contractor is deemed to have included all these aspects.
All other ancillary works related to the safety& proper functioning of the Tunnels.
20 mm and 40 mm aggregate size concreting which is to be used for contruction work should
be used with polypropelene fibres (recron) at 125gram per 50 kg of cement.
Necessary approach channel, both on inlet side and outlet side of Tunnel in approach channel
found necessary as per Design and accepted and approved by the Owner.
All weather instruments rain gauges & other instruments shall be installed in proper time.
Arrangement of 3 phase power supply from nearest feasible AVVNL/Discom feeder
complete along with 100% power backup by generator at tunnel site.
Construction of various buildings along with first class vitrified tile flooring with white cement
high finish with rich specifications and good condition of maintenance, first class/selected
grade teak wood frame with teak facing by flush door polished with wire guage doors &
windows& Safety bars, conduit wiring, all sanitory fitting, water supply arrangements along
with complete furniture, electric branded accessories with air conditioning, landscaping,
recreation facilities, boundary walls, fencing and should be completed with five months of date
of start. All types of planning and design should be prepared by professional Architect and got
to be approved by Engineer in charge, no extra payment will be made for this.
Providing streetlights AT approach road, field hostel, rest house, Subdivision
premises, and division premises at Salumber along with 8 nos of High mast lights system as
advised by the competent authority i.e., Owner whose decision regarding location and number
will be final.
Any requirement of work whether requested by the owner or otherwise and
whether specifically described in the contract or not but are necessary or required for the
proper completion and functioning of the project/works in accordance with the Contract
including of any gaps and deficiencies in the works shall not be deemed to be any change in
the scope of work and shall not entitle the Contractor for any extra payment.
INSTRUMENTATION
AUTOMATIONS BY PLC-SCADA
It is proposed to have fully automatic and fail-safe operation of real time rainfall data
acquisition from four AWS which are to be installed in the free catchment of the demand
inflow received from local distributaries. The scope of work covers conceptualisation, design,
pre-dispatch inspections, supply, installation, pre-commissioning test, commissioning tests,
commissioning, trial run and maintenance of the entire Instrumentation and Control
(PLC)/SCADA system and operation & maintenance for 08 (Eight) years. The complete
system including AWS installed in catchment.
The following equipment shall be included in SCADA for monitoring and control of the
system. The following list is not comprehensive, and the scope of Contract shall not be limited
by list but shall include all necessary instruments, hardware, software, cabling, earthing,
lightning protection, etc., which shall be required for proper monitoring and control of the
complete system including pump station.
Rainfall data of four AWS.
PLC based Instrument control panel with all necessary hardware and software for monitoring
and control of the entire scheme. The PLC shall be provided with all hardware and software
for interfacing with the SCADA system at all rain gauge stations in the catchment area.
Battery and battery charger for theI&C system.
Instrumentation and control cables
Design of the complete system along with the detailed specifications of the equipment
proposed to be installed shall be designed by bidder and submitted for necessary approval of
the Department. The design of the system shall adhere to the principles detailed in the
subsequent clause of this chapter “Specifications for Automation Instrumentation and
Control”. The proposed system shall have necessary arrangement to be interfaced for linking it
to future expansion and integration with other SCADA system of department. Also, system
should be compatible for further automation.
Irrespective of the detailed specifications of the respective items detailed above the
bidder shall be required to provide all equipment, accessories, cabling, earthing, providing
necessary transducers/sensors, system hardware/software, programming logic etc. to achieve
the objectives listed below.
Control System (PLC)/SCADA
The entire PLC/SCADA system is required to receive, store and the information From
Electrical, Mechanical & Instrumentation Equipment.
 Instrumentation equipment‟s.
 Level of water in the Dam.
 Real time Rainfall recorded from AWS installed in Catchment.
 Processing of information for Control
 Generation of reports.
 Any other control logics required for smooth operation of system.
 Alarm Situations
The alarm schedule is indicative of what is required. The Bidder shall provide for the
annunciation of all alarms necessary in order to achieve control and monitoring requirements.
Requirement of Instrumentation
To achieve the objectives listed above in scope of work, the bidder shall provide the r
required numbers of equipment / sensors. Main equipment required is as listed below. The list
is not comprehensive and the scope of contract shall not be limited by list but include all
probes, level sensors, input-output modules, interfaces, other sensing elements, cabling, ducting,
earthling, providing lightening protection, providing facilities of local display of readings from
instruments, etc., which shall be required for automation as desired under scope of work for PLC
systems. The main equipment‟s required are as listed below but not limited to:
 Temperature meters
 Strong motion accelerograph
 Seismograph
 Automatic digitalized Rain gauge station telemetry
 Automatic dam Water Level Meter complete
 Any other equipment suggested by ODC
MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
There are some minor items of fittings and fixtures such as water stops, railing, cover plates,
parapets which are not quantifiable and provided on lump-sum basis
The details of these items shall be proposed under the scope of planning and design work and
will be executed as under scope of civil works.
All minor items or items not particularly specified which are necessary for safe and efficient
execution and operation of works under the Contract and not included in the BOQ are deemed
to have been covered by the bidder under "miscellaneous items"
Following parameters of the project are fixed and bidder’s proposal should be based
accordingly.
Sr Particulars Tunnel
No.
1 Tunnel Location and Alignment As per Preliminary/indicative

drawing given in Bid
documents (Minor change
may not be ruled out based
on geological investigation
findings) length 4000 mtrs
2 Shape of Finished Tunnel D- Shape
3 Design Discharge of Finished Tunnel 14.05 cumecs
4 Length of Finished Tunnel 4.0 km
5 Diameter of Finished Tunnel Inner 4.0m D shaped
6 Slope of Tunnel 1 in 1500

Construction of Zawar Anicut:
Construction of Anicut is combination of Over Flow Section &Non Over Flow Section. Length of
Over Flow Section is 90.0 m and Non Over Flow Section is 40.0 M
Over Flow Section-

The Overflow section is 90.00 m length which having 90.0 m effective water way length and height
from foundation 13 m .Provision of ADIT structure on both side of Non overflow section has been
provided if required. Overflow section has been distributed in 5 number of blocks having different
foundation level but the deepest foundation level of centre block 91.00 m is considered in design of
Overflow section u/s slope is considered as 0.1:1 and D/S considered 0.9:1 from deepest level
It is proposed to construct overflow portion as gravity dam with cement concrete grades of plum M-15,
and Lamina in M-20 & stilling Basin M-25.
Non Overflow Section-
A cement concrete non overflow has been proposed of length 40.00 m. Deepest foundation level of
Non-overflow is 96.0 m considered for design of each Non Overflow section and u/s slope 0.1: d/s slope
is 0.6:1.0 up to MWL from deepest level.The top level of NOF is taken as 109.90 m.The hearting
portion of non overflow section is proposed in M-15 grade of concrete and Lamina portion considered
in M-20 grade of concrete.
Construction of New Non-residential buildings of Division office, Rest house and Sub
divison office Building at Salumber and sarada and site office at anicut and tunnel site.
i. Construction of non-residential buildings of total plinth area of 2125 Sqm, fully
furnished of Class- I finish as per the details provided in specifications, at
different locations on Salumber and sarada including development of the campus.
ii. Power backup to non-residential buildings in shape of inverters of 10 KVA capacity.
iii. 5 nos temporary site camp office/office buildings, till main office buildings
constructed for department officials, equipped with all office facilities such as
furniture, computers, cooling system, high speed internet facility, printer,
electricity supply etc. be completed within 3 months from date of start of work.
Later, the furniture will be shifted to main office Buildings.
deficiencies in the works shall be considered in the scope of the work, and shall not entitle the
contractor for any extra payment.
Twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover
For open channel Twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover in M20 grade concrete proposed for length 3060
mtrs
Cut and cover Location , length and As per Preliminary/indicative
Alignment drawing given in Bid
documents (Minor change
may not be ruled out based
on geological investigation
findings)
Design Discharge of Finished barrels 14.05 cumecs
Slope of Finished barrels 1 in 1500

A. Identification & diversion of forest land required for execution of the project
components.
(i) Collection of forest map, revenue maps and GT sheet for every affected village from
concerned department etc.
(ii) Preparation of Georeferenced digital map of project area demarcating forest/wildlife
affected area, superimposed over digitized cadastral map and google image.
(iii) Preparation of KML file of project layout and forest/wildlife affected area of the
project boundary.
(iv) Identification and quantifying area of forest coming in alignment of tunnel, structure
etc. for diversion.
(v) Preparation of detailed catchment area plan, if required, in accordance of forest
(conservation) Act 1980 for getting forest clearance as per norms of forest
department/Water Resources Department/Water shed Department.
(vi) Preparation of cases for First stage and second stage clearance for diversion,
complete in all respect in prescribed formats, processed through the Water
Resources department, revenue department, district administration and local forest
department.
(vii) Online submission of application for first stage within sixty days of finalization of
tunnel alignment and thereafter, for second stage within forty-five days receipt of
first stage clearance letter.
(viii) Pursuing the cases in concerned offices and office of any other authority whenever
required representing the case before the approval/clearance authority.
(ix) Timely and logical reply to any query raised, within three days.
The bidder shall be responsible for identification of forest land coming under project,
identification of suitable equivalent non forest land for transfer to forest department, obtaining
certified copies from revenue department, digitization of khasra maps, preparation of
KML/KMZ files of both forest land proposed for diversion & equivalent CA land and to
prepare cases for First and Second stage clearances in required format and online submission
of case at his own cost and ensure submission of case for First stage clearance within within
sixty days of finalization of tunnel alignment.
The bidder shall ensure continuous follow up and pursuance of the first stage proposal at
district, state and regional offices of forest department, district administration and with water
resources department. It is expected that the bidder shall ensure the reply to any query raised,
is replied within three working days.
The bidder shall ensure compliance of conditions of first stage clearance within thirty days
of issuance of the first stage clearance letter by forest department, so as to proceed for
second stage clearance within forty-five days.
The cost of compulsory afforestation and land diversion shall be paid by the department
directly to forest department on the basis of demand raised by the forest department.
The bidder is advised to engage one dedicated team for forest clearances which should
comprise of retired forest official ACF, Ranger, Any delay in obtaining forest clearances
will be attributable to the contractor.
Costs incurred in preparing proposals and getting clearances, other than those to be paid
directly to the forest department, shall be borne by the bidder.
B. Identification of land required for the project components, for temporary &
permanent acquisition as per Right to Fair Compensation and Transparency
in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act 2013 & Rules 2016.
a. Permanent acquisition
(i) Collection of blocks wise, village wise land revenue record, map, other details
for preparation of proposal for permanent acquisition of private land for the
project requirement from concerned revenue offices.
(ii) After finalization of alignment and locations of the various work components of
the project by the competent authority, marking alignment of tunnel with
inspection/service road on map on scale1:5000, marking location of tunnel,
office buildings, residential/non-residential buildings, identifying the khasra
details to be acquired including area requirement in, consultation with Water
Resources Department.
(iii) Preparation of village wise and block wise list of khasra numbers to be
acquired.
(iv) Preparation of proposal under section 4 to 21 of Right to Fair Compensation
and Transparency in Land Acquisition, Rehabilitation and Resettlement Act
2013 & Rules 2016 and related circulars/notifications.
(v) Pursuance of proposals at Water Resources Department, Land Acquisition
officer and other offices.
b. Temporary acquisition/crop compensation/Right of way

(i) If any, is to be acquired temporarily. The proposals for temporary acquisition of
private/forest land for works envisaged under scope are to be prepared by the
contractor. The compensation for such temporary land acquisition/right of way,
crop compensation, if any,will be made by the contractor at his own cost.
Cost for social impact assessment study will be borne by contractor.
C. All other activities/infrastructural works, works related to the project as
described in the bid.
i. Four Physical model of 8‟ x 5‟ of the complete scheme displaying all the features is to
be prepared on fiber board or any other suitable material for whole work.
ii. 5-minute video with animation, wherever required, of the complete scheme displaying all
features of complete scheme is to be developed on 3DS Max or any other suitable
software.
iii. The genuine copy of the program/software used for design of project components, shall
be provided to the Engineer in charge.
iv. Contractor will provide necessary illumination at every shaft, Anicut, aqueduct site,
office buildings campus.
v. Construction of one tube well of suitable size along with suitable capacity pumps for
providing Drinking water to each non- residential buildings.
vi. The bidder shall provide five new Bolero Neo 10 fully loaded or equivalent latest
modal year 2023, on his own cost.
All vehicles shall be made available within 30 days of signing of agreement. These
vehicles shall be used by Inspection of departmental officers /Quality Monitor/ CWC
officer etc. during execution of work. All the vehicles shall be procured in the name of
Department and no extra payment shall be made for this. If contractor fails to comply
the aforesaid provision penalty of Rs. 5000/- per vehicle per day shall be levied and
deductible from the bill amount of the contractor.
The expenses of running of vehicle such as cost of POL, driver, Toll charges, Insurance
and maintenance etc. up to project completion, shall be borne by contractor.
vii. Procurement of sets of tool & tackles as per the list enclosed in technical specification
the detailed scope of O&M plan and it is to be handed over to EiC after completion of
O&M period.
viii. The bidder shall assist in establishing a Project Monitoring Cum Control units at
Division office for which the building (three rooms with verandah) shall be provided
free of cost. The bidder shall ensure initial repair of building such as plaster, flooring,
toilet, almirahs and storage unit, colour washing and electrical/sanitary fittings as per
requirement and direction.
This PMC Unit shall be equipped with basic furniture and amenities as per testing lab
cum camp office. In addition to above, computers (all in one desktop i7 processor with 29” or
higher LED monitor, 8 GB RAM having Window 11 or higher, Hard Disc, 2 TB hard disc
memory, graphic cards to run/operate drawing files) with A-1 size MFC printer & scanner shall
be provided with qualified computer operators at each PMC unit. No additional payments
shallbe made on this account to contractor.
D. Operation & Maintenance & management of the project components created

under this agreement for eight years after completion of the project
construction, supply of all spares etc.
(i) Operation, maintenance & management of the systems created under thisagreement for
a period of 8 years after completion of construction work.
Other scope of work includes

1. Site Survey, Measurement of Soil Resistivity, Soil Load Bearing Capacity and other
relevant parameters required for design of the system.
2. Complete Design, engineering, preparation, and submission of drawings
3. Equipment and material specification preparation Procurement and expediting of all
supplies and Delivery of equipment and material to job site.
4. Relay setting calculation and programming Pre-commissioning & Commissioning of all
supplied Equipment‟s and Test running as well as load trials at site.All civil, electrical and
Mechanical work for installation, commissioning operation, monitoring and control.
5. Any other items not specifically mentioned in the specification but which are required for
erection, testing and commissioning and satisfactory operation of the project are deemed to
be included in the scope of the specification unless specifically excluded on turnkey basis.
6. Arranging of all statutory clearances required for installation and grid connection of the
power plant. However necessary fees shall be paid by the employer.
7. Opening an office in Salumber and deployment of sufficient competent manpower for
erection and commissioning and subsequent operation and maintenance of the system.
8. Provision of Safety items like hand gloves, shock treatment charts, rubber mats,
danger/caution boards. Supply of all commissioning spares, Supply of special tools and
tackles Project management including project administration, project coordination,
9. Scheduling, progress reporting to employer. Adhering to safety practices during erection,
commissioning and subsequent operation and maintenance of the system including fire
prevention. Site security. Arranging adequate Insurance Coverage for the complete system
during erection/ commissioning.
Any requirement of work whether requested by the owner or otherwise whether

specifically described in the contract or not but are necessary or required for the proper completion
and functioning of the project/works in accordance with the contract including of any gaps and
F. All other activities/infrastructural works, works related to the project as

described in the bid.
i. All activities as mentioned earlier in the bid document under the item.
ii. Quality assurance plan: Execution of each and every item of this scheme shall have to be in
accordance of specifications laid down in this document or otherwise as per the available
Indian standards or International standards. Contractor has to prepare a quality assurance plan in
consultation with department and it is to be strictly followed during complete execution and
operation & Maintenance of this scheme. For assuring the quality of the materials / works
executed or to be executed contractor shall install digitized quality control laboratory fully
equipped with latest equipments andpersonnel required for conducting test of all construction
& executed material and work as per relevant Indian, International codes for assuring proper
quality of material and executed works and its O&M till completion of work. This laboratory to
be constructed before start of civil work in an area of about 180 sqm in the project area in
consultation with the Engineer -in-Charge. One mobile quality control lab shall also be made
functional by the contractor. For verifying the test results from third party, samples shall have to
be sent to any laboratory which department deems fit for Quality certification in addition to
regular test at field laboratory at the cost of contractor. Frequencies of collection of test
samples are to be followed as per the Indian standards or International standards. As far as
possible the tests are to be conducted in presence of departmental engineer.
iii. Pre-dispatch Inspections Inside or Outside the Employer’s Country The
equipment and machines which requires pre dispatch inspection in the premises of Supplier in
presence of Employer or his representative (either regular employ or designated third party),
Contractor shall have to arrange and provide for the cost of
Travel to the Manufacturer‟s place, accommodation, local transport and food for these
representatives of the Employer. Such costs will be incorporated in the tendered cost of such
items and no separate payment will be made for the same.
iv. Safety Assurance: The Contractor shall take all measures required to maintain highest safety
standards at the site. The measures taken will include all but will not be limited to the relevant
provisions of the Indian Standards. The Contractor shall prepare a safety plan for the project
and have it approved from the Employer‟s Representative. The Contractor shall deploy a safety
officer on each important site to ensure compliance.
G. Operation & Maintenance & management of the project components created

under this agreement for Eight years after completion of the project construction,
supply of all spares.
Operation, maintenance & management of the systems created under this agreement
for a period of 08 years after completion of construction work. The contractor shall provide
all the necessary operating staff and maintenance personnel to operate and maintain the
works for eight years.
Operation and Maintenance contract period under the contract. Contractor will conduct
camps for training for WRD staff and local personnel.. The contractor shall provide a
detailed proposed staffing schedule covering all categories of his staff with duties,
responsibilities, qualification, experience and their salaries, etc. The staffing schedule shall
be prepared on assumption that the system will be operated on a 24 hour per daybasis
with three equal shifts of 8 hours each. The inspection vehicles and staff required for the
maintenance and operation of the tunnel shall also be considered for three equal shifts of 8
hours. For non-residential campuses watch and ward is to be provided throughout the year.
Electricity charges at anicut, tunnel other project buildings (non-residential,) will be borne by
the contractor. Filing charges for applying connection at project site, site offices and office
buildings, Payable to RESB/DISCOM shall be borne by the Bidder/Contractor.
During operation and maintenance, the contractor shall be responsible for all
Activities for functioning of the system. Detailed scope of work under operationand
maintenance of project has been cover under separate Chapter “Operation and
Maintenance”.
1 GENERAL
This section applies to the specifications of materials used for operation and maintenance, the
workmanship, period for routine maintenance, specifications for the acceptable quality of
treated water, maintenance of records, and responsibilities during operation and maintenance
period the Contractor shall operate and maintain the entire Anicut ,Tunnels, Structures, the
instrumentation system, communication system, all ancillary structures & buildings, campus
area, roads and ancillary civil structures along road for the entire period specified in the
Contract.
2. SPECIFICATIONS
The specification of materials used for repairs shall be the same as have been used in the
original work. Specifications for any materials which were not used during construction shall
be approved by the Employer‟s Representative prior to commencement of the operation and
maintenance period and must be incorporated in the O&M manual. Without being limited by
this clause, during O&M period, the Contractor shall use appropriate material for repairs
even if material required forsuch repairs has not been approved earlier, and no delay in
making such repairs shall be subjected to such limitation. However, subsequent to use of
such material the Contractor shall submit proposals for the approval of specifications of such
material. The approved material will subsequently form a part of the O&M manual.
3. ACTIVITIES
General
Within the framework of the Contractor‟s responsibilities given above, the Contractor shall
carry out the following activities. However, these shall not limit the requirement for other
activities which otherwise are required as per term and conditions of Contract or to fulfill
the Contractor‟s responsibilities or are essential as per good industrial practices. The
Contractor shall be responsible for, but not limited to, the following:
a) Providing the required skilled and unskilled staff, but not less than the minimum
specified numbers/ level, during operation and maintenance period and additional
staff as per requirement during periodic maintenance and in emergencies as directed
by EiC.
b) Liaison with DISCOM to ensuring uninterrupted power supply as per requirement.
c) Providing all required consumables required for functioning of plant and equipment
except power charges.
d) Maintenance of office buildings and their campus, and their surroundings, etc.(all
works constructed in this Contract) in neat and clean condition along with maintaining
complete greenery.
e) Entering AMC contracts with system / equipment suppliers, as necessary. It is
mandatory to enter into an agreement for a 08 year maintenance contract with the
supplier or the authorized system integrator, whosoever has executed the work for
this project.
f) Maintenance of the lighting fixtures and the lighting system of all areas and
replacement of all non-functional lighting fixtures within 24 hours.
g) Providing required spares and maintaining adequate inventory of required

accessories or equipment itself for repair of system so that the electrical, mechanical,
instrumentation and control system, and surge system and the communication
system can work efficiently as per the guarantees given or minimum required
efficiencies asked for in the Contract, without any additional costs to department.
The Contractor may use spares and tools and tackles supplied with the Contract as
required by him. However, at the end of the Contract the Contractor shall hand
over the full spares, tools and tackles as supplied with the Contract by replacing the
used items with fresh supplies of the same specifications.
Providing manpower for the required repairs of all facilities along with the
manpower and materials for repair of the roads, buildings and campus area utilities.
h) Maintaining the drinking water supply facilities in building campus and all its units,
and other buildings.
i) Maintaining stores for the electrical, mechanical and instrumentation and control
equipment. The maintenance of stores will include but shall not be limited to:
• Loading / unloading of materials received and issued for works;
• Proper arrangement of material in stores to ensure its safety and easy
availability;
• Maintaining store areas in a neat and tidy condition;
• Keeping records and accounting for the incoming materials,
• Keeping records and accounting for the consumed materials.
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety and security of the
goods in the store and will be responsible for any loss or damages in stores for any
reason. He may opt for insurance cover against the value of the goods to be stored
without any additional costs on the Department.
j) Updating and periodic submissions of the operation and maintenance manual as
defined in specifications for O&M works. The Contractor shall take up all periodic
maintenance works provided in the approved O&M manual.
k) Providing all machinery like JCB, generator, drain pumps, crane, welding machine,
etc., as required for proper and timely maintenance activities.
l) Insurance: The Contractor shall, without limiting his or the Employer‟s obligations
and responsibilities, insure;
i. The work together with material and plant for incorporation therein, to the
full replacement cost (term “cost” in this context shall include profit).
ii. The Contractor‟s equipment and other things brought onto site by the
Contractor, for a sum sufficient to provide for their replacementat the site.
iii. The insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor and the
Employer at the Contractor‟s cost and shall cover the Employer and the
Contractor against all losses or damages from whatsoever cause arising from
the start of the O&M until the date of completion of O&M in respect of the
facility or any section or part thereof as the case may be.
iv. Any amount not insured or not recovered from the insurer shall be borne by
the Contractor.
1. SPARE PARTS
All spare parts used for the equipment in the maintenance of the system must be from the
manufacturer of the equipment or, if the equipment itself has been made with parts from
other manufacturers, the parts must be of the same make as used in the equipment supplied
and installed.
All spare parts shall be packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the
Site. Each spare part shall be labeled on the outside of its packing with its description, number
and purpose and, if more than one spare is packed in a single case, a general description of the
case contents shall be shown on the outside and a packing list enclosed.
Store should be maintained with all required inventory with upto data record maintenance on
software with brand name & other technical and manufacturingdetails.
2. PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS DURING O&M

The workmanship observed for all repair and maintenance work must be in accordance to
“Good Engineering Practices”.
3. BUILDINGS
The Contractor shall carry out ordinary repairs to buildings during the O&M period.The
repairs may include but not limited to the following items:
(i) Easing of doors and windows, monsoon repairs to roofs, attention to drains, rain
water spouts, attention to plinth protection.
(ii) External white or color wash, external or internal painting, internal distempering,
renewal of approach roads within the campus.
The frequency of repairs must not be less than as specified below:
S.N. Nature of Repair Frequency of repair for Frequency of repair

Residential Buildings for other Buildings
1 External finishing (color Once in a year Every two year
washing) after attending minor
repairs such as damage to
plaster, etc.
2 Internal finishing (distemper / In 2,4,6 and ,8 yearof In 2,4,6 and ,8 year of
painting) after attending minor O&M O&M
repairs such as damage to plaster
etc
(iii) Repairs to other official buildings must be carried out during May to June except for
white and color washing work, which should be done in September and October
after monsoon in residential buildings.
Following repairs prior to onset of monsoon are essential:
1. Any faults in the electric installation, leakages, earthing, exposed wire ends and any
hazards on this account to the users/inmates of the buildings, should be taken care of
suitably; wiring, which is damaged or outlived, should be replaced.
2. Damaged sanitary lines should be replaced and choked lines cleared.
3. Proper drainage of the area around the building should be ensured to avoid stagnation
of rain water/ house effluent, in order to prevent malarial conditions. Where
courtyards exist in the buildings, their drainage into the outer drains should be
ensured. Any choked drains should be cleared properly.
4. Leaking roofs should be attended to immediately with suitable repairs/ treatment, as
the case may be. The rain waterspouts should also be cleared of blockages, etc. The
roof should be swept clean of leaves, debris, etc., if any.
5. The plaster on outer walls of the building, which is exposed to weather, should be
repaired before rains in order to prevent dampness inside. Where plinth protection has
been provided, it should be checked and the damaged portions, if any, should be
repaired before rains.
6. Damaged flooring should be repaired/ replaced as per requirement, in order to
prevent dampness inside the rooms, etc., during rains.
7. Periodic repairs of damaged floors, door/window fittings, water taps, water coolers,
furniture, desert coolers, electric circuits, must be taken up on complaints using the
material of same quality as used during construction.
4. ROADS
General
The works shall be carried out in conformity with the relevant Specifications to the required
level, grade and lines using approved materials. The works shall be carried out using light duty
machinery or manual means provided the quality of the end product does not suffer. In
execution of maintenance works, a reference is made to the IRC publications: “Manual for
Maintenance of Roads” for guidance and compliance wherever applicable. Wherever the
Specification is not clear, good Engineering practice shall be adopted in the construction to the
satisfaction of the Employer‟s Representative.
Maintenance Work of Road during O&M Period:-
• Repairing potholes and undulations found in the roads and road cuts.
• Repairing edges of the pavement.
• Repairs to shoulders at least 1.5 m on either side of road and to maintain them inproper
gradient i.e. 3%.
• Ensuring that the pavement and the shoulders at least 1.5 m on either side are keptclear of
any obstruction.
• Keeping a check on the encroachment and damage to the Government property.
• Cleaning and repairing of roadside and catch water drains.
• Jungle clearance to have proper site clearance.
• Cleaning of roads by removing dead animals, fallen trees, stones etc.
• Maintaining the kilometer stones, road signs and caution boards, drums etc. fixed on the
road in a good state of repairs. This will generally involve the following activities:
i) Fixing of dislocated boards and stones.
ii) Periodical painting
iii) Repairs to boards such as welding or tightening of nuts and bolts.
iv) Fixing of new boards where necessary.
• Maintaining all diversion in good condition.
• Maintaining speed humps nicely.
• Maintenance of cross drainage (CD) Works: This will generally involve thefollowing
activities:
i) Clearing of the silt of waterway.
ii) Repairs to the damaged portions of the CD works.
iii) Repairs to cut off walls, apron, parapet walls etc.
iv) Painting of culverts and bridges.
v) Reporting of any serious abnormality and conditions to the Executive
Engineer/ department/ EiC.
vi) Maintaining the U/sand d/s of waterway clean by cutting of vegetation,
excavation etc.
• Maintenance of Signs:
The signs along with the posts shall be maintained in proper position, and kept clean
and legible at all times. Damaged signs shall be replaced immediately. All signs shall
be inspected at least twice a year. Special care shall be taken to see that weeds,
shrubbery, mud etc. are not allowed to obscure any sign.
• Maintenance of arboriculture: This will generally involve the following activities:
i) Watering of plants at required intervals.
ii) Re-plantation without any additional cost in place of dead plants or damaged
plants
iii) Inter cultural operation such as hoeing and weeding etc.
iv) Pruning and trimming and cutting of old big trees for required growth.
5. RESTORATION OF RAIN CUTS
Materials
The material used for restoration of rain cuts shall be got approved from Employer‟s
Representative and shall in general be as specified for earth work in embankment in section 3.
Construction Operation
The area affected by rain cuts shall be cleared of all loose soil and benched. Thewidth
of the benches shall be at least 300 mm and they shall extend continuously fora sufficient
length. The height of the benches shall be in the range of 150-300 mm. Fresh material shall
be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm loose thicknessand compacted so as to
match with the benching at moisture content close to theoptimum. Compaction shall be
carried out using suitable equipment such as plate
Compactors and rammers or by suitable implements handled manually. The finished work
shall conform to alignment, levels and slopes as indicated in the approved drawing.
6. MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
The Contractor under this scope of work is also required to maintain the road in a clean
condition, which includes the cleaning of stones, fallen trees, dead animals, etc., as and when
noticed by the patrolling teams or as directed by the Employer‟s Representative.
The pipe culverts and the other cross drainage structures, aqueducts, tunnels and built or
rehabilitated under the Contract will be regularly inspected and suitable cleaning, grading
works will be done to ensure against impounding near the structures. The structural damages
will be repaired or dismantled and re-constructed considering the extent of damage as per
directions of Employer‟s Representative/EiC/ Department.
The Contractor will also take up the works required for yearly maintenance of the sign
boards, hectometer, kilometer and five-kilometer stones and road marking, ensuring that they
are in good shape and suited for the purpose for which they are installed.
OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The comprehensive manual shall be submitted before the start of operation and maintenance
period, as specified. It shall be periodically updated to incorporate the “best practices”
experience gained while carrying out the O&M activities, broadly on the principals listed
below:
Up-dating any changes in the procedures set out in the O&M manual, as deemed necessary
based on any limitations observed during the maintenance period, including incorporating
additional procedures for maintenance of other repairs/break downs not incorporated in the
maintenance manual but faced during O&M period.
Records of locations and type of damages observed during maintenance of road which are of
recurring nature must be used in updating the manual.
Records of Inventory used must be maintained and the relevant portion of O&M manual must
be updated to list out the inventory requirements for maintaining the system for 12 months.
The provisions in the manual must incorporate every aspect of good industrial practices even if
not elaborated here or in other parts of the bid document. The provisions in the approved
operation and maintenance document shall be valid and binding for both the parties during
operation and maintenance along with the additions and deletions made.
The manual so prepared must be updated after the end of every year of operation and
maintenance, giving effect to the experience gained and the observations made by the
Department during the maintenance period.
At the time of handing over after completion of O&M period, all the equipment, including
standby equipment, must be in good working order.
The main components involved are as detailed above. However, the works described in
these para’s are indicative only. The main object is narrated above. Bidders offer is
deemed to include all costs for completing the work and no extra payment shall be
made to contractor to complete above object as per National /International standards
and Codes including all investigation, planning, designing, drawings and vetting
drawing & design, from competent authority /agency as decided by owner alongwith
approval from owner.
The tenderer, shall assume full responsibility of Engineering adequacy, coordination

and timely completion of investigation, designs, drawings and execution including all
other activities with their own modern equipment, man power and other services so
required connected with the work.
SECTION -V C
Technical Specification
GENERAL
The specifications contained under different sections in this document are for
general guidance. In case of disagreement between the specification the relevant
specifications under latest Indian Standards, IRC, CWC guidelines & “Manual on
water supply and treatment” published by Central Public Health and
Environmental Engineering Organization (CPHEEO), Ministry of Urban
Development, Government of India, relevant regulations of RVPNL and other govt
institution and approved manufacturer specifications shall prevail. In case of any
item not covered in Technical Specification chapter then the relavant IS Code and
WRD guideline will be applicable.
SECTION – I
SURVEY, INVESTIGATION, PLANNING, DESIGN AND DRAWING
1. SURVEY AND INVESTIGATION

1.1. Topographic Survey: Contractor shall conduct topographic survey along both tunnel alignment
during survey all features like natural drains, road, building, trees, railway, line, overhead and
buried lines of water supply, gas, electric etc shall be shown in survey details. Contractor may
conduct survey through high accuracy satellite images, Lidar, Drone Mounted survey etc which
can give desired accuracy. Contractor shall generate coutour map, catchment of each drain
falling in route of tunnel alignment. All drawings shall be in .dwg and .shp format compatible
with GIS softwares like arc GIS, Arc IRADAS etc.
1.2. Furnishing alignment proposal
Apart from L-section of, contractor has to furnish the detailed of shaft, aqueduct, inlet and outlet
structure maps with contours of 0.50m intervals
For Power System Connectivity
The work related to power Supply connectivity will be done by Department through State Power
Company up to the extent described in scope of work under this contract. Thereafter Power
connectivity will be done by the contractor.
1.3. Preparation of Schedule of quantities

Estimate and Schedule of quantities should be prepared separately for entire project. Itemof work
should be in accordance with the specification and rates mentioned in the Bid Proposal Sheet limited
to Price quoted by the bidder. The detailed estimates in triplicates set and also in soft copy which
shall include detailed report, estimates and detail survey sheets.
2. CONSTRUCTION OF BENCHMARK STRUCTURES

2.1. The contractor will collect the details of Survey of India bench marks in the area or
shift new bench mark with nearby GTS BM. With this as a datum additional net-work of
Temporary Bench Marks (TBMs) shall have to be established by the Contractor. Their locations
shall however be decided in consultation with department. Contractor shall fix temporary
bench mark preferably on permanent structures in the project area. Values of such bench marks
shall be fixed with reference to the Permanent Bench Mark established by SOI as indicated by
the Engineer-in-Charge. A plan to a scale of 1:15000 indicating location and levels of all PBMs
established in the project area shall be prepared and submitted to the Department.
2.2. Construction of Permanent Bench Marks (PBMs):
The PBMs shall be constructed at location as may be directed by Engineer- In-Charge. This
should be located preferably at one corner of the field or field boundary, Govt./no man‟s land which
will not hamper the agricultural operations or as instructed by the Engineer-in-charge. A 10 mm dia
anchor about 300 mm in length with steel plate 120 x 120 x 6 mm. Shall be embedded in the
concrete, and the top of the steel plate shall be 100 mm below the top level of concrete and truly
horizontal. The level of PBM shall be established on top of steel plate. Adequate care shall be
taken by the Contractor for curing the concrete laid for the PBMs. The PBMs shall be numbered in
oil paint for identification. Where black cotton soil is met with the foundation will have to be taken
to extra depth and filled with M-10 c.c. & standard size bench marks shall be constructed over
this.
3. FIELD SURVEY FOR BLOCK CONTOURING AND PREPARATION OF

VILLAGE MAPS SHOWING CONTOURS AND FIELD DETAILS :
The BMs shall be constructed as per standard specifications. All the BMs shall be connected by
double levelling accurately. Every day‟s work shall be closed on any one of the bench mark
mentioned above and the accuracy of the day‟s work checked by Engineer‟s representative present
throughout the activity.
a. Marking alignment on SOI Maps:
.
2.1 Reconnaissance survey:
After fixing the alignment of tunnels, the contractor shall carryout reconnaissance survey in field to
verify if the features on the plan tally with actual ground conditions and structures such as tube wells,
houses etc. are not located along the alignment fixed. The location of the outlet should be verified
on the field for confirmation. The Engineer-in-charge shall examine the layout, have discussion
with the contractors.. If necessary approval with proper justification along with precautions for
O&M shall be submitted for approval. After observing these formalities layout may be considered as
preliminarily approved by the department and the contractor shall proceed with detailed planning
according to the specifications.
Final layout:
i. After approval of the preliminary layout as provided above, the contractor shall
proceed with the work of longitudinal sections of the alignments, collecting the field
data for the approved pattern.
ii. The survey work should commence from an established TBM and end onestablished
TBM only at the end of the day‟s work. The closing error should not exceed the permissible limit.
The contractor shall submit final layout prepared as stated above to the Engineer-in- Charge for
approval. The Engineer-in-charge shall scrutinize the proposal and convey his observations to the
contractor within one month. The contractor shall promptly comply with the remarks and/or if
necessary discuss the proposal made by him with the Engineer-in-charge and sort out differences.
The Engineer-in-charge shall convey the final approval within one month.
4. DESIGNS AND PREPARATION OF PLANS & ESTIMATES:
After receiving approval to the final layout, the contractor shall proceed with the task of preparing
final designs of Anicut,tunnel,shaft, aqueduct, VRB,superpassages,twin barrel box type RCC cut and
cover feeder channel its detailed designs, fixing permanent bench marks along the alignment of
tunnels and preparation of plans and estimation of the complete system.
5. ADDITION/MODIFICATIONS:
It may circumstances arise which call for addition/modifications in the design criteria, the department
shall intimate the additions/modifications to the contractor. These additions/modifications will have
to be taken into account. On approval of the proposal, contractor shall submit final presentation.
All drawings shall be prepared in computer. Separate layers should be used to depict different details
in Auto CAD drawings.
i. Index map to the scale of 1:15000 showing alignment of tunnel, important roads, railways,
major drains and village boundaries etc.
ii. Cross section of laying details of tunnels.
iii. Detailed drawings of structures to a scale of 1:50. In case of layout etc. the scalecan be
1:100 and in case of details of components the scale can be 1:25.
iv. Where map cannot be accommodated in one drawing, the overlap of 5 cm on all sides shall
be provided.
v. A uniform block shall be provided on the right side bottom corner as per the details given
by the Engineer-in-charge.
vi. Drawings: All drawings, map plans should be computer printed on transparent sheet by
plotter. A proper numbering system should be used. Each such tracing should be
accompanied by 5 auto cad print on superfine paper. Statements: 3 legible copies of
statements/design notes/reports etc. typed on computer and its print out in laser jet printer.
vii. Land acquisition proposals in the formats as per requirement of revenue department in six
legible copies typed on computer and its laser print out.
viii. The Contractor shall submit original tracing and field books. The contractor shall also return
the documents furnished by the Department.
ix. All above record in multiple hard discs and pen drives with operating software. Submission
of complete animated proposal in Media Player or in flash showing all components of
work and working animated model so as to give terrain depiction, showing villages, towns,
boundaries, river, intake works, virtual working model.
x. Operation and maintenance manual draft of the project with master control.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR CIVIL WORKS
1. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
1.0 GENERAL
i. The Contractor shall at his own expenses provide all material including potable
water required for the work as well as drinking purpose.
ii. All materials to be provided by the contractor shall be in conformity with the
specifications laid down in the contract and the contractor shall if required by the
Engineer-in-charge furnish proof about their suitability to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge.
iii. All charges on account of royalties, Octroi, terminal or sales tax and other duties on
materials obtained for the work from any source (excluding material supplied by
the department) including those due to opening of quarries etc. loading, unloading,
lead and lift shall be borne by the contractor.
iv. Department officials concerned with the contract shall be entitled at all time to
inspect and examine any materials intended to be used in or other works, either on
the site/quarries at any places where these are lying or from where these are being
obtained and the contractor shall give such facilities as may be required for such
inspection and examination.
v. No construction material shall be transported from quarry to work site till it is
approved by the Engineer-in-charge.
vi. All materials brought to the site shall not be removed from the site without the prior
approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
vii. The contractor shall have to remove defective/rejected material from work site on
receipt of notice to this effect from Engineer-in-charge.
viii. Contractor will have to make his own assessment regarding availability of material
at sources. No extra payment or any sort will be payable.
1.1 FINE AGGREGATE

Contractor will have to make his own assessment regarding availability of materials at sources
conforming to I.S. 283 specifications.
The rates quoted by contractor shall deemed to have inclusive of all the operations required to be
done for opening operation of quarry viz. construction of haul road approaches to quarry removal of
overburden, quarrying aggregates (sand) screening and washing where required etc. complete in all
respect.
1.2 COARSE AGGREGATE

The contractor may obtain at his own cost quantity of coarse aggregate from the crushers working in
the vicinity of the site conforming to I.S. 283 specifications only as per his convenience.
1.3 MASONRY STONE
Good quality of stones suitable for masonry can be obtained from the any approved quarry (hills)
in nearby areas which is approachable during all weather. The contractor shall make his own
investigations and estimate for himself for the adequacy of quantity of stone of proper quality,
requirement of removal of overburden, weathered rock in the
Quarry, wastage in quarry operation etc. If the quarry on its opening does not yield adequate
quantity of suitable stones confirming to the specifications laid down in this document, the contractor
may be allowed at his own cost and risk to open any other new quarry subject to approval of quality
of stone by Engineer-in-charge before use in the work. Any allotment of suitable quarry according
to the requirement by the contractor from the Mining Department, Government of Rajasthan would
be processed and provided by the Contractor himself at his own cost and for which no claim
whatsoever, may be, and would be admissible.
1.4 WATER
Water is an essential construction material for execution of work & availability of suitable potable
water in the area is plenty nearby working sites. No extra payment what so ever would be payable on
this component.
1.5 STEEL
The contractor may procure steel from anywhere conforming to relevant I.S. specifications.
1.6 CEMENT
The Contractor may procure cement from any nearby Major Plant conforming to relevant
I.S. 3873-1993 & latest revision.
1. PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

1.1 (a) The specifications cover the requirements of plain and reinforced concrete for use in
structures viz. drainage syphon,., road bridges, super passage canal crossings etc. and its
ancillary works such as pipe culvert in road bridge approaches and on canal construction road.
The work covered under this section consists of furnishing all materials including form work
equipment labour for the manufacture, transport, planning, vibrating, finishing and curing of
the concrete for the structures and performing all operations necessary and ancillary thereto
including dewateringand de-silting as required.
1.2 Applicable Publications
1 IS: 455 - 1976 Specification for Portland slag cement (third

revision)(Amendment No. 1 to 7)
2 IS:456-2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete
(Revised) (Second revision) (Amendment No. 1)
3 IS: 516 - 1959 Method of test for strength of concrete (Amendment No. 1)
4 IS: 2505- 1980 General requirements for concrete vibrators: immersion type
5 IS: 2506 - 1985 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrator
6 IS: 3370 – 1965 Code of practice for concrete structures for the storage of
(Part I to 4) liquids.
7 IS: 3558 - 1983 Code practice for use of immersion vibrators for
consolidating concrete
8 IS: 4656 - 1968 Specification for Form vibrators for concrete
9 ISS: 4990 - 1981 Specification for Plywood for concrete shuttering work
(First revision)(Amendment No. 1)
10 IS: 5242 - 1979 Method of test for determining shear strength of metal (First
revision)
11 IS: 9077 - 1979 Code of practice for corrosion protection of steel
reinforcement in RB and RCC construction.
12 SP: (S&T)- 1980 Design aids for reinforced concrete to IS: 456- 1978
All concrete, its constituents, methods and procedures of manufacture shall conform to
Indian Standard specifications and other publications listed below unless otherwise
specified. Indian Standard
In addition to the above relevant Indian Standards referred in Section–3 shall alsoapply.
1.2.1 Other Publications

1 The United States Bureau of Concrete Manual (Eight Edition)
Reclamation (Revised – 1981)
1.2.2 Composition
Concrete shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate (natural sand or manufactured sand or both),
coarse aggregates (manufactured or natural gravel), admixtures if allowed by Engineer-in-charged and water well
mixed in proportion and brought to the proper consistency. The design mix proportions shall be adjusted to
produce a durable and workable concrete, suitable for specified conditions of placement and design strength.
For all items of concrete in any portion of the lining / structure or its associated works, where
specified controlled concrete shall be used.
1.3 MATERIALS
1.3.1 Cement
Only Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC) 43 grade shall be used for controlled concrete and
other RCC constructions while Pozzolana Portland Cement (PPC)43grade or higher shall
allowed to be used in foundation concrete, mass concrete etc. as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.
Immediately upon receipt at the site of the work, cement shall be stored separately in dry,
watertight and properly ventilated structures. All storage facilities shall be subject to approval
and shall be such as to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Sufficient cement
shall be kept in stock for completion of concreting undertaken Cement shall be used in order of
receipt and cement older than 90 days shall not be used unless the test results satisfy the
minimum strength requirements.
1.3.2 Fine Aggregates

(a) General
All the aggregates shall confirm to IS: 383- 1970, or its latest version and as directed by
Engineer-in-charge. Sand to be used shall be natural as obtained from the riverbed and the
maximum size shall be limited to 4.75 mm.
Fine aggregates will be tested for their gradation, specific gravity, water absorption, fineness
modulus, soundness, Petro graphic analysis, deleterious constituents and alkali aggregate
reactivity. Due allowance shall be made if at the time of mixing, the sand is wet. The exact
extent of such allowance or bulkage shall depend upon the quantity of moisture in sand and
it shall be decided by the Engineer-in-charge.
The large quantity of sand is available in the region as required. The Contractor shall
procure approved quality of sand from any other source at their-own cost.
(b) Quality
Sand shall consist of hard, inert, dense, durable and uncoated siliceous gritty materials. It shall
be free from injurious amount of dust, lumps soft and flaky particles, shale, alkali, organic
matter, loam and other deleterious substances, The maximum percentage of each of the
deleterious substance in sand as delivered to the mixer shall not exceed the following values.
Limits of deleterious material

(i) Coal & lignite 1.0 percent by weight
(ii) Clay lumps 1.0 Percent by weight
(iii) Material finer that 75 micron 3.0 Percent by weight
I.S. sieve
(iv) Shale 1.0 Percent by weight
(v) Total of percentages of all deleterious material 5.0 Percent by weight
(except Mica)
Sand shall be free from injurious amount of organic impurities and sand that are producing a
colour (obtained by dissolving 9 grams of chemically pure (c.-p.) ferric chloride and 1 gram of
C.P. cobalt chloride in 100 ml of water to which one third ml of hydro choric acid has been
added) darken that the standard in the test (organic test) for organic impurities shall be
rejected.
(c) Grading
Sand shall be well graded so as to impart good workability and good finishing. Sieve
analysis of natural sand shall conform to the following limit of gradation.
Cumulative percentage of
IS Sieve weight passing through sieve
10 mm 100
4.75 mm 90-100
2.36 mm 75-100
1.18 mm 55-90
600 micron 35-59
300 micron 8-30
150 micron 0-10
Deviations from the prescribed limits of cumulative percentage retained on sieve 10 mm, 4.75
mm, 2.36 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron and 150 micron IS sieves shall be
permitted provided total of such deviations do not exceed 5 percent. No deviation from the
prescribed limit shall be permitted for cumulative percentage retained on 600 micron IS sieve.
(d) Fineness Modulus

Sand shall have a fineness modulus between 2.2 to 3.2 subject to the gradation specified
in the preceding paragraph.
The modulus shall be computed by adding cumulative percentage of sand retained on
the standard screens 4.75 mm, 1.18 mm, 600 micron, 300 micron, 150 micron IS sieves
and dividing the sum by 100 Gradation of sand shall be
so controlled that the fineness modulus of at least 9 out of 10 consecutive test samples
of finished sand shall not vary by more than 0.10 from the average of
10 test samples. Sand having any deviation from the specified range of gradation and
fineness modulus shall not be permitted to used in work without the written permission
of the Engineer-in-charge.
(e) Storage
All sand shall be stored on the site of work in such a manner as to prevent intrusion of
foreign matter.
1.3.3 Coarse Aggregate

(a) General
Coarse aggregate for concrete shall consist of clean, hard, dense and durable crushed
metal or gravel free from vegetable matter. Predominantly flaky aggregates shall not be
used. All coarse aggregates shall be washed and/or screened by the Contactor, if
required. The percentage of deleterious substance in coarse aggregate shall not exceed
the following values.
Material passing 75 micronIS 3 percent by weight
sieve screen
Shale NIL percent by weight
Coal and Lignite 1 percentage
Soft fragments 3 percent by weight
Clay lumps 1 percent by weight
Coarse aggregates will be tested for their gradation, specific gravity, water absorption,
impact and abrasion values, soundness, Petro graphic analysis, deleterious constituents,
flakiness, elongation and alkali aggregate reactivity.
The sum of the percentage of all the deleterious substances shall however, not exceed 5
percent by weight. The coarse aggregate shall satisfy abrasion, soundness, crushing and
alkali aggregate reactivity tests and water absorption results as laid down in IS: 383-
1970 and other relevant Indian Standard Specifications.
(b) Source
Natural aggregates are not available in enough quantity nearby, and will not be
allowed to be used in any concreting. The crushed aggregates are available in sample
quantities nearby area. These are indicative only. The contractor shall procure
approved quality of aggregates and rubble from any other sources for which no extra
claim shall be entertained.
(c) Grading
i) Coarse aggregate shall be well graded and shall have a maximum size of 20 mm.
ii) The gradation shall give a dense concrete of the specified strength and consistency that
will work readily into position without segregation and without the use of excessive
water content.
iii) The grading of coarse aggregate shall be in the nominal sizes as mentioned in table II of
IS: 383- 1970.
(In concrete for tunnel lining, the percentage of 4.75 to 10 mm fraction shall be reduced
to above 5 to 10 percent of the total coarse aggregate) However, the exact gradation
required producing a dense concrete of specified strength and desired workability shall
be decided by the Engineer-in-charge. The percentage passing for graded/normal size
aggregate shall be as under:
I.S. Sieve description % Passing for graded / normal size aggregate

40 mm 100%
20 mm 95 to 100%
10 mm 25 to 55%
4.75 mm i. to 10%
iv) The material passing through the screen shall be in grade ranging from 40 mmto 4.75
mm. Each grade of material shall be stacked 40 mm to 20 mm, 20 mm to 10 mm and
10 mm to 4.75 mm.
v) Coarse aggregates shall consist of inert, clean, hard, strong, durable and structurally
sound particles of crushed stone or gravel and shall be free from thin elongated soft
pieces, organic or other deleterious matter capable of developing good bound with
cement paste and weather resisting be unaffected by water. It shall have no adherent
coating of clay, silt mud or any other adherent coating. It shall be from a source
approved by the Engineer-in- charge. Coarse aggregates shall conform to IS: 383-
1970 and IS: 515-1959.
vi) Coarse aggregates shall be washed and screened at the source approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. If necessary contractor shall remove all vegetation and other
perishable substances and objectionable amounts of other foreign and deleterious
matter. The cost of washing and screening at source shall be borne by the Contractor.
In case the coarse aggregate brought to the site of work isnot washed and screened at
the source the contractor shall make necessary arrangements for washing and
screening at the B&M plant and its cost shallbe borne by the contractor.
1.3.4 Reinforcing Steel
Corrosion resistance steel of I.S. Standards shall be used for R.C.C. works.
1.3.5 Water
(a) Water used for mixing of concrete and mortar shall be free from injurious amounts of
deleterious materials. Potable water is generally considered satisfactory for mixing and
curing.
(b) Where water is found to contain any sugar or an excess of acid, alkali or salt, the
Engineer-in-charge will refuse to permit its use. As a guide the following table presents
the maximum permissible values.
Percent by weight
Organic 0.02
Inorganic 0.30
Sulphate 0.05
Alkali Chlorides 0.10
pH value 6 to 8
1.3.6 Admixtures
Air entraining agent (AEA) as an admixture shall be added to the concrete batch in solution. It
shall be batch by means of mechanical batcher capable of correct measurement and in such a
manner as well ensure uniform distribution of the agent throughout the batch during the
specified mixing period. The amount of AEA used shall be such as to affect air entrapment
from 4 to 6 percent by volume in that portion of the concrete containing aggregate smaller
than the 40 mm square mesh sieve after its placement and vibration in the forms. The
actual percentage of air shall be as fixed by the Engineer-in-charge and will be changed
whenever necessary to meet the varying conditions encountered during construction.
Admixture shall be borne by the contractor and shall be deemed to have been included in the
unit rates quoted by the contractor for relevant items.
2.1 Proportioning Concrete
Concrete mix shall be designed on the basis of preliminary tests. The proportion of ingredients
shall be such that concrete has adequate workability for conditions prevailing on the work in
question and can be properly compacted with the means available.
Except when it can be shown to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge that supply of
properly graded aggregates of uniform quality can be maintained till the completion of the
work, grading of aggregate shall be controlled by obtaining the coarse aggregate in different
sizes and blending them in the right proportions as required. Different sizes, however, shall be
stacked in separate stockpiles. Required quantity of material shall be stockpiled several hours,
preferably a day, before use. Grading of coarse and fine aggregates shall be checked as
frequently as possible, frequency for a given job being determined by the Engineer-in-charge
to ensure that the suppliers are maintaining the uniform grading as approved for samples
used in the preliminary tests. In proportioning concrete, the quantity of both cement and
aggregate shall be determined by weight. Water shall either be measured by volume in
calibrated tank or weighed. All measuring equipment shall be maintained in a clean and
serviceable condition. Their accuracy shall be periodically checked.
It is most important to keep the specified water cement ratio constant. To this end moisture
content in both fine and coarse aggregates shall be determined by the Engineer-in-charge. The
amount of mixing water shall then be adjusted to compensate for any variations noted in the
moisture content. For the determination of moisture content in the aggregate IS: 2386- 1977
(Part-III) shall be referred to. Suitable adjustments shall also be made in the weight of
aggregates to allow for variations in weight of aggregates due to variations in their moisture
content.
The quantity of water shall be just sufficient to produce a dense concrete of required
workability and strength for the job. An accurate and strict control shall be kept on the
quantity of water.
In the case of reinforced concrete work, workability shall be such that the concrete surrounds
and properly grips all reinforcement. The degrees of consistency, which
shall depend upon the nature of work and methods of vibration of concrete, shall be
determined by regular slump tests.
Following slumps shall be adopted for different types of works.
S.N. Type of work Slumps
1 Mass concrete for RCC foundations, footings 10 mm to 25 mm
and retaining walls
2 Beams, slabs and columns 25 mm to 40 mm
Thin RCC Section with congested steel 60 mm to 70 mm
2.2 Production of Concrete

2.2.1 Production of Aggregates
Production of aggregates may include quarrying of the raw material and processing viz.
transporting, crushing, screening and washing. Water used for washing aggregates shall be
clean and free from alkali, salts and other impurities. After washing, fine aggregates must be
stored in stockpiles with a free draining base for at least 3 days to ensure that sand delivered to
the batching plant will have reasonably uniform moisture content. The storage and handling
shall be in such a manner as to prevent inter-mingling of various sizes of aggregates required
separately for grading purposes. No foreign matter shall be allowed to mix up with the
aggregates.
2.2.1 Batching
The prescribed amount of the various materials of concrete including water, cement,
admixtures, the groupings of fine aggregates and each individual size of coarse aggregate shall
be measured and controlled within the specified limits of accuracy. The amount of water,
cement and aggregate shall be determined by weighing. In the case of the aggregates, the
surface moisture shall be determined in accordance with the method prescribed by Appendix-
D of IS:456–2000 and its subsequent amendments or publications. In the case of coarse
aggregates, percentage of free water shall be determined by weighing a representative sample,
then surface drying each particle individually with a clean piece of cloth and re-weighing.
The proportions of various materials shall be changed as changed as directed inorder to
maintain the desired quality of the concrete. The batching equipment shall be constructed
and operated so that the combined inaccuracies in feeding and measuring materials shall not
exceed 1½ percent for water and cement and 2 percent for each size of aggregate.
The operating performance of each scale or other measuring device shall be checked by
test weight and the tests shall cover the ranges of measurements involved in the batching
operations. Tests of equipment in operation shall be made at least once every fortnight and
adjustments, repairs or replacement, be made as necessary to meet the specified requirement
for accuracy of measurement.
Aggregate shall not be batched for concrete or mortar when free water is dripping from the
aggregate.
2.2.2 Mixing
The concrete ingredients shall be mixed thoroughly in batch mixers of satisfactory type and
size, which are so designed as to ensure uniform distribution of all the
constituent materials throughout the mass at the end of time mixing period. The plant shall
be so designed and operated that all materials entering the mixer can be accurately
proportioned and readily controlled. The entire batch within the mixer shall be discharged
before recharging. The volume of mixed materials per batch shall not exceed the rated
capacity. A mixer will be considered unsatisfactory, if from three tests of any one batch, a
change in slump exceeding 25 mm or a change in air content exceeding one percent is
noticed between representative samples taken at different portions of the mixer discharge.
For any one batch, uniformity of fresh concrete weight of air free mortar of two samples, one
taken at the front and one at the end of the mixer discharges, when determined in accordance
with the provisions of the mixer performance test, designation 265 in the Appendix, concrete
Manual- Eighth Edition, Revised- 1981. United States Bureau of Reclamation shall not exceed
1.6 percent of the mean value. The adequacy of mixing shall also be determined in
accordance with "Method of sampling and analysis of concrete" as per IS: 1199- 1959 and its
subsequent amendments. Excessive variation on the unit weight of air free mortar indicates
that mixing time should be increased. Mixer efficiency tests shall be made at the start of a job
and at such intervals as may be necessary to ensure compliance with the requirements for
effective mixing. The minimum mixing time specified herein may be reduced if mixer
efficiency tests conform that the reduced time permits satisfactory mixing.
The first concrete batch at the start of continuous mixing operation or after a lapse of 30
minutes in continuous mixing operation shall be made richer by the addition of extra
cement as directed.
For any one batch, the difference between the unit weights of coarse aggregate from concrete
samples from the front and end of the mixer or mixer discharge, when determined in
accordance with the above-mentioned mixer performance test should not exceed 10percent of
the mean value.
The mixing of each batch shall continue, for not less than the period stated in Table1 of IS:
457-1957 Mixing shall be continued until there is uniform distribution of the materials and
the concrete is uniform in cool and consistency. The time of mixing shall be as shown
below:
Capacity of Mixer Minimum time of mixing
Natural Aggregates Manufactured Aggregates
3m³ or larger 2 minutes 2½ minutes
2 m³ 1½ minutes 2 minutes
1 m³ of smaller 1¼ minutes 1½ minutes
Unless test of mixer performance show that variation in the prescribed time is necessary or
acceptable. Each mixer shall have a timing device for indicating the completion of the required
mixing period.
The actual time of mixing shall be checked at least twice during each shift and the timing
device shall be adjusted if there is error. The timing device shall be so interlocked with the
discharge gate of the batch hopper that the timing does not start until the discharge gate is
fully closed and all ingredients are in the drum. A suitable
record shall be kept of the average time consumed in charging, mixing and discharging batch
during each run.
The full contents of the drum shall be discharged quickly to avoid segregation.
The minimum mixing periods specified are considered on the material being fed into the
mixer in a manner, which will facilitate efficient mixing and an operation of the mixer at its
designed speed. The following sequence of charging the mixer maybe adopted.
2.2.2.1 Five to ten percent of the total quantity of water required for
mixing adequate to wet the drum thoroughly shall be introduced
before the other ingredients in order to prevent any chalking of
the cement on the blades or sides of the mixer.
2.2.2.2 All dry ingredients (Cement and fine and coarse aggregate)
shall be simultaneously fed into the mixer in such a manner that
the period of flow for each ingredient is about the same. Eighty
to ninety percent of the total quantity of water required for
mixing shall be added uniformly along with the dry ingredients.
2.2.2.3 The remaining quantity of water shall be added after all the
other ingredients are in the mixer.
2.2.2.4 Portion of the coarse aggregate, however, may be added last.
This facilitates clearance of the chutes and removes any fine
aggregate of cement adhering to the sides.
Excessive mixing, requiring additions of water to preserve the required concrete consistency
will not be permitted. Concrete, which has been kept unused for more than 30 minutes after
the addition of water, shall be rejected unless the concrete is in such a condition that it can
be subsequently vibrated in place and its use, is specifically permitted.
When the mixer is stopped, before placing again any ingredients in the mixer, all hardened
concrete or mortar shall be removed from the inner surface of the mixer.
The retendering of partially hardened concrete or mortar requiring renewed mixing with or
without the addition of cement, aggregate or water shall not be permitted.
2.3 Temperature of Concrete and Weather Conditions

The temperature of concrete at the time of placement shall not exceed 32°C. Concreting
operations shall be temporarily suspended during excessively hot weather when the air
temperature exceeds 45°C or when conditions are such that the concrete cannot be placed at
the required temperature. Wherever necessary, exposed surfaces of fresh or green concrete
shall be adequately shaded from the direct rays of the sun and protected against premature
setting or drying by curing under continuous fine spray of water.
2.4 Transporting Concrete
Concrete shall be transported from the mixing plant to the placing position as rapidly as
practicable by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients or slump loss in
excess of 25 mm and/or a loss in air content of more than one
percent before the concrete is placed in the works. Irrespective of haul distance, suitable
agitators or transit mixers shall be used for conveying concrete. Conveying concrete by head
load shall not be permitted in any case.
If buckets are used for conveying low slump concrete, they shall be capable of promoting
discharge in controlled quantities without splashing or segregating and shall be of such
capacity that there is no splitting of batches in loading buckets. Buckets shall be of the
bottom dump type permitting an even, controlled flow into the forms or hopper without
undue splashing or segregation. Conveying vehicles shall be designed to facilitate uniform
delivery rather quick dumping.
Chutes used for conveying concrete shall be of such size and shape as to ensure a steady
uniform flow of concrete in a compact mass without separation or loss of ingredients and
shall be protected from wind and sun where necessary to prevent loss of slump by
evaporation and shall be furnished with a discharge hopper. Free fall or drop of concrete
shall be limited to 150 cm. Chute sections shall be made of or lined with metal and all runs
shall have approximately the same slopes not flatter than 1 vertical to 2½ horizontal. The
required consistency of concrete shall not be changed in order to facilitate chuting. Where it
becomes necessary to change the consistency, the concrete mix shall be completely
redesigned. Wherever there is a free fall within the conveying system suitable baffle plates,
splashboards, or down spouts shall be provided to prevent segregation, splashing or loss
of ingredients. Whenever it is necessary to hold the discharge end of a chute more than 3
meters above the level of the fresh concrete, a flexible down spout shall be used to break the
fall and confine the flow. The lower end of the spout shall be hold close to the place of deposit.
Wherever depositing is intermittent a discharge hopper shall be provided. All chutes shall be
thoroughly cleaned before and after each run. All wash water and debris shall be disposed off
outside the forms.
Properly designed Belt crates shall be used for conveying concrete for placement in the
structures. Belt crates shall ensure an adequate and steady uniform flow of concrete in a
compact mass without any segregation and shall have a dischargehopper with a flexible down
spout as to ensure concrete placement as close to the place of deposit as possible and in no
case more than about a metre.
Equipment used for transporting concrete from the mixer to the forms shall be maintained free
from deposits of stiff concrete and leakage of mortar. Batch containers, transit mixers,
agitators, chutes, concrete pumps, pipelines and discharge hoppers shall be thoroughly
cleaned after each run. All wash water and debris shall be disposed off outside the forms.
2.5 Preparation for Placing Concrete

2.5.1 General Requirement
Concrete shall not be placed until all formwork required is completed, embedded parts, if any,
installed and checked and surfaces prepared for placing. No concrete shall be deposited until
the foundation has been inspected and approved.
All surfaces of forms and embedded materials that have become encrusted withdried mortar
or grout from concrete previously placed shall be cleaned of all such mortar or grout before
fresh concrete is placed.
2.5.2 Placing and Compacting Concrete

After the surfaces have been cleaned and dampened as specified, surfaces of rock and
construction joints shall be covered, wherever practicable with a layer of mortar approximately
15 mm to 20 mm thick. The mortar shall have same proportions of water, air-entraining agent if
any, cement and fine aggregate as the concrete mixture, which is to be placed upon it. The
water cement ratio of the mortar, which is placed, shall not exceed that of the concrete to be
placed upon it, and the consistency of the mortar shall be suitable for being spread uniformly
and worked thoroughly into all irregularities of the surfaces.
So far as it is practicable, concrete shall be placed directly in its final position using mechanical
means and approved methods and shall not be caused to flow in a manner to permit or cause
segregation. Methods and equipment‟s employed in placing concrete shall ensure that
aggregate shall not be separated from the concrete mass.
In placing mass concrete in a lift successive batching of concrete shall be placed in a systematic
arrangement in order to avoid long exposure of parts of the live surface of a concrete layer.
Concrete surfaces, particularly formed surfaces, upon or against which additional concrete is
to be placed shall be chipped and roughened to a depth of not more than 2.5 cm from the
surface. The roughening shall be performed by chipping and in such a manner as not to loosen
or shatter any part of the concrete beyond the roughened surface. After being roughened, the
surface of the concrete shall be cleaned thoroughly of all loose fragments, dirt, lime and other
objection able materials and shall be sound and hard and in such condition as to assure good
mechanical bond between old and new concrete. All concrete, which is not hard, dense and
durable, shall be removed to the depth required to secure a satisfactory surface.
In mass concrete placement, delay may occur resulting in cold joints within a lift. When
placement is resumed while concrete is so green (and therefore capable of ready bonding) that
it can be dug out with a hand pick, the usual construction joint treatment will not be required if
the surfaces are kept moist and the concrete placed against the surface is thoroughly and
systematically vibrated over the entire area adjacent to the older concrete. If the delay is
short enough to permit penetration ofthe vibrator into the lower layer during routine vibration
of successive layers, the vibration will assure necessary bonding.
If, for any cause, the working surface is left exposed until has hardened to a considerable
extent, it shall be left to set and cured for not less than 56 hours or longer. If for any reason
strength greater than 15.2 kg/cm² has been attained before completing the lift, the surface thus
interrupted shall be given a thorough clean up as
for normal lift joint surface and the work shall be commenced with a mortar layer as specified.
In placing mass concrete, the exposed area of fresh concrete shall be maintained at the
practical minimum by first building up the concrete in successive approximately horizontal
layers to the full width of the block and to full height of the lift over a restricted area at the
downstream end of the block and then continuing upstream in similar progressive stages to the
full area. The slope formed by the unconfined upstream edge of the successive layers of
concrete shall be kept as steep as practicable in order to keep its area minimum. Concrete
along these edges shall not be vibrated until adjacent concrete will harden to an extent the
later vibration may not fully consolidate and integrate it with more recently placed adjacent
concrete.
Re-tempering of concrete shall not be permitted. Any concrete, which has become so stiff that
proper placing without Re-tempering cannot be ensured, shall be wasted?
In-formed work, structural concrete placement shall generally be started with an over
sanded mix containing 20 mm maximum size aggregate and an extra sack of cement for one
cubic meter and having a 125 mm slump placed several centimeters deep on the joints at the
bottom of the form. Concrete placement shall commence immediately thereafter.
Concrete shall be compacted to the maximum practicable density, in such a manner that it is
free from pockets of coarse aggregate and is in intimate contact with surface of forms and
embedded material. Unless otherwise permitted, all concrete shall be compacted by mechanical
vibrator. The vibration of the concrete shall be adequate and efficiently performed for which
sufficient number of vibrators of required capacities shall be in working order before start of
the concrete work.
Compaction of concrete shall whenever practicable, be carried out by the use of immersion
type vibrators. Vibrators having vibrating heads of 100 mm or more in diameter shall be
operated at speed of at least 7000 vibrations per minutes in the concrete
Vibrators having vibrating heads less than 100mm in diameter shall be operated at speed of at
least 7000 vibrations per minutes in the concrete. . Normally formwork shall be designed to
provide for the insertion and operation of mechanical vibrators in the placed concrete. Form
vibrators shall be used wherever internal vibration isnot possible or would be inadequate.
In compacting each layer of concrete, the vibrator shall be operated in almost vertical
position and the vibrating head shall be allowed to penetrate and reverberate the concrete in the
upper portion of the underlying layer. In the area where freshly placed concrete in each layer
joins, previously placed concrete, more vibration than usual shall be performed, the vibrators
penetrating deeply at close intervals along these contacts. Layers of concrete shall not be
placed until layers previously placed have been vibrated thoroughly as specified. Contacts of
the vibrating head with surface of the forms shall be avoided.
During placing and until curing is completed, the concrete shall be protected against the
harmful effect of exposure to sunlight wind and rain as directed.
2.6 Form work

2.6.1 General
Forms shall be used wherever necessary to confine the concrete and shape it to the required
lines or to ensure against contamination of the concrete by material caving in or soughing
from adjacent surface left by excavation or other features of the work. All exposed concrete
surface having slope steeper than two horizontal to one vertical shall be formed.
Formwork may be of timber, steel or precast concrete panels or of such other suitable
materials or combination of such materials. Formwork shall be substantially and rigidly
constructed to the shapes, lines and dimensions required, efficiently propped and braced to
prevent deformation due to placing, vibrating and compacting concrete other incidental load
or the effect of weather. If settlement or deflection of forms under the load of concrete is to
be expected, allowance should be made in the original construction of the forms so that the
finished lines and dimensions of the structures are in accordance with those specified on the
drawings.
The surface of formwork shall be made such as to produce surface finishes as specified and
formwork joints space, be tight enough to prevent loss of liquid from concrete. Joints between
the formwork and existing concrete structures shall also be grout tight. Formwork shall be
arranged to facilitate easing and removing of the various parts in correct sequence, without
jarring or damaging the concrete. Fixing blocks, bolts or similar devices may be embedded in
the concrete, provided they do not reduce the strength or effective cover of any part of the
structure below the required standard but the use of through bolts shall be avoided as far as
possible. Temporary opening shall be provided at al points necessary in the forms to facilitate
cleaning and inspection immediately before placing of the concrete.
Forms shall overlap the hardened concrete in the lift previously placed by not more than 75
mm and shall be tightened snugly against the hardened concrete. Particular attention shall be
paid in setting and lightening the forms for construction joints so as to get a smooth joint
free from sharp deviations or projections.
Moulding strips shall be placed in the corners of forms so as to produce chamfered edges as
required on permanently exposed concrete surface.
2.6.2 Form, Centering and Temporary Works

All centering, formwork and temporary works shall be contracted according to the approved
drawings and specification. The IS: 883- 1970 "Code of practice for design of structural
timber in building"" shall be applicable for this work.
As soon as practicable, after the acceptance of his tender, the Contactor shall submit a
scheme showing the order of precedence and method by which proposes to carry
out the work, together with such details as are necessary to demonstrate the adequacy,
stability and safety of the methods.
The approval to the general scheme of centering as well as design criteria and loading shall
be obtained in good time to facilitate all preparatory works. Any delay on this account shall
be the responsibility of the Contractor.
After approval of the general scheme, the contractor shall prepare detailed design and
drawings for execution of the formwork, centering and temporary work. These shall be
forwarded to the Engineer-in-charge for approval. No work shall be carried out without prior
Notwithstanding the approval given to the design criteria and loading and the general
scheme for the centering, the entire responsibility for the satisfactory execution of centering
and all temporary works shall rest with the contractor and he shall be liable to pay all claims
and compensation arising from any loss or damage to life and property due to any
deficiency, failure or malfunctioning of the centeringor the temporary works.
Reuse of Forms etc.
Forms required to be used, more than once shall be maintained in serviceable condition and
shall be thoroughly cleaned and repaired before reuse. All forms shall be checked for shape &
strength before reuse.
2.6.3 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

At the time the concrete is placed in the forms, the surfaces of the forms shall be free from
encrustations of mortar, grout or other foreign material. Before concrete is placed, the surfaces
of the forms designated to produce F1, F2 and F4 finishes shall be oiled with commercial
form oil that will effectively prevent sticking and will not stain the concrete surface. For steel
forms, form oil shall consist of refined mineral oil suitably compounded with one or more
ingredients, which are appropriate for the purpose. Care shall be taken to keep form oil out of
contact with reinforcement.
2.6.4 Removal of Forms

Except as otherwise provided in this sub clause forms shall be removed as soon as the
concrete has hardened sufficiently, thus facilitating satisfactory specified curing and earliest
practicable repair of surface imperfections.
Forms on upper sloping surfaces of concrete, such as forms on the watersides of warped
transition, shall be removed as soon as the concrete has attained sufficient stiffness to prevent
sagging. Any needed repair on treatment required on such sloping surface shall be
performed at once and be followed immediately by the specified curing.
In order to avoid excessive stresses in the concrete that might result from swelling of the
forms, timber forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as this can be accomplished
without damage to the concrete.
Subject to approval, forms on concrete surface close to excavated rock surface may be left
in place provided that the distance between the concrete surface and the rock
is less than 400 mm and that the forms are not exposed to view after completion ofthe works.
The following minimum intervals of time as per specifications in IS:456- 2000 will generally
be allowed when using ordinary Portland cement between placing concrete and striking
form work but the period shall be modified in case of wet weather and also as per direction of
the Engineer-in-charge .
(i) Walls, columns and vertical faces 24 to 48 hours Or as may be
of all structural members deducted by the Engineer-in-charge
(ii) Slabs (Props left under) 3 days
(iii) Beam Soffits 7 days
(Props left under)
(iv) Removal of props under Slabs
Spanning Upto 4.5 m 7 days
Spanning over 4.5 m 14 days
(v) Removal of props under beam
and arches
(1) Spanning Upto 6 m 14 days
(2) Spanning over 6 m 21 days
Note: In normal circumstances and where ordinary Portland cement is used forms may
generally be removed after expiry of the above period. For other cement, the stripping time
recommended for Ordinary Portland Cement may be suitably modified.
The number of props left under, their sizes and disposition shall be such as to be able to
safely carry full dead load of slab, beams or arch as the case may be together with any live
load likely to occur during the curing or further constructions.
2.7 Curing of concrete

2.7.1General
All equipment, material, etc. needed for curing and protection of concrete shall be at hand and
ready for installing before actual concreting begins. Detailed plans, methods and procedures
whereby the various phases of curing and protection shall be firmly established, shall be
settled and got approved in writing from the Engineer-in-charge sufficiently in advance of the
actual concreting. The equipment and method proposed to be utilized shall provide for
adequate control and avoid interruption or damage to the work of other agencies.
2.7.2 Water Curing

Unformed top surfaces of walls and piers shall be moistened by covering with water-saturated
material or by other effective means as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to
prevent damage by water. These surfaces and steeply sloping vertical formed surfaces
shall be kept completely and continuously moist, prior to and during form removal, by
water applied on the unformed top surfaces and allowed to pass down between the forms
and the formed concrete.
Concrete cured with water shall be kept wet for at least 14 days immediately following
placement of the concrete or until covered with fresh concrete by covering with water
saturated material or by a system of perforated pipes or mechanical sprinklers or porous
houses or by any other suitable method which will keep all surfaces continuously (not
periodically) wet. The period of 14 days specified above shall be increased to 21 days when
Pozzolana has been used in the concrete as part replacement of cement.
2.8 Requirement of concrete construction

2.8.1General
All concrete construction shall conform to the permissible tolerance and technical provisions
as described in this section and to the detailed requirements of the following paragraphs. All
structures shall be built in a workmanlike manner or to the lines, grades and dimensions
shown in the drawings or as prescribed by Engineer-in-charge. The location of all the
construction joints shall be subject to the approval of Engineer-in-charge. The dimension of
each structure shown on the drawings shall be subject to such changes as maybe found
necessary by the Engineer-in-charge to adopt the structure to the conditions disclosed by the
excavation.
2.8.2Concrete in Various components of Bridges, Regular, Escape Aqueducts etc.

(a) The item of the schedule for concrete in aforesaid structures includes all concrete in the
various components of the structure and block outs.
(b) Expansion joints shall be constructed as shown on the drawing or as directed. Pre-
moulded bituminous fibber type expansion joint material shall be placed in the
expansion joints. Lighting recesses shall be constructed in the parapets as directed by
the Engineer-in-charge. Open joints or false joints shall be constructed as shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in- charge. Preformed expansion joint filler
shall be placed in the roadway and sidewalls where shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Engineer-in- charge.
2.8.3 Concrete in Block outs
All concrete required to be placed in block outs to permit the installation and adjustment of
mechanical and other equipments shall be included in the respective concrete as described
above. The concrete surface of the block outs shall be chipped and roughened as described
hereinafter before the concrete is placed in block outs.
Exceptional care shall be taken in placing the concrete in block outs in order to ensure
satisfactory bond with the concrete previously placed and to secure complete contact with all
metal work in the block outs.
The roughening of the concrete surface of the block outs shall be performed by chipping or
sand blasting as approved by the Engineer-in-charge and in such a manner as not to loosen,
crack or shatter any part of the concrete beyond the roughened surface. After being roughened
the surface of the concrete shall be
cleaned thoroughly of loose fragments, dirt and other objectionable substances and shall be
sound and hard to ensure good mechanical bond between the existing and new concrete. All
concrete which is not hard, cense and durable shall be removed to the depth required to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
2.8.4 Embedment in concrete

In some of the locations of structures as shown on the relevant drawings a few conduits or
openings shall have to be provided through RCC/PCC/Masonry work. Construction of the
surface for either placement of concrete or for laying of masonry shall have to be suitably
carried out so as to meet with the placement of such conduits or openings. No extra claim for
such improvidence in construction shall be entertained.
2.9 Construction Joints

(a) Concreting shall be carried out continuously upto the construction joints, the position and
details of which shall be as shown on approved drawings or as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge.
(b) For vertical construction joints stopping boards shall be fixed previously at a
predetermined position and shall be properly stayed for sufficient lateral rigidity to
prevent its displacement or bulging when concreting is completed against it. Concreting
shall be continued right upon the board. The board shall not be removed before expiry
of the specified period for removal of vertical forms.
(c) In all cases, the position and detailed arrangement of all construction joints shall be
predetermined and got approved from the Engineer-in-charge.
2.10 Tests and Standards of Acceptance
(a) For controlled concrete preliminary tests shall consist of three sets of separate tests and in
each set tests shall be conducted on six specimens. Not more than one set of six
specimens shall be made on any particular day. Of the six specimens in each set, three
shall be tested at seven days and the remaining three at 28days. The preliminary tests at
7 days are intended only to indicate the strength likely to be attained at 28 days.
2.10.1 General
Testing of concrete shall be carried out at the cost of the department on representative
samples taken at the site of laying the concrete in accordance with relevant Indian Standard
Specification.
2.10.2 General Sampling Procedure and Frequency

Sampling Procedure: A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that each
concrete batch has a reasonable chance of being tested, i.e., the sampling should be spread
over the entire period of concreting and should cover all mixing units.
Frequency: The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall bein
accordance with the following:
Quantity of concrete m3 Number of Set (Six Samples)
Up to 5 1
6 to 15 2
16 to 30 3
31 to 50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional sample for each additional 50
m3 or part thereof.
Note: - At least one sample shall be taken during each shift.
2.10.3 Test Specimen

Three test specimens shall be made from each set for testing at 28 days. Additional cubes may
be required for various purposes, such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days or at
the time of striking form work, or to determine the duration of curing or to check the testing
cubes cured by accelerated methods as described in IS: 9013-1978. The specimen shall be
tested as described in IS: 516-1959.
2.10.4 Test Strength of Samples/ Specimen

(a) The test strength of the samples shall b e the average of three specimens. Individual
variation shall not be more than 15 percent of the average.
(b) Contractor shall provide necessary unskilled labour for collection of samples/ cores etc.
and facilities for immediate transport of collected samples, cores, etc. from site to
laboratory and shall remain present at the time when the samples, cores, etc. are taken.
Testing shall be carried out at the testing laboratories set up at the site or at any other
laboratory that the Engineer-in- charge may decide up on and the results given thereby
shall b e considered as correct and authentic and acceptable to the contractor. The
Contractor shall be given access to all operations and tests that may be carried out as
aforesaid. All testing charges are to be borne by the department.
2.10.5 Acceptance Criteria
(a) The average strength of the group of cubes cast for each day shall not be less than the
specified cube strength for the work. About 20 percent of the cubes cast for each
day may have values less than the specified strength provided the lowest value is
not less than 85% of the specified strength.
(b) In case the concrete does not confirm to the acceptance criteria for strength as specified
above, the Engineer-in-charge reserves the right to reject the work or accept the same at
a reduced rate derived from tendered rate and as approved by him. Whenever necessary
for the purpose of obtaining economy, workability, density, impermeability, durability
or strength on account of variations of the quality and gradation of aggregates or other
materials, the Engineer-in-charge shall after testing, make necessary changes in the
proportion of mix. Contractor shall have to effect these changes, and shall not be
entitled to any compensation on account of such changes.
(c) As the concrete lining work progresses and has attained a minimum curing and
setting of 28 days period, cores shall e taken at random to evaluate the quality of
concrete lining laid in respective reaches. Frequency of coring shall be determined by
the Engineer. Broadly, it could be one core from bed lining and one core each from side
lining per 250 metres length of lining or as directed by the Engineer. In no case fewer
than 3 cores shall be tested. The cores shall be tested for compressive strength. The
contractor shall allow all facilities and cooperation towards collection of cores. The
testing of cores shall be carried out either in the project laboratory or at any other
laboratory that the Engineer may so decide and the results obtained shall be considered
correct and authentic by the contractor. The contractor shall be give access to all
operations and tests that may be carried out as aforesaid so that he may satisfy himself
regarding the methods and procedure adopted. Final payment shall be made only after
the satisfactory core test result acceptable to the Engineer as per Section-16.3.3 of IS:
1978 (Section 17.4.3 of IS: 456-2000)
A Standard test cylinder has a diameter one-half of its height (viz. L/D ratio is 2). However,
the cores taken from the in situ concrete lining may not have these relative dimensions and
consequently, L/D ratio will not be 2. Accordingly, a correction factor according to the
height/diameter ratio will not be 2. Accordingly, a correction factor according to the height/
diameter ratio of specimen after copping shall be obtained from the curve shown on page
13 of IS: 516-1959 (reproduced in the sketch.). the product of this correction factor and the
measured compressive strength shall be known as the corrected compressive strength, this
being the equivalent strength of a cylinder having a height-diameter ratio of 2. The
equivalent cube strength of the concrete shall be determined by multiplying the corrected
cylinder strength by 5/4. The cores shall be prepared and tested as per IS: 516-1959.
Concrete in the member represented by a core test shall be considered acceptable if the
average equivalent strength of the cores is equal to at least 85% of the cube strength of the
grade of concrete specified and that no individual core has strength less than 75%
2.11 Steel Reinforcement

The provision made under section 7 shall apply.
2.12 Tolerance in Concrete Construction

2.12.1 General
(a) Permissible surface irregularities for the various classes of concrete surface finish
specified in the relevant portion of the paragraph of "Finished and Finishing of Concrete
Surfaces" are defined as finish and area to be distinguished from "Tolerance" as
described in this section. Deviation fromthe established lines, grades and dimensions
shall be permitted to the extent set forth in this clause, provided that lesser tolerance
than that set forth in this clause may be prescribed at site if such tolerances are
considered to impair the structural action or operational action or operational function
of the structure.
(b) Where tolerances are not stated in the specifications or drawings for any individual
structure or feature thereof, permissible deviations shall be interpreted in conformity
with the provisions of this clause.
(c) Concrete work that exceeds the tolerance limits specified in this section shall be
either remedied satisfactorily or removed.
2.12.2 Concrete Surface Irregularities
(a) General: Bulges, depressions and offsets are defined as concrete surface irregularities.
Concrete surface irregularities are classified as "abrupt" or "Gradual" and are measured
relative to the actual concrete surface.
(b) Abrupt surface irregularities, Abrupt surface, irregularities are defined herein as offsets
such as those caused by misplaced or loose forms, loose knots inform timber or other
similar forming faults Abrupt surface irregularities are measured using a short straight
edge, at least 150 cm long, held firmly against the concrete surface over the irregularity
and the magnitude of the off- set is determined by direct measurement.
2.13 Measurement and Payment
(a) Except or otherwise especially provided for in the specifications, measurement of
concrete for payment shall be made on the basis of the volume of concrete calculated as
being contained within the concrete outlines shown on the relevant drawings.
(b) Measurement for payment for the concrete laid in pockets in the foundation shall be made
on the basis of the volume of the pockets filled.
(c) No measurements shall be made for the concrete backfill beyond the minimum lines of
excavation shown on the drawings except where such payment isspecifically authorized.
Measurement of concrete shall be made after deducting the volume of all recesses,
passageways, chambers, opening, cavities and depressions, but without deductions for
round or beveled edges or space occupied by electrical conduits and reinforcement.
(d) Concrete in bridge, side walls, kerbs and block outs etc. shall be measured on the basis of
volume of concrete calculated as being contained within the concrete outlines shown on
the relevant drawings and constructed accordingly.
(e) The unit rate for concrete shall include the cost of all materials, labour, tools and plant
required for mixing, placing in position, vibrating and compacting, finishing as per
direction of the Engineer-in-charge.
(f) The unit rate also includes the cost of dewatering, de-silting diversion and protection work
as may be necessary during and after concreting work.
(g) All expenses likely to be incurred by the contractor in transporting materials supplied to
him to the site of work the expenses incurred in improving the quality of materials to
acceptable levels (such as screening washing etc.) and the expenses incurred in proper
storage of materials as directed by the Engineer-in-charge etc. are deemed to be
included in the unit rate.
(h) Payment for the various classes of concrete shall be made on the basis of unitrate per
cubic metre entered in respect of items in the Schedule G.
(i) The unit rate quoted by the bidder for the respective item shall be deemed to have
included the requirement of cement for miscellaneous operations like priming of mixer,
laying of cement slurry for successive layers, finishing of concrete etc. also.
2.14 Unacceptable Work
All defective concreting work including but not limited to defects arising out of honey
combing, under strength are liable to be demolished and rebuilt by the Contractor at his cost.
In the event of such work being accepted by carrying out repairs etc. as specified by the
Engineer-in-charge, the cost of repairs shall be borne by the Contractor. Acceptance of such
works will be in accordance with the provisions of IS: 456- 2000. In the event of the work
being accepted by giving a design concession arising out of but not limited to under sizing and
strength by accepting higher design stress in member and accepting materials not fully
meeting the specifications etc. the contractor shall be paid for the work actually carried
out by him at a reduced rate derived from the tendered rate as approved by the Engineer-in-
charge.
REINFORCEMENT
a. Scope of work
The work includes supplying, cutting, bending, binding, welding and erecting in position High
Yield Strength Deformed (HYSD) steel bars and Corrosion resistance steel (CRS) bars as
reinforcement for concrete of various components of drainage syphon, syphon aqueducts, road
bridges, cross regulators, head regulators for branches, escapes and other structures.
b. Applicable Publications
i. Indian Standards
1 IS: 226- 1975 Structural Steel (Standard quality) (Fifty revision)

(Amendment No.1 to 5)
2 IS: 814 – 1986 Covered electrodes for metal arc welding of structural steels
(Part-II)
3 IS: 814 – 1974 For welding products other than sheets
(Part I) (Fourth revision)
4 IS: 1786- 1985 Specification for high yield strength deformed steel bars and wires
for concrete reinforcement (Third revision)
5 IS: 2502- 1963 Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for concrete
reinforcement
6 IS: 2751- 1979 Recommended practice for welding of mild steel plain and
deformed bars for reinforced construction
(First revision)
7 IS: 5525- 1969 Recommendations for detailing of reinforcement in

reinforced concrete works.
8 IS: 9417- 1979 Recommendations for welding cold worked bar for
reinforced concrete construction.
In addition to the above the relevant Indian Standard Codes referred to in Section4 shall
also apply.
6.1 Steel Reinforcing Bars

6.1.1 General
(a) Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed in concrete where shown on the
drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The drawings issued with these
specifications show only in part the requirement of reinforcement and further drawings
shall be issued by the Engineer-in-charge during course ofthe contract.
(b) Not less than 30 days prior to placement of reinforcement, the Contractor
shall submit to the Engineer-in-charge three prints and reproducible tracings of each
of reinforcement detail working drawings for approval. The contractor's
reinforcement detailed drawing for approval shall be prepared in accordance with IS:
456- 1978 "Code of Practice for plain and Reinforced Concrete". IS: 2502- 1963 "Code
of Practice for Bending and Fixing of Bars for concrete Reinforcement" and IS: 5525-
1969 "Recommendation for detailing of Reinforcement in reinforced concrete work"
unless otherwise shown on the reinforcement detail drawing. Contractor's drawings
shall show necessary details for checking the bars during placement and for use in
establishing payment quantities. Reinforcement bars shall conform to requirements
shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge to the Contractor's
reinforcement detailed drawings shall not absolve the contractor of his responsibility for
the correctness of details or for conformance with the requirements of these
specifications.
(c) As far as possible High Yield Strength Deformed bars, conforming to IS:
1786- 1985 shall be used as reinforcement as shown in the drawings. However, in
case of non availability of such bars, other steel bars conforming to IS: 432-1982
and/or IS: 1139-1966 shall be used as per as the directions of the Engineer-in-charge
on production of necessary documentary evidence bythe contractor.
6.1.2 Cutting Bending and Binding
(a) The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the cutting, bending and
placing of the reinforcement; Reinforcement shall be inspected for compliance with the
requirements as to grade, size shape, length, splicing and locations after it has been
placed. No concreting shall be started unless the reinforcement as placed in the work is
finally checked, recorded and certified by the Engineer-in-charge.
(b) Before the reinforcement is placed, the surface of the bars and the surfaces of any metal
bar supports shall be cleaned of the rust, loose mill scale, dirt, grease and other
objectionable foreign substances. After being placed, the reinforcing bars shall be
maintained in a clean condition until they are completely embedded in the concrete.
(c) Reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed and secured in positions so that there will
be a clear distance of at least 25 mm between the bars and any adjacent embedded metal
work and the bars and fabric shall not be displaced during the placing of concrete. The
contractor shall also ensure that there is no disturbance of the reinforcing bars in
concrete that has already been placed.
(d) Wire for binding reinforcement shall be of soft and annealed mild steel and shall
conform to IS: 280- 1978. Binding wire shall have tensile strength of not less than 56
kg/mm². The wire shall have minimum diameter of 1 mm. Chairs, hangers, spacers and
other supports for reinforcement maybe of concrete, metal or other approved material.
Where portions of such supports will be exposed on concrete surfaces designated to
receive F2 or F3 finish, the exposed portion of support shall be galvanized or coated
with other corrosion resistant material without which the concreting will not be
permitted. Such supports shall not be exposed on surfaces designated to receive F4
finish unless otherwise shown on the drawings. The minimum allowable clearance
between parallel round bars shall not be less than 1.5 times the maximum size of
aggregate whichever is greater. Bars crossing each other, where required, shall be
secured by binding wire in such a manner that they do not slip over each other at the
time of fixing and concreting. Wire used for binding reinforcement shall not be
measured for payment.
6.1.3 Splicing
(a) Where it is necessary to splice reinforcement the splices shall be made by
lapping by welding or by mechanical means.
(b) Joints or splices in reinforcing bars shall generally be made at the locations
where neither shear nor bending moment is maximum, but the Contractor would be
permitted to make joints or splices at other positions provided that such positions are
approved by the Engineer-in-charge and joints and splices in adjacent bars are
daggered as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. Approval of such additional splices
will generally be restricted to splices not closer than 8 m in horizontal bars or 4 m in
vertical bars measured between midpoints of laps.
(c) If the contractor proposes to use welded splices in reinforcing bars, the
equipment, the material and welding and testing procedures shall be subject to the
(d) For welded splices for reinforcing bars conforming to IS: 1786- 1985,
welding shall be done in accordance with IS 9417:1979. For reinforcing bars
conforming to IS: 432 (part-I) 1982 welding shall be done in accordance with IS: 2751-
1979. Electrodes for manual metal arc welding shall conform to IS: 814- (Part-I) 1971
and IS: 814 (Part-II) 1974. Mild Steel Filer rods for Oxy- acetylene welding shall
conform to IS: 1278- 1972 provided they are capable of giving a minimum butt weld
tensile strength of 41 kg/mm².
(e) Reinforcing bars 23 mm in diameter and larger may be connected by butt-
welding provided that lapped splices are permitted when round to be more practicable
than butt-welding and the lapping does not encroach on cover limitation or binder
concrete or reinforcement placing.
(f) Reinforcing bars 25 mm in diameter and less may be either lapped or butt-
welded, whichever is the most practicable.
(g) Butt-welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed under cover from
weather and may be performed either by the gas pressure or flash pressure welding
process or by the electric arc methods. The following requirements shall apply to all
welding of reinforcing bars including butt-welding and the preparation of welded
reinforcement mats.
(h) Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested at the rate of 0.5% of total
number of joints welded. Specimens shall be taken from the actual site of work.
Strength of the weld provided shall be at least 25 % higher than the strength of bar.
(i) If the contractor proposes to use mechanical couplings for reinforcing bars,
he shall submit samples of the proposed coupling to the Engineer-in-charge for
approval not less than 60days prior to their proposed use.
6.1.4 Care of Placed Reinforcement and Concrete
Where reinforcement bars are bent aside a Construction joints and after wards bent back into
their original position, care shall be taken to ensure that at no time the radius of the bend is
less than 6 diameter (6 D) for deformed bars and 4 diameter (4 D) for plain mild sheet bars.
Care shall also be taken, when bending such bars, to ensure that the concrete around the bars is
not damaged.
6.1.5 Measurement and Payment

Measurement for payment for furnishing and placing reinforcing bars will be made only on the
calculated weight of the bars placed in concrete, in accordance with the drawings or as directed
by the Engineer-in-charge. The calculated weight for reinforcing bars shall be determined as
follows:
The calculated weight/meter of reinforcing bars used shall be based on the standard weight
and the corresponding lengths of arcs placed in concrete by the Contractor.
All other joints or splices shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in- charge
shall be measured as laps. Mechanical coupling and welded joints approved by the
Engineer-in-charge shall be measured for payment in terms of length of equivalent lap joint.
Except as provided in Para 5.4.3 additional joints or splices shall not be measured for
payment. Payment for furnishing and placing reinforcement bars shall be made at the rate
tendered thereof in the Schedule G. The rate shall include the cost of preparing reinforcement
as per detailed drawings including bar placing drawings, bar bending diagrams submitted the
drawing to the department preparing all necessary bar and cutting lists, furnishing and
attaching wire ties and cutting bending cleaning securing and maintaining in positional
reinforcing bars as shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge. The unit
rate shall also include cost of all incidental operations necessary to complete the work as per
specification.
Supporting chairs/separators/cover/overlaps for MS or HYSD reinforcing bars shall not be
payable.
61 BLASTING:
7.1. Observing rules regarding blasting:
In conducting blasting operations proper precautions shall be taken for the protection of
person, the work and property. All Government laws relating to the design and
location of magazine, transport and handling of explosives and other measures for the
prevention of accident shall be strictly observed Warning signs shall be prominently
displayed on the magazines, and warning signs given for each blast. Specifications for
blasting given under the separate section shall be carefully and rigidly observed.
7.2. Storing of explosives:
Explosives shall be stored in a safe place at sufficient distances from the work and under
the special care of watchman so that in case of accidents no damage occurs to the other
part of work. Explosives, detonators and fuses shall be each separately stored. No
Objection Certificate from District Magistrate or inspector of Explosives shall be
obtained as required by the Contractor.
7.3. Restrictions on blasting:
i. Blasting which may disturb or endanger the stability safety or the quality of
the foundation will not be permitted.
ii. Blasting within 30 meter of masonry work in progress of a permanent
structure shall not be permitted.
iii. Blasting operation shall be monitored so as not have peak practical velocity
near important structures to exceed 10 ppv.
iv. Progressive blasting shall be limited to two third of the total remaining
depth of excavation.
v. No large scale blasting operation shall be restored to when the foundation
excavation reaches the last half meter. Only small charges preferably black
powder may be allowed so as not to shatter the foundation
vi. Rules of blasting are as appended.
7.4. Excavation in hard strata with chiselling and / or controlled blasting:
i. Where the excavation in hard strata is involved, since usual blasting operations
are likely to damage the adjoining houses, transmission lines or hinder the
traffic on important roads. The excavation for a good length is required to be
done under controlled blasting conditions and / or chiseling. The item will
include excavation in hard strata to correct sections as shown in the drawings
with chiseling and / or controlled blasting and depositing the excavated stuff as
and wheredirected
ii. The holes for blasting shall be drilled for a depth of only 40 cm thus increasing
the number of holes and correspondingly decreasing the charge required for
each holes.
iii. The holes as far as possible shall be slant. All the holes after charging will be
covered by grill of steel rods which shall be suitably loaded by gunny bags
filled with sand or Murom. The steel grill shall be so lowered over the holes
that it does not to cause any damage to the (use wire or charges and care shall
be taken to see that the fuse wires remain free. The loading shall be sufficient
to prevent the overthrow of rock after blasting In addition to the above
loading; the steel grill shall be securely anchored to the adjoining rock by
chains. The steel grill shall extend at least 3 meters beyond the area to be
blasted.
iv. Chiselling manually or excavation by pneumatic rock breakers shall be restored
to as directed by Engineer --in - charge where blasting cannotbe permitted.
v. Any alternate technique approved by the Engineer- in - charge may be used, but
approval to execute the work by the above mentioned method or alternate
technique would not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of damage to
the power line and properties.
7.5 DRILLING AND BLASTING

7.5.1 General
Blasting where required will be permitted only when proper precautions have been taken for the
protection of persons and property in accordance with IS 4081-1967 (Indian standard specification
for safety code for blasting and related drilling operations). While carrying out excavation, adequate
precautions in accordance with IS 3764-1966 (Indian standard specifications for safety code for
excavation work) shall be taken.
Explosives such as gelatine, prilled ammonia nitrate detonators and fuse coils etc required for the
rock blasting are to be procured by the contractor at his cost. The contractor has to purchase the
blasting materials on the name of work and on the name of contractor. The materials without
mentioning the above two names on the bill will not be accepted. It shall be the responsibility of
the contractor to store the explosives purchased by him in accordance with the rules of the explosives
act and other rules framed by Government of India. He should possess/acquire proper license for
transport of explosives, portable magazines for possession and use of explosives and shot fires as
per revised act 1983.
A list of I.S code applicable is furnished below:
IS 4081-1986: Safety code of blasting and related drilling operations IS 3764-1966: Safety code
for excavation work.
In addition to the above I.S. codes, the specification of O.S.S and manual for quality control and
inspection shall also be complied with.
7.5.2 Materials:
All the materials such as explosives, detonators, fuse coils, tamping materials etc. that are
proposed to be used in the blasting operations shall have the prior approval of the Employer. Only
explosives of required make and strength are to be used.
7.5.3 Item to include:
All Labor materials, pumps, plants, equipments, staging, shoring, strutting, sumps and other
arrangements necessary for Excavation, balsting, cleaning, disposal, dewatering during excavation
and construction of other item requiring dewatering.
SECTION 8- TUNNEL AND CUT & COVER
1. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SURVEY & DEISGN
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS:
1.1.1 The Technical Specifications described hereunder broadly cover the permanent civil
works of the project as brought out in the 'Scope of Work' for Civil Works. The items
of works are based on Owner's Preliminary layout as enclosed in the indicative
drawing. Detailed Technical Specifications shall be prepared as per Standards (as
submitted by the bidder and approved by the Owner) and shall be got approved from
the Owner within 2 (two) months from the date of signing of agreement. Elaboration
of the technical specification described here under shall not be considered as detailed
technical specifications as the same are indicative only.
1.1.2 The list of I.S. Codes and other publications applicable to this section is givenbelow:
Guidelines for preparation of project estimates for river valley projects –second
revised edition – March 1997 issued by Central Water Commission.
1. I.S. 4453 -1967 Code of practice for exploration by pits, drifts andshafts
2. I.S.4464 (Part- Code of practice for presentation of drilling informationand core
III) – 1967 description in foundation investigation
3. I.S.2132– 1972 Code of practice for thin walled tube sampling of soils
4. I.S.8763- 1978 Guidelines for undisturbed sampling of soils

5. I.S.5497 - 1983 Guide for topographical surveys for river valley projects
6. I.S.4800-1987 Code of practice for design of tunnels conveying water
The Contractor shall follow the following Technical Specifications while carryingout the
above work.
1. Block leveling and preparation of B.C. Plans with 1.00 M interval contours ( as
applicable to each block).
2. Preliminary investigation of Tunnel by conducting reconnoiter survey, fixing the
alignment with total Station, fly levels, including alternatives.
3. Establishing of Bench marks at 500 m intervals all along the Tunnel as per survey
done.
4. Detailed investigation of Tunnel taking L.S.& C.S. Levels , fixing I. P. Stones and fixing
C.L. stones at 100m intervals along the Tunnel.
5. Conducting site surveys for the Tunnel.
6. Drilling bore holes @ 100 M or as directed by the owner intervals on Tunnel drilling
bore holes at Tunnel points and classifying the rock met with as per the
I.S.I code.
1.1.2.1 ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS ACCOMPANYING THE TENDER NOTICE:
1. The tenderer, shall assume full responsibility of Engineering adequacy,

coordination and timely completion of investigation, designs, drawings
including all other activities with their own modern equipment, man power
and other services required connected to the work.
2. The tenderer shall be fully responsible for designing of all the connected and component
works of the tunnel. The responsibility of the tenderer shall be,
a) To study in detail all the Engineering and design features.
b) to prepare technical specifications which are necessary for execution of
works.
c) The tenderer shall be responsible for furnishing the most technically suitable
proposals. The Contract price quoted shall include the cost of investigation,
alternative investigation, site surveys, designs, alternative designs, estimates
etc., to arrive at technically sound and suitable proposals. No separate
payment shall be made for study of alternatives.
d) The designs and specifications are to be drafted by the tenderer.
e) Preparation of all designs, drawings, as may be required for complete and
correct execution of all works which are included in the scope of the work for
the tunnel, and should conform to I.S.I specifications. All the above plans
and documents shall be supplied in 5 copies to the owner for approval. It is
obligatory for the Contractor to make any modifications or alternations for
designs & drawings as required by the Department and also in the proposals
without any extra payment.
1.2 By fixing the base lines and boundary lines of the area with total station including
chaining or total station and GPS Software.
1.3 Plotting C.S net levels or block levels on the Scale, and drawing the contours at
1.00M intervals and marking the block command plans in serial numbers as per G.S.I
topo sheets pattern.
2.0 Preliminary investigation of Tunnel following items.
2.1 Reconnoiter survey of field.
2.3 The Contract price quoted should also include cost of the work of preliminary
investigation also. The tenderer should quote his Contract price keeping in view this
aspect also in block levelling.
2.4 Marking the alignment Tunnel including alternative alignment.
2.5 Transferring the alignment marked on the B.C. plan to the ground with the following
operations of work.
(i) Survey.
(ii) Conducting Fly-levels.
(iii) Probing the points.
(iv) Peg marking along the alignment
(v) Fixing the alignment on ground by transferring the alignment
2.8 Preliminary alignment shall be submitted for approval to the Owner.
2.9 Necessary changes or alterations of the alternative alignment are to be done as per the
instructions of owner, without any extra payment.
2.10 On approval of the preliminary alignment only further investigation is to be taken
up.
1.1.2.2 Fixing of B.M.s
3.1 Supplying of B.M stones of size 900mm x 150mm x 150 mm/RCC Pre-cast
B.M. with M.15 mix using 20mm metal and including fixing the stones in cement
concrete M7.5 mix using 40mm graded H.B metal of approved quality from the approved
quarry, including cost of all materials and labour charges for fixing B.M. Stones.
3.2 Labour charges for carving the letters and numbers as furnished in the drawing.
3.4 Conducting double check levelling to establish the value on B.M stones fixed, duly
connecting it to a G.T.S Bench Mark.
3.6 Preparation of B.M Registers noting the bench mark values and its locations etc.
1.1.2.3 Detailed Survey:

Detailed survey shall be conducted for fixing the alignment of Tunnel as follows:
4.1 Chaining
4.2 Taking L.S levels at 25m intervals.
4.3 Cross sections shall be taken @ 10 m intervals along the Tunnel alignment and
C.S. levels on the C.S at 3M intervals
4.4 Fixing of C.L stones of size 750mm x 150mm x 150 mm as per the drawing enclosed at
every 100m intervals along the alignment and at every tangent points of the curve and
@ I.P points etc. The C.L. Stones, I.P. Stones and stones at tangent points should be
painted with different colours for each, forclear identification.
4.5 Painting of the stones with good quality of paint approved by the Engineer-in- Charge
with Chainage, including cost and conveyance of C.L stones, B.M.Stones and
I.P.Stones, paints etc. The departmental staff will check the levels at salient points.
1.1.2.4 PREPARATION OF HP’s (Hydraulic Parameters)
5.1 Preparation of Hydraulic Parameters for Tunnel and approach and exit channel based on
the guidelines given as per I.S.I codes / C.W.C Manuals / standards.
5.2 Preparation of L-Section with levels at 10 m intervals on Tunnel and approach and exit
channel alignment and Cross Sections levels at 10 M intervals along
L.S. tunnel at 3m intervals along cross-section.
5.3 Existing classification of rock based on the bore-hole data and by geographical mapping
marking the classification on L.S including preparation of Borehole registers.
5.6 H.Ps with the check slip and necessary statements mainly comprising of
(i) Statement showing the approach approach and exit channel and Tunnel.
5.7 Preparation of detailed report of the hydraulic particulars. On approval of the hydraulic
particulars by the owner the work of conducting site surveys for the structure and
preparation of designs shall be taken up.
1.1.2.7 Drilling of Bore-Holes for Tunnel.
6.1 Boreholes shall be drilled at every 100 m interval along the centerline of tunnel.
6.2 Classifying the rock and noting the classification of soils in T.P / Bore Hole Register
6.3 Bore holes shall also be drilled 5 m beyond the maximum scour level, or up to hard strata
whichever is less for all the structures and core-samples of disturbed and un-
disturbed soils are to be tested in the laboratory, to find out the bearing capacity of
soils; and the samples are to be preserved for verification by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Minimum 3 Numbers of bores one at center of crossing, the other two on u/s and D/s of
crossing are to be drilled for each structure. Extra Bores are to be drilled wherever
necessary, depending upon the magnitude of the structure Log book of the bores drilled
shall be maintained at site, during progress of drilling, besides preserving the core
samples in wooden core boxes at site.
8.7 CHECKING OF SURVEY WORK:
The checking of field survey work, Longitudinal Section of and establishment of

Bench Marks to an extent necessary by the contractor / Tenderer will be done by
engineer-in-charge.
SECTION 9 CLEARANCE OF SITE
9.1.2 CLEARING AND GRUBBING:
a) The portion of the right -of-way, where required for work under these specifications, shall
be cleared of all trees, bushes, rubbish and other objectionable matter in compliance of MoEF
sanction. Trees designated by the Engineer-in- charge shall not be cut and shall be
protected from injury, such cleared material
shall be disposed, off as provided in paragraph-2.1.4 below or removed from the site of
work before the date of completion of the contract as approved by Engineer- in-charge. The
useful material should be stacked and handed over to the Department. The clearing
operation shall be in accordance with I.S. 4701 -1982 Indian Code of practice. Surface
boulders either loose or partly embedded in the ground will have to be removed and stacked as
directed. All holes and hollows whether originally existing or produced by digging up roots
shall be filled with suitable earth, well rammed and leveled off the logs/stumps cleared shall be
neatly stacked and handed over to the representative of Engineer-in-charge as directed at the
places indicated. The pits formed up roots which shall be filled with suitable earth and
compacted and leveled at the cost of contractor.
9.1.4. DISPOSAL OF CLEARED AND GRUBBED MATERIAL:
a) The disposal of cleared and grubbed material shall be in accordance with clause
4.1.1. of I.S. 4701 Code of practice for earth work in approach and exit channels. All
waste material to be burnt shall be piled neatly and when in suitable condition shall be burnt
completely as ashes. Piling of waste material for burning shall be done at such a location
and in such a manner as would not cause any fire risk. Necessary precautions shall be taken
to prevent spreading of fire to areas beyond the limits of cleared areas. Suitable materials
and equipment for prevention andsuppression of fire shall be kept available at all time.
SECTION 10 EXCAVATION FOR TUNNEL AND OTHER WORKS
10.1.1The list of I.S. codes and other publications applicable to this section is given
below
The abbreviations, I.S., I.R.C., B.S., ASTM. shall be considered to have thefollowing
meanings.
I.S. Indian Standard of the bureau of Indian Standard.
S.N. I.S. Number Short Title
01. IS:7293-1974 Safety code for working with construction
Machinery
02. IS:3764-1966 Safety code for excavation work.
03. IS:1498-1970 Classification and identification of soils for
general Engineering purposes.
10.1.1 General :
a) The work to be done under these specifications shall consist of furnishing all tools,
constructional plant, labour, materials and other things required for excavation in all stratas.
Conveyance and disposal of the excavated materials, leads and lifts, temporary work for
performance of all the operations connected with the work embraced under the contract as will
secure a satisfactory quality of work.
b) Construction and maintenance of diversions in case diversion of existing communication lines,
channels, or drains where they were disturbed due to excavation of tunnel and approach and
exit channel and for construction of structures.
10.1.2 Scope:
Excavation of approach and exit channel/channel/approach channel/drain/cut off trench/key

trench /toe wall/toe drain/foundations for structures/Cut off wall/chute drains etc., in all
soils/H.D.R.-I and II/F&F. rock / H.R.in both wet and dry conditions and disposal of spoil
not useful for construction on spoil bank and soils not required for construction on stock
piles and stacking of useful stone, disposal of not useful stone, conveyance of excavated
spoil/soils including swell, conveyance of excavated rock including voids, with all leads, lifts
and delifts and formation of spoil bank/stock piles, including dewatering, diversion of streams,
formation and removal of ramps, diversion roads/approach roads, shoring/strutting. etc., as per
drawings and as directed by the Engineer-in-charge to complete the finished item of work.
10.1.3 Planning:
a) Prior to the commencement of work, all relevant data shall be collected by the contractor and
drawings preferred by him showing the location of the excavation, spoils, deposition and
filling. On these drawings, full cutting reaches, partial cutting and partial embankment reaches
and full embankment reaches should be distinctly indicated. The quantity of material to be
placed in fill shall be noted clearly in these reaches. Where the material to be excavated.
consists of different types and if the various types have to be used separately in the fill or
dumped to spoil bank, the quantities of each class of material in each area should be shown on
drawings.
b) The contractor shall present his planning of the work along with required details to the
Owner at least 15 days before starting the work.
10.1.4 a) Setting out works: Specification 1.1.3 shall apply.

b) Bench mark: Specification 1.1.2.2 shall apply.
c) Prior to starting any work, the Contractor shall erect additional permanent bench marks,
reference lines, reference points and checks profiles at convenient locations approved by
the Engineer-in-charge. The Bench Marks stones shall be of 600 mmx 200mm. size with
450mm. embedded under firm ground in concrete and 150mm. projecting above
ground. The word "B.M" showing value of R.L shall be conspicuously carved and
painted.
d) The check profiles shall be located at 25mm. apart or closer as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge so as to ensure execution of all slopes, steps and elevations, to the profile or
profiles indicated on the approved drawings. All the important levels and all control
points with respect to bench marks and reference lines shall be fixed and correlated by
the Engineer-in-charge.
e) The contractor shall take all precautions to see that the lines, points and bench Marks
fixed by the Department are not disturbed by his work and shall make good of any such
damage.
f) All materials and labour for setting out works including construction of Bench Marks,
reference lines, check profiles and surveys, as may be required at variousstages of
construction shall be supplied by the Contractor at his cost.
10.1.5 Clearing the site:
The provisions of specification 2.0 shall apply.
10.1.6 RECORDING OF CROSS SECTIONS.
10.1.6.1 After clearing the area required for tunnel and approach and exit channel
excavation in accordance with the provisions of specifications cross sections shall
be taken at every 10 M interval or closer, depending on the nature of ground, normal
to axis of approach and exit channel up to sufficient distance outside the limits of the
work.
10.1.6.2 After stripping and prior to commencement of excavation cross sectional levels of
stripped surface shall be taken at the same locations at intervals as specified in
para (a) above and certificated as mentioned shall be recorded by the contractor.
10.1.7 Authority for classification:
i. It is the responsibility of the contractor to perform and maintain the excavation to the
pay lines described in these specifications or as shown on the drawings.
10.1.8 CLASSIFICATIONS OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:
All materials involved in excavation shall be classified by the owner as and whenrequired
10.1.9 EXCAVATION :
Where sub soil water is expected the excavation shall be started preferably from the nearest
valley
10.1.9.1 The contractor shall commence excavation immediately after the surface
areaof ground is prepared.
10.1.9.2 The Government reserves the right, during the progress of work to vary the
slope of excavation or the slope of embankment and the dimensions depended thereon.
10.1.9.3 Suitable arrangements for drainage shall be provided to take surface water
clear of excavation during the progress of work. Sump pits if found necessary shall be
excavated at suitable places and the water thus collected shall be bailed out or let into
a near by valley at his cost. When cutting on cross sloping ground, the contractor
shall cut a catch water drain on the higher side to prevent water from flowing down
the cutting slope. No separate payment shall be made for this work unless otherwise
specified.
10.1.9.4 No distinction shall be made as to whether the material being excavated is
wetor dry or in water.
10.1.9.5 All washable materials and any soil which generally becomes unstable
on saturation such as organic soil, loose soils and expansive soils shall be removed as
directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
10.1.9.6 All Suitable excavated material within economic lead shall be used for
construction of embankments.
10.1.9.7 In soils the contractor shall not excavate out side the slopes or below the
established grades or loosen any material outside the limits of excavation. Any excess
depth excavated below the specified levels shall be made good at the cost of the
contractor to standards as prescribed by the Engineer-in-charge.
10.1.9.8 The method of drilling and blasting to be resorted to the excavation in rock
shall be in accordance with specification 3.3 “Drilling and Blasting” and got approved by
the Executive Engineer.
10.1.9.9 The degradation for tail channel and approach channel for structures and
diversion of drains or vagus shall conform to the lines, dimensions, grades, side
slopes, and levels and shown on drawings or as directed by the Engineer- in-charge.
10.1.9.10 Where suitable materials in excess of that required to construct adjacent
embankments or in deficit sections by conveyance or back filling of structures or to
construct O&M. Road, Ramps and Bridge approach embankments as determined by the
Engineer-in-charge in one continuous operation, then such material shall be stock piled
at places designated by the Owner for later use.
10.1.9.11 All gangways, roads and stopping shall be such that they fall within the cross
sections so that the final dressing of slope will consist of digging and no rolling will be
required.
10.1.9.12 During rock excavations, over-hangs or unsafe slopes shall not be permitted.
10.1.9.13 Unless otherwise specified, over excavation in rocks/soils shall not be
permitted.
10.1.9.14 Blasting in a manner as to produce over -breakage which in the opinion of
Executive Engineer is excessive shall not be permitted. Special care shall be taken to
prevent over breakages or loosening of material on bottom and side slopes against which
lining is to be placed.
10.1.9.15 Final cutting for 500 mm. in rock shall be carried out by controlled blasting or
trimming or by chiseling wedging, barring with the help of pneumatic paving breakers
and no extra payment will be made.
10.1.9.16 In case of reservoir/tank works, the useful materials excavated in the cut of
trenches key trenches approach channels from the sluices, over burden removal on the
U/S and D/S sides of surplus weir, and foundations, excavation for sluices and surplus
weir, excavated shall be used for construction purposes. Any material unsuitable for
construction purposes shall be disposed of as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
10.1.10 OVER EXCAVATION :

In excavation any excess depth below the specified levels and any excess excavation in
slopes and widths shall be made good at the cost of the contractor with suitable concrete.
10.1.11 For excavation in rock, tolerance of 75 mm. beyond the designed tunnel profile will,
however, be permitted. No extra payment will be made for the excavation beyond the
designed tunnel profile.
10.1.11.1 Should any excavation occur beyond the tolerance limit, the same shall also be
refilled at contractor’s own expenses, with.
10.1.11.1.1 M15/suitable concrete.
10.1.11.2 However, over- breakages occurring due to natural causes and slips in rock
shall be refilled as indicated at (i) under (a) above breakages. The tenderer while
quoting for excavation, shall keep the above conditions in view.
10.1.12 DEWATERING
If water is met in the excavation due to sub-soil ground water, springs, seepage, rain or
other causes, it shall be removed by suitable diversion, pumping or bailing out and the sub-
soil water table shall be kept below the excavation so that the excavation kept dry whenever
so required as directed by the Engineer-in-charge care shall be taken to discharge the
drained water as not to cause damage to the works, crops or any other property. No separate
payment will be made for dewatering.
10.1.13 DISPOSAL OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL:
10.1.13.1 No rehandling of excavated material due to injudicious selection of place for

dumping or otherwise will be paid for.
10.1.13.2 In case of deep cutting the spoil shall be so disposed off as not to result in
unsightly heaps and shall be leveled and properly dressed. The-top of both the
finished banks shall slope away from the inner edge with a suitable gradient.
10.1.13.3 The contractor has no claim over any of the materials got out of excavation of
the approach and exit channel cutting and foundation excavation except for
bonefieduse of the project.
10.1.13.4 The responsibility for arranging the land required in excess of that acquired by the
department for disposal of excavated material rest with contractor.
10.1.14 PAY LINE:
a) The tunnel shall be excavated to the lines, dimensions side slopes and levels shown on
the drawings. Pay line for excavation including subsequent removal of the extra depth
for lining/stabilisation shall be to the dimensions, slopes and grades and levels as
shown on the drawings unless otherwise specified.
SECTION -11 NIL
SECTION -12
12.1 EXCAVATION OF TUNNEL
This section covers the specifications for item of excavation of tunnel in differentgrades of
rock.
12.1.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS:
For tunnel excavation in rock, the following operations are normally required asextracted
from IS 5878 – 1972.
12.1.1.1 Marking of Tunnel Profile.
12.1.1.2 Setting up and drilling.
12.1.1.3 Loading explosives and blasting.
12.1.1.4 Removing toxic gases after blasting.
12.1.1.5 Checking misfires.
12.1.1.6 Scaling.
12.1.1.7 Mucking.
12.1.1.8 Erection of supports or guniting or shotcreting with/without rock bolts. The process
of shotcreting should generally be concurrent with mucking, the muck pile being used as a
platform to gunite / shotcrete the ground and adjoining areas. In case any scaffolding is
necessary for shotcreting the area, it should be arranged at his own cost. The lower parts may be
gunited / shotcreted after mucking is completed.
In case of use of only steel support without gunite / shotcrete, the steel supports should be
erected after mucking. Wedges should be provided between the rock profile and outer
flanges of steel ribs at a number of points to enable proper transfer of rock loads to the ribs.
Where ever considered necessary and subject to the approval of Owner, initial concrete blocking
logging / suitable Packing be provided.
This operation should be done after mucking and if feasible, simultaneously with drilling for
blasting of the next round depending upon the bridge action time of therock met with.
12.1.1.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
All methods and procedures for excavation of Tunnel shall conform to India Standards
specifications listed below unless otherwise specified.
IS 3764 Safety Code for excavation work (Ammendment No.1)IS
4756 : 1978 Safety Code for Tunneling work (1ST Revision )
IS 5878 : 1971(Part Code of practice of construction of Tunnels. Precision survey and
-1) setting out
IS 5878 (Part 2): Underground excavation in rock drilling and Blasting
Section 1 -1979 (Amendtment No.1)
IS 5878 (Part – 2): Underground excavation in rock
Section/II/1971 Section- 2, ventilation, lighting, mucking And dewatering.
(Amendment No. 1)
IS 5878 (Part-II): Under ground excavation in rock Section 3, Tunneling methods
Section – III – for steeply inclined tunnel, shaft and underground power house.
1971 Underground excavation in soft strata. (Amendment No. 1)
IS 5878 (Part-III):
1972 Tunnel supports (Amendment No. 1)
IS 5878 (Part -IV):
1971 Concrete Lining(1st Revision)Steel
IS 5878 (Part-V) :
1976 lining.
IS 5878 (Part-VI) :
1976
IS 6922 :1973 Criteria for safety and design of Structures subject to underground
Blasts
12.1.2 SETTING OUT THE TUNNEL ALIGNMENT:

Before taking up the excavation of the tunnel its faces shall be established and alignment of
the tunnel marked in accordance with IS 5878 (Part – 1): 1971. The two faces i.e., inlet and exit
portals of tunnel shall be located on ground and the stations from which driving lines can be set
out shall be fixed precisely. The portal points shall be marked by concrete pillars on the
ground. Reference points or marks shall be constructed on the roof of the tunnel and these
pillars shall be cast in concrete with
Nonrusting plates fixed flush with top of concrete. Setting out tunnel shall conform to IS 5878
(Part 1): 1971 code of practice for construction of tunnels, (Part-1) precision survey and setting
out.
12.1.2.1CLOSING ERROR:
If closing error is less say 25mm to 50mm, it should be adjusted in the erection of shuttering
for concreting itself, if the error is of higher order, curves of very large radii should be introduced
near junction points as specified in clause 10 of IS 5878 (Part 1): 1971 Code of Practice for
construction of Tunnels.
12.1.3 GENERAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS:
The contractor shall scrupulously follow at all times the safety requirements to ensure safety
to men, and materials in accordance with the provision of the following IS Codes.
IS 4081: 1986 Safety code for blasting and related drilling operations
IS 4138:1977 Safety code for working in compressed air. (1st Revision)IS
4756: 1978 Safety code for tunneling work (1st Revision)
12.1.3.1.
I. The Contractor shall also depute experienced safety Supervisors in all the three
shifts under the overall command of his Safety Engineer;
II. Aproper ambulance shall be provided and maintained by the Contractor near the
inlet portal as well as near the outlet portal for carrying injured persons to the
hospital.
III. The Contractor shall establish firstaid posts, near the inlet and the outlet protal,duly
manned by trained staff and equipped with essential medicines required or first-aid;
and
IV. The Contractor shall monitor the air / gases inside the tunnel for any possible
presence of Methane gas and inform the Owner immediately upon such detection.
12.1.3.2 TUNNEL SUPPORTS & GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:
The safety of tunnel excavation shall at all times be contractor‟s full responsibility. He
shall also be responsible for adoption and fulfiling of all necessary measures to protect his
workers from slides and cavities from roofs, walls or at the work fronts, fortuitous
explosions, misfires, intoxications, noxious fumes, traffic accidents, electric discharges,
electrocution, and all accidents of probable occurrence in the construction of tunnels. The
contractor shall take all precautions normally required to be taken for this type of work. He
should maintain adequate lighting in the works area and inside the tunnel for adequate
visibility. Lack of compliance with any safety measures or requisites indicated in this paragraph
shall be sufficient cause for the Owner to suspend the work until the causes that lead to the
suspension of the work are remedied. The contractors shall have no right to claim extension or
compensation for this reason. The sections of the tunnels where the rock met with is unstable
shall be permanently supported with intermittent or continuous way by means of steel
supports with permanent or temporary laggings placed as required by site condition with prior
approval by Owner and as per drawings.
12.1.3.3. EQUIPMENTS:
Electrical, pneumatic or diesel equipments can be utilised for the different operations
involved in the excavation of tunnel. Gasoline powered equipments shall not be permitted in
tunnel or underground works. In case the diesel equipment is used the contractor shall provide
necessary facilities to remove all obnoxious gases resulting from the operation of the
equipment. The equipment, shall have in-built scrubber to keep down emission of obnoxious
fumes to the minimum. If the diesel gas removal system is not adequate the Owner may orders,
without extra cost to the Dept., the suspension of all operations till the necessary measures to
correct the defects of the ventilation system are taken.
12.1.4 LIGHTING
Adequate lighting shall be provided at the face and at any other point where work is in
progress at equipment installations, such as pumps, fans and transformers. A minimum
illumination of 100 lux shall be provided at tunnel and shaft headings during drilling,
mucking and sealing. When mucking is done by tipping wagons, running on trolley
tracks, a minimum of 50 lux shall be provided for efficent and safe working. Along the
length of the tunnel also adequate lighting shall be provided.
Any obstructions, such as jumbo, form work, etc, side the tunnel shall be well lighted to
avoid accidents when hauling units are moving.
Lighting at the working face shall be profuse. However, no single lightshall be so
powerful as to cause temporary blinding effect when looked at.
Voltage of supply line may be reduced in the tunnel from 230 V to 110 Vfor lighting
purpose, where practicable. For motors of 440 V waterproof cables shall be laid in
tunnels.
Incandescent lamps should be fixed in the centre of the roof of tunnel of tunnel. In case
the lamps are to be fixed on sides of tunnel, they shall be as high as possible and well
above the ventilation ducts, so that the shadow of the duct is not formed on the road
surface.
The electric circuits of the lighting in tunnel shall be divided into numberof
independent circuits with their insulators and fuse boxes separate. With the separation
of the circuits, the repair works on the electric lighting system can be easily done by
switching off the desired circuit while the other circuits are still in operation.
In addition to the fixed lighting system, all hauling equipment shall have their own
lighting system. These lights not only give indication to the personnel inthe tunnel
of the approach of the hauling equipment but also permit them to negotiatethe tunnel
without any danger in case of emergencies when the fixed light systems are turned out.
In addition to the normal lighting, provision of flood lights shall be madeat suitable
intervals for detailed inspection for any particular length or spot. All electrical cables
and wires shall be fixed firmly on tunnel walls by means of insulatorsof adequate and
capacity and their installation shall be made in such a way that wiresdo not get
damaged during tunnel construction. The contractor shall provide sufficient lighting at
all places where work is in progress. Visibility inside the tunnel at all times be fully
adequate.
A. Unless otherwise directed by the Owner the minimum service illuminance on ground or
working surface to be provided for the various operations or work areas shall be as tabulated
below:
Operational area Illuminance Minimum
Measured value lux.
Earth work & excavation 20
(Other than underground work)
Acess to haul roads where cross Traffic or 10
other hazardous conditions exist
Bridges 10
Concrete Placing 50
Underground works(working faces) 50
Junctions 15
Operators cabin of machines 30
Maintenance shop and auxiliary Buildings 200
B. The Contractor shall supply a suitable instrument to the Owner for measuring the intensity of
illumination.
C. All mobile equipment‟s or plants used during night operations or in tunnels shall be equipped
with sufficient light and reflectors to ensure safe working conditions.
D. Not less than 14 days before the start of tunneling or night operations, the contractor shall
submit his proposals for lighting in the tunnels and in the areas in which he proposes to work at
night to the Owner. The contractor shall modify the proposals if required by the Owner and shall
not begin operations at night or in tunnels as the case may be until the proposals for lighting
(in an amended form if required)have been approved.
E. Approval of contractor‟s proposals for lighting shall not relieve the contractor if any of
his liabilities or obligations under the contract.
5.1.4.7 The entire cost of providing and maintaining such lighting system shall be deemed to
have been included in the rates tendered for items included in section – 7 Bill of quantity. No
separate payment shall be made for this item.
12.1.5 DUST CONTROL:

The average concentration of respirable dust at the work front during each shift, to which
each worker is exposed at any working point of place shall not exceed 3mg. per cubic meter.
This limit of value will be applicable when the respirable dust contains 5% or less of free silica
in the airborne dust. Where dust content contains more than 5% quartz or free silica the
limiting value shall
Be determined by the following formula.
Average concentration of Dustin 15 Percentage of respirable parts or Partsor
Mg/cubicmetre free silica
1) All respirable dust concentrations shall be measured by the NCB/MRE dust sample type
113 A of Uk or its approved equivalent.
2) The minimum frequency for determination of the respirable dust concentrations shall be
once a month at different working points.
3) Dust control measures shall be adopted if the concentration exceeds the limit below 5
micron size. The dust control measures are several including thorough wetting of the
surfaces at locations which produce dust, for example, the area to be blasted, loading and
unloading place, crusher or dressing of stones, etc. Another effective dust control measure is
the provision of suitable dust respirator where the permissible limits are exceeded.
4) From the drilling and blasting point of view the dust control measures shall include;
i. Drilling;
ii. As far as practicable the times for shot firing shall be chosen that
minimum number of persons are exposed to dust.
iii. After shots have been fired (a) the airborne dust in the place shall be removed
actively by a current of air and (b) after the place has been examined and
declared safe, the face walls and sides and all loose rock with in a radius of
4.5m of the site of blasting shall be sprinkled with a fine spray if considered
necessary.
iv. Dust suckers may be sued in dust laden atmosphere
12.1.6 NOISE CONTROL

Noise is considered to be impulse when the variations in level involve maximum intervals
greater than one second, when personnel are subjected to sound levels exceeding the limits
specified in this section feasible Engineering or administrative controls shall be utilised. If such
controls fails to reduce sound levels within the specified limit, personnel protective equipment
shall be provided and used to reduce sound levels to the specified limit.
The following standard shall have to be maintained for works for 8 hours duration work.
1) A working limit of 85 DB (A) continuous may be set as the level below
which very little risk to an unprotected ear, of hearing impairment exists for
an eight hour exposure.
2) The danger limits value shall be 90 DB (A), above which the danger of hearing
impairment and deafness may result for an unprotected ear.
3) A worker should not be allowed to enter without appropriate ear protection in
area in which the noise level is 115 DB(A), or more.
4) Personal protective equipment shall be worn, if there are single isolated
outbursts of noise which can go above 130 (A)DB „Impluse‟ or 120 DB(A)
Fast.
5) No worker shall be allowed to enter an area where the noise level exceeds 140
DB(A).
In all cases where the sound levels exceed specified limits, a continuing, effective hearing
conservation programmes shall be administrated. Sound pressure level measurements shall be
made by qualified personnel using calibrated instruments. Noise hazardous area (greater
than 85 DB(A) continuous or 130 DB(A) Impulse or
120 DB(A) „Fast‟) shall be marked with caution signs indicating both pressure ofhazardous noise
levels and the need for hearing protection.
12.1.6.2 The entire cost of providing and maintaining the noise control system shall bedeemed
to have been included in the rates tendered for items included in Bill
of Quantities No separate payment shall be made for this item.
12.1.7 COMMUNICATION FACILITIES:

The contractor shall install and maintain proper communication in good working orders at all
times during the whole period of work, at or near the working face of the tunnel/adit/shaft and
other areas contiguous to the work etc., as well as other points so as to afford prompt
communication, with some responsible employees of the contractor outside the tunnel, shaft
etc., The Contractor shall also install, maintain and operate such other communication and
signal facilities as may be necessary for the safe and efficient execution of work. Authorized
employees of Department shall have free used such communication and signal facilities.
12.1.7.2 The entire cost of providing and maintaining such communication and signal
system for the tunnel shall be deemed to have been included in the rates
tendered therefor, in schedule. No separate payment shall be made for this item of
work.
12.1.8 DRAINAGE AND PUMPING:
For effective dewatering if drain has to be excavated outside the lines of excavation
shown, the Contractor may excavate such drain with the approval of the Owner. This shall be
back filled by the Contractor with concrete as specified while lining the tunnel. The excavation
and back filling of such drain by the Contractor shall be at his own cost for which on payment
shall be made to the contractor.
12.1.9 UNDERGROUND EXCAVATION
Underground excavation for tunnel shall include all excavations performed by tunneling
methods for different, classifications of rock. The tunnel shall be excavated to the lines, grades
and dimensions shown on the drawings as vetted by CWC and approved by the Owner. No
variation in the alignment of the tunnel shown on the drawing shall be permitted. Payment for
excavation shall be made to the “B” line in all cases and over break of excavation outside the
“B” line shall be at the contractor‟s expenses irrespective of the cause of such over break or over
excavation, including for the causes mentioned in para 5.1.4.16 and 5.1.16.1. The tunnel shall be
constructed in such a manner as to permit a thorough inspection and logging by Geologist of the
rock formation penetrated. At each 30Mt section of the tunnel the excavated surface of the tunnel
shall be washed clear of dust and loose rock, so that the natural condition of rock can be
observed by the Department and examined/mapped by the Geologist.
12.1.9.2 GEOLOGICAL MAPPING
“Geological mapping shall invariably be carried out on on-going basis throughout the
tunneling operation by the geological consultant of the department”.
12.1.9.3 UNDERGROUND EXCAVATION, SETTING OUT AND
REFERENCE POINTS.
The contractor shall establish at suitable point, permanent reference marks on the centre line
of tunnel and on their extensions at both the ends as may be necessary.
Suitable permanent reference marks shall also be established at portals, etc., The permanent
marks shall be inscribed on bronze pegs, set in firm concrete blocks where they will be free
from any likely-hood of disturbance. As the work progress, centre line marks shall be made
on pegs inserted in the roof of the tunnel and other hollow cuts at convenient intervals for
checking alignment, grades, levels etc., and also the dimensions minimum excavated line ie., “A”
line (i.e., excavation of designed profile line of tunnel) to the satisfaction of Owner. The
contractor shall remain responsible at all times for the sufficiency and accuracy of all such Bench
Marks and reference points. The cost of these shall be deemed to have been included in the
rates tendered.
12.1.9.3 ACCURACY OF ALIGNMENT, GRADES, LEVELS ETC.,
Bench marks, and fixed reference points with values of levels and co-ordinates are
available in the work area. Plans showing the position, co-ordinates and levels shall be
supplied to the contractor. The contractor shall fix his permanent points and bench marks
conforming to the values. He shall take all precautions to see that the points fixed by the
department are not disturbed by his acts and shall make good the damage if any, at his own cost.
The contractor shall execute the tunnel true to alignment grade and levels and shall check these
at frequent intervals as the work progresses. The contractor shall provide free of cost, all
facilities like labour, instruments etc., and all co-operation to the Owner to check the alignment,
grades, levels etc. Such checking by the Owner shall not absolve the contractor from his
responsibility of maintaining the accuracy of his work. Any discrepancy or error detected during
course of excavation and or at the end of the work when the excavated faces met, shall be set
right by the contractor at his own cost in the manner prescribedby the Owner.
12.1.9.4. METERIALS TO BE EXCAVATED AND MODE OF CHECKING
DIMENSIONS
The nature and character of materials likely to be met within the underground excavation are
indicated, Drawing, showing, Bore hole data, Core samples can be inspected in the office of the
Owner by prior appointment.
The test report on rock samples suggest the rock specimens as dark massive horizontally
layered lime stone with shale partings. The compressive strength of the rock samples tested at
Technical laboratory G.S.I. are ranging from 1103 Kg/Cm2 to 2086 Kg/Cm2 .
However this does not preclude any sizeable variation of the rock properties from the above
at places along the alignment of tunnel. The department however does not take any
responsibility for any variation that may be met with during actual excavation. No distinction
shall be made on account of material being wet or dry. The quantity of excavation shall be
measured as solid excavation insitu. The contractor shall provide a suitable jig or equipment
for moving the jig along the alignment and grade of the tunnel to check the dimensions of the
minimum excavation line as and when required by the Owner. Pumping out seepage Water
collected over the entire area during the course of excavation and further execution of the
work till completion of the construction of tunnel envisaged under the contract shall be carried
out by the contractor at his own cost. The cost of dewatering operations shall be deemed as
included in the rates tendered.
12.1.9.5. DRILLING:
All drillings for the underground excavation shall be done with adequate supply of water to
each rock drill except where tunneling is to done through soft shale, splintery shale strata.
12.1.10.TUNNEL EXCAVATION THROUGH ROCK NOT REQUIRING
ANY PERMANENT STEEL SUPPORTS.
The contractor may execute the tunnel excavation by means of any appropriate methods
approved by Owner. He shall use excavation and transportation equipment‟s which meet with the
specifications. The excavation and support installed operation shall be made in a coordinated
way to avoid the creation of unbalanced forces in the excavated rock mass. Wherever
considered necessary by the Owner, rock bolts shall be provided. The contractor shall submit
well in advance for the approval of the Owner the schedule that he proposes to follow for
excavating the tunnel headings and a complete description of the sequence of different
operations including depth of holes, spacing of holes quantities, type and strength of the
explosives to be used, ignition sequence type and class of detonators and their delays estimated
consumption of explosives per cubic metre of excavation and all other pertinent data that
shall allow the Owner to be acquainted with the working procedures and the equipment to be
used. This description shall be sent not later than three weeks after the start of the excavation
trials and the investigation about the control of vibrations, Smooth blasting techniques shall only
be adopted for tunneling and shall be in accordance with the following paragraph.No.5.4.10.2.
All possible precautions shall be taken to prevent the rock lying outside the excavation lines
undisturbed and otherwise in the best possible conditions.
12.1.10.1 SMOOTH BLASTING
i). The contractor shall evolve a smooth blasting or controlled contour blasting
technique for tunneling as against normal profile blasting methods (Where no consideration is
given to the appearance and condition of the blasted contour) Smooth blasting technique shall be
developed by him aiming at obtaining a smoother and stronger tunnel profile and limiting the
peak particle velocities (PPV) within the permissible range specified by the Owner.
ii). Smooth blasting shall require closely spaced perimeter holes with an adjacent inner
row of holes, to be charged and fired together with the rest of the round. Not only the
perimeter / contour holes shall have light charges but the row of holes directly adjacent to them
shall also be charged with well balanced charges since the excessive charge in this row may
break beyond the intended rock excavation like before the perimeter holes are blasted, thereby
spoiling the final contour. Well balanced charges in the holes next to the perimeter holes are
thus a must for achievingto the best result, otherwise these holes may cause more damage to the
remaining rock than the perimeter holes.
12.1.10.1GENERAL GUIDELINES
i) The contour of tunnel is divided into floor holes, wall holes, and roof holes. The floor holes
shall be charged more than the stopping holes to compensate for gravity and for the weight
of rock masses from the rest of the round which lay over them at the instant of detonation. In
firing sequence, these holes shall be ignited earlier than the contour holes.
ii). The contour holes as well as the row immediately adjacent to the, shall have lighter charge
density. Accordingly, suitable spacers shall be used in between explosive cartridges to achieve
the desired objective in both the contour holes and the row of holes immediately next to them.
The spacers of 30 cm + length shall separatethe explosive charged.
iii). The firing pattern shall be designed so that the angle of breakages is an wide as possible
(approximating to 900, to the extent possible). Maximum number of both short (milli second)
and long (half second) delays shall be used in the round in order to reduce the co-operating
charge in the context of the fact that the blast-induced peak particle velocity (PPV) is
proportional to the quantum of co-operating charge. If V- Cut is used,, the angle of cut in
the Vs shall not be too acute and preferably not less than 600. More acute angles shall require
higher charge concentration in the holes, which is not desirable. MS delays shall be used to fire
the V-Cut.
iv). In the event of tunnel driving through a bad zone encountered on one side of its crown, the
spacing of perimeter holes on that side shall be made closer (reduced to half) and alternate
holes shall be kept empty. No separate payment shall be made for this operation and its cost
shall be deemed to have included in the rates tendered therfor in Section-7, Bill of quantities.
12.1.10.2 Peak particle Velocity (PPV) Vibration Monitor.
The Contractor shall procure and maintain a “Peak particle Velocity Vibration Monitor”
for monitoring peak particle velocity (PPV) as well as sound pressure levels in decibels
generated by blasting.
12.1.10.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORTS.
With the adoption of smooth blasting techniques and provision of rock bolts and or
permanent steel supports when required with in the specified period after blasting, it is
considered that there will be no situation when temporary supports shall be required. It shall
however be the contractor may consider the provision of temporary supports necessary for the
approval of Owner. Consequences if any, on the failure to erect temporary support in proper time
shall be the sole responsibility of the contractor. The support shall be of steel or timber and
shall be removed before placing the concrete.
12.1.11 CAVINGS IN TUNNEL:
The contractor shall, at all times take all other measures deemed necessary orordered by the
Owner to avoid caving in the tunnel. In case a caving / cavity occurs or the sign indicating
the possibility of its occurrence are observed, the contractor shall take all necessary
measures to avoid its further spread and prevent accident and notify immediately. In such cases
the contractor shall take all measures ordered by the Owner. The removal of caved in
materials, the necessary repairs, and the consequential accidents that may occur shall also be
contractors responsibility. In such case the contractor shall have no right to request for the
extension of time for the completion of work.
12.1.12 TUNNEL EXCAVATION THROUGH ROCK REQUIRING
PERMANENT STEEL SUPPORT: (EXCAVATION OF TUNNEL IN
FISSURED AND FRACTURED ROCK)./POOR STRATE ETC.,
The contractor may be required to excavate some sections of the tunnel through poor
weak or weathered rocks such as F&F by means of acceptable methods which allow a
permanent control of the face / heading and avoid cave-ins and slides. The excavation shall be
co-ordinated with the installation of loggings with structural steel supports and with the back
filling operations behind supports to provide immediate support, for the rocks surrounding the
tunnel. Where such zones of rock are found or apprehended the excavation shall be started
using manual methods or pneumatic tools in order not to disturb the vulnerable zone
surrounding the tunnel section. In case it is not possible to execute the excavation using manual
methods and it becomes necessary to resort to explosives blasting shall be carried out in a
controlled manner. However only smooth blasting method shall be used every where. When
supports and lagging are placed the gap between the supports and rock profile shall be packed
tightly to achieve support to rock with suitable lean concrete mix through a concrete placer as
determined and approved by the Owner.
12.1.12.1 PERFORMANCE OF SUPPORT SYSTEM.
The Contractor shall feedback the performance of the support system (Wherever provided) to
the Owner for any modification, if required, in the support system. Monitoring by the contractor
of the behavior of rock in the excavated section of the tunnel shall be an on-going process
through appropriate instrumentation. He shall monitor convergences at regular intervals and
keep the Owner duly informed. He may be required to provide additional support system
wherever considered essential.
12.1.13 EXCAVATION AT TUNNEL JUNCTIONS AND CORNERS.
Special care and precautions shall be taken to carry out excavation at tunnel junctions and
corners, to avoid over breakages spacing of contour holes in drilling pattern should be reduced
and the blasting charge suitably adjusted in the last zone adjacent to the final excavation lines to
give the desired results.
12.1.14 SCALING AND TRIMMING OF ROCK
After the face is blasted, gasses removed through the ventilation system and the face
ventilated, all loose rock in the top and sides shall be removed as quickly as practicable by
approved methods to avoid danger to work men and equipment if any loose or loosened rock is
noticed later any where in the excavation it shall be removed expeditiously. As the work
advances, trimming of rock surfaces remaining within the minimum excavation line shall be
undertaken simultaneously. In no case the trimming shall be postponed and left to be tackled
last. No separate payment shall be made for this item. The cost of such scaling and removal
of lose and loosened rock trimmingshall be deemed to have been included in the rates tendered
for excavation of tunnel in hard rock as well as soft rock in Section 7 Bill of Quantities.
12.1.15 TREATMENT OF FAULTS AND MINOR CREVICES IN TUNNEL.
During the excavation of the tunnel some crevices, shear zones and/ or faults may be found
which may require special treatment determined by the Owner including short blasting rounds,
heading benching fore-poling, providing heavier steel ribs and additional rock bolting shotcreting
with wire mesh grouting etc. etc.
12.1.15.1 PROBE HOLE
12.1.15.1.1 A Probe hole shall be drilled ahead of the tunnel heading to determine, in
advance, the nature of the material to be excavated and the presence of any
water/ gases. These probe holes are separate from the exploratory holes
which may be ordered by the Owner.
12.1.15.1.2 The drilling of the probe hole 40mm – 50 mm diameter in excavation
by conventional method, shall be included in a normal pattern of drilling the
probe holes. The length of the probe hole shall be about 5m or at least 3
times the length of the expected day‟s excavation advance.
12.1.15.1.3 Based on the probe hole information, the Contractor shall, without
delay, provide to the Owner, in writing his assessment of the expected
material to the encountered.
12.1.15.1.4 Should the probe hole indicate the presence of excessive water
ahead of the excavation face, the Contractor shall take appropriate
precautions such as grouting draining through deep holes or adopt such
suitable measure as necessary to facilitate excavation. Similarly, the
Contractor shall adopt suitable measures to deal with any gases, or zones of
weakened / sheared rock which may be encountered. All measures deemed
necessary shall be subject to approval by the Owner.
12.1.15.4. EXTRA – ORDINARY GEOLOGICAL OCCURRENCE (E.G.O.)
i. Geological occurrence is called extraordinary (EGO) if its appearance is unexpected and
there is no possibility of further advance by the construction methods provided for, and
priced by the Contractor in his bid, even by using qualified tunneling crew.
ii. In the case of EGO, the Owner having taken up the matter with the Contractor, shall
determine the best possible method to be used (including chemical grouting, heavy fore
poling, extensive grouting to be able to continue with the advance in that under ground
heading.
12.1.15.5 EXCAVATION LINES IN ROCK REQUIRING PERMANENT
STEEL SUPPORTS.
In portion of sections of work it may be necessary to support the rock by the permanent
structural steel supports and excavation may have to be increased to accommodate supports. In
such cases the payment line shall be taken parallel to the central line of supports 100mm (one
hundred millimetres) beyond the outer surface of the support.
12.1.16.1 OTHER REQUIREMENT.
The contractor shall take very precaution in his operations to avoid loosening materials
beyond the “B” line. All drilling and blasting shall be carefully performed. Any damages to or
displacement of tunnels supports and any damage to any other part of the work, caused by
blasting or any other operations of the contractor shall be repaired at the expense of and by the
contractor in an approved manner.
The excavation in the crown of unsupported and supported concrete lined tunnel sections
shall be sufficient to accommodate the pumpcrete pipe line between the forms or
reinforcement and the excavated surfaces.
All excavated material not specifically approved for inclusion in construction of specified
features shall be disposed off in such dump area as shown in the drawings with all lifts and
leads beyond.
All loosened materials, either inside or outside of the “B” lines that in the opinion of the
Owner is liable to fall, shall be removed.
All materials projecting inside the “A” lines in concrete lined sections shall be removed by
the contractor in accordance with the paragraph 5.4.10.1
In addition to specifications given in this section various complimentary specification criteria
and requirements of India standards as given in paragraph 5.4.1. shall also apply to all
underground excavations.
12.1.
16.2 IN SITU STRESS MEASUREMENTS.
Knowledge of the insitu is essential to evaluate the sound, logical design of rock
reinforcement system, excavation procedure and for the interpretation of expected rock
strength and deformation properties, The contractor shall provide necessary field facilities for
carrying out such insitu stress measurements as required by the Owner.
12.1.16.3. INSTRUMENTS.
Extensometers, load cells, or any other type of instruments that may be required by the
owner shall be installed at representative cross sections of the tunnel. Necessary ducts
recesses shall be left in the tunnel, for installing necessaryinstruments as desired by the Owner
at no extra cost. The cost of Instruments and cost of installation shall be borne by the
department.
12.1.17 DRILLING AND BLASTING
12.1.17.1 DRILLING.
For drilling a tunnel through rock it is essential to drill holes for charging the explosives. The
drilling pattern shall be worked out by the contractor by trial experiments for each particular
work as it depends on the texture and formation of rock, size and shape of the tunnel, the
strength of explosives and also the fragmentation of rock realised so as to make it suitable for
handling by muckingequipment. The drilling shall be such as to ensure minimum over break and
least amount of explosive per unit volume of excavation. Only wet drilling shall be permitted,
except where the rock is such that it can cause muddy condition.
Blasting shall be permitted only after proper precautions are taken for the protection of
men and property. Any damage to the work or property by blasting shall be repaired or made
good by the contractor. The contractor shall apply and obtain prior approval of Owner for
the maximum advance for each round of blasting, drilling pattern, type of explosives, blasting
accessories and procedures proposed to be adopted by him. All modifications required in any
of these respects shall be intimated to the Owner and approval obtained. The excavation work
shall have to be carried out so as not to damage in any manner, the concrete lining of tunnel
and the remaining rock itself. For this purpose strict rules for monitoring blasting operations are
set out, which have direct bearing on the permissible quantity of charge for delay and
consequent on the rate of progress. The particle velocity shall not exceed where concrete work
is also under progress.
TABLE
PERMISSIBLE PARTICLE VELOCITY AT CONCRETE LOCATION.
Age of concrete Hours Maximum particle velocity (cm/s)

8 - 24 0.25
24 - 36 ` 0.50
36 - 48 1.00
48 - 60 1.75
60 - 72 3.00
More than 72 5.00
For safe charges for different types of rocks, for safety of structures located nearby, IS.
6922 – 1973 criteria for safety and design of structure subject underground blast shall also be
applicable with various regulation and requirements described therein.
12.1.18 VENTILATION OF TUNNEL
The contractor shall furnish and install in each one of underground work fronts of the
tunnel, a ventilation system which will be maintained in operation during the time the work is
being executed. The ventilation equipment and ducts shall be of good quality so that a
continuous services is guaranteed, have an adequate capacity and be firmly fixed and
sufficiently strong to wish stand the work pressures. The tail end of the ventilation duct shall
be taken to a place as close to the heading as allowed by the blasting. Thereafter, for supplying
fresh air at the face for effective and quick clearance of blasting fumes, gasses, a flexible
extension pipe shall be used.
The contractor shall submit for the approval of the Owner all ventilation drawings and
general layout indicating number of fans and their capacity before initiating any underground
work. The contractor shall not work without this approval which however does not relieve him
from his obligation to provide sufficient fresh air for underground work. If during the execution
of the work, it is found, in the opinion of Owner, that the capacity of the ventilation system is
inadequate for the good health of the workers and for removing the blasting fumes gases as
prescribed below, the Owner may order the contractor to install additional fans and take all
necessary measures to obtain the desired results. Adequate arrangements shall be made to
circulate as much quantity of air up to the site of blasting as to ensure that after every round of
blast, contents of carbon Monoxide (C0) and oxides of nitrogen in the blasting fumes shall not
exceed 50 PPM and 5PPM respectively with in a period of 5 minutes. It shall be ensured that
every place where persons are required to work or pass, the air does not contain less than
19.5% oxygen or more than 0.5% of carbon dioxide or any other noxious gas present in quantity
likely to affect the health of any persons. The contractor shall have no right to any
compensation or to ask extensions for this reason. The Carbon Monoxide (C0) content and the
percentage of the oxygen in the air shall be measured and checked regularly after half an
hour of each blasting and once between the two consecutive bastings. If the Carbon Monoxide
contents in the air exceeds 50 PPM or the percentage of oxygen in the air is less than
19.5% atany place, the excavation rate shall be reduced as under: If Carbon Monoxide (C0)
content is between 50 and 60 PPM the excavation rate shall be reduced by 10% and if oxygen
content is between 19.5 and 19% the excavation shall also be reduced by 10%. The work shall
be stopped after the CO content exceeds 60 PPM and the percentageof oxygen reduces below
19%. In case of persistent failure to adhere to the standards and requirements laid down above
the Owner shall be free to take either of the flowing two actions at his own option (a) install
and operate at the cost and risk of the contractor, such supplementary ventilation facilities as he
may deem necessary or (b) terminate the contract after giving the due notice. Persistent failure
will also invite action under the relevant laws of the country. The ventilation provided for each
work front shall furnish sufficient fresh air for all the personnel in the tunnel in order to avoid a
concentration of contaminants dangerous for the health and lives of the workers and
supervisors. At least 5 cubic meters/ min/bhp of air should be circulated in the tunnel where
the diesel equipment is in use. In normal approaches/diverges of approximately 10sqmts. Cross
section, which are 50 Mts. Or more in length a suitable auxiliary fan should be provided to
ensure at least 150 cubic meter/minimum ventilation air currents within 4.5 meter of the faces
in normal conditions and 284 cubic meter/minute at the time of blasting and time following
blasting. The minimum amount of fresh air shall be 4.25 cubic meter/minute/person. In
addition, 5 cubic meter of air per minute shall be applied per brake horse power of diesel
equipment. In addition to the above limit, the ventilation systems shall have a minimum capacity
which allowed the withdrawal of all gasses and dust resulting from the blast within a period of
time not more than about 15 to 20 minutes, so that after this time has elapsed, all operations
can be resumed. No person shall be allowed to reenter the place where blasting has been carried
out unless a period of at least 15 to 20 minutes has elapsed from the time of blasting.
Ventilation and exhaust system for the excavation of tunnel shall be of sufficient capacity of
maintain an adequate supply of uncontaminated pure air at all points. The design of ventilation
system shall take into account, factors such as length of heading size of tunnel, amount of
explosives used, frequency of blasting, temperature and humidity and safe limit of endurance for
human being to toxic gasses. The wet bulb temperature in any working place should not exceed
33.5 C and where the wet bulb temperature exceeds 33.5 C arrangement shall have to be made to
ventilate the same with a current of air moving at a speed of not less than one meter per second.
All the ventilating and lighting arrangements specified in this section shall be considered as a
part of the items of under ground excavations by tunneling and no extra payment for this shall
be made.
12.1.19 REGULATIONS AND REQUIREMENT FOR
BLASTINGOPERATIONS
12.1.19.1 GENERAL
In conducting blasting operation, proper precautions shall be taken for protection of
persons, work and property. All the prevailing Govt., laws and rules relating to the designs and
location of magazines, transport and handling of explosives other measures enacted for the
prevention of accidents shall be strictly observed. Warning signs and signals shall be prominently
displayed on all magazines. Similarly proper warning signals hall be given before actual blasting.
Rules for blasting shall be observed rigidly and strictly as per specifications laid down under
“Rules for blasting Operations” given in the following paragraphs and as per rules and
regulations modified from time to time.
12.1.19.2 RULES FOR BLASTING OPERATION.
The contractor shall acquaint himself with all the prevailing laws rules and regulations,
concerning to storing, handling and use of explosives. All such laws, rules and regulations,
etc., which are in vogue from time to time shall be binding upon the contractor.
The provisions described in this paragraph are supplementary to the above laws, rules and
regulations and are applicable except where they conflict with the above mentioned laws, rules
and regulations. Further, the Owner may issue modifications; alternations of new instructions
from time to time. The Contractor shall comply with the same without these bearing made a
cause for any claim.
12.1.19.3 MATERIALS
12.1.19.3.1 All materials such as explosives, detonators, fuses, tamping materials,
exploders/blasting batteries etc., that are proposed to be used in the
blasting operations shall have the prior approval of the Owner.
12.1.19.3.2 Black powder and safe explosives (as commonly used in India) shall be used
wherever possible. In open excavation special gelatine of appropriate strength
or any other explosive proposed to be used and delay detonators (with
sufficient number of delays) as approved by the Owner shall be used for
firing of rounds at tunnel headings changes shall through the standard and
approved exploders. Firing from electric mains shall not be allowed. The
type of explosives and detonators to be used by contractor shall be got
approved by the Owner Pattern of blasting shall also be got approved by
the Owner.
12.1.19.3.3 The use of fuse with only one protective coat is prohibited. The fuse shallbe
sufficiently water resistant so as to remain unaffected when immersed in
water for thirty minutes. The rate of burning of the fuse shall be uniform and
not less than 16 seconds per 10 RM of length with 10% tolerance on either
side. Before use the fuse shall be inspected and the moist, damaged or
broken one shall be discarded. The rate of burning of all new types of fuses or
that have been in stock for long, shall be tested before use.
12.1.19.3.4 The detonators used shall be capable of giving effective blasting of the
explosives. Moist or damaged detonators shall be discarded.
12.1.19.4 PERSONNEL:
a. Excavation by blasting will be permitted only under personal supervision of
competent and licensed persons and trained workmen.
b. All supervisors and workmen in charge of makeup house, storage and blasting work
shall be adequately insured by the Contractor.
c. The storage shall be in charge of a very reliable person, if necessary, cause police
enquiry being made as to his reliability and antecedents. The contractor shall have to produce a
security for the person in charge of explosive, if required by the Owner or by the Civil
Authorities of the District.
d. The contractor shall make sure that his supervisors and workmen are fully
conversant with all the rules to be observed in storing, handling and use of explosives.
It shall be assumed that the supervisor in charge is thoroughly acquainted with all thedetails of
the handling and the blasting operations.
12.1.19.5 STORAGE OF EXPLOSIVES.

All necessary clearances, permissions, licenses and authorities as required
under laws prevailing at the site of work for procurement, transportation,
storage and use of explosives shall be obtained by the bidder at no cost to the
owner and the cost of same is deemed to be included in the bid price.
12.1.19.5.1The explosives, detonators, fuses and any other materials received for
blasting operations shall be procured by the contractor himself and storedin
the magazine constructed by the contractor. No separate payment shall be
made for procurement of explosives and blasting operations. It is deemed
that the cost is included in the excavation requiring blasting operations. The
site of the magazine, its capacity and design shall be subject to approval by
the Owner and by the Inspector of explosives. As a rule, the explosives
shall be stored in a clean, dry well ventilated and fire proof building
isolated site. The explosives and detonators shall be stored separately. No
objection certificate and all licences from the district Magistrate or the
inspector of explosives shall be obtained by the Contractor as required.
12.1.19.5.2A careful and day to day account of the use of explosives shall be kept
by the contractor in an approved manner. The account shall be produced by
the contractor for inspection of the Owner when so required by him.
12.1.19.5.3The Owner may also pay surprise visit to the place of storage of the
explosives, if the account is not found to have been maintained in a manner
prescribed, the contractor shall be liable to be penalized with forfeiture of
Performance Security lodged by him with the Dept., or his tender shall be
liable to be cancelled in which case he shall not be entitled to any
compensation for the losses. The action taken under this clause shall be in
addition to that which be taken by the competent Civil Authorities in the
Court of Law.
12.1.19.5.4 The magazine shall at all times to kept scrupulously clean.
12.1.19.5.5 No unauthorized person shall at any time be admitted inside the magazine.
12.1.19.5.6The magazine shall, when not in use of authorized persons, be
kept welland securely locked.
12.1.19.5.7The magazine shall, on no account, be opened during or on the
approach of a thunder storm and no person shall remain in the vicinity of
the magazine during such period.
12.1.19.5.8Magazine shoes, without nails, shall at all times be kept in the
magazine and a wooden tub or cement trough about 0.3m (one foot) high and
0.46m (one and half feet) in diameter which shall be kept always filled with
water and shall be fixed near the door of the magazine. Persons entering the
magazine must put on the magazine shoes which shall be provided by the
contractor for the purpose and they are further instructed as below:
12.1.19.5.9 Not to put their feet on the clean floor unless they have the
magazine shoes on.
ii. Not to allow the magazine shoes to touch the ground outside the clean
floor and.
iii. Not to allow any dirt or grit to fall on the clean floor.
i. The magazine shall, when not in use of authorized persons, be kept well and
securely locked.
j. Persons with bare feet shall, before entering the magazine, dip their feet in water and
then step direct from the through over barrier (if there be one) on the clean flood.
k. A brush or broom shall be kept in the lobby of the magazine for cleaning out the
magazine on each occasion it is opened for the receipt, delivery or inspection of
explosives.
l. No matches or inflammable materials shall be allowed in the magazine. Light shall
be obtained from an electric storage battery lantern.
m. No persons having articles of steel or iron on him shall be allowed to enter
the magazine.
n. Cotton rags, waste and articles liable to spontaneous ignition shall not be allowed
inside the magazine.
o. Workmen shall be examined before they enter the magazine, to see that the have
none of prohibited articles on their body.
p. No tools or implements other than those of copper, brass, gun metal or wood shall
be allowed inside the magazine. All tools shall be sued with extreme gentleness
and care.
q. Boxes of explosives shall not be thrown down or dragged along the floor. These
shall be stacked on wooden trestles. Where, there are white ants, the legs of the
trestles should rest in shallow copper, lead or brass bowls containing water. Open
boxes of dynamic shall never be exposed to the direct rays of the sun.
r. Empty boxes or loose packed materials shall not be kept inside the magazine.
s. The magazine shall have a lighting conductor which shall be got tested at least once
a year by an officer authorized by the Owner. The contractor shall within 15 days
comply with all the recommendations made by the officer testing the lightning
conductor failing which the Owner shall be entitled to rectify the same at the
contractor‟s expenses.
t. A notice shall be hung near the store prohibiting entrace of unauthorized persons.
u. The following shall be hung in the lobby of the magazine.
i. A copy of rules both in English and in the languages which the workers are
familiar with;
ii. A statement showing the up-to-date stock in the magazine.
iii. A certificate showing the last date of testing of the lightning conductor and
iv. A notice that smoking is strictly prohibited.
v. The magazine will be inspected atleast twice a year by an officer
representing the Owner who will be that all the rules are strictly complied
with. He will notify all omissions to the Contractor, who shall rectify the
defects within a period of 15 days from the date of receipt of the notice
failing which the Owner may take whatever action considered suitable.
12.1.19.6 USE OF EXPLOSIVES.
a. For transport of the explosives and detonators between the store and the site,
closed and strong container made of soft materials such as timber, zinc, copper,
leather and the like shall be used.
b. Explosives and detonators shall be carried in separate boxes and transported
separately. For the convenience of primer special container shall be used. No
blasting which may, disturb or endanger the stability, safety or quality of
foundation shall be permitted. Light blasting with in
15 metres (50feet) and heavy blasting within 30 metres 9100ft) of masonry or
concrete work for a permanent structure shall be not permitted. Progressive
blasting shall be limited to two third of the total remaining depth of excavation.
No large scale blasting operation shall be resorted to when the foundation
excavation reaches last 0.6m to 1m. the final profile. Only small charges,
preferably with use of black powder, may be allowed so as to prevent
shattering of the foundation.
c. The boxes and container used shall be kept well closed.
d. Explosive shall be stored and used chronologically to ensure the one, received
earlier, being used first.
e. A make up house shall be provided at each working place in which cartridge as
required will be made by experienced men. The make up house shall be separated
from other buildings. Only electric storage battery lamps shall be in this house.
f. No smoking shall be allowed in the make up house.
12.1.19.7 DISPOSAL OF DETERIORATED EXPLOSIVES.
The deteriorated explosives shall be disposed off in presence of Owner or his representative
in an approved manner. The quantity of the deteriorated explosives tobe disposed off shall be
intimated to the Owner. Prior to their disposal. No refund/ adjustment shall be allowed to the
contractors for such deteriorated explosives.
12.1.19.8. PREPARATION OF PRIMER.
Primer shall not be prepared near open flames to fires. The work of the preparation of
primer shall always be entrusted to experienced personnel. Primer shall be used as soon as
possible after it is ready.
12.1.19.9 CHARGING OF HOLES
a. The work of charging shall not commence before the drilling work at the site for the
skirt is completed.
b. The Owner has to satisfy himself to that aspect by actual inspection. While charging,
open lamps shall be kept away. Charging with powdered explosives, naked flames shall
not be allowed.
c. Only wooden tamping rods, without any kind of metal on them shall be allowed to be
used.
d. Only one cartage shall be inserted at a time gently pressed into hole with the tamping
rod. Sand, clay or other tamping material used for filling the holes completely shall not
be tamped too hard.
e. Bore holes must be of such size that the cartridge can easily pass down through them.
12.1.19.10 BLASTING WHEN RESORTED TO
A. Blasting in the open cut excavation shall be carried out during fixed hours of the
day, which shall have the prior approval of the Owner. The hours once fixed shall
not be altered without prior written approval of the Owner.
B. The site of blasting operations in the open cut excavation shall be prominently
demarcated by red danger flag. The order to fire shall be given only after giving
warning signal three times, so as to enable the laborers and other personnel to reach safe
shelter and after ascertaining that nobody is within the danger zone.
C. A bugle with a distinct sound shall be used to give the warning signals. The bugle shall
not be used for any other purpose. The laborers shall be made acquainted with the sound
of the bugle and shall be warned strictly to leave their work immediately as the first
warning signal and to make themselves safe under shelters and not to leave the shelters
until clear signal is given.
D. All the roads and footpaths leading to the blasting area shall be watched.
E. In special cases, the Owner may, however permit blasting beyond fixed hoarse provided
he is satisfied that proper precautions are taken to give sufficient warning to all
concerned and that the work of other agencies on the site is not unduly hampered. In
such cases suitable extra precautions shall be taken.
F. For lighting the fuses, a lamp with a strong flame, such as a carbide lamp, shall be used.
G. The supervisor shall watch the time required for the firing of the fuses and shall see
that all the workmen are under safe shelter in good time.
In special cases extra precautions shall be taken. In respect of blasting of tunnel headings
in the underground excavation the Owner shall permit blasting without restriction of fixed time,
provided that he is satisfied that proper precautions are taken including giving sufficient warning
to all concerned and that the work of other agencies on the site is not hampered. The use of
special gelatin / other explosives and delay detonators to be used in tunnel blasting shall be got
approved from the Owner. Firing of the circuit / circuits shall be through a blasting battery and
electric main. Exploder shall not be used.
12.1.09.11 ELECTRICAL FIRING.
a. Only the Supervisor-in-charge shall keep the key of the firing apparatusand he
shall keep it always with himself.
b. Special apparatus shall be used as a source of current for the blasting operations.
Power lines shall not be tapped for the purpose.
c. All the detonators shall be checked before used.
d. For blasts in one series, only detonators of the same manufacture and of the
same group of electrical resistance shall be used.
e. Such of the electrical lines, as could constitute danger for work of charging,
shall be removed from the site.
f. The firing cable shall have proper insulating cover so as to avoid short
circuiting due to contact with water, metallic parts or rock.
g. Use of the earth as a return line shall not be permitted.
h. The firing cable shall be connected to the source of current only after ascertaining
that nobody is in area of blasting.
i. Before firing, the circuits shall be checked by a suitable apparatus.
j. After firing, whether with or without actual blast, the contact between the firing
cable and the source of current shall be cut off before the persons are allowed to
leave the shelter.
k. During storms charging with electrical detonators shall be suspended. The charges
already placed into the holes shall be blasted as quickly as possible after taking all
the safety precautions and giving necessary warning signals. If this is not possible
the site shall be abandoned till the storm has passed.
12.1.19.11PRECAUTIONS AFTER BLASTING.
l. After the blast, the supervisor shall inspect the work carefully and satisfy himself
that all the charges have exploded.
m. After the blast had taken place in underground works. The workmen shall not be
allowed to go to the place till the toxic gases get evacuated from the place.
12.1.19.12 MISFIRES
a. If it is suspected that a part of the blast has failed to fire or is delayed, sufficient time
shall be allowed to elapse before entering, the danger zone. When fuses and blasting
caps are used, a safe time should be allowed and then the supervisor alone shall
leave shelter to see the misfire.
b. Drilling near the hole that has misfired shall not be permitted until one of the two
following operations are carried out by the Supervisor.
i. The Supervisor should very carefully (when the temping is of damp clay) extract the
tamping with a wooden scraper or jet of water or compressed air (using pipe of
soft materials), and withdraw the fuse with the primer and detonator attached. A
fresh primer and detonator with fuse shall thenbe placed in this hole and fired.
ii. The supervisor shall get some of the tamping cleared off and indicate the direction
by placing a stick in the hole. Another hole may then be drilled at least 23cm(9”)
away and parallel to it. This hole should then be charged and fired. The balance
of the cartridges and detonators found in muck shall be removed.
c. Before leaving the work, the supervisor should inform the supervisor of the relieving
shift, of any case of misfire and shall point out the position with a red cross
denoting the same and also state that action, if any he has takenin the matter.
d. The supervisor shall at once report to the office all cases of misfire the cause of
misfire and the steps taken in connection there with.
e. The name of the supervisor-in-Charge of day and night shifts must be noted daily.
f. If a misfire has been found to be due to defective detonators or dynamite the
whole quantity in the box from which the defective materials were taken shall be
returned to the authority as may be directed by the Owner for inspection to
ascertain whether the whole box contains defective materials.
g. Redrilling the hole that has misfired either wholly or partly shall not be permitted.
Any damage to Govt. property, structure or personnel in the process shall be to the
account of the contractor.
12.1.20 DISPOSAL OF THE MUCKED MATERIAL TO DUMPING

ZONES.
The blasted muck shall be deposited at the sites specified for dumping areas as shown in the
drawings in a ecofriendly manner Muck dumped shall be properly leveled and Two
walls/gabions provided (wherever necessary) to prevent sliding of muck specially during rainy
season. Revolts in dumping areas shown on drawing or directed by the Owner shall not be
blocked and natural water courses in hill slopes shall not be disturbed. No separate payment
will be made for disposal of muck to dumping zones and shall be deemed to have been included
in the rates tendered for excavation item of tunnel.
12.2 SHOTCRETING ROCKBOLTING & APPROACH AND EXIT CHANNEL

LINING
12.2.09 GENERAL
The Section covers specification, for shotcreting, reinforcement fabric and for rock
bolting and approach and exit channel lining.
12.2.10 CLASSIFICATION
The items covered under these specifications are as under: Providing 75mm thick shotcrete
lining for tunnel portion and 100mm thick shotcrete lining for the inclined faces of inlet and
outlet of tunnel, of cement concrete as per mix design, including suitable approved additive and
cost of all materials, scaffolding, batching, mixing, transporting, laying and curing including all
lifts and leads.
Providing and installing steel reinforcement fabric including all accessories Providing and
installing 25 mm diameter rock bolts with all accessories, including
drilling grouting with cement grout approach and exit channel lining for approach
approach and exit channel.
12.2.11 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
All methods and procedures for providing shotcreting, providing and installingreinforcement
fabric and rock bolts shall conform to India Standard specifications and other publication listed
below unless otherwise specified.
12.2.11.11 Indian Standards
IS 8112 : 1989 Specification for 43 grade ordinary port land
cement.(First Revision).
IS 1566 : 1982 Specification for hard drawn steel wire fabric for
concrete reinforcement.
IS 1570 (Part-I):1978 Steel specified by tensile and/or yield properties.IS
9012: 1978 Recommended practice for shotcreting.
12.2.12 SHOTCRETING
The Contractor shall apply shotcrete to excavated surfaces were shown on the drawings
and/or as directed by the geologist/Owner. For purposes of these specifications, shotcrete is
defined as concrete or mortar, with or without admixtures, pneumatically applied at a pressure of
5.5.6 Kgs./Cm2 on to a prepared surface. Except as otherwise specified, shotcrete shall be
applied in accordance with the requirements of IS 9012 : 1978 “Recommended practice for
Shotcreting.
12.2.13 MATERIALS:
Cement – The cement used shall be conforming to the specification laid down inIS 8112
: 1989
Water – Water to be used for shotcreting shall conform to requirement given in IS456 :
1978.
Aggregates
Sand for shotcrete shall comply with the requirements given in IS:383: 1970* and graded evenly
from fine to coarse as per Zone II and Zone III grading of IS 383:1970*. Sand failing to satisfy
this grading may, however, be used if reconstruction testing (see 6) establishes that it gives
good results. Further, sand for finish or flash coats may be finer than the above grading.
However, the use of finer sands will generally result in greater drying shrinkage, and coarse
sands, in more rebound.
Coarse Aggregate – Coarse aggregates when used shall comply with the requirement of IS
:383 – 1970*. It shall, generally conform to one of the gradings given in Table 1. The maximum
size of coarse aggregate to be used shall be restricted to 12.5 mm.
TABLE 1 GRADING OF COARSE AGGREGATES

IS Sieve Percentage by Mass Passing For Aggregate of
Designation Nominal Maximum Size 10mm
12.5mm
(1) (2) (3)
mm
25 - -
20 - 100
12.5 100 90-100
10 85-100 40-70
4.75 10-30 0-15
2.36 0-10 0-5
1.18 0-5 -
All oversize pieces shall be rejected by screening, since they are likely to cause plugging of
the hose.
Admixtures: Admixtures shall be in accordance with the requirements of IS 9103: 1979 and as
approved by the Owner. The proportion of admixture (as percentage of cement) shall be
approved by the Owner.
The relating proportions of fine aggregate, coarse aggregate cement, admixture and
moisture content of the ingredients when mixed shall be as approved by the Owner Fine and
coarse aggregate shall be mixed thoroughly in an approved mixer and fed with cement and
admixture‟s if used, in the correct proportion to achieve the required proportions and shall so
enter the shotcrete machine so as to achieve proper mixing.
The cement to be used for shotcrete shall be weighed first before mixing with the coarse and
fine aggregate. Every time the batch of concrete for shotcrete shall be prepared for 50 Kgs. of
cement or multiple thereof. The contractor shall use weighting equipment to the accuracy of
0.1 Kg. to measure weight of cement added in each batch.
Mixed dry aggregate and cement, which do not contain a set accelerating admixture and
which are not placed within 30 minutes after mixing, shall be discarded. Mixed dry
ingredients, which contain a set accelerating admixture shall be discarded if they are not placed
within the time as determined by the Owner depending on the moisture content of the mix
and the amount of admixture. Payment shall not be made for such discarded materials. For this
purpose, the Department will maintain a separate record of discarded batches and cement
consumed in the batch and contractor or his representative will be required to sign this record
every day in token of his acceptance.
12.2.13.11 PROPORTIONING:
The ingredients of the mix for short crete & strength criteria shall be as follows
12.2.13.11.1 Aggregates shall be well graded to achieve good pumpability through the
spraying nozzle of shotcreting machine and the maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be limited to 12.5mm. generally the mix design shall
constitute 1 Part cement, 1 part sand (of fineness modulus) of 2:4 and above
and 2 parts of well graded aggregate however the mix proportions may vary
as required by the Owner.
12.2.13.11.2 Shotcrete mix design shall ensure 28 days compressive strength of over
25 Pma (250 kg/Cm2)
12.2.13.11.3 Water cement ratio for shotcrete in place shall be in the range of 0.35 to
0.40 by mass or as per design mix. The water content of the mix shall be limited to
prevent sloughing
12.2.13.11.4 mix design of shotcrete proposed to be deployed at selected locations, to
be specified by the Owner, shall broadly/approximately conform to the
following compressive strength requirements in the age range of 1 hour to 24
hours, 7 days and 28 days or as shown on drawings/approved by Owner.
Age Compressive Strength of Shotcrete
1 hour ........................................................0.2 MPa
2 hours….. 0.50 - 0.75 MPa
8 hours….. 4.00 - 4.50 MPa
12 hours…… 5.00 - MPa
24 hours…… 10.00 - 11.00 MPa
72 hours…. 12.00 - 12.50 MPa
7 days…… 17.00 - 17.50 MPa
28 days…. + 25 MPa
The cement to be used for shotcrete shall be weighed first before mixing with the coarse and
fine aggregate. Every time the batch of concrete for shotcrete shall be prepared for 50 Kgs. of
cement or multiple there of. The contractor shall use weighing equipment to the accuracy of 0.1
kg. to measure weight of cement added in each batch.
Mixed dry aggregate and cement, which do not contain a set accelerating admixture and
which are not placed with in 30 minutes after mixing, shall be discarded. Mixed dry
ingredients, which contain a set accelerating admixture shall be discarded if they are not placed
within the time as determined by the Owner depending on the moisture content of the mix
and the amount of admixture. Payment shall not be made for such discarded materials. For this
purpose the Department will maintain a separate record of discarded batches and cement
consumed in that batch and contractor or his representative will be required to sign this record
every day in token of his acceptance.
Mix proportions shall be varied. When required by the Owner, to obtain required strength of
shotcrete; maintain rebound to the minimum,; and to meet any other requirement.
12.2.3 Equipment and Workmanship.
Not less than 30 days prior to applying any shotcrete, the contractor shall submit drawings for
approval showing his proposed plant arrangements together with a general description of the
equipments proposed to use, the methods of operations and the mix proportions and admixtures;
Manual mixing of ingredients shall not be allowed. The contractor shall employ only skilled
nozzle man and, before being permitted to perform any production and application of shotcrete,
each nozzle man shall demonstrate to the Owner his ability to apply shotcrete to the required
standard, including regulation of the water cement ratio. Air and water shall be provided in such
volume and under such pressure as may be necessary for the best operating conditions. In
applying shotcrete, the discharge nozzle shall be held in such a way that the stream of material
shall impinge as nearly as possible at the optimum angle to the surface for minimum rebound,
and the Velocity of the discharge from the nozzle. The distance of the nozzle from the surface
and the amount of water used in the mix shall be regulated so as to produce a coating with a
minimum rebound of the material, with no sagging. Obstructions, such as service lines, shall be
removed to enable direct application of shotcrete to the surfaces. Rebounded material shall not
be used again, but shall be removed from the work and disposed off by the contractor as part of
the work under this section. The contractor‟s personnel working as nozzle man shall take utmost
care to apply shotcrete lining in correct manner to keep the percentage of
rebound materials to minimum. Any suggestion of Owner in this regard shall be attended by the
contractor without claiming any extra cost from the Department. During application of
shotcrete the contractor shall provide adequate ventilation facilities and take such other
measures as are necessary for safety of his workmen including provision of face protection for
nozzle men.
12.2.4 ADMIXTURES
Where the use of a admixture is required in order to apply successful shotcrete or to
maintain safe conditions, the type and amount of admixture used in a shotcrete shall be as
The chemical admixtures proposed to be used in the shotcrete mix to develop quick set
and high early strength shall be got approved from the Owner. In addition, the proportion of
addition of admixture shall be determined through laboratory trials, duly approved by the Owner.
The admixture shall have proven compatibility with the cement make and type to ensure the
needed initial and final setting time. The contractor shall conduct necessary tests to conform
compatibility.
12.2.4.1 PREPARATIONS
The locations where shotcrete is to be used shall be as shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Owner. Depending on the condition of the rock being treated, any one or more
of the following types of treatment may be directed;
12.2.4.1.1 Shotcrete without steel reinforcing fabric support and/ or
12.2.4.1.2 Shortcrete with steel reinforcing fabric support “Steel
reinforcement fabric” shall be securely fastened with surface
anchor and supported with approved spacers to provide 75 mm
clearance between reinforcement and rock surface.
In addition to surface anchors reinforcement shall be securely anchored to rock, with
rock bolts wherever necessary.
Surface anchors are defined as devices used for fastening reinforcement which do not
penetrate in to rock to a depth greater than 650 mm and include nails, staples and embedded wire
ties and masonry anchors. The reinforcement mesh when provided shall be completely
embedded by shotcrete lining. Wherever shotcrete is to be provided, the Contractor shall clean
and prepare the surface to receive the shorcrete lining. Loose or shattered rock, rock debris,
soil or other loose materials, mass etc., shall be removed from the surfaces. Materials in seams
shall be cut back to a depth as directed by the Owner to provide a key. After loose material has
been, removed, the surface shall be washed, where required, with a strong air water ject or by
other meansas approved by the Owner.
12.2.4.2 APPLICATION.
Shotcrete would need to be applied shortly after blasting and scaling of the tunnel heading.
12.2.4.3 Deleted.
12.2.4.4 MAKING TEST PANELS;
12.2.4.4.1 At least 30 days prior to the placing of any shot crete in the works, the Contractor shall
undertake preparation of the trial mixes, in the presence of Owner or his representatives
using the methods described below;
12.2.4.4.2 The Contractor shall prepare three test panels of minimum size 75cmx75cm
and 80mm thick, for each mix design and for each type of plant. They shall besprayed
from each position required in the works, one downhand, one horizontal and one
overhead with a layer thickness appropriate to that position and with reinforcement as
directed by the Owner. Panel moulds shall be formed from play wood, at least 20mm
thick, be adequately braced and held rigidly in position.
12.2.4.4.3 For the purpose of routine quality control during the execution of Work,
control test panels of the same size for the trial mix testing shall be sprayed. For the
first 50 M3 of shotcrete applied in each underground excavation heading, one test panel
shall be prepared. Further, the test panels will be limited to one per nozzle man per
work or one per 100 M3 of material as directed by the Owner. The test panels shall be
constructed along side the area of placement and at the same angle and shall be sprayed
by each nozzle man in rotation so that the test shall represent the quality of the
shotcrete being placed by each nozzle man. The test panels shall be stored and cured
along side and under similar conditions to the shotcrete placed in the works.
12.2.4.4.4 The pressure at which the shotcrete shall be applied to the test panels shall be
the same as will be used in actual work at the place of application.
12.2.4.4.5 Shortcrete from both the trial mix and the routine quality control test
panelsshall be tested by the Owner. as described here under.
12.2.4.5 TESTING FOR COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH:
12.2.4.5.1 Four, 50 mm diameter cores shall be cut by the Contractor from each test
panel at right angles to the plane of the panel approximately forty eight hours after the
panel has been sprayed. Cores shall be not taken within 10 cum of the edges of the
panel.
12.2.4.5.2 First core shall be compression tested at 7 days, second core at 28 days, and
the remaining two cores at 90 days. The core capping and testing will be carried out by
the contractor in a laboratory in presence of the engineer-in- chage.
12.2.4.5.3 The cores shall be stored, cured and tested in accordance with relevant
standards. All cores shall be suitably labeled to identify them with the panels form
which they have been taken, and the location in the works to which they relate.
12.2.4.5.4 the appropriates compressive strength requirement for each set of two, 28
days cores, shall be satisfied if:
12.2.4.5.4.1 Each core has a compressive strength equal to or greater than thatspecified; or
12.2.4.5.4.2 The average compressive strength of the two cores in equal to or greater than
that specified and the difference between the strength is less than 20% of the
average.
12.2.4.5.4.3 In case any of the cores reveal defects such as lack of compaction, dry patches,
voids or sand pockets, the Owner may require further cores to be taken from the
remainder of the panel(s) or he may reject the procedure used to make the defective
test panel and require that a replacement test panel be made with a modified
procedure.
12.2.4.6 CONDUCTING OTHER ROUTINE TESTS DURING THE WORKS

i. When directed, and at specified locations selected by the Owner, the Contractor shall
make 25 mm diameter probe holes to determine the thickness of the shotcrete.
ii. When directed, and at locations indicated by the Owner the Contractor shall cut sets
of 50 mm diameter cores from the finished shotcrete, which shall be tested by the
Owner using the same procedure as for cores taken from the test panel.
iii. Core holes shall be filled by hand with well remmed dry-pack mortar of a similar mix
to that used for shotcrete.
iv. Where directed by the Owner, the compressive strength of the shotcrete shall be
assessed by non-destructive testing using the “Schmidt concrete Test Hammer”,
calibrated by reference readings taken on the shotcrete at locations where cores
are to be taken. At least ten readings shall be taken for each strength assignment.
v. Soundness shall be tested by hand hammer. A hollow response indicates a possible
lack of bond or other defect.
vi. The measurement of in-situ penetration resistance shall be carried out by using a
spring-loaded penetrometer or similar suitable equipment.
vii. During the progress of the work, the Contractor under supervision of the Owner, shall
perform tests for the determination of rebound volume. The Owner will determine the
number of such tests as needed to obtain reliable results.
12.2.4.7 ROFICIENCY OF WORKMEN
12.2.4.7.1 Nozzle man shall have had sufficient previous experience in
the application of coarse aggregate shotcrete or shall work
under the immediate supervision of a foreman or instructor
having such experience.
12.2.4.7.2 Each crew shall demonstrate acceptable proficiency in the
application of shotcrete to test panels, as set out in para (I)
hereof, before beginning production work.
12.2.4.8 SAFETY MEASURES.
12.2.4.8.1 Alkali hydroxides and other chemicals contained in shotcrete admixtures are
moderately toxic and can cause skin and respiratory irritation unless adequate
safety measures are taken. In applying shotcrete containing toxic admixtures, the
nozzle men and helpers shall wear appropriate hoods to protect them against toxic or
objectionable material.
12.2.4.8.2 Gloves and necessary protective clotting shall be worn to protect against
dermatitis.
12.2.4.9 CURING
Shortcrete cured with water, shall be kept continuously wet at least for 21 days immediately
following placement.
12.2.4.10. SAFETY OF WORKS
Application of shotcrete, as temporary or permanent support, shall not be considered as
relieving the contractor of his responsibility to maintain all portions of the works in a safe
condition.
12.2.4.11 REPAIRS.
Areas of shotcrete, below strength or otherwise defective as determined by the Owner, shall
be removed and repaired within 7 days of the Owner informing the contractor that such repairs
are required.
12.2.5. REINFORCEMENT FABRIC
1. Welded wire mesh shall conform to the requirement of IS:1566 – 1982. The fabric shall have
a square mesh of 100 mm spacing made of wires having a yield strength not less than 275
N per sq. mm, and of 4mm diameter or as shown on the drawings.
2. Where possible, the welded wire mesh shall be placed at the same time as rock bolts
are installed. It shall not be placed between the rock surface and bearing plates of rock
bolts but shall be placed over the heads of rock bolts and fastenedthem by separate plates
and nuts. Sufficient intermediate mesh anchors, or ifdirected by the Owner, additional rock
bolts shall be placed to ensure that the mesh is drawn close to the excavated surface so that
when shotcrete is applied subsequently, them mesh neither sags nor vibrates excessively and
impairs theeffectiveness of the shotcrete.
3. In case the welded wire mesh is placed at such locations where rock bolts have not been
provided, wire mesh anchors of a type acceptable to the Owner shall be used to secure the
edges of wire mesh tight to the rock surface to provide anchorage at overlaps and to provide
intermediate support. The wire mesh anchors shall have a length of 650 mm.
4. The use of wooden pegs for fastening the wire mesh to the rock surface will not be
permitted.
5. Welded wire mesh shall be firmly stretched between the rock bolts. Care shall be taken to
ensure that air pockets are not formed behind the wire mesh when used as reinforcement for
shotcrete.
6. Overlaps in the wire mesh shall not be less than 300mm.
7. The installation of chain link fabric as reinforcement of shotcrete shall be permitted only
when the excavated surface is so uneven and rough that placing of welded wire mesh fabric
is impractical. Chain link fabic shall conform to the requirements of IS 2140 : 1986 for
galvanised steel chain link fence fabric. The fabric shall have a mesh size of approximately
50mm x 50mm and a wire diametre of 3mm or as shown on the drawings. Installation of
Chain link fabric will be subject to approval by the Owner.
12.2.6ROCK BOLTS:
12.2.6.1 SCOPE OF WORK:
The work includes furnishing the wedge type rock bolts of the mild steel conforming to
I.S.1570 (PART-I): 1978 or latest edition with all accessories such as steel wedge, bearing
plate, hexagonal nut, bevel washer, grout tube, group seal, plug cement and aluminum powder
for grout, rust preventive compound lubricant and other materials required for installation of the
tensioned grouted rock bolts.
The work shall also include furnishing all tools and plants, scaffolding, labour and materials
required for installing rock bolts, at the roof of tunnel and in the benching portion of hill slopes
at both faces of entrance and exit of tunnel
12.2.6.2. MATERIALS:
ROCK BOLTS:
The rock bolts shall be 25mm diameter mild steel deformed bar slotted at the one end and
threaded at the other end as shown in the drawings. The length of the rock bolts and pattern in
which the rock bolts shall be installed shall be as shown in the drawings or as other wise
prescribed by the Owner. Rock bolt shall have a tensile strength of 410 MPa and minimum yield
strength of 250 PM (26kgs/mm2) and minimum elongation of 23 percent and they shall be
threaded. All nuts for the rock bolts shall be of heavy duty hexagonal, double chamfered
conforming to “Black hexagon bolts, nuts and lock nuts and black hexagon screw” IS 1363-
1967 or its subsequent revision. Threads of the rock bolts and all surfaces of nuts shall be coated
with a heavy coat of gasoline-soluble rust preventive compound. Such rock bolts shall be
commercially straight, sound and free from harmful surface defects.
The contractor shall conduct full-scale tests to destruction of such rock bolts as the Owner
may order from time to time. The purpose of these tests shall be to check the effectiveness of the
various installations and installation methods. All the costs ofperforming such test shall be borne
by the contractor but the cost of the rock bolt so destroyed shall be measured for payment. Where
the installations fail at load less than the specified ultimate loads and the cause of such failure is
not due to poor ground conditions the contractor shall at his own expense replace, repair or make
good such defective units and such other defective units of which the test may be
representative.
Intensified testing shall be required whenever systems, materials or methods are to be
employed on site by the contractor for the first time. Regular 150mm cube strength tests shall be
conducted on grout mixes used in underground support.
Where additives are added to grout mixes or mixes for pneumatically applied concrete these
shall be tested weekly to assure that the desired properties are imparted to the grout or concrete
and to ensure that none of the other properties are being affected detrimentally. Whenever a
new batch or consignment of additives is intended for use in the works this shall first be tested
prior to use.
Steel wedges
The steel wedges shall be made of steel conforming to “structural steel (standard quality)” IS
2063:1992 or its subsequent revision. The size of steel wedge shall be about 10mm x 19mm x
140mm.
Washers
The bevel washers shall be made of steel conforming to “Structural steel (standard quality)”
IS 2062:1992 or from malleable iron confirming to “Black hearth mealleable iron casting
“IS2108-1962 or its subsequent revision. The machine washers shall be made of hardened steel.
Bearing plates
Flat steel square bearing plates shall be 200mm x 200mm x 10mm size and conforming to
“Structural steel (standard quality)” IS 2062: 1992 or its subsequent revision. For the purpose of
grouting the flat steel bearing plates shall have separate holes for the grout tubes.
Cement
Cement for grout shall be ordinary port land cement conforming to “Ordinary and low heat
port land cement” IS 8112-1989 or its subsequent revision except that the average fineness value
of the cement shall not be less than 4,500 square centimeters per gram.
Lubricant and rust preventive compound shall be as approved by the Owner.
12.2.6.3 INSTALLATION OF ROCK BOLTS IN TUNNEL, AND IN BENCHING
PORTION OF HILL SLOPES AT BOTH FACES OF ENTRANCE AND EXIT OF
TUNNEL.
12.2.6.3.1 The Contractor shall submit for the approval of the Owner the
installation methods for bolts, including details of the drilling equipment, as well as
details about fastening and insertion of bolts. The drilling equipment shall be such as to
allow the correct alignment and uniformity of the diameter in the drill hole, in order
to guarantee the lateral support of the expansion capsule against the rock.
12.2.6.3.2 Rock bolt to be used shall be installed as soon as possible after
each blasting. However, the rock bolts shall be completely installed and tightened within
a approved time lapse after the blast and shall cover all the exposed rock surface
within a maximum distance of 1.0 to 1.5 metres from the excavation front or heading.
The Contractor shall be well prepared to perform such work and the equipment
used forthat work shall allow the Contractor to insert rock bolts up to the face with the
necessary speed and accuracy and, if possible, without removing the recently
excavated material to install them. In case the rock bolts are inserted, as directed by
the Owner too close to the work front and rock bolts are affected by the blasting, new
rock bolts shall be installed near affected rock bolts if ordered by the Owner which
shall be paid at the accepted rate for the item of rock bolt.
12.2.6.3.3 The diameter and depths of drilled holes and the method of cleaning
the same for rock bolts shall be such as will promote effective anchoring and grouting
of the rock bolts and ensure that the inner end of the rock bolts does not protrude closer
than 50mm from the final lining face or beyond the minimum excavation line by more
than 70mm in the case of unlined excavation or excavations receiving a nominal
shotcrete lining.
12.2.6.3.4 Once the drilling is completed, the bore holes shall be cleaned by
means of water and air under pressure in order to remove shall particles of rock or dust
remaining in it, so that the hole is perfectly cleaned before the insertion of the rock
bolt.
12.2.6.3.5 Holes for rock bolts shall generally be drilled normal to the, minimum excavation
line unless other wise shown on the drawings or ordered by the Owner. Each hole shall be
drilled at 4m interval in staggered position or as directed by the Owner. The actual position of
the rock bolts shall be chosen such that the shank is not bent or stressed due to excessive
inclination between the rock face and the shank. The direction of bolts shall be modified to suit
the rock joining pattern as observed at site on excavation as per the instructions of the Owner
and rock bolt spacing shall be adjusted suitably for local pockets depending on joint spacing
and pattern.
12.2.6.3.6 Once the bolt has been introduced into the bore hole, The wedge shall be adjusted
against the end of the hole and by applying tension of 5 tones, by means of hydraulic tensioner
or by an approved torque wrench. For reliability of results of tensioning, the Contractor shall
carry out frequent recalibration of hydraulic tensioner land torque wrench. After anchoring the
bolt, it shall withstand, without displacement, a maximum tensile stress equivalent to the
elastic limit or the rock material.
12.2.6.3.7 The Contractor shall install all the rock bolts that shall be required in roof of
tunnel and in the benching portion of hill slopes at both faces of entrance and exitof tunnel.
As soon as practicable after exposure of rock surface to be supported and shall be installed
immediately following 75mm thick shotcreting and prior to blasting the next round. All bolts
within 10m. of blasting operation shall be checked within a time as directed by the Engineer and
retightened.
12.2.6.3.8 Prior to installing the rock bolts, the rust preventive compound shall be thoroughly
removed from the bolts and nuts and they shall be cleaned with minerals spirits and all threads
of the rock bolts shall be free of rust and buns.
“The rock bolts, nut, plates, washers etc., shall be painted with approved anticorrosive
compound, having good bonding properties with cement grout and shotcrete:.
12.2.6.3.9 The method of installation of the rock bolts to effectively seat and tighten the rock
bolt anchorage in the hole and the required tension to be applied to each bolt shall be subject to
the approval of the Owner.
12.2.6.3.10 Bolts to be grouted, shall have the grouting tube attached. The Contractor shall
supply plastic piping in rolls. He shall cut and attach them to the bolts with adhesive tape or
another approved method. Prior to tightening the bolts to be grouted, the opening of the hole
shall be filled with a sealing material. The Contractor shall provide and install such material
previously approved by the Owner.
12.2.6.3.11. The bolts shall be installed with the steel bearing plates against the first shotcrete
layer. These plates will be provided with necessary holes, through which the bolts, and grout
tubes will pass. In 130mm thick shotcreting portions, welded wire mesh must be placed well
adapted to the first shotcrete layer and passed through protruding end of bolts, prior to insertion
of bearing plates. Before placing the nut it may be convenient to insert some level washers or
even to place wedges between the plates and the shotcrete later in order to obtain full bearing.
Immediately before placing the nut a hardened steel washer with anticorrosive liquid shall be
put. Before the bolts are inserted All the threads shall be completely cleaned and lubricated
withan approved anti-corrosive and anti-friction product to be furnished by the Contractor.
12.2.6.3.12 Bolts which cannot withstand the specified load, due to defective installation shall
be considered unacceptable and the Contractor will not be paid for their installation.
12.2.6.3.13. In those zones where the heads of the bolts are not to be covered byconcrete
or shotcreting, the surface of bearing steel plates and washers shall be protected with two coats
of lead-oxides paints to be applied before installing the bolts. Prior to the application of the paint
coasts, the surfaces of these elements shall be free from oil, grease and any other foreign
material (oxides, cement spilling etc.) for which, if necessary they shall be cleaned with
dissolvent and iron brush, or by meansof other approved method.
12.2.6.3.13 In zones where the protruding ends of the bolts are to be embedded in concrete or
shotcrete, the Contractor shall be careful to leave them free of grease, oil etc., for which he shall
clean them with a dissolvent product and an iron brush, if necessary.
12.2.6.4 Pull out Test
12.2.6.4.1 The rock bolts shall be tested at intervals as deemed necessary with atleast one test
for every 50 bolts as selected by the Owner prior to grouting the bolts for performing pull lout
tests. The bolt shall, resist a pull out tension equal to the yield strength. The pull out tests shall be
carried out at the cost of the Contractor who shall supply the required equipment and all other
facilities for the tests.
Load shall be applied to the hydraulic jack movement of 0.8mm (1/32”). This shall be
continued until yield strength of bolt has been reached. When tests indicate that
anchorage is rather low, some more bolts shall be pulled a day later. The tension shall
be restored to the required value whenever there is an indication of eithera load
increase or decrease in rock bolts.
All nuts which are loose shall be tightened against the bearing plate. Rock bolts which
are not capable of being tightened because the threaded section has moved too far
beyond the bearing plate will be rejected and shall be replaced immediately by the
Contractor at his expense.
If any rock bolt fails due to improper workmanship or defects of materials, the Owner
may order a test of all adjacent rock bolts, and all rock bolts so failing shallbe
replaced and retested at the Contractor‟s expense.
12.2.6.4 Grouting of Rock Bolts.
5.2.6.5.1 The space between the bolt including the wedges of the bolt and the bolt hole
shall be filled back with cement grout after the bolts have been tensioned except the bolts on
which the pull out test is to be done. The bolts on which pull out test is tobe carried out shall be
grouted after the pull out test. Rock bolts shall be retightened before grouting and no blasting
shall be allowed within 10 metre for 7 days after grouting. The grouting operations hall be
carried out as soon as possible and not later than three weeks after the installation of the bolts.
5.2.6.5.2 Grout shall be made up of port land cement and water, in a mixture with a water-
cement ratio of approximately 0.4 by weight to which aluminum powder shall be added if
required in a proportion indicated by the Owner.
5.2.6.5.3 Unless otherwise directed or approved commercial grade extra fine, aluminum
powder in an amount not exceeding 0.005% by mass of cement, shall be blended with the cement
to ensure the necessary expansion of gout.
5.2.6.5.4. Grouting shall be applied at a moderated pressure (2 kg/cm2) unless indicated
otherwise until the voids between the bolts and the rock are filled up. i.e., as soon as the
grouting is finished, the grouting and the drill holes shall be plugged to
avoid leaks of grout through them. Whenever grout comes out around the base plates during the
injection, the Contractor shall plug those outlets using methods approvedby the Owner.
12.2.6.5 RECORD, MEASUREMENT OF ROCK BOLTS.

Record
Following information for every rock bolt shall be recorded in a register:
1. Type of rock bolt
2. Diameter of rock bolt
3. Length of bolt
4. Location
5. Tension applied to rock bolt
6. Date of installation and grouting of the rock bolt.
The Contractor has to record the above details and satisfactorily maintain the record
without any cost to Government of Andhra Pradesh which should be duly checked by the Owner
soon on installing the rock bolts.
CONCRETE LINING FOR APPROACH AND EXIT CHANNEL.
Scope work
(a) The section covers specifications for item nos.L1, L2, L3, L4, L5, L6, L7, L8, L9,
L10, L11, L12, L13.
(b) Clearing site, preparations of sub grade in soils and rock, providing under drainage,
pressure relief arrangements, anti -salt treatment, placing model section, laying
weigh batching plant mixed concrete of 150 mm thick grade with machine
crushed hard broken graded aggregate of 40mm nominal size and cement of not
less than 331.20 kgs per cubic meter of concrete achieving a characteristics
compressive strength of 200 Kg/Cm2 using suitable steel faced mechanized slip
form screed providing 25mm diameter HYSD anchor bolts.
(c) If during construction, it is found necessary to alter the approach and exit channel
sections and side slopes without altering the thickness of lining, the contractors
shall be informed in writing of such changes.
(d) Near all structures or where flaming is involved. Lining shall be provided for 15m
length in transition on either side of structure with a thickness of 150 mm on
slopes, curvature and bed as specified in the relevant drawings.
(e) The scope of work also includes the following:
i) Dewatering, the approach and exit channel section for preparing the
base for lining and for laying concrete lining;
ii) Providing necessary under drainage arrangements consisting of longitudinal
and transverse drains, pressure relief values as per drawings.
iii) Providing filter materials of approved quality as per designs.
iv) Providing grooves for joint by cutting the concrete to required depth and
width as per drawings;
v) Providing steel safety ladders/concrete steps at required intervals or as
directed;
vi) Curing.
vii) Filling joints;
Description of Items
L1 – deletedL2
– deleted
L3 – Providing porous concrete panels of size 300 x 200 mm with one part of cement and
four parts of aggregate by weight using not less than 331.2 Kgs, of cement per cubic metre of
concrete using 20 mm size hard broken metal of quartzite variety obtained from approach and
exit channel spoil/or from specified quarries including the cost and conveyance of all
materials, scaffolding centering and form work, placing, mixing, conveyance of water,
dewatering and curing complete for furnished item of work as per drawings.
L4 – Providing longitudinal and lateral filter drains of size 600 x 750mm in bed including earth
work excavation in all soils and rocks and filled with metal and sandas per drawing including
cost and conveyance of all materials, dewatering, placing in position complete for finished item
of work as per drawings.
L5 – Providing and fixing in position porous concrete plugs of 150mm ia and 450 mm long in
bed including cost of excavation in soils, rock cost and conveyance of all materials form work
mixing charges manufacturing, conveyance of water, curing, handling and installation in position
including filling with metal, sand alround the plug complete for finished item of work as per
drawing.
L6 – Providing and fixing in position porous concrete plugs in side slopes, of size 150 mm dia
and 450 mm long including cost of excavation in soils, rock cost and conveyance of all materials
scaffolding, form work, mixing charges, manufacturing, conveyance of water, curing, handling
and installation in position including filling with rock spoils around the porous plug complete
for finished item of work as per drawing.
L7 – Laying 150 mm thick cement concrete design mix with a cement level as per design mix of
cement per cubic meter of concrete for achieving a 28 days characteristics compressive strength
of 200 Kg/Cm2 using machine crushed hard broken graded aggregate of 40 mm nominal size
obtained from crushing of approach and exit channel spoil for lining of approach and exit
channel including the cost and conveyance of all materials, form work mixing of concrete in a
stationery weight batching and mixing plant of adequate capacity installed at suitable places
and concrete conveyed to work spot in transit mixers, unloaded at site placing, vibrating
conveyance of water and curing for the finished item of work as per drawing.
(a) For Bed lining.
(b) For side lining.
L8 – Laying 150 mm thick cement concrete with a cement level as per design mix of cement per
cubic metre of concrete using machine crushed, hard broken graded aggregate of 40mm nominal
size obtained from approach and exit channel spoil for lining side slopes of approach and exit
channel including the cost and conveyance ofall materials, form work, mixing of concrete. In a
stationery weigh batching and mixing plant of adequate capacity installed at suitable places
and concrete conveyed
to work spot in transit mixers, unloaded at site, placing, vibrating, conveyance of water,
dewatering and curing complete, for the finished item of work as per drawing.
L9 – Cement concrete with a cement level as per design mix of cement per cubic meter of
concrete using machine crushed, hard broken graded aggregate of 40 mm nominal size obtained
from approach and exit channel spoil for lugs in side slopes including the cost and conveyance of
all materials, form work, mixing of concrete in a stationery by weigh batching and mixing plant
of adequate capacity installed at suitable places and concrete conveyed to work spot in transit
mixers, unloaded at site placing vibrating, conveyance of water and curing complete for
finished item of workas per drawing.
L10 – Providing construction joint in lining including the cost and conveyance of all
materials, dewatering, labour charge complete for finished item of work as per drawing.
L11 – Providing 12 mm thick expansion joints in lining at junctions of structures as per
drawings with joint filler, top 25 mm sealed with hot pour sealing compound including the cost
and conveyance of all materials, dewatering, labour charges complete for finished item of
work.
L12 – Providing anchor bolts of 25 mm HYSD bars each 700 mm long (600 mm embedded
in rock and 100 millimeters embedded in lining concrete) spaced to 1500mm centre to centre
staggered including the cost and conveyance of anchor bolts, drilling of holes in rock and fixing
the bolts in position including cost of cement grouting.
L13 – Providing and fixing in position porous concrete blocks of size 600 mm x 600mm x
750 mm along with length of approach and exit channel in bed and sides in each panel staggered
including cost and conveyance of all materials form work, mixing charges, manufacturing,
conveyance of water, curing, handlings, and installation in position including filling with sand
and metal under the porous blocks complete for finished item of work as per the drawing.
12.2.6.6 Applicable publications.
All concrete, its constituents, methods and procedures of manufactures shall conform to
India standard Specifications and other publications listed below unlessotherwise specified.
1 IS 456 : 2000 Code of practice for plan and reinforced concrete (Second
Revision Amendment No.1)
2 IS 457 : 1957 Code of practice for general construction of plain and
reinforced concrete for dams and other massive structures
3 IS 3873 : 1993 Code of practice for laying in-situ cement concrete lining of
canals (First Revision)
4 IS 2505 : 1980 General requirements for concrete vibrators immersion type.
5 IS 2506 : 1985 General requirements for screed board concrete vibrators.
6 IS 3366 :1965 Specifications for Pan vibrators.
7 IS 3558 : 1983 Code of practice for use of immersion vibrator for
consolidating concrete.
8 IS 4656 : 1968 Specification for form vibrators for concrete
10 IS 5256 :1968 Code of practice for sealing joints in concrete lining on
canals.
11 IS 3085 : 1965 Methods of test for permeability of cement mortar and
concrete.
12 IS 1199: 1959 Methods of sampling and analysis of concrete.
13 IS 516 : 1959 Methods of tests for strength of concrete (Amendment No.1)
14 IS 5529 : 1985 Code of practice for in-situ (Part 1 & 2) Permeability test in
(Part 1&2) over burden Bed rock
15 IS 9103:1979 Specifications for admixtures for concrete.
16 IS 272:1980 Methods of test for soils Determination of water content –
(Part-7) dry density relation using light compaction (second Revision
Amendment Nos. 1 & 2) Reaffirmed 1987.
17 IS 9019:1978 method of making curing and determining compressive
strength of accelerated cured concrete test specimens
18 IS 9451:1994 Guidelines for linig concrete of canals in expansive soil
Other publications
1 USBR Concrete Manual (Latest Edition)
2 ASTM C-156-80 (water retention test)
3 ASTM C-309-81 Type-2 Liquid membrane – Forming
Compound for curing concrete.
4 ASTM C-491-80 Water reducing agent
5 ASTM C-493 – TYPE.D
6 ASTM C-494- TYPE.D Water reducing agent and set retarder.
7 CBIP Manual of canal lining.
12.2.6.7 Clearing site

The area proposed for lining the approach and exit channel as a whole shall be cleared of all
objectionable material. Any waste material obtained from such site clearance shall be disposed
off in a manner directed by the Owner. The cost of this operation shall be deemed to have been
covered under the rates quoted for approach and exit channel lining.
12.2.6.8 Preparation of sub grade
The Provisions of this para shall apply to the preparation of all subgrade upon which
concrete lining is to be laid.
The work of trimming the approach and exit channel section upto the underside of concrete
lining and preparing subgrade includes the removal of the extra width of
450-600 mm provided during the construction of embankment and final cutting of rock.
Soil in all reaches should be tested for salt content before lining is started. Where the salt
content is over 1 percent or sodium sulphate is over 0.36 layer of bitumen, if ordered by the
Owner it shall be treated in accordance with para 4.3 of IS 3873 : 1978.
Wherever rock is over excavated it shall be filled as specified under subsequent paras.
At the end panels of existing lining against which lining is to be placed under these
specifications, all loose material shall be removed and all voids beneath the existing lining shall
be refilled and thoroughly compacted.
12.2.6.9 Preparation of sub grade consisting of earth.

12.2.6.9.1 The sub grade shall be prepared, dressed and rolled true to level and according to the
required cross – section of the approach and exit channel to form a firm compacted bed for the
lining.
12.2.6.9.2 The contractor shall place selected bedding material test profile true to the cross-section
of the approach and exit channel at times and places designed by the Owner to show the
adequately of his construction procedures for laying bedding material. The test sections shall
conform to Clause 4.5.2 of I.S. 3873: 1993. The cost of this operation shall be deemed to
have been coveredin the rates quoted for approach and exit channel excavation.
12.2.6.9.3 In other than predominantly sandy reaches where the dry bulk density of the natural
soils is not less than 1.8 gm per C.C, initial excavation shall be done up to about 300 mm
above the final section and the cutting to final shape shall be done immediately before lining.
The compaction shall conform to Clause
– 4.5.6. of I.S. 3873 : 1993.
12.2.6.9.4 If at any point material of prepared sub grade has been excavated beyond the neat lines
required to receive lining, the excess excavation shall be filled in horizontal layers with graded
filter material completely with the sub grade material moistened and thoroughly compacted in
accordance with Para 4.5.5 and 4.5.6. of I.S. 3873 : 1993. Where placing and compacting
bedding material is on sloping foundation, the layers may be placed parallel to the surface of
the foundation. If at any point the foundation material is disturbed or loosened during the
excavation process or otherwise it shall be moistened if required, and thoroughly compacted by
tamping, rolling or other approved methods to form firm foundation for placing the concrete
lining.
12.2.6.9.5 In bed where the dry bulk density of the natural soil is less than 1.8 gm/ C.C. and
subsoil water is near the sub grade, the consolidation shall be done by under cutting the bed
by 7.5cm and then ploughing up to 15.0 -cm below the sub grade level. The loosened soil shall
then be recompacted with sheep foot rollers or other suitable devices. All along the approach
and exit channel alignment the rain gullies on the banks shall be filled up with approved soil
and shall be compacted adequately to required lines, dimensions and level.
12.2.6.9.6 In bed where the subsoil water is low, requiring no dewatering and the dry bulk
density of the natural soil is less than 1.8 gm/C.C, the consolidation shall be done by digging
the approach and exit channel up to sub grade level and after loosening the earth below sub
grade up to 15 cm by disc harrows, or ploughing and compacting the same to a layer of 11
c.m. After that the second
layer of 15 cm of earth shall be laid over the compacted layer by taking earth from lip
cutting and compacting this to a depth of 11 cm. The compacted layer of 7 cm above
the sub grade level shall be removed and the subgrade brought to design profile before
laying the lining.
12.2.6.9.7 Compaction of sides shall be done by Pneumatic compactors or suitable Slope
compactors to a depth of 30 cm to obtain a minimum dry bulk density of not less than 90
percent of the density at optimum moisture content obtained in accordance with IS 2720 (Part
VII) : 1965. and concrete or masonry shall not be allowed unless contractor carries over the
compaction as per specification.
12.2.7.Preparation of sub grade consisting of rock,

(a) The sub grade in rock shall be excavated to the required cross – section. Final cutting
for 450-600 mm in hard rock and fissured and fractured rock shall be carried out by
wedging barring, controlled blasting or trimming with the help of suitable equipment.
No extra payment will be made for this final cutting.
(b) The bed and side slopes of the approach and exit channel excavation profile over which
the bedding material, under drainage arrangements are to be placed and overlaid with
lining shall be furnished accurately to true and even surfaces and to the dimensions
shown on the drawings.
(c) All excavation including over breakages below the lines of the underside of lining shall
be backfilled as follows:
Slopes: In slopes the selected bedding material shall be M 15 grade cement concrete of the
same specification for side lining. The concrete shall be placed compacted and vibrated to form a
neat bedding. No separate payment will be made for the bedding material filled in the over
breakages.
Bed: In case of bed, the selected bedding material shall be 20 mm size hard broken quartzite
metal, obtained from approach and exit channel spoil. Any over excavation shall be filled with
hard broken quartzite metal by the contractor at his expenses.
Tolerance in Excavation:
Excavated profile provides the final base for lining and tolerances should be comparable to the
following:
Departure from established alignment:
+ 20 mm on straight section,
+ 50 mm on tangents, and
- 100 mm on curves
Departure from established grade: + 20 mm
The above tolerances shall be negotiated gradually through smooth transition in a length of
50m. No over-run in excavation, filling with the materials as directed by the Owner, or concrete
filling shall be paid to the Contractor.
In case of expansive soils, the bedding material shall be 1000 mm thick cohesive non-
swelling material (CNS) conforming to the following gradation andindex properties.
(i) The lower limit shear parameters shall be 10.342 KN/m2 to 27.58Kn/m2+ and 120
to 140.
(ii) Gradation.
1. Clay (less than 2 microns) – 15 to 20%
2. Silt (0.06 mm – 0.002 mm) – 30 to 40%
3. Sand (2mm – 0.06 mm) - 30 to 40%
4. Gravel (greater than 2mm) - 0 to 10%
6 The CNS material shall be non-swelling, having a minimum of 10KN/m2 cohesivevalue.

7 Index properties.
1. Liquid Limit less than 55% but greater than 30%
2. Plasticity Index less than 30% but greater than 15%.
12.2.6.9.7.1 If the expansive clay is in thin layers or in small pockets or other wise suitable
subgrade shall be over excavated as determined by the Owner and replaced with suitable non-
expansive soil and compacted suitably.
12.2.6.9.7.2 After the approach and exit channel prism has been shaped to a reasonably true and
even surface, selected bedding material shall be placed on thoroughly wetted sur faces in
layers of 15 cm maximum thickness to bring the bedding material to a height where it can
be trimmed to form a true and even surface upon which to place the concrete lining. Each
layerof the bedding material shall be moistened in accordance with paragraph
5.3.10.6.6 and 5.3.10.6.7 and thoroughly compacted. Where the bedding material is
placed and compacted on a sloping round layers may be placed parallel to the
surface of the foundation. The moisture content of the bedding material at the time
of compaction shall be accordance with paragraph 5.3.10.6.6 and 5.3.10.6.7. The
compaction procedures used shall be the same as those used in the demonstration
section described below.
(i) The contractor shall place demonstration or test sections of selected bedding
material at time and places designated by the Owner, to show the adequacy of his
construction procedure for placing and compacting the bedding material. The test
section shall conform to Clause 4.5.2. of IS 3873: 1993.
(ii) The bedding material shall be placed to sufficient thickness in the test sections to
allow practical density testing of the compacted bedding material.
The dimensions and densities of the compacted bedding materials in the test
sections and the testing there of shall be in accordance with paragraph 5.4.10.6.6and
5.3.10.6.7. Modifications shall be made to procedures untilit is demonstrated that
acceptable densities are being consistently obtained. The procedures shall then be
used to compact the selected bedding material on the remaining work.
(iii) Where placing and compacting selected bedding materials on a sloping foundation,
the layers may be placed parallel to the surface of the
foundation. If at any point the foundation material is disturbed or loosened during
the excavation process or otherwise it shall be moistened if required and thoroughly
compacted by tamping, rolling or other approved methods to form firm
foundations to place the concrete lining.
The bottom and side slopes, including the surfaces of compacted embankment,
compacted selected bedding materials and compacted backfill over which concrete
lining is to be placed shall be finished accurately to true and even surfaces to the
dimensions shown on the drawings. The loading, handling transporting and placing
of the selected bedding material is subject to approval of Owner and shall be such as
will result in a uniform mixture of the materials being placed without separation
or segregation. Selected bedding material required shall be obtained from
excavation.
(iv) Immediately prior to placing the first lift of bedding material, the surfaces of the
excavation and embankment to receive the material shall be adequately wetted
trough fine spray nozzler to ensure that the subgradedoes not become muddy to
a depth of 15 cm to impermeable material whichever is less as approved by the
Owner.
(v) Suitable material trimmed from the approach and exit channel shall be used to
complete approach and exit channel embankments, to construct road
embankments, for back fill around structures or for selected bedding material.
Where material lsuitable for selected bedding as determined by the Owner is
encountered during trimming operations and cannot be placed in one continuous
operation such material shall be stockpiled along the right-of-way designated by the
Owner.
12.2.7.Materials
Cement
12.2.7.1The provisions of Paragraph 12.1.4.1. (a)(b) and (c) shall apply.
12.2.7.1 STEEL
The provisions of Paragraph 12.1.4.2. (a), (b) and (c) shall apply.
12.2.7.2 Fine Aggregate (Sand)
The provisions of Paragraph 12.1.4.3. and 12.1.4.3.1. shall apply
12.2.7.2.1 Coarse Aggregate
The provisions Paragraph 12.1.4.3. and 12.1.4.3.2. shall apply.
12.2.7.3Admixtures
The provisions of Paragraph 12.1.4.4. shall apply.
12.2.7.4 Water
The provisions of Paragraph 12.1.4.5. shall apply.
12.2.7.5 MODEL SECTION
(a) Deleted
12.2.7.6 UNDER DRAINAGE

For a lined approach and exit channel where the ground water level is higher or likely to be
higher than the water level inside the approach and exit channel so as to cause damaging
differential pressure on the lining or where the sub grade is sufficiently impermeable to prevent
free drainage of the underside of lining in case of rapid draw-down, pressure relief arrangements
for under drainage shall be provided with suitable pressure relief arrangements as indicated in
the drawing in accordance with IS, 4558 : 1968.
12.2.7.7 Filter Drains.
12.2.7.7.1 In bed wherever necessary, longitudinal or lateral filter drains of size 600
mm x 750 mm – shall be laid below the concrete lining true to the
approach and exit channel grade as shown in the drawings or as directed
by the Owner. These drains shall consist of precast porous concrete blocks
of size 1000 x 450 x 300 mm in two halves (150 mm width each) with 100
mm diameter hole and shall be filled with sand alround as shown on the
drawing.
The sand shall be clean should and well graded before placing the filter,the bed
shall be prepared as specified in paragraph above.
The longitudinal drains shall be laid to the grade of the approach and exit channel
while the transverse drains in bed shall have a fall of 50 mm towards the edge of
the approach and exit channel bed from the centre.
12.2.7.8 Pressure Relief Arrangements:
Wherever necessary pressure relief arrangements consisting of porous concrete plugs with
local filters shall be provided in the bed and sides as shown in the drawingor as directed by the
Owner.
12.2.7.8.1 Porous Concrete Panels: At the slopes of the approach and exit channel lining,
porous concrete panels of size 300 mm x 200 mm shall be provided as
shown on drawings or as directed by the Owner. The porous concrete shall
be as specified in (c) below.
12.2.7.8.2 Porous Blocks: Porous concrete blocks of size 600 mm x 600 mm x 750
mm shall be provided in one row along the length of approach and exit
channel in bed and sides in each pannel staggered. The porous concrete shall
be as specified in (c) below A continuous reverse filter consisting of two
layers of sand and metal shall be provided under the porous blocks along the
length of approach and exit channel in bed and sides in each pannel.
12.2.7.8.3 Porous Plugs : Wherever specified, the porous concrete shall be composed of
one part of cement and 4 parts of aggregate by weight of not more than 20mm
size. Only so much water shall be used in concrete as required to produce a
paste which will coat the particles without filling the voids. In placing porous
concrete in moulds, care shall be taken to ensure that it isnot over tamped
or compacted so as to reduce its porosity. The porous concrete after curing
shall be pervious and free draining type. As soon as the concrete hardens
(i.e., it attains final setting) it should be spinkled and kept moist for at least 14
days. The compressive strengths of porous concrete at 7 days age as
determined by tests on 15 cm diameter, 30cm. high cylinder should not be
less than 70 Kgs/Cm2 and the porosity at 7 days be such that water shall
pass through slab of the concrete 30 cm thick
at a minimum, of 500 liters/min/square meter of the flap with a constant10cm
depth of water on the slab.
Pre cast porous concrete plugs (cylinders) 150 mm dia and 450 mmlong
both for bed and sides shall be provided.
The porous plugs shall be so inserted into the lining that their porosity is
not lost or reduced when the concrete for the lining is vibrated.
12.2.7.9 ANCHOR BOLTS
(a) In hard rock anchor bolts of 700mm/650mm long manufactured with HYSD steel
bars of size 25mm diameter, as shown in drawing shall be taken to a depth of
600mm into rock and 100mm to be embedded in side each panel of concrete lining.
12.2.7.10 LAYING OF CONCRETE LINING..
General.
The work of laying in-situ cement concrete lining shall generally conform to IS 3873:1993
and all concrete shall be governed by IS 456-2000. The concrete shall be of controlled grade
with suitable approved admixtures as air entraining agents using well graded Quartzite of 40mm
maximum nominal size and ordinary port land cement level as per design mix of concrete., to
achieve the 28 days compressive strength of 200 Kg/cm2 However, due to change in design
mix, if it becomes necessary to use lean / richer mix, the contractor shall comply the same
without any extra cost.
Batching
The provisions of Paragraph 5.1.5 (a) to (g) shall apply.
Mixing.
The provisions of Paragraph 5.1.6 (a) to (d) shall apply.
Transporting
The provisions of Paragraph 5.1.7. (a) to (c) shall apply.
Slump.
The quantity of water to be used in the concrete shall be determined from time to time during
the course of concreting work in order to secure concrete of proper consistency and also adjust
for any variation in the moisture content or grading of the aggregates as they enter the mixer.
Addition of water to compensate the stiffening of the concrete resulting from over mixing or
objectionable drying before placing shall not be permitted. Where concrete is alid from the
bottom to the top of the slope, the consistency shall be such that the concrete will just stay in
place of the slope. A slump 60 to 70 mm shall be generally allowed. 50mm at the laying point
shall be permitted. To have a close control of consistency and workability of the concrete the
slumps of concrete shall not vary more than 20mm which would otherwise, interfere with the
progress and quality of the work.
Placing and Compaction.
(a) Placing of concrete shall not be started until all form work installation of parts to be
embedded and preparation of surfaces upon which concrete is to be laid have been
completed. All absorptive surfaces against which concrete is to be laid shall be
moistened thoroughly so that moisture will
not be withdrawn from freshly placed concrete. The surfaces, however, shall be
free from standing water and mud.
(b) In the placement register containing the list of various work items in sequential
order; the contractor or his representative shall write completed preparation of
subgrade, earth work, installation of parts to be embedded as per specifications
and ready for placing concrete‟ and sign. The Owner‟s authorised representative
shall inspect and write in the Register against that item allowed for concreting and
sign. Then placing of concrete shall be commended by the contractor, if
concreting is not started within 24 hours after approval, it shall be got approved
again.
(c) Concrete shall be placed only in the presence of a duly authorised representative of
the Owner.
(d) Hand mixing of the concrete shall not be permitted under any circumstance.
(e) Concrete shall be deposited in all cases as neatly as practicable in its final position
and shall not be caused to flow in manner to permit segregation. Excessive
separation of the coarse aggregate caused by allowing the concrete to fall freely
from too great height or at too great angle from the vertical shall not be permitted
and where such a separation would other wise occur the contractor shall provide
suitable means to convey the concrete without allowing such separation.
(f) Concrete shall be deposited and spread on the bed and sides of the approach and
exit channel as indicated on the drawings and left with cutting grooves, cut for
joints in between panels. Concrete may be so laid as to facilitate placing, vibrating,
finishing and curing operations. The side lining concrete shall be screeded up the
slope, whole the concrete is being vibrated, ahead of the screed. Concrete required
for keys as shown on the drawings shall be laid integrally along with the side slope
lining.
(g) Mixing of concrete shall be in a stationery weigh batch mixing plant of adequate
capacity installed at suitable place and concrete and concrete conveyed to work spot
in transit mixers and placing of concrete on side slopes shall be with a steel faced
weighted screed having a mechanised pulling up arrangement and vibration of
concrete ahead of screeding.
The minimum rate shall be obtained on the side slopes and on the bottom of
the approach and exit channel, while also meeting the requirements for lapse of
time following trimming, consolidation, concrete thickness tolerances, finishes,
joints and other requirements specified herein, the equipment and operation for
foundation trimming, subgrade preparation, concrete production, concrete delivery,
and other associated activities supporting the placement rate of each lining
operation. The overall equipment employment shall be such as to ensure the
completion of approach and exit channel lining within the scheduled period
specifiedin the contract.
(h) The design mix for lining shall be to secure dense concrete of required strength for
that grade as specified.
(i) The compaction shall be with suitable vibrators approved by the Owner and it
shall be effective so as to have durable impermeable concrete.
(j) The concreting near the joints shall be done with utmost care so as to avoid
segregation and collection of loose pieces of aggregate along the form work which
may result in honey combing.
(k) The concrete near the junction of the side concrete and head concreting shall be
done as shown in drawings such that both shall rest firmly against each other to
resist any back-kick from external hydrostatic forces.
(l) When concrete placing operations are stopped for the day, uninterrupted because of
breakdown or delayed by other causes or where the contractor elects to construct a
joint such as would result from constructing one half the lining in one pass the
edge of the fresh concrete lining shall be bulk headed to a surface normal to the
lining along transverse or longitudinal lines. Before placing operations are resumed,
the surface of the hardened concrete shall be prepared as construction joint.
Whenever substantial breakdown occurs in the concrete production or concrete
transportation system, a joint shall be formed as close to the face of the concrete as
possible. All concrete on the new side of the joint shall be removed. This is
outlined in the attachment 5.5.1 (sketch showing elimination of coldjoints)
(m) The fresh concrete shall then be placed against the existing concrete with
the full groove for required contraction joint formed in between them. The
completed groove shall be sealed with sealing compounds as per clause 6.3 of IS
3873 : 1993.
(n) Where concrete lining joins a structure, sponge rubber filler and sealing compound
shall be placed as shown on the drawings.
(o) Compaction: The concrete shall be compacted with vibrators to give a dense
concrete which is durable and impermeable ensuring the desired strength. Concrete
shall not be over vibrated. The variation shall be sufficient to remove all
undesirable air voids from the concrete, including the air voids trapped against the
forms.
After consolidation, the concrete shall be free of aggregate packets and honey comb
areas and shall be closed against all surfaces of forms and embedded materials. All concrete
shall be properly consolidated before initial setting and should not be subsequently disturbed.
Form vibrators shall be used in conjunction with slip form lining machines for consolidation.
The Government may remove samples of hardened concrete for testing and examination, and the
contractor shall replace, with no cost to the Government, concrete from which such samples are
removed.
12.2.7.11 Finishing.
12.2.7.11.1 The contractor shall notify the Owner before commencing concrete finishing.
Unless inspection involved in each specific use, finishing of concrete lining
shall be performed only when Owner‟s representative is present. Concrete
surfaces will be tested by the Owner in accordance with Para 5.5.17.8 where
necessary to determine whether the concrete surfaces is within the specified
tolerances. Finished concrete which is not in the specified tolerances shall be
repairs as detailed below:
12.2.7.11.2 Immediately on the removal of forms, unsightly ridges or tips shall be removed
and undesirable local bulging on exposed surfaces shall be
remedied by tooling and rubbing. All exposed concrete surfaces shall be cleaned of
impurities, lumps of mortar or grout and unsightly stains.
12.2.7.11.3 Repairs to concrete surfaces and additions where required shall be made by
cutting regular openings not less than 70mm depth into the concrete and
placing fresh concrete to the required lines. The chipped openings shall be
sharp. The fresh concrete shall be reinforced and chipped and trawled to
the surface of the openings. The mortar shall be placed in layers not more
than 20mm in thickness after being competed and each layer shall be
compacted thoroughly.
12.2.7.11.4 The surface of concrete finished against forms shall be even smooth and shall
be free from projections, pockets honey combing and other objection able
defects. This shall be obtained by careful use of a long-handled steel trowel,
without any time interval after laying concrete with cement mortar as
directed by the Owner.
12.2.7.11.5 The top portions of the side slopes of the approach and exit channel lining
extending 1.5 metre vertically below the top of the lining shall receive a
nonskid, longitudinal brush finish as approved by the Owner.
12.2.7.11.6 Use of any hing tool in areas where water has accumulated shall be prohibited
and all finishing operations shall be delayed until the water has been
absorbed, evaporated once moved by draining, mop pin or such other means.
12.2.7.11.7 The contractor is not entitled for any extra payment for the work under
finishing paragraph as the bid rates in Section 7 Item Bill of Quantities
Lining is inclusive of finishing.
12.2.7.12 TOLERNCES:
The intent of this paragraph is to establish tolerances that are consistent with modern
construction practice. The permissible tolerances for the approach and exitchannel lining shall
be as under in accordance with section 5.3 of IS 3873 – 1993.
(a) Departure from Established + 20mm on straight reaches alignment
+ 50mm on partial curves or tangents
(b) Departure from Established grade + 20mm on small approach
and exit channels.
(c) Variation in thickness of lining + 10% provided average thickness
is not less than specified thickness.
12.2.7.13Curing
(a) Subsequent laying of concrete lining and after a period of 24-36 hours, the lining
shall be cured with water for atleast 28 days.
(b) On bed small bounds longitudinal and cross wise consisting of earth materials or
lean mortar (1:15) shall be laid for height of 150mm for the purpose of curing. The
water shall be kept always pounded in these bounds continuously for 28 days.
(c) On side slopes the panel in which concreting is done the previous day shall be
covered with burlap or empty cement gunny bags and always ; except wet with
water spray.
(d) For the purpose of curing, steel water tank of 5000 litres. Capacity shall be placed
on platform at the edge of service road at the rate of one for 500m
length of lining which shall be kept filled with water, with arrangement of outlet and
flexible hose of at least 300m length. Water will be continuously sprinkled for 28
days. Sprinkling shall be done during the night time also. The curing of side slopes
may be done by perforated pipes on the coping at the top of lining or besprinkles.
(e) The contractor is not entitled for any extra payment for the work under this para
curing as the bid rate for lining in Section 7 Bill of Quantities is inclusive of this.
(f) When the curing the concrete lining is not found satisfactory, the Owner may
ask the contractor in writing to resort to membrane curing with white pigmented
curing compound of approved quality conforming to ASTM-C- 309 – 81.
12.2.7.14TESTING OF CONCRETE AND ACCEPTANCE OF WORK.

General.
Systematic testing of the raw materials for concrete as well as the concrete shall bedone
both while it is fresh and after it has hardened by the Quality Control and Inspection Division
on representative samples taken at the site of laying the concrete in accordance with relevant
India Standard Specifications.
5.2.7.19.2. Sampling Procedure and frequency.
(a) Sampling Procedure: A random sampling procedure shall be adopted to ensure that
each concrete batch has a reasonable chance of being tested; that is, the
sampling should be spread over the entire period of concreting and over all mixing
units.
(b) Frequency: The minimum frequency of sampling of concrete of each grade shall be
in accordance with the following.
Quantity of concrete (cubic metre) Number of samples

1 - 5 1
6 - 15 2
16 - 30 3
31 - 50 4
51 and above 4 plus one additional samples for each
additional 50 cubic metre or part there of
NOTE: At least one sample shall be taken from each shift.
Test Specimen
Three test specimens shall be made from each sample for testing at 28 days Additional cubes
may be required for various purposes, such as to determine the strength of concrete at 7 days or
at the time of striking form work or to determine the duration of curing or to check the testing
error. Additional cubes may also be required for testing by accelerated methods as described
in IS : 9013 – 1978. The specimenshall be tested as described in IS : 516 – 1959.
TEST STRENGTH OF SAMPLES:
In all cases; the 28 days compressive strength specified below shall be the criteria for
acceptance or ejection of the concrete.
Grade Compressive strength Specified characteristic
Description of 15cm cubes at 7 compressive strength at
Days in N/mm2 28 days N/mm2
10 7 10
15 10.5 15
20 13.5 20
The test strength of the sample shall be the average of three specimens. The
individual variation shall not be more than + 15 percent of the average.
(a) Contractor shall provide necessary unskilled labour and facilities for transport, collection of
samples, cores etc., and shall remain present at the time when the samples, cores etc., are
taken. Testing shall be carried out at the testing laboratory set up at Nandyal or at any
other laboratory that the Owner may decide upon and the results given thereby shall be
considered as correct and authentic and acceptable to the Contractor. The Contractor
shall be given access to all operations and tests that may be carried out as aforesaid. All
testing charges are to be borne by the S.R.B.C.
TESTING – CORE TEST

The points from which cores are to be taken and number of cores required shall be at the
discretion of the Owner. In no case however shall, fewer than three cores be taken and tested
“As the approach and exit channel lining work progresses, testing of concrete lining completed
and cured for 28 days in respective reaches. Cores shall be taken. Frequency of cores shall be
determined by the Owner, broadly it could be one core each from bed and side lining per 2000
m2 (or even more at the discretion of Owner) of in-situ lining. The cores shall be inspected for:
segregation, honey-combine and thickness of lining. The cores density inspected for compressive
strength, density, permeability, and cement content etc., The testing of cores shall be carried out
at the testing laboratories setup at the site or at another laboratory that the Owner may so decide
and the results there of shall be considered correct and authentic by the contractor. He shall be
given access to all operations and tests that may be carried out as aforesiad so that he may satisfy
himself regarding the procedure and methods employed.
A standard test cylinder has a diameter half of it‟s height (viz the length L/Diameter D
ratio is 2). However the cores taken from in-situ lining shall not have these relative dimensions
and consequently L/D ratio will not be 2.Accordingly the test strengths of the cores shall need
to be corrected. The curve in attachment 5.5.2 may be used to correct the indicated strengths to
make them comparable with those obtained from standard specimens. The contractor shall stack
the cores properly in the sheds.
The criteria of acceptance of core strengths shall be as outlined in IS:456 – 2000.
In case the concrete does not conform to the accepted criteria for strength as specified above,
the Owner reserves the right to reject the work or accept the same at a reduced rate derived
from tendered rate and as approved by him. Whenever necessary for the purpose of obtaining
economy, Workability, density, impermeability, durability, of strength or on account of
variation in the quality and gradation of aggregates or other materials, the Owner, in consultation
with Q.C. & I Division, shall after testing, make necessary changes in the proportion of
mix and
vibrators. Contractor shall have to effect these changes, and will not be entitled to any
compensation on account of such changes.
12.2.7.15 JOINTS
EXPANSION JOINTS.
(a) Expansion joint shall not be provided except where structure intersects the approach
and exit channel.
(b) Expansion joints of 12mm width shall be provided on each template where adjacent
panels rest. The joint shall be filled in by 12mm thick asphaltpads, when concrete
lining is laid for approach and exit channels in embankment or in cutting where sub
grade does not get physically bonded with the joints. Where concrete lining is in
physical bond with sub grade such as in case of hard rock reaches, expansion joints
need not be provided. The details of joint are shown in the drawings. Sealing
compound in the joint shall conform to IS: 5256 – 1968.
(c) In case of sandy soils it is preferable to Provide felt/asphalt pad over the template
and in the vertical joint between the panels to prevent leakage through joint shall be
provided as shown in the drawings.
CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.
(a) The concrete for sides and bed lining should be placed in alternative days, the
bays remaining in between may be filled after a gap of a least one day with primier
one litre per four square metres.
(b) The shuttering should be clean, well-oiled, smooth and firmly fixed to the sub-grade
and concrete near the shuttering properly placed and especially compacted.
(c) Faces to be painted with sealing compound.
CONTRACTION JOINTS.
(a) Contraction joints shall be provided at places shown in the drawings or as directed
by the Owner in accordance with the provisions laid-down.
(b) Where lining operations are continuous, transverse grooves or longitudinal and
transverse grooves both in case of concrete lined approach and exit channels with
lined perimeter more than 10 m shall be formed as shown on drawings.
(c) When lining is cast in panels, before laying cement slabs, the top of the sleepers
both in bed and side slopes shall be treated with two layers of sealing compound as
prescribed in IS 5256 : 1986 and as shown in drawings to reduce the leakage
across the joints. Slabs shall be laid in alternate compartment with an interval of at
least one day for settings and contraction. The faces of the previously placed
concrete shall be painted with sealing compound as prescribed in IS 5256 : 1968 to
ensure that no bonding takes place.
(d) The grooves at the joints shall be of the size and, shape as prescribed in (b) and
filled with hot applied sealing compound.
(e) Filling of the joint with hot-applied sealing compound should be taken up after
curing period is over. In the mean time, the joints are liable to be filled with
earth, which will be difficult to clean. It is, there fore, advisable
to fill these joints with coarse sand during the curing period. The sand canbe
easily blown out from joints when required.
FILLER
(a) The grooves in approach and exit channel lining shall be filled with sealing
compound conforming to IS 5256 : 1968.
(b) The grooves shall be clean and free from foreign substances when sealing
compound is filled.
(c) Grooves shall not be filled while it is raining or when there is free water in the
grooves. The grooves shall be filled as soon as the concrete has become sufficiently
stiff to prevent appreciable distortion of groove shape or damage to the concrete.
(d) The expansion joint shall be filled with the mixture of following materials with
proportion specified against each.
Maxphalt 80-100 30% by volume
Sand 51% by volume
Cement 17% by volume
Hemp cut into length 2% by volume Net
exceeding 3mm 100% by volume
12.2.7.16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

as per relevant clause
12.3 TUNNEL LINING
12.3.1.1 SCOPE OF WORK:
The work shall include providing and placing of controlled concrete (at a temperature of not
more than 32 C) in the various components of the works of Tunnel Lining including filling of over
breakages and contact grouting.
The work covered by this section consist of furnishing all materials including cement,
shuttering and centering labour, furnishing, maintaining and operation all equipment for the
manufacturing, transporting, placing, vibrating, finishing and curing of concrete for tunnel lining
including contact grouting in the tender and performing all the functions ancillary thereto. This item
also includes any dewatering required for placement of concrete.
12.6.2 CLASSIFICATION
The items covered under these specifications are as under.
12.3.2.1. CONTRACT USING AGGREGATES

This shall include providing cement concrete as per mix design with the necessary form
work centering where ever required, batching, mixing, transporting, laying,vibrating, finishing and
curing considering all lifts and leads as per approved design and drawing.
12.3.3.APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS
All concrete its constituents‟ methods and procedures of manufactures shall conform to
Indian Standard Specifications and other publications listed below unless otherwise specified.
INDIAN STANDARDS:
IS 8112: 1989 Specification for 43 grade ordinary and low
Heat port land cement
IS 383 : 1970 Specification for the coarse and fine
Aggregate from natural sources of Concrete.
IS 456: 2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
IS 457 : 1957 Code of practice for General Construction of plain
and Reinforced concrete for Dams and other
massive structures
IS460 Specification for Test Sieves.
IS460 (Part.I) Wire Cloth Test Sieves.
:1985
IS 460 (Part-II): Perforated plate Test Sieves.
:1985
IS 460 (Part-III): Methods of examinations for Tests Sieves.
IS 516 :1959 Method of examinations for Tests Sieves.
IS 1199:1959 Methods of sampling and Analysis of concrete.
IS 2386 (Part.I) Methods of Tests for Aggregates for concrete
To VIII):1977
IS 2386(Part-I) Particle size and shape
:1977
IS 2386 (Part.II) Estimation of Deleterious Materials and organic
:19177 Impurities.
IS 2386 (Part.III) Specific Gravity, Density, Voids, Absorption
:1977 and Bulking
IS 2386 (Part.IV) Mechanical Properties.
:1977
IS 2386 (Part.V) Soundness
:1977
IS 2386 (Part.VI) Measuring Mortar Making Properties of Fine
:1977 Aggregate
IS 2386 (Part.VII) Alkali Aggregate reactivity
IS 2386(Part-VIII) Petrography Examination
:1977
IS 2770:1969 Methods of testing bond in reinforced concrete.
IS 2770 (Part.I) Pull-out Test.
:1969
IS 3025 : 1984 Methods of Sampling and Test (Physical and Chemical) for
Water used in Industry.
IS 5816 : 1970 Methods of Test of Test for splitting Tensile strength of
Concrete Cylinders.
IS 9103 : 1979 Specification for Admixture for concrete.
OTHER PUBLICATIONS.
(1) Concrete Manual U.S.B.R.
(2) American Society C-494 -80 for Testing of Water Reducing Agent Materials.
12.3.4 COMPOSITION
Concrete shall be compose of ordinary Portland cement, water, fie aggregate, coarse
aggregate, air-entraining agent, other approved admixture or concrete shall be composed of Portland
pozzolana cement, water, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, air entraining agent and other approved
admixtures.
12.3.5 QUALITY
Unless other wise specified the concrete mixed will be designed by the Owner who
will determine the required quality of the concrete for the structures covered by these specifications.
12.3.6 CEMENT
12.3.6.1 GENERAL
The contractor may also use bulk cement subject to the approval of the infrastructure
required for transporting handling and storage of such cement, by the Owner.
12.3.6.2 QUALITY
Cement shall be 43 grade ordinary Portland cement and shall conform to IS 269-
1976.
12.3.6.3TEST REQUIREMENTS
Sampling and testing will be by the contractor as per procedure laid down. No cement shall
be used until notice has been given that the test results are satisfactory. Cement which has not been
used within 90 days after the date of manufacture shall not be use until retest gives satisfactory
results.
12.3.6.4STORAGE
Immediately upon receipt at the site of work, cement shall be stored separately in dry, water
tight and properly ventilated structures. All storage facilities shall be subject to approval and shall be
such as to permit easy access for inspection ;and identification. Adequate storage capacity of cement
shall be provided by the Contractor near his concrete batching and mixing plant. In order that
cement may not become unduly aged after delivery, the storage and use of cement shall be in such
an order, that cement received first shall be used first.
12.3.7 ADMIXTURES
12.3.7.1 AIR-ENTRINING ADMIXTURES
12.3.7.1.1 General :- There air-entraining admixture shall be

added to the concrete batch is solution. It shall be batched by means of
mechanical batcher capable of correct measurement and in such a
manner as shall ensure uniform distribution of the agent used shall be
such as to obtain air entrainment from 4 to 6 percent by volume in that
portion of the concrete containing aggregate smaller than the 40 mm
square mesh sieve after its
placement and vibration in the forms. The actual percentage of air-entraining admixture shall be
as fixed by the Owner and shall be changed whenever such change is deemed necessary to meet the
varying conditions encountered during construction.
The admixtures shall procure the contractor for use in the concrete mix. The cost of
admixture and the charges for labour transport, storage and mixing shall be borne by the
Contractor. No claim on any account for use of this admixture in the concrete will be entertained by
the Department.
12.3.7.1.2Tests:- The Contractor shall provide at his cost satisfactory facilities for easy and quick
collection of adequate test samples and their transport to the project laboratory. All tests for the
evaluation and approval of an admixture will be made by the Department.
12.3.7.2 WATER REDUCING ADMIXTURE:
Water reducing admixtures conforming to ASTM Designation C-494 -80 (Type D- Water
reducing and retarding admixture) shall be used for reducing water content of concrete mix if so
directed by the Owner. The charges for cost, labour, transport, storage and for mixing shall be borne
by the Contractor.
AGGREGATES:
COMPOSITION:
Aggregated for concrete shall conform to specification in I.S. 383 :1970. Fine Aggregate
shall be in the form of natural sand.
SOURCE:
Source of Aggregate: Sand and coarse aggregates for concrete and sand for mortar and grout
shall be obtained by the contractor from appropriate quarries. blending operations shall at all times
be subject to approval of the Owner.
12.3.7.3 QUALITY:
12.3.7.3.1 General: Aggregates, as delivered to the mixer, shall
consist of clean and hard particles. Fine silt etc. be removed from the
coarse aggregates by adequate washing. The coarse aggregates shall be
rescreened just prior to their delivery to the batching plant bins. The
capacity of the aggregate conveying and rescreening equipment shall be
adequate to maintain storage bins at a satisfactory level without resorting
to overloading of screens or transfer equipment during periods of peak
production. The rescreening plant shall be located, arranged and operated
in such a manner that will ensure delivery to the mixer of uniformly
graded and dewatered coarse aggregates conforming to the provisions of
paragraph 5.6.8.3 (b) Test requirement of Coarse Aggregate” hereinafter,
and with moisture content conforming to the provisions of paragraph
5.6.8.7. “Moisture Control” therein after. Fractions finer than 4.8 mm
obtained as by product during production of crushed coarse aggregates
shall be wasted. Coarse aggregates may be rescreened and delivered to
the batching plant bins in one size group at a time or two or more
adjacent size groups at a time.Simultaneous rescreening of noadjacent
size groups is not permitted.
If the rescreenig plant is operated in such manner that the smallest size of coarse aggregate is
always included in the material being screened, material finer that IS 480 micron sieve shall be
excluded. Otherwise, all undersize material from the smallest size group being rescreened at any time
shall be wasted, or at the option of the contractor, returned to processed aggregate storage piles. Over
size particles of the largest size group being rescreened shall not be delivered to the bin of the next
larger aggregate size group. Compliance with the aggregate grading and uniformity requirements
will be determined
at the mixer. The aggregt shall conform to the following test requirement for ensuring thesuitability.
12.3.7.3.2 Test requirements for coarse Aggregates: Coarse
aggregates for concrete shall consists of naturally occurring (crushed or
uncrushed) stones gravel and sand or a combination thereof and shall
conform to IS 383 : 1970. The term “Coarse Aggregates” is used to
designated particles varying in size from 4.75 mm to 150 mm coarse
aggregates shall consist of well shaped hard, dense, durable, uncoated
rock fragment and shall be free from objectionable quantity of fragments.
The percentages of deleterious substances in any size of coarse
aggregate as delivered to the mixer shall be determined in accordance
with IS 2386 (Part-II) 1963 “Contractor shall get samples of coarse &
fine aggregate tested at regular interval for rise of potential alkali –
aggregate reactivity”
The abrasion value of coarse aggregates, when tested in accordance with the method
specified in IS 2386 (Part-IV) 1977 shall not exceed the following values.
12.3.7.3.2.1 For aggregates to be used in concrete for wearing surface 30

percent.
12.3.7.3.2.2 For aggregate to be used in concrete else where 50 percent.
The average loss of weight after 5 cycle for coarse aggregates when tested inaccordance with
the method of soundness test specified in IS 2386 (Part-v) 199. Shall not exceed 12 percent when
tested with Sodium sulphate and 18 percent when tested with magnesium sulphate. Specific gravity
of coarse aggregates. When tested in accordance with the method specified in IS 2386 (Part-III)
1977 shall not be less than 2.7.
C) Test requirement for fine Aggregates: The terms fine aggregates (sand) is used to
designate aggregates in which the maximum size of particle is 4.75 mm. Fine aggregates for
concrete, mortar and grout shall be of natural sand produced from the natural aggregates available
from the river shores.
TABLE -5-2
Nominal Particle size range for different sizes of coarse aggregates.

Designation of size Nominal size rang
10 mm Aggregates 4,75 mm to 10 mm
20 mm Aggregates 10 mm to 20mm
40mm Aggregates 20 mm to 40 mm
This separation shall be such that the average percentage of materials passing the undersize
test screen (Significant under size) in any 12 hour period shall not exceed 2% by weight and all
materials shall pass the oversize test screen. In this screen test, the aggregates shall be tested as
batched and the screening shall be done on screens designated in the following table.
TABLE -5.3
Sieve sizes for Tests for determining undersize and oversize fractions in differentsizes of
coarse aggregates.
Size For Undersize test For Oversize test

20 mm aggregates 4mm 22 mm
40mm aggregates 16mm 47 mm
75mm aggregates 31.5 mm 89 mm Screens
used in making the tests for undersize and oversize aggregates shall
conform to the requirements for IS :460-1978 with respect to permissible variations in
average openings for corresponding sizes. The percentage by weight of 20 mm aggregates that will
pass a screen having 10 mm square openings shall not be less than 35 percent and shall not
exceed 50 percent, unless a larger percentage, that however shall not exceed 50 percent, unless a
larger percentage, that however shall not be more than 60 percent, is authorized by the Owner in
order to avoid waste of other sizes.
The grading of different size of natural coarse aggregates for use in concrete making shall
be as given in the table 5.3 above subject to the requirement of the design,
Fine aggregates shall consist of hard dense, durable and uncoated rock fragments and shall
be free from injurious, amount of dust, lumps, soft or flak, particles, shales, alkall, organic
matter, loam, mica and other deleterious substance. The percentage of deleterious substances in the
sand as delivered to the mixer after processing of aggregates as determined in accordance with “IS:
2386 (Part-II) 1977. Method of Test for aggregates for Concrete” shall not exceed the limits
specified. Table 1 on page 8 of IS 383:1970 ) “specifications for coarse and Fine Aggregates from
Natural Sources for Concrete”
The sum of the percentage of all deleterious substances, including mica shall not exceed 5%
by weight of fine aggregate. The percentage of mica lumped in with other deleterious substances
such as coated grains, flaky particles loam etc shall not exceed
2% by weight.
“Contractor shall get samples of coarse and fine aggregates tested at regular interval for
risk of potential alkali-aggregate reactivity”
Sand, producing a co lour darker than the standard in the calorimetric test for organic
impurities in accordance with IS 2386 (Part.II) 1977 shall be rejected. Normally sand shall be
discarded if the portion retained on 300 micron sieve conforming to IS :460
-1962 when subject to five cycles of test for soundness in accordance with IS 2386 (Part- V 1977
shows a weighted average loss of more than10% by weight when tested with sodium sulphate and
15% when tested with magnesium sulphate, unless it is proved that the concrete production from
such sand is of acceptable strength and quality. Fine aggregates (Sand) as delivered to the batching
plant, shall have a reasonable, uniform and stable moisture content and shall therefore, be stored
after washing I stock piles with afree drawing base at least for three days after washing.
12.3.8.GRADING:
a) Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregates shall be separated in to nominal sizes asindicate

in Table 5.2 given above (At page 5.232)
TABLE – 5.4
LIMITS OF GRADATION FOR COARSE GGREGATES

Maximum size Percentage of coarse aggregates fractions Of
aggregates (clean separation)
In concrete in mm
Medium Fine Gravel
Gravel Gavel
20 mm 10 mm 4.75 mm
to to to
40 mm 20 mm 10 mm
20 mm - 55.73 27.45
40 mm 40.55 10.35 15.25
(b) Fine aggregates/sand as batched shall be well graded and when tested by means of standard
screens in accordance with the method of test prescribed in IS : 2386 (Part-1) – 1977 shall conform
to the limits as indicated at table 5 5. at page 5.235.
TABLE – 5.5
LIMITS OF GRADATION FOR FINE AGGREGATES.

Sieve No. size Sieve Size Sieve Size Individual
Conforming to Conforming Conforming percentage
IS: 460 – 1978 A.S.T.H.M B.S.Specifictions retained by weight.
4.75 Millimeter 4 3/16 0–5
2.36 Millimeter 8 7 5 – 15
1.1 Millimeter 16 15 10 – 15
600 Micrometer 30 25 10-30
30 Micrometer 50 52 15-35
150 Micrometer 100 100 12-20
75 Micrometer pan Pan 3-7
Sand delivered to the mixer shall have a fineness modulus of not less than 2.4 and not more
than 2.8 Grading of sand shall be so controlled that the fineness modules of at least 9 out of 10
consecutive test samples of finished sand taken at 6 hours time interval will not vary by more than
0.2 from the average fineness modulus of the 10 test samples. At the start of concreting
operations, the variations in fineness modulus shall not exceed
0.20 from the accepted average value established. During preliminary operation of screening plants
subjects to the limits specified herein above.
PARTICLE SHAPE
The shape of the particles in the fine aggregate and in the coarse aggregates shall generally
be spherical or cubical. The quantity of flat and elongated particles in the separate size groups of
coarse aggregates shall not exceed 30% in any size group.
STORAGE
Aggregates shall be stored and handled in such as manner that will prevent the intermingling
of various sizes of aggregates separately required for grading purposes. No foreign matter shall b
allowed to be mixed up with the aggregates. Stock piles shall be build in layers of uniform
thickness.
MOISTURE CONTROL:
The free moisture content of the fine aggregates and the smallest size group of coarse
aggregates, as delivered to the mixers shall be so controlled as not to exceed 6 and
3 respectively, expressed as a percentage by weight of the saturated surface of dry aggregates. In
addition to the limits on the maximum amounts of free moisture in the fine aggregates and the
smallest size of coarse aggregates moisture content shall be so controlled that for each size the
variation in the percentage of free moisture shall not bemore than 0.5 percent during any one hour
of mixing plant operations and the variation in moisture content shall not be more than 2% during
any eight hours period of mixing plant operation. Moisture content of other sizes of the coarse
aggregates shall be so controlled that the aggregates are delivered to the mixes with the least
amount of free moisture and the least variations in free moisture practicable under the job
conditions. Under no
conditions shall other sizes of coarse aggregates be delivered to the mixing plant bins “Dripping
Wet”. The contractor may accomplish the required moisture control by use of free drainage storage,
mechanical dewatering devices or any other satisfactory means or combinations of mea
WATER
Water used for mixing Concrete and mortar and all so for washing aggregates and curing
shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, salts, sugar, organic materials
and other substances that may be deleterious to concrete or steel. Potable water shall be used for
mixing concrete.
The permissible limits for solids when tested in accordance with IS: 3025-1964
:Methods of sampling and test (Physical and Chemical) for water used in industry” shall be as
specified in Table-1 on page 23 of “IS :456 -1979 for code practice for plain and Reinforced
concrete” reproduced under.
TABLE -5.6
Permissible limits for solids in water used for mixing concrete.

Material Maximum Permissible limits
Organic 200 mg/litre
Inorganic 3000 mg/litre
Sulphates (as SO4) 500mg/litre
Chlorides (as C1) 2000 mg/litre for plain Concrete work
And 1000mg/litre for reinforced concrete.
Suspended matter 2000 mg/litre.
PROPORTIONING OF CONCRETE
AGGREGATES
The proportion of all materials entering in to the concrete shall be as directed. Concrete
mixer shall be so designed as to use the largest size of maximum amount of coarse aggregates
available and place able in the various parts of the structure. The proportions will be changed
wherever changes are considered necessary to maintain the standard of quality required for the
structures covered by these specifications and to meet the varying conditions encountered during
construction.
WATER –CEMENT RATIO

Water -Cement Ratio will be regulated by the requirements of workability, strength and
durability. The proportion of water to cement in any concrete shall be such as to produce a mixture
which can work readily in to corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement bars without
segregation. Whenever concrete is being conveyed over a long distance during hot or dry weather,
an allowance may be made for probable evaporation during the period when concrete is being
transported. Uniformity in consistency from batch to batch shall be required. Every mixer shall be
provided with a water meter in order to control the water content in each batch. Its use must be
supplemented by frequent slump tests, the results of which should be noticed on the recorded roll
opposite the corresponding consistency graphs. Workability will bemeasured by slump. Slump of
the concrete after it has been deposited but before it has
been compacted, shall be the lowest practicable but not exceeding 50 mm for concrete containing 75
mm maximum size. Aggregates and 100 mm for all other concrete.
For pumped concrete for tunnel lining the slump shall be 100 mm -112.50 mm. The Owner may,
however, direct to achieve a lesser slump whenever such lesser slump is practicable. The proportion
of water in concrete for strength and durability shall be determined in laboratory for given aggregates
on the basis of requirement of strength, durability and workability. Total weight of water in concrete
mix, including all free water in the aggregates shall be taken for calculating the water cement
ratios. The Owner mayalso allot the use of Super Plasticizer in the concrete mix, if required.
MEASUREMENT OF MATERIALS:
The method of measuring materials for mixing concrete shall be such that the proportions of
constituents in the mixes are controlled and readily checked at any time during the progress of the
work. Materials shall be measured as follows.
Each size of aggregated, cement, admixtures and water shall be weighted separately for
each batch. Weighing shall be done by weight batchers which should meet the following
requirements.
i) Accuracy shall be set in such a manner that the indicated weight of any hopper full
of material does not vary more than one percent of the requiredweight.
ii) The weighting equipment shall be designed to permit ready and proper
adjustment of the proportion of the mix.
iii) The equipment shall be capable of controlling the rate of delivery of each kind and
size of materials that the combined in accuracy in feeding and measuring during
normal operations does not exceed 1 percent for water,
1.5 percent for cement, 3 percent for admixtures,2 percent for sand, 2 percent for
10mm,20mm, and 40mm, coarse aggregates and 3 percent for 75 mm coarse
aggregates.
iv) The operating mechanism for measuring the amount of water shall be such that no
leakage occurs when the valves are closed. The discharge valve shall not be
opened before the filling valve is closed.
v) Test scale weight shall be provided and periodic checks made of the accuracy of all
weighing equipment‟s.
No extra charges shall be payable for weighing of cement before mixing. The contractor
shall not be entitled to any claim or compensation from the Department on account of any
shortage in the weight of cement in bags.
The water cement ratio by weight, established for each class of concrete shall be
held within the limits specified under paragraph 5.6 10.2 Water for mixing shall be
measured by weight, and the measuring device shall be so accurate as not to permit
variations more than one percent. A reliable method of compensating for free water shall be
used for maintaining a constant water cement ratio.
12.3.9 CONTRACTOR‟S PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Prior to installation of the plant and equipment for manufacturing, processing, handling,
transporting and storing concrete ingredients and for proportioning, mixing, transporting, placing and
compacting concrete, the Contractor shall prepare drawings showing proposed locations and details
of plant installations from the store to the site of Owk Tunnel.
Detailed description/specification of the plant and the procedure proposed to be adopted in
installation and operation of the plant and equipment shall accompany the drawings to enable the
Department to scrutinize the whole schemes in adequate measure. The capacity of the individual
components as also the over all plant should be adequate to fulfill the output targets given in the
tender and no component or element shall prove to be a bottleneck for peak production. The
drawings shall also indicate sampling and testing facilities being made available to the quality
control set up the Department.
The plant, equipment and storage facilities shall at all times be subject to approval of the
Owner.
Approval to plant and equipment or its working or of any procedure shall not absolve the
contractor of his responsibility about the quality of materials or finished work described in the
specifications.
The capacity of the aggregate conveying and rescreening equipment shall be adequate to
maintain storage bins at a satisfactory level without resorting to overloading of screens or transfer
equipment during period of peak production. The rescreening plant shall be so located arranged and
operated that it will ensure delivery to the mixers of uniformly graded aggregates with moisture
content conforming to the specifications. Every unit of batching and mixing plant shall be
provided with a water metre in order to control the water content in each batch.
Cement, each size of coarse aggregates, fine aggregates and admixtures shall have separate
weigh batchers which shall meet the requirement stipulated in paragraph 5.6 10.3
12.3.10 BATCHING AND MIXING
12.3.11 GENERAL:
The contractor shall provide maintain and operate the equipment required, which will
determine accurately and control the prescribed amounts of the various ingredients of the concrete by
separate weighing. Quantities of water and each admixture shall be determined by weighing. Batch
bins shall be self-cleaning during drawdown. Equipment for conveying batched materials from the
batch hopper or hoppers to and in to the mixer shall be so constructed, maintained and operated that
there shall be no spillage of the batched materials or overlap of batches. Equipment for handling
cement shall be such that it shall prevent noticeable increase of dust in the plant during their
measuring and discharging. If the batching and mixing plant is enclosed, the Contractor shall install
exhaust fans or other equipment for removing dust.
12.3.11.1 WEIGHING AND MEASURING EQUIPMENTS:
Weighing hoppers shall be so constructed as to permit the convenient removal of over weight
materials in excess of the prescribed tolerances.The scales shall be interlocked so that a new batch
cannot be started until the weighing hoppers have been completely emptied of the previous batch
and the scales or in balance. Each weighing unit shall include visible springles dial which shall
register the scale load at any stage of the weighing operation from zero to full capacity.
The equipment shall be capable for ready adjustment for compensating the varying
weight of any moisture contained in the aggregate and changing the mix proportions and shall also
be capable of controlling the delivery of material for weighing
of volumetric measurement so that the combined inaccuracies n feeding and measuring during
normal operation shall not exceed 1 percent for water 1.5 percent for cement 3 percent for admixture,
2 percent for sand, 2 percent for 10mm,20mm, and 40mm coarse aggregate and 3 percent for 75 mm
coarse aggregates
The operating mechanism in the water measuring device shall be such that leakage shall not
occur when the valves are closed. The water measuring device shall discharge quickly and freely in
to the mixer without objectionable dripple from the end of the discharge pipe. In addition to the water
measuring device, there shall be supplement means for measuring and introducing small
increments of water into each mixer when required for final tempering of the concrete. This
equipment shall introduce the added water well in the batch.
Dispensers of air entraining agent, calcium chloride solutions and water reducing agents
shall have sufficient capacity to measure and discharge at one time the full quantityof the properly
diluted solution required for each batch an shall be maintained in a clean and freely operating
condition. Equipment for measuring shall be designed to conform to the accepted standard of
accuracy of the measurement for each batch.
12.3.11.2 MIXING
Mixing plant shall be so installed that the mixing action in atleast one of themixers can be
observed conveniently from the control station, and whenever required mixing action of each mixer
can be observed from a safe location easily accessible from the control station. Arrangements, shall
also be made to enable the plant operator to observe the concrete in the receiving hopper or buckets
after discharge from the mixers. Mix design shall ensure uniform distribution of all ingredients
throughout the mass in the end of mixing period. Any wet batch hopper through which the
concrete passess shouldbe conical in shape. The mixing time shall be as under.
TABLE-5.7
MIXING TIME
Capacity of mixer Time of mixing in

In cubic metre minutes
Up to 1.5 1½
Beyond 1.5 and up to 2.00 2
Beyond 2.0 and up to 5.00 2½
Equipment that fails to conform to the above requirements or is in capable of producing acceptable
results(Minimum segregation and loss of slump) shall be modified promptly or replaced as directed
by the Owner.
12.3.12 TRASPORTATION
The concrete shall be conveyed from the mixer to the place of final destination as soon as
possible, by methods which will prevent segregation or loss of materials or loss of
plasticity by more than 25 mm of the slumps. There shall be no vertical drop greater than 1.5
m except where suitable equipment is provided to prevent segregation and where specifically
authorized. Transportation equipment and methods shall be such as to enable placement of
concrete in its final position within 30 minutes after mixing. The vehicles to transport
concrete from the mixer
to its final destination, as well as the handling method shall comply all the requirements of
the IS 456:2000. “Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete” The use of
transportation equipment lacking the mixing elements, will be permitted only under the
written authorization of the Owner and when it meets the aforementioned Indian Standard
requirements. The contractor shall deploy agitator cars/transit mixers of adequate capacity
(around 4 cum or above) for transporting concrete.
12.3.13.1 PUMPING OF CONCRETE
(1) The placement of concrete in tunnel lining shall be through deployment of concrete
pumps”.
The concrete pumps; must be of the proper type without „Y‟ Section and sufficient
impulse capacity. The equipment shall be cleaned after each operation. The maximum loss
of slump in the pumping equipment shall not exceed 4 cm.
The concrete in tunnel linings and arches and in location difficult to access, shallbe placed
by pumping. The method used must give satisfactory results and shall be subject to the
approval of the Owner. As the pump is very sensitive to the change in consistency of the
concrete, a careful control on consistency shall be maintained specially throughout to ensure
efficient working of the pump.
2) The delivery pipe line from the concrete pump to the shuttering shall be wrapped with
gunny bags and sprinkled with water to keep it cool to prevent excessive temperature.
The pumping plant shall be maintained in an efficient order throughout the pumping
operation. Leakage of water in to the concrete shall be avoided. Water that is a admitted to
the cylinder walls shall flow under gravity not under pressure. During clearing of the
pipe line waste water shall not be permitted to flow in to the forms.
12.3.13 SHUTTERING FOR TUNNEL LINING
i. Form works for final concrete of overt portion of the tunnel shall, in general consist of
an approved movable type of telescopic and or collapsible steel shuttering of robust
design manufactured in adequate lengths.
ii. The forms shall be fitted with ample windows at appropriate spacings and locations to
allow the introduction of vibrators and to carryout inspections and any other work
needed behind the form.
iii. The form work shall be of rigid construction, non-deformable due to working loads
imposed upon it. Once installed in the position, the form shall remain in position
without displacement during concrete placement.
iv. The form work shall be constructed in such a way that no abrupt irregularities arise at
article construction joints. The joint in form work shall overlap the vertical construction
joint by at least 50 cm.
v. The windows shall be provided in each side about the midweight of the tunnel and at
the crow on alternate side of the centerline. The windows shall be at
least 60 cm in the least dimension and shall be spaced at a distance preferablynot
exceeding 2.5 m
vi. Forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition particularly as tosize, shape,
strength rigidity, tightness and smoothness of surface.
vii. The Owner will, at any time, have the right to reject form work which he considers to be
no longer fit for use. The water shall be controlled to the satisfaction of the Owner by
means of grouting, caulking diverting by pipes or pans and pumped from sumps as
approved by the Owner from time to time. Before placing concrete around steel liners
in tunnel, the outside surface ofthe steel liners shall be cleaned by removing all loose
rust, scale or other objectionable materials and shall be maintained clean until the
concrete isplaced. In the case of steel shuttering, the surfaces against which concrete
is to be placed shall be thoroughly cleaned and profusely oiled, care however being
taken to prevent oil flowing along the surface or otherwise getting mixed with
unhardened concrete.
All temporary timber shall be removed from outside the line prior to concreting. The
surface of steel support and steel rib support be cleaned as for steel liners, prior to placing any
concrete against these surface.
All support timer shall be removed as far as practically possible and safe prior to
commencing any concreting, provided that all support timber within the clearance line shall be
removed entirely.
All steel rib support to be encased in concrete shall be adjusted to be in the position
shown on the drawings or ordered by the Owner prior to performing any concreting.
Where grouted rock bolts are to be encased in concrete lining , these shall first be grouted
prior to commencing concreting, except where such items are to be released for the purpose of
checking tension.
12.3.14 CONCRETE VIBRATION AND POURING
12.3.14.1 Before concrete is placed., all the mixing and transportation equipment
shall be cleaned carefully. All places where the concrete is to be poured must be
clean and free of debits and forms shall be coated properly with oil or damped
whenever, it is possible. The reinforcement shall be free from rust, mud, oil or
layers of non metallic coatings. Old surface shall be treated as specified here in
after. Before placing the concrete it will be necessary to pump out all the stagnant
water from the site of placement.
12.3.14.2 The contractor shall notify the Owner when he is ready to pour
concrete at any site in order to enable him to inspect the forms, foundations,
reinforcement, etc., The contractor shall not start the pouring operation at a
determined place before inspection an approval of the Owner.
12.3.14.3 The most important requisite for the concrete pouring is the use of
methods minimizing segregation of coarse aggregates from the mix. Further
more, the mixing and pouring equipment shall have enough capacity to prevent
the concrete setting and cold joints. Retempering the concrete is not allowed.
12.3.14.4 The concrete shall have the consistency and composition such as to
permit pouring in all corners and angles of the forms, around the reinforcement or
any other embedded element without segregation. Each concrete batch shall be
deposited as close as possible to its final position to avoid segregation due to
rehandling or flowing. Free water on the surface of placed concrete shall be
collected in depression away from the forms and taken out before placing new
layer of concrete, which will be placed as soon as possible and never after, 30
minutes of having laid the previous one.
12.3.15.5. When concrete is placed on foundation, this foundations shall be clean and
dump but without stored or running water on it. Concrete shall not be placed on mud, dry
porous earth or fills not authorized by the Owner.
12.3.15.6 Rock surface on which the concrete is to be placed must be clean and free from oil,
standing or running water, mud, debris or fragments of soft rock or semi adhered rock. This
cleaning operation shall be carried out with pressurized air and water, wire brushes or by
other approved methods. Rock surface must be continuously dampened for 24 hours
immediately prior to placing concreting thereon. No extra payment for cleaning the surface
before placement of concrete thereon. No extra payment for cleaning the surface before
placement of concrete shall be made. The rate tendered for various items of concrete in
section-7 bill of quantities shall include all such extra efforts required for cleaning.
12.3.15.7Concrete shall be consolidated with the aid of mechanical vibrators complemented

with manual labour but in no case vibrators may be used to displace or spread fresh concrete
during the pouring operation. The vibration equipment and its more important mechanical
characteristics must be known by the Owner and its use in the work will depend upon his
approval. In order to obtain an adequate consolidation, sufficient number of vibrator shall be
available. The concrete shall be adequately vibrated through surface vibrators fixed to the
steel shutter and immersion type vibrators form the windows provided suitably in the shutter.
The types of vibrators recommended are shown in table 5,8 below.
TABLE 5.8
Immersion vibrators for concrete
Sl. No. Type of concrete Suitable vibrator.
Concrete with maximum size Immersion type, vibrating
Aggregate 40 mm head 60 mm diameter, 700
Impulses per minute.
12.3.15.8The vibrating operation shall only last the necessary time to reach the required
consolidation without producing segregation of materials. Vibrators must not penetrate in to
those areas where vibration might effect the reinforcement position or the elements embedded
into the concrete when setting has already started.
12.3.15.9The concrete handling close the surface of the upper part of a pour shallbe the
minimum necessary to produce the required consolidation for this layer and to obtain rugged
surface that will offer good adherence of concrete of the nextpour. Neither vibration in
the surface shall be permitted nor any other operation
that may tend to produce a smooth surface in the horizontal constructions joints.The top
surface which are not provided with formwork and that will not be covered with concrete
or back filled shall be finished at an elevation slightly higher than that indicated and the
excess of material shall be removed with a ruler or the required finishing shall be applied as
indicated in the drawings and in these specifications.
12.3.15.10Special care shall be taken to prevent segregation of the coarse aggregate when
concrete is being placed through the reinforcement. At the bottomof the beams and slabs in
the cases where reinforcement is congested making it difficult to place the concrete properly, a
layer of mortar may be deposited containing the same proportion of sand cement and water
as used in the concretebut only to the necessary depth in accordance with the direction of
the Owner.While placing concrete at any site, concrete shall not be allowed to fall from a
height greater than 1.50 Meters, except when special means previously approvedby the
Owner.
12.3.15.11Concrete shall not be placed when there is a need for blasting in the nearby places
without written approval of Owner. If blasting is necessary near places where concrete has
been placed they must be carried out with the authorization of the Owner and keeping safe
blasting distance as decided by the Owner.
12.3.16 PREPARATION OF CONSTRUCTION JOINTS.
12.3.16.1 GENERAL
Concrete surfaces upon or against which concrete is to be placed and to which new
concrete is to adhere, that have become so rigid that new concrete can not be incorporated
integrally with that previously placed, are defined as construction joints.
The surfaces of construction joints shall be clean, rough and damp but free from
standing pools of water when receiving the next lift. Clean up shall comprise removal of all
laitance loose or defective concrete, coatings, sand, curing compound, if used, and other
foreign materials, if necessary by scrapping, chippings, wet and sand blasting, washing
thoroughly with air-water jets and surface drying the joints prior to placing of new
concrete.
As a lift is completed, the top surface shall be immediately and carefully protected
from any condition that will damage the concrete Horizontal construction joints of the lifts
with relatively open and accessible surface shall be prepared for receiving the next lift by
cleaning with air water cutting (green cutting), wet sand blasting, chipping and (or) water
blasting. The contractor shall obtain approval of the wet sand blasting or water blasting
equipment that he proposes to utilize for this purpose. If the surface of a lift is congested
with reinforcing steel is relatively inaccessible, or if for any other reason it is considered
undesirable to disturb the surfaces, cutting by means of air water jets shall not be permitted.
At such places, wet blasting or water blasting shall be adopted.
12.3.16.2 AIR WATER CUTTING.
Air water cutting (green cutting) of a construction joint shall be performed to
remove, laitance, if the next lift is planned to be placed within 4 to 12 days of the
completion of previous lift. Green cutting shall be one within 8 to 16 hours of laying
concrete depending upon ambient temperature and humidity etc. The green cutting shall be
done only horizontal surface after the concrete has stiffened but before the concrete has
become too hard for effective cutting for a construction joint. The surface shall be cut
with a high pressure air-water jet to remove all laitance and to expose clean, sound
aggregate, but not to undercut and edges of the larger particles of aggregate. A jet or air and
water at approximately 90 to 100 psi (6.33 to 7 Kgs/cm 2) pressure be use for green cutting.
After green cutting, the surface shall be washed and as long as there is any trace of
cloudiness in the wash water. The surface shall again be washed just prior to placing the
succeeding lift. Where it is necessary to remove accumulated laitance, coatings, stains, debris
and other foreign material, wet sand blasting will be required as the last operation before
placing the next lift.
12.3.16.3 WATER BLASTING

A stream of water under pressure of not less than 4 kg/cm2 may be used for
cleaning as directed by the Owner. Its use shall be delayed until the concrete is sufficiently
hard so that only the surface skin of mortar is removed ad there is no undercutting of coarse
aggregate particles. When cleaning is done more than two days prior to placing the next lift,
additional clean up even informing of the deposits on the joint surface during these days
shall be carried out as final clean up operation prior to concreting. If the water jet is
incapable of satisfactory cleaning, the surface shall be cleaned by wet sand blasting.
12.3.16.4 WET SAND BLASTING.

When employed in the preparation of construction joints, wet sand blasting shall be
performed as the final operation before placing and not more than two days prior to
placing the following lift. The operation shall be continue until all accumulated laitance,
coatings, stains, debris and other foreign materials are removed. The surface of the concrete
shall then be washed thoroughly to remove all loose materials. The surface shall again be
washed just prior to placing the succeeding lift inside surfaces shall be washed just prior to
placing the plugs.
12.3.16.5 CHIPPING AND ROUGHENING OF CONCRETE SURFACES:

Concrete surfaces, particularly formed surfaces, upon or against which additional
concrete is to be placed shall be chipped and roughened to a depth of not more than 2.5 cm
from the surface. The roughening shall be performed by chipping or other satisfactory
methods and in such a manner as not to loosen or shatter any part of the concrete beyond the
roughened surface. After being roughened the surface of the concrete shall be cleaned
thoroughly of all loose fragments, dirt, lime and other objectional materials and shall be
sound land hard and in such condition as to assure good mechanical bond between old new
concrete. All concrete which is not hard, dense and durable shall be removed to the
depth required to secure a satisfactory surface.
12.3.16.6 WASTE WATER DISPOSAL.

The method used in disposing off waste employed in cutting, washing and rinsingof
concrete surface shall be, such that the waste water does not strain, disc effect exposed
surfaces of the structures. Methods of disposal of waste water shall be subject to approvalof the
Owner.
12.3.17 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS AND SEQUENCE OF CONCRETING

Unless otherwise shown on the drawings or permitted by the Owner and where the lining
invert is curved, in cross section the concrete shall b placed in a continuous operation up to at least
the level of the longitudinal axis of the excavation or to the springing of any roof arch, provided that
smaller pours may be placed if shown on the drawings or permitted by the Owner unless otherwise
shown on the drawing or permitted by the Owner unless otherwise shown on the drawing or
permitted by the Owner. The tunnel lining shall either be poured in Sections or by high –speed
continuous pouring. If the contractor wishes to place concrete lining in sections, he shall furnish
details of concreting gentry (with dimensioned sketch) proposed to be deployed by him along with
the sequence of concrete placement and consolidation. If he wishes to use the latter method, he
shall furnish the complete methodology of continuous pouring technique and details of telescopic
shutters and motorized traveler and satisfy the Owner that the concrete production, transportation,
and placing equipment proposed to be deployed has adequate capacity to produce and handle the
quantity of concrete necessary for continuous pouring of lining. In addition the contractor shall
submit details of the steps to be taken in the event of a interruption in the concrete supply. In
any cross section the roof arches shall however be poured in a single operation without any
construction joints breaking the arch. When any intermediate construction joints are permitted by the
Owner measures recommended by him shall be taken at the joints such as dowel bars, keys
grooves etc aton extra cost to the department except the dowels ordered to be placed by the Owner
shallbe paid under reinforcement item.
Unless otherwise shown on the drawing or ordered by the Owner the invert lining of
excavation shall not be cast until such time as the movement of personnel and equipment over
these section can be kept to a minimum. When the invert linings is cast first or is shall be protected
by the Contractor subsequently, it shall be protected by the Contractor at his own expense by placing
soft soil over the concrete. Concreting shall normally be commenced from the farthest end and
progress outwards unless otherwise permitted by the Owner.
Unless otherwise directed or permitted, the concrete lining of the tunnels shall be placed in a
single operation for the sides and arch together, and no construction joints allowed. The invert shall
be placed independently when, however, so approved or directed by the Owner, longitudinal
construction joints may be kept between the sides and the arch, the exact locations and details of
construction joints shall be subject to theapproved of the Owner.
The contractor shall take sufficient care to protect adequately the surface of the completed
work from damage. Any damage to the invert shall be made good in such area and with such
materials and method as the Owner may direct and to his satisfaction.
The contractor may, if he so desires, place concrete, in the invert up to the minimum
excavation lines shown in the drawing and carry out the invert concrete of the specified thickness
later. The cost of such concreting in two layers at different times together with the cost of operation
involved in cleaning and removing and replaced concrete shall be deemed to be covered by the
overall item rate tendered.
The Owner may at his discretion, direct the invert to be laid last in all cases thecost of
initial cleaning or cleaning at the appropriate time is covered time is covered bythe item rate.
12.3.18 BULK HEAD JOINTS
Bulk headed joints are the circumferential construction joints, necessitated because of
stopping of the concreting at the end of concreting day, the joints bing formed by using bulk head of
a satisfactory design. Care shall be tken to fill in crete tightly against the bulk head, So also care
shall be taken to pack concrete at the joints, while starting the next days operations. The joints shall
be finished in a vertical plane at right angles to the axis of the tunnel.
12.3.19 EXPANSION JOINTS
Expansion joints shall be provided at 30 m interval or at suitable locations as shown in the

drawings, or as directed by the Owner embedding 300 mm wide PVC water stops confirming to ISI
22001/1987. The joints shall be painted with one coat of primer and shall be filled with a
performed joint filler conforming to IS 1838 : 1984. The joint shall be filled to its full depth
leaving a gap of about 25 mm at the top and bottom. The gap shall be sealed with sealing
compound,
The primer, sealing compound and performed fillers shall conform to IS 5256:1968 for
sealing joint in the concrete lining of channel, and IS 1838 : 1984 for performed filler respectively.
The rate tendered for item is inclusive of all the materials required for laying, fixing, filling and all
the preparations defined in the nomenclature ofthe item.
12.3.20ALIGNMENT AND TOLERANCES

12.3.20.1 GENERAL
Tolerance stated under this article are different from the surface irregularities, refereed to
under “Finishings” of these specifications.The tolerances take into account the influence of variations
in the alignment on the structural or hydraulic behaviour of the different structure. Slope dimension
or alignment deviations in the different structures. Slope dimension or alignment deviations in the
different structures shall not have higher values than those here in specified. Concrete work not
complying with the specified tolerances shall be repaired or demolished when order by the
Owner at the contractor‟scost.
12.3.20.2 TOLERANCES FOR TUNNELS AND SHAFTS.

(a) Variation of any reach with
respect to the general alignment
or slope but without any sharp change 1.5 cm.
(b) Variation in the inside diameter 1.5 cm
(c) Variation in the duct by defect 0.5 cm

thickness at any point by excess 2.5 Cm
12.3.20.3 TOLERANCES FOR PLACING THE REINFORCEMENT STEEL.
Tolerence
(a) Variation in the coverings For coverings and spacing of 0.5 cm
5 cm.
(b) Variation in centre to For spacing of 8 cm 1.00 cm
Centre spacing
FINISHINGS
GENERAL.
Deviations from the vertical, levels, slopes, alignment, etc., which are specified under the
proceeding para are different from the surface irregularities or from the contracts between two
surfaces as described in this article. All surface finishings shall be accomplished by qualified
personnel and unless otherwise permitted, they will be performed under the control of Owner.
The surface irregularities will be measured by the Owner in order to determine if they are
with in the limits here in specified.
The finishing irregularities will be considered as “abrupt” and “gradual” All poorly
aligned joints as well as offsets and abrupt projections resulting from defective placing of the from
or from other errors, are considered as “arbupt irregularities” and shall be measured directly.
Other irregularities are considered as “gradual” and will be measured with metallic rules or with their
equivalent for curved surfaces Rules of 1.5 M shall be used for formed surfaces and 3 M rulers for
unformed surfaces.
FORMED SURFACES.
Formed surfaces are classified into four groups.
Type F1, typeF2,type F3 and Type F.4 Generally, and unless otherwise shown in the
drawings or as ordered by the Owner a different type of surface for a specific work, they
correspond to the following.
TYPE F-1 SURFACE.

It corresponds to the formed surfaces to be covered with earth fills. They will not need
special maintenance after the forms removal, except repair of defective concrete, the filling holes left
by the fasteners as later on specified and the necessary curing. Correction of superficial
irregularities described under paragraph of 5.624.2 of this article, shall be applied only to depression
over 2 cm.
5/6/22/4 TYPE F-2 SURFACE.
It corresponds to those formed surfaces that will not be covered with earth and not included
in type F-3, and F-4,. Superficial irregularities measured as indicated under paragraph 5.6.24.2 of
these specification shall not be over 0.5 cm for abrupt irregularities, nor over 1.0 cm for gradual
irregularities. All irregularities, abrupt and gradual exceeding the permissible limits for F-2 surfaces
must be polished with emery or by any other method approved by the Owner. Type F-2 surfaces
will not require special treatment except repair of defective surfaces, filling of the holes left by the
fasteners and the necessary curing.
TYPE F-3 SURFACE

It corresponds to the inside surface of the tunnel, where smoothness is very important. The
Superficial abrupt irregularities shall not exceed 3 mm and the gradual 5 mm. The complete lower
semi circumference of the transition surfaces and the tunnel
inverts, that in the opinion of the Owner have pouring defect shall receive the following treatment
after minor repairs of the surface. Soft pressure sand jet shall be applied to remove superficial
grounds layer and exposed small holes due to air pockets. Afterwards, and with the concrete surfaces
dampened, mortar will be applied into the small cavities.
The mortar shall penetrate under rubbing with emery stone No.60m, and it shall be cured
permanently with dampened burlap for 14 days when excess of mortar shall be removed with an
emery stone No.30 with a continuous water flow during the operation.
The tunnel transition will be made with forms that fit, as much as possible, to the form
indicated in the drawings. Construction joints in addition to those indicated in the drawings shall not
be permitted. Special care must be taken while repairing and grinding the irregularities on the
transition surfaces.
The circumferential construction joints at the shafts and lines areas of the tunnels must be
made in such a manner that the downstream side of each joint does not project from the upstream
side.
TYPE F-4 SURFACE.

It corresponds to the faces of structures exposed in a noticeable manner to the public view,
generally named as “architectural concrete” Unless otherwise specified regarding colours and
finishing different from those obtained with the concrete mix for these surfaces, the following
indications must be carefully observed.
(1) No changes of the cement content per cubic metre of mix will be made; 2) only one type
of cement shall be sued,(3) only one source of coarse aggregate shall be used and there shall be
no variations in the maximum size,(4) only one source of fines and only one consistency for the mix
shall be used, (5) finally, the water cement ratio, by weight, shall not exceed from 0.46. All
indications given regarding quality and use of the forms as well as the concrete pouring shall be
followed carefully.
UNFORMED SURAFACES
GENERAL
All exposed exterior surfaces the oritically horizontal shall be provided with a gentle slope
for drainage, as shown in the drawings or as indicated by the Owner. Theslope of narrow surface
shall be of approximately 3% and for wide surface such as flowers, platforms etc. Shall be around
1% finishings for the different surfaces are classified into four groups. Type U1,type U2,type U3
and U4 as follows.
TYPE U1 FINISHING (SCREEDED FINISHING)

It is applied to unformed surfaces to be covered by files or concrete. It is also applied, as the
first stage, for surface with type U2 and type U3 finishings. The finishing consists of executing the
necessary operations screeding the whole surface in order to obtain a uniform and sufficiently
levelled surfaced.
The superficial irregularities, ”abrupt” or “gradual” as defined in paragraph

5.6.24.2 shall not be over 1.0 cm.
56.23.3 TYPE U2 FINISHING (MASON‟S FLOAT FINISHING)
It is applied to unformed surfaces which will not be covered with fills or concrete, such as
roof slab of the various shafts, etc. This finishing may be accomplished with mechanical equipment
or by hand and it will be started as soon as the screeded surfaces
have hardened enough to obtain the results specified by the Owner. The use of the mason‟s float
shall be the minimum necessary as to eliminate marks left by the screed. A fresh concrete surface
cannot be worked with the mason‟s float because it would produce mix segregation and smooth
surface is not to be obtained by adding cement or by bleeding the grout using mason‟s floats or
trowels. The surface irregularities, “abrupt” and or “gradual”, as described in paragraph 5.6.24.2
will not be over 0.5 cm joints and corners shall be levelled when finishing the surface, as shown in
the drawings.
TYPE U3 FINISHING (TROWLED FINISHING)

It is applied to unformed surfaces, at the floor of the exit and access tunnels. It will be
obtained by applying pressure with trowel to seat grains and produce a smoothand dense surface
but it can only be done after the floated surface has hardened enough to avoid segregation by floating
of grout and fines.
This finishing shall not show noticeable irregularities on the surface.
TYPE U4 FINISHING (FLOATED FINISHING)
It is applied to floor surfaces defined to pedestrains or vehicles and with a slope over 5%.
This type of finishing is like type U2 but with grooves on the surface, as shown in the drawings.
Irregularities and level of corners shall meet the specified requirements for type U2 finishing.
FORMS
GENERAL
Forms shall be used where necessary to confine concrete and give it the required shape and
dimensions. Form shall be constructed sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar through them. At
the corners of the forms where indicated in the drawings or where ordered by the Owner, special
forms shall be placed to level the edges of permanently exposed surfaces.
Form can be made out of wood, steel or any other approved material. The cost of labour,
materials and equipment for the manufacturing and placing of forms and the costof the necessary
additional operations shall be included in the tendered rates for concrete.
FORM PANELS.
The wood or materials used for the manufacturing of form panels shall be of first quality
producing neither chemical deterioration nor changes of colour in the concrete surfaces, The
characteristics of the panels, used in a given site as well as their adjustment and polishing shall
correspond to the indicated requirements of these specifications in regard to the finishings ofl the
various surface classifications.
For type F-1 surfaces, in accordance with the classifications given here in after panels
manufactured with but wood, well smoothened after construction, may also be used. For type F-2
surfaces, panels shall be made out of rigid sections, as large as possible, with tongue and groove
joints from first quality wood, smoothened and sufficiently thick to prevent distortions or of rigid
multiple-layered wood having at least 5 layers. For type F-2,F-3 and F4 surface forms lined with
galvanized sheets or any other material which may give rise to polished and glossy finishings will
not be acceptable.
UNIFORMITY OF THE FORM PANELS.
Panels for types F-2,F-3 and F-4 finishings shall be constructed in such a way as to create
a uniform and consistent texture in the exposed concrete surface.
Wood form panels shall be planned to avoid as much as possible, joints between planks leaving
permanent marking on the concrete surfaces. Where surface continuity is required, joints between
panels shall be filled with a putty made out of equal parts of felt and portland cement. After each
puring, panels will be inspected in order to fix any possible defect. Neither repairs with metal
pieces on the form surfaces nor repairs with wood pieces that might modify that panels general
surface will be allowed.
FASTERNERS
Fasteners used to keep the form panels alignment which are embedded in to the concrete, shall
consists of bolts provided with screws and nuts, in such way that embedded part ends at least 5
cm deep from the finished surfaces permitting the removal of their outer ends without
deteriorating the concrete surfaces. The resulting cavities after the removal of the non-fixed parts
will be filled with mortar of low water cement ratio, as specified separately here in after. In no
case wire can be used as fastener or any other material which might produce staining on the
concrete surface or which do not warrant a firm support for the form panels. Where type F-1
finishing are specified, fasteners may be cut flush with the concrete surface.
CLEANING AND COATING OF FORM PANELS.
At the time of concrete pouring, the form panels surfaces shall be free of mortar residues or
from any other material free of holes, defects or imperfect joints that may permit loss of grout
through them, or which may cause irregularities in the concrete surface.
Prior to the pouring operation the form surface to be in contact with the concrete shall be
coated with oil to eliminate the adherence between the concrete and the form. Mineral oil which does
not change the natural colour of the concrete shall be used for this purpose. Excess oil shall be
removed from the construction joints, reinforcement or embedded materials to preserve their bond
with the concrete. Burnt oil or paper shall not be acceptable to protect the form. The oil coating may
be substituted by through dampening of the form with the prior approval of the Owner, but only in
the case of concrete surface with type F-1 finishing.
FORMS FOR THE CONCRETE LINING OF TUNNELS AND SHAFTS

For construction of the concrete lining for tunnels, metallic forms shall be used which shall
cover cylindrical surface, except that part corresponding to the tunnel invert. For the shaft, the
metallic forms shall cover the whole lining surface. The forms may be of the hinged folding or of
the telescopic type suitable for continuous poring, for easy removal and its moving without affecting
the concrete surfaces recently poured. The forms for the shafts and for the intake structures may be
of the slipping type of continuous pouring by means of lifting hydraulic and centralized operation
system.
Forms shall be composed of one or several longitudinal jointed among them to permit
continues pouring between two consecutive constructions joints. While placing the form it must
overlap for a minimum length of 15 cm with the adjacent part previously poured in order to prevent
displacements of edges at the construction joints.
Forms shall be sufficiently rigid to prevent greater distortions than those specified and the
joints among the various sections, if any, shall fit smoothly in order that the irregularities resulting in
the concrete surface be within the specified permissible limits.
The form shall be provided with sufficient number of openings or with suitable devices
which will allow correct vibration and facilitate the concrete pouring.
The openings shall be so constructed that they will fit flush with the form to the longitudinal
construction joints, avoiding greater edges than allowed. To construct transitions in the tunnels the
forms may be manufactured with narrow boards smoothened and planed after they are in place or
with plywood.
DESING AND CONSTRUCTION OF FORM PANELS.

The contractors shall design prior to initiation of the work, the forms to be used in the
different work structures, as well as the fasteners system, supports, bracings, etc, and submit them for
the approval of the Owner, who may suggest changes or reject the proposed system if he considers
that it does not meet the necessary requirements of alignment, rigidity smoothness or finishing.
However, the approval of the Owner does not exonerate the contractor from his responsibilities to
obtain concrete according to the different conditions stipulated in these specifications and on the
drawings.
The contractor shall modify the system that he is using if at a certain stage the Owner
considers that the specified concrete surface are not being obtained and if the Owner asks to
replace, partially or totally the worn out or defective forms. The contractor shall not claim or request
modification to the rates tendered for various items of concrete in section-7. Bill of quantities for
such replacement.
. LOWERING OF FORMS (SHUTTERS)
“Stripping/lowering/collapsing of forms after concrete placement has been foreseen to be

made normally after a minimum period of 24 hours of the completion of the concrete pour with
normal portland cement. However, the period shall be increased at the option of the Owner. This
minimum period of 24 hours is only recommendatory. The contractor may where he so desires,
extend the above to longer intervals. This shall not. However, constitute any reasons for any claim for
extension of time or damage to concrete, etc., The contractor shall be solely responsible for any
damage that may be caused by negligence, lack of proper precautions of hastiness etc., in the matter
of lowering/collapsing of gantry forms and shall make the same good to the satisfaction of the
Owner.
The forms removal shall be carried out carefully to prevent damages on the surfaces.
Immediately after the forms removal, the contractor shall proceed to make the necessary repairs in
the concrete surfaces and initiate the corresponding curing as specified here in after. The minimum
periods for removal of forms are by experience known to be safe and no claims shall be entertained
against the department for damages caused owing to the periods being not sufficient. The contractor
may where he so desires, extend the above periods to longer interval.
12.3.21 CURING AND PROTECTION

12.3.21.1 GENERAL
All equipment‟s, materials, etc. needed for curing and protection of concrete shall kept
handy and ready for installing before actual concreting begins. Detailed plans, methods and
procedures where by the various phases of curing and protection shall be established firmly, shall be
settled and got approved in writing from the Owner sufficiently in advance of the actual
concreting. The equipment and method proposed to
be utilised shall provide for adequate control and avoid interruption or damage to thework of
other agencies.
12.3.21.2 CURING
Curing shall be done normally with water. If any other medium of combination of media is
proposed to be adopted by the contractor, it shall be got approved by the Owner.
All unformed surfaces shall be moistened by covering with water saturated material or by
other effective means as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage by water.
The surface shall kept completely and continuously moist, prior to and during form removal, by
water applied to the unformed top surface and allowed to pass down between the forms and the
formed concrete surfaces.
Curing shall be accomplished by covering the surface with water saturated material, or by
a system of perforated pipes, hoses, sprinklers or by any other methods which shall keep all surfaces
continuously wet.
. CURING PERIOD
Curing shall start immediately after placement of concrete and continue for aminimum
period of 28 days.
WATER
Water for curing shall be clean and free from any elements which may cause staining or
discoloring of concrete besides meeting the specification for water used for mixing concrete.
WOODEN FORMS.
Where forms of wood logging are used and left in place during curing the logging shall be kept
wet at all times to prevent the logging from opening at joints. Curing shall be carried out round
the clock irrespective of whether concreting is done round the clockor not.
Construction joints shall be cured in the same manner as other concrete surface and
kept moist prior to placing additional concrete thereon.
PROTECTION
All concrete shall be protected adequately from mechanical injury unhardened concrete shall
be protected from heavy rains and flowing water. No fire or excessive heat shall be permitted
near or in direct contact with concrete at any time. Exposed finished surface of concrete shall be
protected from direct rays of the sum at least for the first three days after placement. Such
protection shall be made effective as soon as practicable after placement, or after placing of
unformed concrete or after the removal of forms.
Disturbance of the surface concrete at a construction joint during the early stages of
hardening shall be avoided. Necessary traffic on new concrete shall be on timber walkays
constructed so as not to cause injury to the concrete.
For formed concrete surfaces, which are to be exposed to high velocity of water, special
precautions shall be taken to prevent or to minimize surface pitting without reserting to over
manipulation of the concrete next to the form.
CONCRETE REPAIRS
Repairs of concrete surfaces shall only be carried out by qualified personnel and under
supervision of the Owner unless he does not consider it necessary. The Contractor shall correct
all defects in order that the concrete surfaces can be obtained in accordance with these
specifications. Unless otherwise approved, all repairs must be made within 24 hours after removal
of the forms. All mortar incrustations and ridges resulting from joints among form panels shall be
polished carefully with emery stone. Where the concrete had suffered damages, presents
honeycombs, fractures or any other defects, or where fillings are necessary due to depressions
greater than permissible, the surface shall be roughened to remove all imperfect concrete to
the degree determined by the Owner and filled with concrete or with dry consistency mortar to
the required lines The scarified surfaces shall have sufficient depth so as to allow good bond of
the filling and shall be performed as fish tail, if so directed by the Owner to obtain the best
results.
12.3.22 DRY CONSISTENCY MORTAR FOR REPAIR OPERATIONS.
Dry consistency mortar shall be used to repair holes with depth equal of greaterthan the
smaller dimension of the hole section, but it shall neither be used for shallow depressions where the
mortar cannot be confined nor for holes passing the section through, nor either for repairs
extending further than the reinforcement.
Dry consistency mortar shall be proportioned, by weight with 1 part of cement and 2 ½
parts of sand passing No.16 sieve. Colour of the mortar shall be the same as that of the finished
concrete surface and a sufficient amount of white cement may be added if necessary to get it. Water
added to the mix shall be that necessary to get it. Water added to the mix shall be that necessary to
obtain a pasted mix to mould a ball applying slight pressure leaning the hands damp and the ball
without bleeding water. The right water cement ratio shall be obtained while filling the holes, by
applying pressure such that aplastic consistency is obtained.
Mortar shall be applies to the holes after removing the defective concrete and the contact
surfaces having been sufficiently made damp. Mortar shall be applied in layersof about 1 cm in
thickness, and consolidated and packed by hammering on wooden rodsof about 2 cm in diameter.
All cavities resulting from the removal of the outer ends of fasteners, shall be filled with
dry consistency mortar applying pressure to improve adherence. The mortar surface shall be polished
flush with the concrete surfaces, to obtain good appearance. Mortar for filling shall not be used
under the reinforcement or for holes going through the concrete section. Under these circumstances,
the filling must be carried out with concrete. Also fillings of areas larger than 500 cum or with
depth greater than 10 cm shall be made in concrete. The repaired surfaces shall be cured as
specified under these specifications. All Materials to repair the concrete shall comply with the
requirements of these specifications. All fillings shall be perfectly adher to concrete surfaces and
shall be free from cracks or imperfect zones at the end of the curing. All fillings shall be completed
carefully, as specified by the Owner in order that general appearance of the surface be uniform and
satisfactory. All the cost of materials, equipments and labour for these operations shall be deemed to
be included in the rates tendered for various items of concrete in section-7, bill of quantities.
12.3.23 EXPANSIVE CONCRETE OF MORTAR

In places where tight filling is required, such as back filling of block outs specialexpansive
concrete or mortar shall be used. This concrete has admixture of a very small
quantity of aluminium powder that largely reduces “separation of water (bleading) which would
cause settlement shrinkage” and also cause expansion of concrete or mortar, thus filling up to the
confined space fully.
The aluminium powder, which should be of the unpolished variety, shall be free from
impurities and it shall have fineness such that 100% of this pass through IS sieve 75 micron . The
powder shall first blended with 50 parts by weight of cement. The blend shall then be used shall be
determined by the Owner. Aluminium powder shall not be used until tests with job materials at
job temperatures have shown that effective expansion can be obtained and even then only under
strict.
The blend shall be mixed thoroughly with cement and sand before water is added otherwise
the aluminum powder will float on water. Batches shall be small enough to allow placement of
freshly prepared mortar as the action of aluminum becomes very weak about 45 minutes after
mixing. After all ingredients are added, the batch shall be mixed for 3 minutes, the mixing time a
specified in Table 5.7 “Mixing Time” shall not be applicable in this case.
The cavity in which concrete is to be filled should be confined by suitable formwork on all
sides to take proper advantage of this expansive concrete. Labour charges for its used in concrete
and mixing shall be borne by the contractor.
12.3.24 QUALITY CONTROL The quality control manual shall be prepared by thecontractor and
submitted for approval of the owner.
12.3.25 GENERAL.
Quality control on the work shall be exercised through
(i) Laboratory tests on the ingredients as well as finished product at various stages of
production.
(ii) Control on production, machinery performance and
(iii) Adoption of proper procedures during construction that will lead to results expected
by the detailed specifications for the various items of work.
The entire responsibility of adopting the correct construction procedure, selecting proper
materials, employment of experience and knowledgeable personnel(Labour, Artisan Supervisors,
Engineers) operation of the plant and equipment to produce the works and satisfying the standards
regarding quality shall rest with the contractor. The contractor shall abide by the relevant Indian
Standard Specification, tender specifications and the instructions given by the Owner in this respect.
The contractor shall provide satisfactory sampling and test facilities and labour for easy
and quick collection of adequate quantity of representative test samples. He shall also provide
sample and protected working space adjacent to the batching and mixing plant, free from plant
vibration, and shall furnish it with necessary utilities such as compressed air, water, heat and
electrical power for operation of the testing equipment to carry out tests by the department.
The cost of providing a representative test sample of concrete and concrete materials and
providing working space with utilities and facilities for, procuring andhandling them at the batching
and mixing plants, shall be deemed to be included in the rates tendered for various items of
concrete.
12.3.25.1 TEST FOR CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS
12.3.25.1.1 Aggregates : Samples of processed aggregates in
required quantity shall be delivered to the Owner at the laboratory in the
project by the Contractor at his expense at least 60 days in advance of the
time concrete is expected to be placed.
The specified samples shall be representative of the materials approved for use inthe
work and shall conform to the specified graduation requirements.
12.3.25.1.2 Cement : The Contractor shall provide at his own

expense the required quantity of cement of approved and tested quality to
the Owner at the laboratory in the project for evolving the mix design,
Whenever required.
12.3.25.1.3 Mix Design Studies : Mix design studies and tests

will be made by the contractor at designated laboratories and will be
submitted to the owner for approval.
12.3.25.2 PRODUCTION OF CONCRETE.

a. Cement Over and above the normal tests prescribed for checking the quality of cement at
factory site, testing will be done on field samples. The samples shall be collected at the bin of the
batching plant. Frequency of collecting samples shall be one sample for every 100 tonnes of cement
used.
b. Coarse Aggregate: (!) Grading: Location at which samples are taken may be selected by
the Owner in consultation with the contractor so as to have the most effective production control
e.g.place of entry of mixer. At least once during each concreting shift there shall be sieve analysis in
accordance with the IS:2386 (Part.I) 1977. When the amount passing any sieve is outside the
specification limits, sampling and retesting shallbe done immediately. If the second sample fails on
any sieve, immediate measures to correct the grading shall be taken at the screening plants.
ii) Moisture content: Samples shall be collected at the bin of the batching plant. One
sample shall be tested for each size of coarse aggregates at least once in a shift. When two
consecutive readings for smallest size coarse aggregates differ by more than
1.0 percent, frequency of testing shall be increased to that specified in paragraph 5.6.8.7 Whenever it
is conformed that the moisture content of aggregates changes by 0.5 percent or more, the scale
setting for the aggregates batcher and water batcher shall be adjusted directly by means of a moisture
compensation device.
iii) Deleterious substances: samples shall be collected at the bin of the batching plant.
When, in the opinion of the Owner, problems exist in connection with deleterious substances in the
coarse aggregates aggregate tests shall be made in accordance with IS : 2386 (Part-II) 11963. Testing
frequency shall not be less than one per week. When test result fall outside the specified limits the
coarse aggregates shall be sampled and retested. If a second sample of material also fails,
immediate steps shall be taken by the contractor to make the washing effective till suitable results as
specified are achieved.
C. Fine Aggregates : (I) Grading: Location at which samples are taken shall be decided by
the Owner in consultation with the contractor so as to have most effective production control.
Frequency of collecting samples shall be at least once during each shift, when the amount passing
any sieve is outside the specification limits, re sampling and retesting shall be done. If there is
another failure on any sieve, immediate action to rectify the situation shall be taken by the contractor.
ii) Moisture Content: Samples shall be collected at the bin of the batching plant. There shall
be at least one test for moisture content during each of the 8 hours period of mixing plant operation.
The time for the tests shall be selected at random within the 9 hours period. An additional test shall
be made whenever the slump is shown to be out of control or excessive variation in workability is
reported by the placing foreman or the Engineer. Whenever the moisture content changes by 0.5% or
more, the scale setting for fine aggregate batcher and water batcher shall be adjusted directly or by
means of amoisture compensation device.
iii) Deleterious substances: Samples shall be collected at the bin of the batching plant. When
in the opinion of the Owner, problems exist in connection with deleterious substances in fine
aggregate tests shall be made in accordance with IS: 2386 (Part-II) – 1963. Testing frequency shall
not be less than one per week. Results falling outside the specified limit of the fine aggregates shall
be resampled and retested. If a second sample of material also fails, immediate steps shall be taken
by the Contractor to make the washing effective till suitable results as specified are achieved.
d. Concete : (I) Air content : Samples shall be collected from the mixer at the time of
discharge of concrete in to the hopper. At least one test for air content shall be made on randomly
selected batches of each class of concrete every day. Whenever actual air content approaches the
upper or lower control limits on the control chart, and adjustment shall be made in the amount of air
entraining admixture batched, as soon as practicable. After each adjustment, another test shall be
made to verify the correctness of the adjustment. Whenever the value falls above the upper control
the discrepancy shall be calibrated to ensure that it is operating correctly and with good
reproducibility. Wherever two consecutive values, either for average or range are outside the control
limits, the Owner shall be notified. Wherever the air content departs from the specified range,
concrete shall not be delivered to the forms.
ii) Consistency : Samples shall be collected from the mixer at the time of discharge of
concrete in to the hopper. At least one test for slump shall be made on randomly selected batches of
each class of concrete every day. When the mixer is at a considerable distance from the point of
placement, occasionally two slump tests of the same batch shall be taken, one at the mixer and the
other at the point of placement. All slump test shall be done in accordance with IS 1199:1959. In the
case of concrete with very small or zero slump, the consistency shall be measured by the use of vee-
bee consistometer. Whenever slump values approach the upper or lower control limits on the control
chart, an adjustment should be made in the batch weights of water and fine aggregate. When a slump
value is outside the control limits of such adjustment, another test shall be done to verify the
correctness of the adjustment. Whenever the slump departs from the stipulated value by more than 40
mm (1 ½ inches), concrete shall not be delivered to the forms.
ii) Consistency : Samples shall be collected from the mixer at the time of discharge of
concrete in to the hopper. At least one test for slump shall be made on randomly selected batches of
each class of concrete every day. When the mixer is at a considerable distance from the point of
placement, occasionally two slump tests of the same batch shall be taken, one at the mixer and
the other at the point of placement, All slump test shall be taken, one at the mixer and the other at
the point of placement. All slump test shall be done in accordance with IS 1199:1959. In the case
of concrete with very small or zero slump, the consistency shall be measured by the use of vee-bee
consistometer. Whenever slump values approach the upper or lower control limits on the
control chart, an adjustment should be made in the batch weights of water and fine aggregate. When
a slump value is outside the control limits of such adjustment, another test shall be done to verify
the correctness of the adjustment. Whenever the slump departs from the stipulated value by more
than 40 mm (1 ½ inches), concrete shall not be delivered to the forms.
iii) Compressive strength: Samples shall be taken from the mixers and vibrated in the
moulds to simulate vibration given in the forms. The frequency of sampling of concrete of each
grade shall be as under.
Quantity of concrete Number of samples

With work M3 1
2
3
4
51 and above 4 plus one additional samplesfor
each additional
50 m 3 or part thereof.
However at least one sample shall be taken from each shift.
The test cylinders shall be cast in accordance with IS 457 :1979 and IS 456:1978, except that
for test specimen of mass concrete. All coarse aggregates larger than one fourth the minimum
dimension of cylinder shall be removed by wet screening or hand packing and remaining concrete
remixed with shovel into iniform mass for casting test specimens. The cylinder shall be cast without
delay after sampling and stored in a protected moist place at 27 C + 2 C with out disturbed or
moved at least 24 hours after being cast. Air entrained concrete used for slump and unit weight
test shall not be usedfor casting cylinders.
The manner of moulding, capping, and testing the cylinder/cubes shall be in accordance with IS 456-
1979, except than an approved method of vibration may be used for compacting concrete. A
compression testing machine capable of carrying out compression tests up to a load of 200 metric
tonne will be provided in the laboratory. Regular tests shall be done to know the compressive
strength values at the age of 7 days,28 days, 90 days, 80 days and 365 days with occasional tests for
14 days values. The Contractor shall provide necessary labour and transport for delivering test
specimens for testing.
iv) Density and Water Absorption : Compression specimens, either cylinders or core
derived from the structure, shall be used for determining unit weight, specific gravity, absorption
and durability.
v) Hardened concrete in the Structure: Compressive strength will also be determined by

testing cores which will be extracted by department from concrete at such ages and locations as
considered necessary. The contractor shall provide labour and other facilities for extracting
representative core specimens from hardened concrete in the works and for transporting them
to the laboratory. The cost of such extracted in the works and for transporting them to the
laboratory. The cost of such extracted samples and testing will be born by the department. Contractor
shall render all required help including providing labour for extracting and testing the cores by the
department. Number of cores taken from hardened concrete from the structures shall generally be one
per 10,000 cubic metre of concrete laid. The core shall normally be 15 cm diameter except as
otherwise
directed. It shall be given some semipermanent legible identification marks. The core shall be cut
to form cylinder with lengths equal to twice the diameter. They shall be soon as practicable after
extraction, be kept continuously moist either by wet burlap or fog curing until the time of test and
tested in the same manner as cast concrete cylinders. The results of cores shall not indicate strengths
lower than those obtained from the cast specimens.
vi) Acceptance/Rejection
All concrete shall satisfy the following criteria:
a) One field test for 28 days compressive strength shall be considered as an average of
three specimens cast from a single batch of concrete for each grade of mix in the manner described
in paragraph 5.629,3 d (III).
b) At least 80% of the field test shall have compressive strength more than the specified
compressive strength of concrete for each grade mix.
c) The overall co-efficient of variation for any thirty or more consecutive field tests for
compressive strength of concrete for each grade of mix shall not exceed 0.15
12.4 REINFORCEMENT
INDEX
Sl. No. PARA NO. ITEM
1. 12.4.1 GENERAL
2. 12.4.2 MATERIALS
3. 12.4.3 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT
5. 12.4.4 SPLICING
6. 12.4.5 COUPLING BARS
7. 12.4.6 CARE PLACEDREINFORCEMENT
AND CONCRETE
8. 12.4.7. TOLERANCE
9. 12.4.8 DOWELS
10. 12.4.9 MEASUREMENT AND
PAYMENT
11. 12.4.10 PAYMENT RATE
STEEL REINFORCEMENT
12.4.GENERAL
a) This section covers specifications for providing steel reinforcement for various concretes
for portals, tunnel lining and other miscellaneous components.
b) This work shall consist of furnishing and placing reinforcement of the shape and
dimensions shown on the drawings and as specified in the specifications, including cutting, vending,
cleaning, welding, placing, binding and fixing in position.
c) Steel reinforcing bars shall be placed in concrete where shown on the drawings or as
directed by the Owner. The drawings issued with these specifications show only in
part of the requirements of reinforcement and further drawings will be issued by the Owner during
the course of the contract. Further drawings will include br placement details, bar bending details
and reinforcement bar lists for ll structures. Not less than 30 days prior to placement of
reinforcement, the contractor shall prepare detailed drawings for reinforcement in order to procure
reinforcement steel bars as per requirements under these specifications and to provide reinforcement
steel bars of required strength. No claims of the contractor in preparation of detailed reinforcement
drawings shall be entertained. A list of I.S. codes applicable is furnished below.
LIST OF I.S. CODES:

I.S. 456 – 2000 - Code of practice for plain and reinforced concrete.
I.S. 1786 – 1985 - Specification for High Strength deformed Steel bars and
Wires for concrete reinforcement.
I.S. 432 – 1982 - Specifications for mild steel and medium tensile steel bars(Part
1) concrete reinforcement and hard drawn steel wire.
I.S 280 – 1978 Mild Steel wire for general Engineering purposes.
I.S. 2502 – 1963 - Code of practice for bending and fixing of bars for
Concrete reinforcement.
I.S. 9417 – 1989 - Recommendations for welding cold worked bars for
Reinforced concrete construction.
I.S. 2751 – 1979 - Welding of mild steel plain and deformed bars for
Reinforced costruction.
I.S. 814 – 1991 - Covered electrodes for manual metal are welding of carbonAnd
carbon manganese steel.
I.S. 1278 – 1972 - Filler rods and wired and gas welding.
In addition to the above I.S. codes, the specifications of A.P.S.S. and manual forquality
control and inspection shall also be compiled with.
12.4.1 Materials:
a) Steel shall be clean and free from loose rust or loose mill scle at the time of fixing in
position and subsequent concreting.
b) The contractor shall procure high yield strength deformed bars conforming to
I.S. 178601985. However in case of non-availability of such bars, other steel barsconforming to I.S.
132 – 1982 shall be used as per the directions of the Owner in writing.
c) The reinforcement bars used by the Contractor shall be in accordance with the Section
5.1.4.
ii) Cutting bending, binding of reinforcement.
a) Reinforcing steel shall conform accurately to the dimensions given in the bar bending
schedules shown on relevant drawings.
b) Bars shall be bent cold to the specified shape and dimensions by a bar benderby hand
or power to attain proper radii of bends as shown in drawings or as directed by the Owner.
c) Bars shall not be bent or straightened in a manner that will injure the material.
d) Bars bent during the transport or handling shall be straightened before being used on
work, they shall not be heated to facilitate bending.
e) “U” type hooks shall invariably be provided at the end of each bar if specified in
drawing or ordered by the Owner. The radius of the bend shall not be less than twice the diameter
of round bar and the length of the straight part of the bar beyond the end of the curve shall b
atleast four times the diameter of the round bar. In the case of bars which are not round and in the
case of deformed bars, the diameter shall be taken as the diameter of a circle having an equivalent
effective area.
f) The hook shall be suitably encased to prevent any splitting of the concrete.
12.4.2 PLACING OF REINFORCEMENT:
12.4.2.1 Before the reinforcement is placed, the surface of the bars
and the surfaces of any metal bar supports shall be cleaned of the rust, loose mill
scale, dirt, grease and other objectionable foreign substances.
12.4.2.2 All reinforcing bars shall be accurately placed in exact

position shown on the drawing, and shall be securely held in position of concrete
by annealed binding wire, and by using stays, blocks or metal chairs, spacers, metal
hangers supporting wires or other approve devices at sufficiently close intervals.
12.4.2.3 Wine for binding reinforcement shall be soft and annealed

mild steel of 16 SWG and shall conform to IS : 280 – 1978. Binding wire shall have
tensile strength of not less than 5600 Kg.cm and and yield point of not less than
3850/Kg/cm.
12.4.2.4 Bars shall not be allowed to sag between supports. They shall
not be displaced during concreting or any other operation over the work.
12.4.2.5 The contractor shall also ensure that there is no disturbance

caused to the reinforcing bars already placed in concrete.
12.4.2.6 All devices used for positioning shall b of non-corrodible

material. Metal supports shall not extend to the surface of the concrete, except where
shown on the drawings. Pieces of broken stone or brick and wooden blocks shall not
be used. Where portions of such supports will be exposed on concrete surfaces
designated to receive F2 or F3 finish, the exposed portion of support shall b
galvanized o coated with other corrosion resistant material without which the
concreting will not be permitted. Such supports shall not be exposed on surfaces
designated to receive F4 finish unless otherwise shown on the drawings.
12.4.2.7 Placing on layers of freshly laid concreter as work progresses

for adjusting bar spacing shall not be allowed.
12.4.2.8 Layers of bars shall be separated by spacer bars, pre-cast

blocks or other approved devices.
12.4.2.9 Reinforcement after being placed in position shall be

maintained in a clean condition until completely embedded in concrete. Special
care shall be taken to prevent any displacement of reinforcement in concrete
already placed.
12.4.2.10 To protect reinforcement from corrosion, concrete cover shall
be provided as indicated on the drawings. All bars protruding from concrete and to
which other bars are to be spliced and which are likely to be exposed for an
indefinite period shall be protectedby a thick coat of neat cement grout.
12.4.2.11 Bars crossing each other, where required, shall be secured by

binding wire (annealed) of size not less than 1 mm dia and conforming to IS 280-
1978 in such a manner that they do not slip over each other at the time of fixing
and concreting.
12.4.2.12 As far as possible, bars of full length shall be used. In case

this is not possible, overlapping of bars shall be done as directed by Owner. When
practicable, overlapping bars shall not touch each other, but be kept apart by 25
mm or 1 ¼ times the maximum size of the coarse aggregate which ever is greater by
concrete between them. Where not feasible, overlapping bars shall be bound with
annelid steel wire, not less than 1 mm thickness twisted tight. The overlaps shall b
staggered for different bars and locate at points along the span where neither shear
not bending moment is maximum.
12.4.2.13 The minimum allowable clearance between parallel round

bars shall not be less than 1 ½ times the diameter of the larger bars and for
square bars shall not be less than twice the side dimensions of the larger bars 1 ½
times, the maximum size aggregatewhich ever is greater.
12.4.2.14 Dissimilar diameter rods should not be joined together.
12.4.3 SPLICING :
12.4.3.1 Where it is necessary to splice reinforcement the splices shall

be made by lapping, by welding or by mechanical means.
When permitted or specified on the drawings, joints of reinforcement bars shall be bull
welded so as to transmit their full strength. Welding of bars shall be don as directed by the Owner
and conforming with requirements of clause 11.4 of IS 456 – 1978. If it is proposed to use welded
splices in reinforcing bars, the equipment, the material and all welding and testing procedures shall
be subject to the approval of the Owner. The contractor shall also carryout test welds as required by
the Owner. No extra rate will be paid for welding reinforcement test-welds as bid rate in bill of
quantities is inclusive ofthis item.
For welded splices for reinforcing bars confirming to I.S : 1786-1985. Welding shall be
done in accordance with I.S : 9417 – 1979 For reinforcing bars confirming I.S : 432 (Part 1) –
1992, welding shall be done in accordance with I.S. : 2751 – 1979. Electrodes for manual metal arc
welding shall conform to I.S. : 814 (Part 1) – 1974 & I.S. 814 (Part 11( - 1974. Mild steel fillers rods
for oxy-acetylene welding shall conform to I.S:1278 – 1972 provided these are capable of giving a
minimum butt weld tensile strength of 41 Kg/mm. Only electric arc welding using a process which
excludes air from the molten metal and conforms to any all other special provisions for the work shall
be accepted. Suitable means shall be provided for welding the bars securely in position during
welding. If must be ensured that no voids are left in welding and when welding is done in two or
three steps, previous surfaces shall be cleaned well. Ends of bars shall be cleaned of all iron scale
rust, grease, paint and other foreign matter before welding.
12.4.3.2 Reinforcing bars of 28 mm in diameter and larger may b

connected by but welding provided that lapped splices will be permitted if found
to be more practical than
but welding and if lapping does not encroach on cover limitation or hinder concrete or
reinforcement placing.
12.4.3.3 Reinforcing bars 25 mm in diameter and less may be either,

lapped or butwelded, whichever is the most practicable.
But welding of reinforcing bars shall be performed either by gas pressure or flash pressure
welding process or by the electric arc methods under cover from weather.
Welded pieces of reinforcement shall be tested at the rate of 0.5% of totl number of joints
welded. Specimen shall be taken from the actual site of work. Strength of the weld provided shall
be atleast 25% higher than the strength of bar.
12.4.3.4 Welded joints or splices shall preferably be located at

points where steel will not be subject to more than 75% of the maximum permissible
stress and welds so staggered that at any section not more than 20% of rods are
welded. Approval of such additional splices will generally be restricted to splices not
closer than 8 meters in horizontal bars of 4 meters in vertical bars measured
between mid point of laps.
12.4.4 Coupling of Bars:

Wherever indicated on the drawings or desired by the Owner to use mechanical couplings for
reinforcing bars, bars shall be joined by couplings which shall have a cross section sufficient to
transmit the full strength of bars. The ends of bars that are joined by couplings shall be up set for
sufficient length, so that the effective cross section at the base of threads is not less than the
normal cross section of the bar. The threads shall be standard while-worth threads. Steel for
couplings shall conform to IS:226 the contractor shall submit samples of the proposed coupling to the
Owner for approval not less than 60 days prior to their proposed use. A site visit where such
couplings are being used shall also be arranged. No additional payment for couplings will be made
to the contractor. The contractor‟s bid rate shall include this item.
12.4.5 Care of placed Reinforcement in concrete:
Where reinforcement bars are bent aside at construction joints and afterwards bent back into
their original position, care shall be taken to ensure that at no time the radius of the bend is less
than 6 x diameter for deformed bars and 4 x diameter for plain mild steel bars. Care should b taken,
when bending such bars, to ensure that the concrete around the bars, is not damaged.
12.4.6 Tolerance :
As specified in clause 11.3 of I.S. : 456 – 2000 unless otherwise specified by th Owner
reinforcement shall be placed within the following tolerances.
i) For effective depth 200 mm or less = + 10 mm

ii) For effective depth more than 200 mm = + 15 mm
The cover shall in no case be reduced by more than one third of specified cover or5 mm
which ever is less.
12.4..7 Dowels:
(a) The dowels shall be of the same H.Y.S.D. bars of grade Fe 415 conforming to
I.S. 1786 – 1985 as used for reinforcement.
(b) Details for dowels shall be as shown on the drawings or as directed by the
Owner.
c) Dowels shall be placed in the concrete where shown on the drawings or where directed
and will be inspected for compliance with requirements as to size, shape, length, position and amount
after they have been placed, but before being covered by concrete.
d) Before the dowels are embedded in concrete, the surface of dowels shall be cleaned of
all dirt, grease or other foreign substances which in the opinion of the Ownerare objectionable.
e) The dowels shall be accurately placed and secured in position so that they will not be
displaced during the placing of the concrete.
12.4.8 Payment.
i) Wastage, overlaps, couplings, welded joints, spacer bars, dowels and annealed wire for
binding shall not be measured and the cost of these items shall be deemed have been included in the
bid price.
12.4.9 GROUT NIPPLES:
12.4.9.1 Grout nipples with blank steel tub of 75 mm dia, of standard class “A” specification
and taper screw plug as approved by the Owner shall be embedded in tunnel lining as per
drawing either by tying or by welding to the reinforcement grills. The steel tube shall be
expanded up to excavated rock surface.
12.5 CONTACT GROUTING

INDEX
PARA NO. ITEM
SCOPE OF WORK
12.5.1CLASSIFICATION
12.5.2 APPLICABLE PUBLICATION
12.5.3 INDIAN STANDARDS
12.5.4 CONTACT GROUTING
12.5.5 GENERAL
12.5.6 GENERAL GUIDELINES
12.5.7 CONTACT GROUTING
12.5.8 PATTERN OF GROUT HOLES
12.5.9 DRILLING GROUT HOLES
12.5.10 GROUT MIX
12.5.11 GROUTING PROCEDURE AND SEQUENCE
12.5.11 GROUTING EQUIPMENT
12.512 TEST GROUTING
12.5.12 BACK-FILL GROUTING OF SPECIAL REACHES
12.5.13 DAILY RECORDS OF GROUTING
12.5.14 GENERAL
12.5.15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR GROUT HOLES
12.5.16 MEASUREMENT AND
12.5.17 PAYMENT FOR PRESURE
12.5.18 GROUTING
12.5.19 UNDER DRAINAGE ARRANGEMENTS
12.5.20 FILTER MATERIAL
12.5.21 G.I. PIPES
12.5.22 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
12.5.23 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE
12.5.24 WATER SLOPES
12.5.25 INSTALLATION
12.5.26 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENTS SKETCH FOR LAYOUT OF
GROUT STATION SHOWIG SUPPLY TO GROUT HOLE
CONTACT GROUTING
SCOPE OF WORK
The work to be done under this item consists of contact grouting of the shrinkage formedbetween
the rock surface and concrete lining in tunnels. The grout shall be injected through the system of
pipe lines installed specifically for this purpose.
CLASSIFICAION:
The item covered under these specifications is as under.
Contract grouting of space between rock surface and concrete lining in the tunnel portionwith
cement grout in proportion as directed at specified pressure.
APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS:
All methods and procedures for drilling and grouting shall conform to Indian standardspecifications
listed below unless otherwise specified.
INDIAN STANDARDS
IS 812:1989 Specifications 43 grade ordinary and low heat

Portland cement (Ist Revision)
IS 1489:1976 Specification for Portland puzzolona cement.
(2nd Revision)
IS 4079:1980 Code of practice for indexing and storage of drill cores.
(Ist Revision)
IS 4464:1985 Code of practice for presentation of Drilling Information
And core description in foundation investigation.
IS 5878 Code of practice for construction of Tunnels.
Part vii:1972 Grouting.
IS 6066 :1984 Recommendations for pressure Grouting of Rock
Foundations in River valley project (Ist Revision)
CONTACT GROUTING
GENERAL
i. At least 30 days prior to the start of grouting works, the Contractors shall submit to the Owner
for approval, detailed proposals and a detailed layout of his proposed arrangements for drilling
and grouting, including specifications of all equipment, tools, and all grouting material to be
used, and qualification and experience of the proposed personnel.
ii. An overall drilling and grouting program shall be drawn up jointly between the contractor and
the Owner, Grouting mixes, pressures, pumping rates and sequencing will be selected, subject to
modifications, to meet local conditions encountered during the performance of the work.
Grouting works shall be planned in such a manner that they can be carried out according to the
approved plan concurrently with other activities to the extent feasible.
GENERAL GUIDELINES.
Necessity for Contract Grouting Back-fill grouting between the rock and over concrete lining is
essentially required to fill any voids/gaps/cavities left after the placement of final concrete lining and
gaps due to shrinkage of concrete. The concrete lining is to be carried out through pumpcrete. The
portion below springing level gets filled up through gravitybut there are chances of gaps being left
in the portion above the springing level, especially near the crown. The grouting of the portion above
the springing level has to be done to ensure complete insteraction between the concrete lining and the
rock. The contact grouting is also expected to improve the strength of the rock in the arch portion to
make it more competent to carry external loads.
CONTACT GROUTING
Embankment of grout Nipples prior to concrete placement in the overt, 75 mm diameter
nipples of black steel pipe shall be provided and duly fixed according to the designed pattern. These
nipples extend up to the rock face and are embedded during concreting to faciliate further during in
the rock for back-fill grouting .
PATTERN O FGROUT HOLES.

The pattern of Grout holes for providing nipples shall be 3 grout holes alternating with 5
grout holes at 3.0 m intervals, with a crown hole for each set of holes, as indicated in drawing
No.14/16. The location and spacing of grout holes may be slightly shifted as per site conditions
(to avoid interference with rock bolts and steel supports etc.) and /or as determined by Owner. The
pipe nipples extending to the rock shall be cleaned thoroughly of all dirt, grease, grout and mortar
and shall be fitted with plugs before the placement of concrete. The pipes shall be held firmly in
position and protected from damage during the process of concreting.
DRILLING GROUT HOLES.

i. After the concrete lining sets and attains sufficient strength, grout holes of 40 mm diameter
shall be drilled through 75 mm diameter black steel pipe nipples, all ready embedded in
the concrete with percussion type rock drills. The depth of holes into the rock shall be kept
as 1.00 m in normal reaches and 1.5 m in geologically classified poor reaches, including
the reaches associated with high
over breaks. Drilling into the rock is necessary so as to expose the contract between the
rock and the concrete for effective grouting. During drilling, it shall be ensured that there
is not grease or oily substance on the drilling rods.
ii. The holes shall be drilled in a group of preferably, 8 holes covering a length of 6 meters of
the tunnel. Alternate blocks of 9 m length of the tunnel shall be taken up for drilling and
grouting operations, so that the grout of the previous grouted block does not get disturbed
or washed, even partially, during drilling and washing of the next block. Each hole after
drilling shall be protected from getting clogged or obstructed by capping.
iii. At locations where the pipe nipples are left out/omitted in advertently during concreting,
holes as per prescribed pattern (Para-ii) shall be drilled through concrete will percussion
type rock drills into the rock and taken up for grouting along with the other holes of the
group No. hole shall be drilled through concrete before 7 days after placement of concrete.
iv. Whenever the drill water is lost or artesian flow is encountered, drilling shall be stopped and
the hole shall be grouted before drilling is resumed. The contractor shall record the location,
flow and the pressure of any artesian conditions encountered in any drill hole.
GROUT MIX.
v. The grout mix to be used shall be either cement slurry (cement + water) or cement
–sand-water grout. The later is used when the grout intake through the holes is excessive.
Cement used shall be ordinarily Portland conforming to, IS 269:1976 or as prescribed by
the Owner. Clean sand of such fineness shall be used that not more than 5% is retained
on IS.16 sieve: not less than 10% nor more than 30% pass the IS.100 sieve and not more
than 5% pass the IS 200 sieve.
vi. In normal reaches the mix to be sued shall, preferably, be cement slurry only. Grouting shall
be commenced with 1:4 cement-water ratio, gradually coming down to 1:3,1:2 and finally
1:1 mix for plugging the holes.
vii. In high over-break reaches, where the grout intake through initial grouting operation is
excessive, cement-sand-water mix my be used. Sand, being abrasive causes wear of the
cylinder liner of grout pump and its use shall therefore be restricted to the situations of high
grout intake. The quantity of sand in the grout mix shall also be varied as considered
appropriate at site. As a guideline, the grout mix, comprising1 bag of cement (50 Kg) 1 bag
sand and 72 liters of water may be used. The grout mix shall be neither too thick to cause
pumping difficulty nor too thin to cause the segregation of sand.
viii. Grout to seal off the inflow of any ground water may also include a filler or a chemical to be
GROUTING PROCEDURE AND SEQUENCE

ix. Flushing of Holes After all holes in one group of 9 m length (a group of holes in 6 m
length can also be taken up if it is more convenient) are drilled, these shall be flushed with
water by open washing to remove the rock cuttings and rock dust, if
any, left in the holes. The holes shall then be fitted with pipe nipples, reducing sockets and
plug valves at the end.
x. Water Testing All holes, after open washing, shall be tested at water pressure not exceeding
2.1 Kg/sq.cm to establish contact with other holes; to find out leakage, if any , in the
concrete lining or around the embedded pipe nipples; and to determine the rate of water
intake of individual holes in a group. The required quantities of cement and sand, (if
considered necessary) shall be arranged after ascertaining broadly the extent of water
intake/loss so that the grouting operation of a particular group of holes, when undertaken,
would continue uninterrupted
xi. Grouting Operation.
In each group of hole, the lowest holes on both sides of the tunnel, as designated in
Drawing Nol4/18 shall be filled with grout injections at a pressure not exceeding 2.1kg/sq.cm or
3.5kg/sq cm through 75 mm diameter pipe nipples extending through the lining as given in the table
below.
Particulars Normal Reaches Poor/High over breackage
Reaches.
Depth of holes
In rock 0.9m 1.5 m
Spacing 3.0 m 3.0 m
Grout pressure 2.1kg/Cm2 3.5 Kg/Cm2
The lowest holes, provided, at 5 shall be grouted first in order that the upper holes may serve as
vents for the escape of air entrapped in the void/cavity, water and the thin mix of the grout which
emerges on settlement of the grout. The upper holes shall be taken up next for grouting while
the holes at the crown shall be grouted last of all, at the specified pressure. Each group of holes shall
be considered as completed for grouting when all the holes individually refuse to take any more
grout. The holes even with nil rate of intake of water (during water testing) shall also be tried and
grouted at specified pressure.
xii. During grouting, if any leakage is observed from concrete cracks of some other locations, the
same shall be caulked with lead wool or oaken and the grouting carried out intermittently at
a pressure which the crack could with stand without any further leakage, but not exceeding
the prescribed limiting pressure, viz 2,1 kgcm2 Connections showing the supply of grout to a
grout hole are depicted in Drawing.
xiii. Each hole after completion of grouting at specified pressure shall be closed by a plug valve,
so that injected grout is retained in the hole/gap/cavity. Other fittings, aftrer removal, are
washed for installation on the next holes to be grouted. The plug valves shall, however, be
removed after the grout has an initial set (normally) within 24 hours), and shall be cleaned
before the grout has hard set, for further use on other group of holes to be grouted.
xiv. An extra set a of pistons with piston rods, water maters, and few pressure gauges fitted with
copper tube coils, shall always be kept ready for replacement for uninterrupted grouting
operations. To avoid frequent choking of pressure gauges, copper tube coils filled with Mobil
Oil shall be fitted with pressure gauges to provide a cushion between the grout and the
pressure gauge.
. GROUTING EQUIPMENT.
Proper grout pumps and the associated equipment shall be deployed for undertaking
grouting operation. The equipment shall be capable of effectively mixing and stirring grout and
forcing the same into the holes in a continuous uninterrupted flow at the specified pressure at the
grout nipple. Grout mixers shall be of mechanically operated, high speed colloidal type of
sufficient size and operating at 1,500 to2,000 rmp with a electric/pneumatic drive. The grout pumps
shall be capable of delivering a flow of 50 liter/min of thick grout (w/c=1) at specified pressure.
Grout pumps shall be of the duplex double acting piston type or a single acting plunger type or
other type approved by Owner. The grouting equipment shall be provided with an accurate water
meter and a valve for measuring and controlling the water requirements of the grout. The mixer
drum and agitator shall be fixed in such a manner that these are driven with a single Air Motor,
operated by compressed air. The grout shall be mixed in the mixer drum and then taken into the
agitator drum to keep in consistent before it is forced into the hole through the grout pumps.
Schematic layout of a grout station showing grout supply to the grout holeis depicted.
TEST GROUTING.
Test grouting of at least 10% of the holes already grouted shall be carried out to ensure that
no gap/void/cavity remains unfilled. The holes with high consumption of grout during initial
grouting and those with high water intake but less consumption of grout shall be specifically
included for test grouting along with other holes.
i. Holes for test grouting shall be drilled 1.5 m in to the rock with a diameter of 50 mm
against 40 mm drilled for initial grouting in order to make re-grouting more effective.
ii. During test grouting only cement –water mix (viz., cement slurry) shall be used. No
cement –sand grout shall be used. The operation shall be started with 1:4 cement –water
ratio and gradually reduced to 1:3,1:2 and finally 1:1 mix.
iii. Grouting will be regarded as being satisfactory if the pressure can be maintained or at
least 5 minutes without further grout intake.
BACK-FILL GROUTING OF SPECIAL REACHES
Special reaches, associated with adverse geological features, fault zones and shear zones, and
special design considerations, shall be identified by the Owner. The grouting of such reaches shall
be done with additional grout nipples over and above those used for normal reaches. The usual
pattern is to provide nipples on both sides staggered at ,3.0 m interval and at the crown (indicated in
para 5.8.4.4.). In the special reaches, additional nipples each side from the springing line shall also be
provided, to be determined by the Owner. In any section of the tunnel the concrete lining with in
about 30 m to 40 m of that section shall have been in place for at least 21 days before grouting
commences. The general extent and approximate location of the grout holes for contact grouting are
tentatively indicted on bid drawings for the purpose of bid operation. The final number, length,
location and inclination of drill holes as well as the composition and consistency of the grout
mixes, grouting pressures, pumping rates and the sequence in which the holes are to be drilled and
grouted shall be governed by actual conditions encountered at siteand shall be at all times subject
to approval by the Owner. The extent land location of chemical grouting, if needed anywhere, will be
determined by the Owner.
DAILY RECORDS OF GROUTING OPERATIONS
During the performance of the grouting works, the contractor shall keep
complete daily records of all grouting operations which shall include the following.
a) Number and location of the drill holes.
b) Results of water pressure tests.
c) Grouting method.
d) Date and time of commencement and of each change in grouting operations.
e) Rate of pumping
f) Grouting pressure and gauge reference number.
g) Water-cement ratio and its variations.
h) Quantities of cement, sand, bentonite, fly ash, admixtures and chemicals used.
i) Connections, if any, with other holes and cracks, as well as any surface leak age of water
or grout location, how caulked and the success of caulking shall be described.
j) Number of holes and depth of holes left for redrilling
k) Time of completion.
l) Names of the foremen/engineer of grouting. Grouting reports in an approved form shall
be complied from these records and submitted weekly to the Owner. Results of water
pressure tests and grout in takes shall be presented graphically.
(a) DRY PACK MORTAR: After completion of contract/backfill grouting as well as the
consolidation grouting(in special reaches) all grout holes shall be properlyfilled with dry
pack mortar to flushed level with concrete lining profile to the satisfactionof Owner.
GENERAL
i) Preliminary programme for completion of works shall be submitted indicating the
order in which the contractor intends to carryout the works in form of a bar chart. This
programme shall abide by the limit dates specified in the contract and shall constitute the basis to
prepare the detailed programme to be furnished by him later. The programme shall provide a clear
description of the temporary works locations and type of permanent installations and other
infrastructural features and job facilities.
ii) Broad construction equipment planning and proposed deployment of equipment on the
principal activities. The contractor shall deploy proper drill jumbos capable of fast and guided
drilling of tunnel heading and affording safety to the crews during tunneling and installation of
support system. He shall provide details of the whole range of the main and back up equipment
proposed to be deployed by him on the ;job, including drill jumbos, compressors, rock drills,
exploratory drilling equipment, rock bolting and shotcreting machines, concreting gantries, aggregate
processing equipment, grouting equipment, ventilation equipment, batching & mixing plants,
concrete transportation and concrete placement equipment for concrete lining.
iii) Detailed method statement, backed up with his proposed methodology and broad
calculations of cycle times in respect of the execution of all major activities to justify his capability
in achieving the completion of the construction of the owk tunnel within the tendered time period
for achieving the project objective. He shall also furnish a layout depicting the installation of
various job-facilities and infrastructure needed for under taking job.
OTHER ITEMS
UNDER DRAINAGE ARRANGEMENTS
Drainage arrangements in the form of inverted filter drains in the tunnel crown on both sides
shall be provided as shown in the drawings or as approved by CWC and/or directed by the Owner to
reduce or eliminate hydrostatic pressure behind the lining. The embedded G.I. Pipe shall be used for
this purpose wherever required as shown in the drawing.
MATERIALS
FILTER MATERIAL:-
Filter material shall consist of well graded materials as per requirement of IS 4558:1958
“Code of practice for under drainage of lined Approach and exit channels” The filter material
shall be clean, sound, free from debris, wood, vegetable matter and other deleterious matter. If
required, washing of the materials shall be resorted to so that the silt content is restricted within 8%
maximum.
G.I. PIPE :
The contractor shall provide 75 mm diameter G.I. pipe as approved in the drawing for weep
holes. The pipe shall be free from any manufacturing defects. The pipe shall be straight. These pipes
shown in the drawing shall be drilled into the rock above roof level and 75 mm diameter G.I. Pipe
shall be inserted into the above holes. Once the grouting of rock bolts has been completed in tunnel
crown, drilling for drainage holes shall be initiated according to the distribution and dimension
shown in the drawing or as approved by the Owner before laying G.I. pipes in the drainage holes, the
holes , the holes shall be washed to remove loose fragments.
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE WATER STOPS
5.8.6.1 Polyvinyl Chloride water stops shall normally have a centre bulb of 12.7 mm inside
diameter and 25.4 mm outside diameter. If shall be 300 mm in width and shall havea minimum of 2
or 3 longitudinal ribs on each side of the bulb evenly distributed between the bulb and edge of the
water stop. Each rib shall be 6.35 mm high. The rib adjustment to the central bulb shall have web
thickness of 12.7 mm and the rib adjacent to the edge shall have a web thickness of 9.53 mm. The
water stop shall be dense, homogeneous and free from holes and other imperfections. The water stops
shall meet the material and test requirements as per specifications. The cross sections of the water
stops shall be uniform along its length and the thickness shall be symmetrical transversely. Tolerance
from the dimensions given above shall be +5mm in width +2 mm in thickness and +1 mm for the
rest.
INSTALLATION
The P.V.C. water stops shall be provided at the construction joints in the stilling basin at entry etc.,
The location and embedding of the P.V.C. water stops shall be as shown on the drawing or as
directed by the Owner. Prior to embedding, the edges of the water stops shall be secured to
looped wire in the end bulbs to improve the concrete bond as shown on the drawing. The manner
in which the water stops secured to the reinforcing bars is subject to the approval of Owner.
6. BUILDING AND OTHER INFRA WORKS
.
a. Rest House Building:
Work shall involve planning, designing, construction of Rest House building along with its
required ancillary services like water supply, drainage, electrification, furnishing etc complete. Work
will also include required foundation treatment, land filling etc. Rest House Building shall be of
RCC framed structure having following facilities.
• Rooms and Total Plinth area of Rest House shall be 700 sqm
• It should have 2 Double bed rooms and 4 Single bed rooms
• All double bed rooms shall have attached dressing and Bath room
• Single bed rooms shall have attached bath rooms
• Each room shall have one door, one window, one bed, one almirah, one fan point, two light
points , one power point.
• Vitrified Porcelain Polished tiles of size (600mmX600mm) of make (Johnson/Kajariya)
10mm thick on floor skirting and steps etc. laid with tile admixture (Roof Pidilite of
equivalent) including joints to be filled with tile grout shall be provided for flooring except
toilets where ceramic tiles of superior quality shall be provided.
• Meeting Hall, Dining Hall, Reception etc. shall be provided
• The full Rest House is to be finished in every respect i. e. furnishing , AC , Sanitary
Fittings , Double Beds, Center Table , Officers Chair etc.
Chambers shall be equipped with removable cast iron/ precast concrete covers, approachladders/
rungs and valve supports as appropriate.
Preparatory works
The Contractor shall undertake the following works:
i) Approval of architecture, design and drawing of civil structures
ii) Approval of developmental plans and landscaping
iii) Approval of design and drawing of Staff quarters and recreation facilities
iv) Drainage plans and designs
v) Electrification of campus area
vi) Pipe and piping work for potable water in campus area
vii) Other designs / plans required for campus area development
Horticulture and Landscaping
Horticulture and Landscaping shall be done according to the topography of the area and should be
planned so as to make the campus a focal point. The open areas leaving expansion requirements
must either be covered by tree plantation or must be suitablygrassed. Shadow trees must be planted at
a maximum distance of 15 m c/c along the periphery of the campus area and along the roads. The
campus must be provided with gardens, with seasonal flowerbeds and decorative plants.
Horticulture operations shall be started on ground leveled and dressed to require formation levels
and slopes. In case where unsuitable soil is met with, it shall be either removed or replaced or it shall
be covered over to a thickness decided by Employer‟s Representative with good earth.
Specification for Furniture

Executive Table
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25 mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS
pipe, with standard size two drawer on right side operate on precision made slides, using 22 gauge
MS sheet. Tabletop of 18mm thick particle board laminated with veneertop (shade to be approved
by Employer‟s Representative) and back panel having teak wood beading all around. Drawers to be
provided with suitable locking arrangement and with Godrej type handle. The glass top (5 mm thick)
shall be provided.
Size – 2135 mm x 865mm - height 735mm
Table
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25 mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS
pipe, with standard size two drawer on right side operate on precision made slides, using 22 gauge
MS sheet. Tabletop of 18mm thick particle board laminated with veneertop (shade to be approved
by Employer‟s Representative) and back panel having teal wood beading all around. Drawers to be
provided with suitable locking arrangement and with Godrej type handle. (Godrej or Equivalent) The
glass top (5 mm thick) shall be provided.
Size- 1675mmx865mm - height- 750mm
Computer Table
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipes
'C' frame designed with sliding keyboard on nylon rollers. Table top and sliding board of 18mm pre-
laminated particleboard with PVC lipping.Size -730 mm (W) x 880 mm (D) x 750mm (H).
Printer Table
Godrej or Equivalent make table frame of 25x25mm tubular section of 16 gauge ERW MS pipes
'C' frame designed on nylon rollers. Tabletop and sliding board of 18mm pre laminated particleboard
with PVC lipping.
Size-730mm(w)x770mm(d)x750mm(h)
Revolving Chairs with Arms
Godrej or Equivalent make chair with revolving seat on tubular pipe frame of 25mm diameter ERW
MS pipe of 14 gauge having high back with push back system and PU arms on five pronged base
with ball coaster and pneumatic seat height adjustment. Moulded PU foam on seat and back and
covered with good quality tapestry, colour and quality of tapestry should be used as approved by
Employer‟s Representative.
Size-660mm (d) x660mm (w)
Height - 1025mm-1145mm Seat
height - 440mm-560mm Visitor
Chair
Godrej or Equivalent make chair made of 25mmx25mm tubular section of 14 gauge, 25mm
diameter ERW MS pipe of moulded PU foam on seat and back with upholstered seat and back
by good quality tapestry as approved by Employer‟s Representative.
Size-460mm (w) x820mm (h)
Seat height – 450 mm
Steel Almirah
Godrej or Equivalent make office storewell made from high quality CRCA steel of 20 gauge having
anti rust treatment equipped with Godrej precision lock and four adjustable shelves with powder
coated finish of following sizes:
1980mmx915mmx485mm (Big)
1270mmx765mmx440mm (Small)
Filing Cabinet
Godrej or Equivalent make 4 drawer lateral filing cabinet made of premium quality CRCA
corrosion resistant steel of 20 gauge with 25mm teak wood table top and powder coated finish.
Drawer should be moved on precision balls slides with anti tipping and anti-rebound mechanism
provided with full length drawer pulls.
Desert Cooler
600mm sweep ISI mark exhaust fan and ISI mark water pump fitted in 20 gauge MSbody.
Lockers
Godrej or Equivalent make industrial locker of 18 doors size 284mm(h) x 274mm (w) x 485mm (d)
made of 20 gauge premium quality CRCA anti corrosive steel fitted with Godrej precision lock,
handle and label holder.
Drawing Cabinet
Godrej or equivalent make cabinet shall be made of premium quality corrosive resistant 20gauge
steel. A seamless, integral casing should framed through careful welding of sheet metal components.
Drawers should be smoothly moved on a accurately fabricated precision slides having nylon
rollers. Drawers should be fitted with label holders,Continuous pull out handles, and multi lever
Godrej lock with anti tipping and antirebound mechanism.
Overall dimension - 625mm (h) x1170mm (w) x865mm (d)Drawer
dimension - 65mm (h) x1040mm (w) x780mm (d) No. of drawers -
6
Ordinary Cane Chair
Godrej or Equivalent make made of 25mm diameter tubular MS ERW pipe of 14 gauge seasoned
teak wood seat and back with canning without arms, cantilevered chair duly polished and painted and
using half round canning.
430mm (w) x 570mm (d) x 885mm (h)
450mm seat height
Side Racks
Godrej or equivalent make made of 35x35mm ERW MS angle section with five shelves.Shelves
material should be 20 gauge ERW MS sheet.
5 tier - 1800mmx900mmx375mm
Sofa Set
Made of teak wood frame with 80 mm thick 40 density foam seats upholstered with goodquality
tapestry, design to be approved by Employer‟s Representative.
Central Table
Made of teak wood, 12 mm thick tinted glass top, design as approved by Employer‟s
Representative.
Pelmet and Curtain Rods
12 mm thick palmets with 20 mm dia anodised Aluminium curtain rod with Aluminium
brackets, and 100*25*3mm MS flat 150 mm wide of M P teak wood grade
Rolling Shutter
Providing ,and fixing rolling steel shutters fabricated from 18/20 gauge steel laths with side
guides, bottom rail, brackets, door suspension shaft, rolling springs, locking arrangements and
housing box at the top including painting complete.
Painting Iron and Steel work:
In addition to specifications for oil painting “General " the following shall also apply forpainting Iron
and Steel Work -
Operation and workmanship for painting iron and steel work shall be as per I.S 1477 (Part1959,
code of practice for finishing of Iron and Steel in Buildings, painting and allied finishes. Subject to
the following -
The method of preparation of the surface for painting shall be as specified by Engineer in
charge- Where Iron and steel works need repainting (maintenance),instructions detailed In clause n
of I. S. 1477 ( Part - I) 1959 shall be followed.
Red lead paint shall be used for primer coat unless other paints are specified. The number of
primer coats shall be given in detailed specifications for each item where not given it shall be one
coat.
Intermediate protective treatments (pre-treatments) shall be omitted unless specified in the
special provisions.
The finishing coat shall be of the paint as specified for each item by the Engineer. The number of
finishing coats of the required shade of colour shall also be specified for each item separately. They
shall be two when the number is not specified.Actual date of painting girders, steel tanks and other
steel structures shall be neatly marked by the contractor on the structure according to the instructions
of the Engineer-in Charge.
Roads
Contractor shall construct new Service road of 3.75m wide carriage way along tunnel with all
associated component and other necessary works. Contractor shall construct network roads within
project area to link all the proposed buildings and amenities.
The works for roads shall cover site clearance, construction/ preparation of earthen embankment,
subgrade, sub-base (granular), base course, pre mix carpet surfacing, Cross Drainage (CD) works,
pipe culverts, shoulder construction, road markings, kilometer stones, Arboriculture and other
associated civil works and maintenance of the constructed road for 8 (Eight) years.
CD Works
It shall be as per IRC SP-13 and MoRTH specification.
To provide effective drainage across the road at all natural rivers, Nallahs and in areas where
impounding of water is suspected, the Contractor shall design and provide required cross drainage
structures including necessary river training works. The provided structures must ensure safety of
their foundation and protection of Nallah/river/road banks in embankment. All CD works, VRB,
DRB structures shall be designed for AA class loading. Discharge calculation of each CD work shall
be based SP 13 and other Standardsof IS and IRC.
Technical Provision for Gates
The materials shall conform to the specifications as mentioned in the approved drawings and as per
direction of the Engineer-in-charge. The Contractor shall go through the approved drawings
thoroughly and bring to notice of the Engineer-in-charge immediately of any discrepancy or
deficiency before taking up fabrication. The Engineer-in-charge shall not be responsible if any
problem arises due to discrepancy in the drawings noticed during or after fabrication. The
Contractor shall be fully responsible for smooth operating of the gates under all conditions. The
gates shall be capable of being operative at any opening under all conditions of unbalanced
operations and shall be free from vibrations at all conditions of gate operation. The leakage through
the gates shall not exceed the permissible limits. The EPC contractor can also use high quality
HDPE Gates with modern technology and confirming to national or international standards.
Metal work, Fabrication and Machine work:
All fabrication work under the contract shall be done in accordance with the specifications and
works shall be performed and completed in a through workman like manner as per the practice in
manufacture and fabrication of materials of the type covered by the specification. The work, shall in
all cases, be of the highest quality and carefully performed to the specification of the Engineer-in-
Charge. All materials and workmanship furnished by the Contractor be free from injurious defect.
He shall replace free of cost to the Engineer-in- Charge, any defect in material or workmanship
noticed during erection and shall bear all cost of the modification in the field of any defect for
which he is
responsible. Workmanship shall conform to the latest standards, laid down in Indian Standard
specification.
All members shall be free of twists, bends or other deformations and all surfaces that will be in
contact shall be thoroughly cleaned before assembling. Parts shall be adjusted to line and fit and
shall be firmly bolted or otherwise held securely together so that surfaces are in close contact
before drilling, reaming or welding is commenced.
If weight limitations and transport clearances do not permit anchorages and miscellaneous embedded
parts, they shall be fabricated into sub-assemblies. The Contractor shall submit a drawing showing
the sub-assemblies into which he proposes to fabricate the gates, anchorages, miscellaneous
assemblies and embedded parts and hoists for transporting them to site.
Plates with laminations discovered during cutting, welding or at any other time shall be rejected.
Minor surface imperfections can be repaired wherever possible with the prior approval of the
Engineer-in-Charge. Materials not supplied or workmanship not performed in accordance with
the approved drawings and / or with the specifications shall be rejected and replaced.
All parts of the gates, hoists shall be fabricated in accordance with the specifications and approved
drawing. The Contractor shall take special care in fabrication of the parts affecting strength, rigidity
and water tightness of the gates. The seal bases shall be finished after the plates have been welded
to the skin plate and the finished surfaces of the seal bases shall be in the same plane within the
tolerances as specified elsewhere.
Applicable IS. codes:
Steel structures like Gates: All structure of steel shall be executed as per specifications given in the
following IS Codes. All materials & methods and procedures for the work of design, manufacture,
transport, supply and installation shall conform to latest edition Indian Standard Specification and
other publication listed below unless otherwise specified.
Code of Practice for General Construction inSteel.
IS : 800
IS : 808 (Part – 1) Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Beams M.B. Series.IS : 808
(Part – II) Dimensions for Hot Rolled Steel Column
Series.
All parts Specification for covered Electrodes for Metal Arc
IS : 814 Welding
of structural steel, Welding Sheets.
Classification and coding of covered Electrodes for MetalArc
IS : 815 Welding of Structural steel.
Code of Practice for Use of Metal Arc Welding forGeneral
Construction in Mild Steel.
IS : 816
IS : 961 High Tensile Structural SteelIS :
1028 IS : 1458 Bronze
Bushing
IS : 7205 Safety code for erection of structural steel. IS :
7215 Tolerances for fabrication of steel structure.
IS : 8500 Weldable structural steel (Medium & High strength qualities)
IS : 9595 Recommendations of metal Arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels.
IS : 9917 Specification for calcium base heat stable grease.
Pictorial surface preparation standard for painting of seal
IS : 9954 surface.
IS : 11228 Recommendations for design of screw hoists for Hydraulicgate

IS : 11855 General Requirements for Rubber seals for Hydraulic gates.
The above list is only indicative & in no way complete or exhaustive. Any other
materials necessary as per approved drawings have to be procured and used by
the Contractorwithin quoted rates.
SECTION - VI
QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALITY CONTROL
1. GENERAL OBLIGATIONS OF THE CONTRACTOR

i. The Contractor shall establish staff, equip and operate a comprehensive quality assurance
organization at the site during the full period of the Works. The principal responsibilityand duty
of this organization shall be to ensure that all work carried out and materials produced or supplied
by the Contractor shall comply fully with the Specifications as well as with all relevant Indian or
other standards.
ii. a) The Contractor shall prepare a detailed quality control manual, organization plan and staffing
programme. This manual shall list all internal quality control procedures to be undertaken by the
Contractor, given details of laboratories (listing their equipment and testing procedures), reporting
procedures, Quality control training programmes for his staff. Sampling procedure, frequency of
testing, preservation of samples, list of external Quality control labs having accreditation where the
samples can be sent to counter check, tolerance.
iii. The Contractor shall prepare detailed Quality assurance and control procedures with detailed
procedure for control charts, statistical analysis & online reporting system. The bidder shall design
such systems & provide hardware & software‟s for day to day reporting of the programmed &
frequency of testing.
iv. Within 60 days of issue of the order to Commence, the Contractor will submit to the Engineer-in-
charge, for review and approval, a detailed and updated Quality control manual and programme,
which will take into account all comments made by the Engineer-in-charge.
v. At all times, the Contractor's quality control and other site personnel will co-operate with and
inform fully the Engineer-in-charge in all matters relating to the work in progress and testing of
materials etc., and will reply promptly to any requests by the Engineer-in- charge and his site
supervision personnel for additional information and data.
vi. The Engineer-in-charge may establish and operate his own site laboratories for materials testing,
and contractor will be required to provide at no cost to Water resources Department samples for
testing in these laboratories. The contractor shall be required send samples to outside labs also for
third party certification at the cost of contractor as per the instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
vii. Supervision and testing which may be carried out by the Engineer-in-charge no way relieves the
Contractor of his full responsibility for the quality of the works and for compliance with the
requirements of these specifications.
2. CONTROL OF THE PROGRESS OF WORK
i. Close progress control, and the preparation of corresponding progress reports, shall be an important
part of the Contractor's quality control responsibilities. The Contractor must at all times provide the
Engineer-in-charge with up to date information on the progress of work and must without delay
bring to the attention of the Engineer-in-charge all delays or occurrences which could lead to
delay or additional costs.
ii. The Contractor shall submit detailed monthly progress reports to the Engineer-in-charge, in which
the contractual programme for the works is updated and information is given on the quantitative
completion of civil works (in the form of tables indicating the quantitiesof completed works).
iii. The monthly progress reports shall give full details of any delays to work in progress or planned,
delays in transport to/from the site, together with detailed proposals for overcoming or preventing
delays, and for regaining any lost time.
iv. The Contractor shall at any time, at the request of the Engineer-in-charge, submit detailed
reposts on particular matters relating to the execution and progress to the works, is such reports
are required in order to assess the quality or progress of specific activitiesor works.
3. CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL STAFF

i. The Contractor shall assign one experienced engineer to site as full – time quality control officer,
responsible with complying with all requirement of this Section.
ii. The experience and qualification of this engineer shall be given in the contractor's tender and shall
be subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-charge.
iii. The positions, and the qualification and duties, of the contractor's quality control staff shall
be indicated in the quality control organization plan and manual respectively, and shall likewise be
subject approval by the Engineer-in-charge.
4. CONTRACTOR'S LABORATORIES
a) The Contractor shall establish, equip and operate fully furnished laboratories for the mix design
and testing of the principal construction materials at site.
b) The numbers of samples to be tested, and the timing of testing, shall be as specified in
relevant IS Codes, or upto satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
c) The staff of the Contractor's laboratory shall have proven experience in similar previous work
and their qualification shall be subject to approval by the Engineer- in-charge.
d) Complete records shall be kept of all laboratory tests carried out and shall be available at any
time to the Engineer-in-charge on request.
e) The Engineer-in-charge shall be permitted at any time and without notice to observe tests being
carried out in any of the Contractor's laboratories, to inspect equipment or to study results.
5. SITE LABORATORIES
Due to the nature of the work, the material for preparing concrete and the concrete itself must be
of very high quality and the reliability of all material must be ascertained at the commencement of the
work. A well – equipped laboratory shall be established on site and shall be equipped maintained and
managed by the Contractor and he shall keep a full time well – experienced laboratory Engineer-in-
charge thereof. The Personnel‟s working with the testing of the concrete shall be well trained for
their task. Furthermore, the facilities of the laboratory and the assistance of its personnel‟s shall be
available to the Owner for his independent tesing well before the Commencement of the Concreting of
any Permanent works structures , related pre-construction and others requisite tests shall have been
performed. These tests shall be carried out by the Contractor & put up for the approval of the
owner.
All testing of concrete material and other works shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate
“ Bureau of Indian Standard “ or “British Standard Institution “ or “ American Society for Testing
Materials (ASTM) Standard Specifications and Methods “ , except when otherwise agree with the
owner. The laboratory equipment shall be calibrated and checked periodically to the approval of the
owner.
In addition to equipments required for the stipulated BS or ASTM tests, the following equipment to the
approval of the Engineer-in-charge shall be provided and installed in the laboratory by the contractor.
6. FREQUENCY OF TESTING
S. Test Frequency of Test Purpose Test Designation
No.
1. Grain size analysis One test per day for To know the AsperIS:2720-IV- 1985,
for classification every 3000 m3 classifications of IS: 2720-V-
and Atterberg‟s soil actually put in 1985.
limits the embankment
2. Specific Gravity One test per day -do- IS:2720-III-1980
3. Field Density and One test for every To determine the IS:2720-XXVIII-
Moisture content 1500m3ofearthwork Placement density 1974
And atleast one test i n And moisture
IS:2720-XXIX-1975
Each layer laid on content.
embankment IS:2720-XXXIII-1971
4. In-situ permeability One test every 3m of To determine IS:2720-XVII-1986
Test embankment height or permeability
for 20,000 m3 characteristics of the
fill material
5. Tri-axial ShearT est One test in every 3mof To know the shear IS:2720-XII-1981
embankment or for characteristics of fill
20,000 m3 material (in-situ)
6. Consolidation Test 1 set of 3 samples in To know the IS:2720-XV-1986
every 6m height of settlement rate and
embankment or for its magnitude.
30,000 m3
7. Standard Proctor Forevery10,000cum To determine MDD IS:2720-VII-1980
Test Of compacted earth or And OMC of the soil
Where there is change And compare the
In the borrow area or Results with
Change of soil texture, Laboratory value
Limited to minimum
three samples and
maximum10samples.
8. Moisture content One test in each To know the IS:2720-II-1980
sample moisture content of
the sample
9. Shrinkage Factor Onetestin5mtrsof To determine IS:2720-VI-1972
embankment height shrinkage limited
FILTERS
10. Grain Size Analysis One test for every To find % of the D10, IS:2385-PartI-1963
200m3offilter(sand) D15, D30 D50, ,
One test for every 200 D60 and D85 grain
m3 of filter Aggregate) sizes of Materials
11. Clay lumps and One test for every 200 To find out clay IS:2386-PartII-1963
organic impurities m3(sand) ,One test for lumps & Organic
every 200 m3 impurities level
(Aggregate)
S Test Frequency IS Allowable Limits

N
1. CEMENT
a)Chemical For each a)IS:269-1989 OPC<0.60%
i) Alkalies consignment b)IS:1489-1991 PPC<0.70%
ii)Minor, major oxides by c)IS:4032-1985
Calorimetry
iii)Chloride PPC/OPC<0.05%
b) Physical For each a) IS:269-1989
i) Fineness consignment b) IS:1489-1991 Not<2250 cm2/gm
ii)Soundness(Le Chatelier Not>10mm
iii)Consistency
iv)Setting time (Initial & IS:4031-1988 Penetration upto 5 to 7 mm
Final) from base.
v)Compressive Strength IT–Not<30min
vi)Heat of Hydration FT–Not>600min
vii)Drying shrinkage 3days -160 Kg/cm2
7days -220 Kg/cm2
28days -330 Kg/cm2
PPC7days–65 Cal./gm
OPC28days–75 Cal./gm
< 0.15%
S. Test Frequency Purpose IS Allowable Limits

No.
2. FINEAGGREGATE
i)Screen Analysis One test for To know grain Size IS: 2386 2.2to3.2
(Fineness Modulus) every150m3 and The fineness Part I-
Of sand used modulus Of sand 1963
In concrete
ii)Unit Weight - As above- (also To utilize data for IS:2386 Allowable limit of
and Bulkage of once in a shift or mix design Part III- Bulkage of sand
sand for every computation 1963 is20%
consignment)
iii)Organic -As above- To assess the IS:2386 As explained in Sec.
impurities PartII-
quality Of sand 1963 4.2.2
iv)Soundness One test for every To assess the IS :2386 Loss Not >10% after5
quality Of sand
150cum Of sand Part V- Cycles of immersion in
v)Silt Content One test for To IS :2386 Notgreaterthan3%
every150cum Assess -1963 For natural FA and Not
of sand used in the silt content greaterthan5%for
concrete present in the sand crushed FA
3. COARSEAGGREGATE
i)Sieve Analysis One test for To know IS:2386
every150m3 gradatio PartI-
Or less. n and 1963
percenta
ge of
various
size
ii) Specific -do- Toutilize dataf IS :2386 Not>2.6
Gravity, Bulk or mix design Part III- Notmorethan5%by
Density, Moisture computat ion. 1963 weight Not >3%
content,
Absorption & Silt
Continent
iii)Soundness test -do- To IS :2386 LossNot >12% after5

(Sodium Sulphate assess PartV- cyclesof immersion in
method)
the 1963 Na2SO4
quality
ofcourse
aggregat
e
iv)Abrasion, -do- -do- IS:2386 Wearing Surfaces:
Impact&
Crushing Value PartIV LossNot>30%Non
1963 WearingSurfaceNot
>45%
v)Organic -do- -do- IS :2386 Lessthan 1%
Impurities
(Mica content) PartII-
1963
vi)Alkali Twice in one working To know the IS :2386 Fallinginleftsideof
reactivity season 'innocuo us' PartVII- Sc/Re curve..
(Alkali- or 1963 'Innocuous'
Aggregate 'deleterio Fallinginrightsideof
reactivity) us'natureof Sc/Re curve...
aggregat e 'Deleterious'
vii)Petrographic Twiceinone To know the IS:2386 Deleterious
Examination working deleterious Part Constituent plus silt
season Constituents VIII- Shall not exceeds 5%
and silt in
aggregate
vi)Specific Gravity, One test for To utilise the data IS :2386
moisture content and every150cum of for mix design Part III-
absorption sand used in computat ions 1963
concrete
S. Test Frequency IS AllowableLimits
No
.
1. GRAVEL
i) Size of Gravel For each IRC:19-1977 Not larger than ¾"
ii) Liquid limit stack <20%
iii)Plasticity Index <6%
2. WATER Two IS:3025PartII 6to 8
pHvalue, Organic, In- samples Not greater than 200
organic for each IS:3025Part18 mg/l
source Notgreaterthan3000mg/
l
Sulphates, Chlorides IS:3025-Part24 Notgreaterthan400mg/l
IS:3025-Part32 Plain Concrete: Not
greater than 2000 mg/lit
RCC Work: Not greater
than 1000 mg/lit.
Suspended Solids IS:3025-Part- Notgreaterthan2000mg/l
17
3. RRSTONE
i)Abrasion value Foreac IS:1124-1974 Nottoexceed6%
ii)Crushing Strength h IS:1121-1974 Granite–1000 Kg/cm2
quarry Basalt–400 Kg/cm2
iii)Specific Gravity IS:1122-1974 2.60
iv)Water Absorption IS:1124-1974 Nottoexceed5%
v)Durability IS:1126-1974
4. REINFORCEMENT For each IS:1786-1985 Dia ≤ 8mm
Weight consignmen IS:432-1982 4%
t
Diameter Refer the table below
Ultimate for allowable limits.
Test
Strength
Yield
Stress
Elongation
1) Allowable Limits for ReinforcementBars
Types of Characteristic Ultimate Minimum
reinforcement strength(yield tensile elongation on
stress stress, gauge length of
of0.2%proofstre N/mm2 5.65xSq.rt.Cros
ss) N/mm2 s-sectional area
(%)
Mild steel of grades

I 255 412 20-
236 23
II 231 373 20-
211 23
Medium tensile 353 538 17-
steel 348 20
323
Cold worked 415 15%more than 14.5
deformed bars the actual 0.2%
proof stress
500 10%more than 12
the actual 0.2%
proof stress
Hot Rolled 412 15%higher than 14.5
the yield
stress
SAIL-MA of grades
300 HY 300 440-560 20
350 HY 350 490-610 20
410 HY 410 540-660 19
Frequency to Testing Cement Mortar, Masonry and Concrete
S. Test Frequency IS Allowable Limited
No.
1 Cube Test for 3 tests specimens per IS:456-
concrete 50m3 of concrete subject 2000
to a minimum of three
samples per day for each
grade of concrete.
2. Cube test for 3testspereachgradeof IS:2250-
cement mortar mortar per day 1981
in masonry Appendix-A
3. Permeability Once in a week IS:3085- Not greater than 2.5x10-
8
test on cement 1965 mm pers ec. for rich
mortar mortar &4.8x10-8 for
lean mortar.
4. Permeability At least two holes in IS:11216- Not greater than 2.5
test on every block for every 1985 Lugeons in masonry in
masonry lift, one in upstream and CM 1:3 and 5 Lugeons
(applicable one in downstream in in masonry in CM 1:4
for masonry staggered fashion. for dams.
dams)
5. Slump test One test in each shift on IS :1199- As per Mix design.
at frequent intervals to 1959
checked workability
The actual frequencies shall be determined by the Engineer-in-charge to suit the nature and variability
of material placed and the rate of fill placement with the objective of ensuring best quality control
and quality construction.
7. MATERIALS DELIVERED TO SITE

a) The contractor's quality control staff shall keep full records of all materials delivered to site
for use in the works, and of all tests made on such materials either prior to or following delivery
to site.
b) These records shall be available at all times to the Engineer-in-charge, together with any
factory testing certificates.
.The Engineer-in-Charge may also ask for Pre-Dispatch inspections for any other item(s) not shown in
the list of items requiring pre-dispatch inspection, for which the contractor shall make necessary
arrangements, without any additional costs to the Department.
i. OK cards as mentioned below, shall be maintained :
ii. O.K. Card for raising / Strengthening of Earthen Embankments / Fill Placement &
Compaction
iii. Supplementary O.K. Card for subsequent layers of earth work.
iv. O.K. Card for Sub grade preparation for placement of lining
v. O.K. Card for placement of cast-in-Situ Concrete lining
vi. O.K. Card for Random Rubble Stone Masonry
vii. O.K. Card for Plain & Reinforced Cement Concrete
viii. O.K. Card for PCC Slab tunnel Lining
ix. O.K. Card for Grouting,
x. OK Card Shotcrete
xi. OK Card for Guniting
xii. OK Card for pipe line work
xiii. OK Card for hem works
Format for above mentioned OK cards shall be approved by Engineer in charge withconsultation to
QC unit.
Required record but not limited to following will also be mandatorily maintained byConstruction
agency.
i. Density Register
ii. Cement receipt and Consumption Register
iii. Slump Test Register
iv. Concrete Cube casting Register
v. Mortar cube register
vi. Inspection Register
vii. Gradation Register for Fine sand
viii. Gradation register for aggregate
ix. Test Result of Bricks, tiles / PCC Blocks/ Soil/Cement/steel and other material beingused at
site.
x. Concrete batch/Load register
xi. Printed slip of each concrete Batch showing ingredients of concrete
xii. Kerosene test register for swell index
xiii. Grouting register
xiv. Flexure test register for Tiles
xv. Duly signed Bar bending schedule and drawings good to construction of each
structure.
xvi. Detailed estimate, drawings, and agreement of work .
All these registers will be maintained by Contractor and got checked to Junior Engineerand
Assisitant Engineer regularly and each officer during inspection of site.
• Before start of work, all types of material need to be stacked at site in adequate quantity and
same shall be got tested from Zonal Labs. Mix design of All the grades of concrete shall be
got done from MT lab ID&R Jaipur
• All the concrete shall be strictly done with weigh batching system with printing and memory
facility for details of each concrete batch.
• For concrete above M20 and Above grade, mix design shall be done preferably using
Admixtures to achieve economy and durability in concrete.
• Dry bulk density (DBD) test with core cutter be done at the frequency of, one test for every 1500
m3 of earth work and at least one test in each layer laid on embankment. (in accordance with
IS code IS: 2720(part 29)-1975)
• Norms for cement concrete with regard to mix design, laying and testing as per the IS codes
IS:516-1959, IS:456-2000, IS:1199-1959 & IS:10262-1982.
• It should be ensured in the field that curing of the work be done on continuous basis for 28
days invariably.
7.2 Manufacture’s Certifications

In addition to the items listed below, the Department may ask for relevant certificates of the
manufacturer for any item supplied in the contract.
Cables
All cables supplied under the Contract shall be subject to routine tests in accordance with the
relevant Indian ISS. Cables will not be accepted on Site for installation until certificates giving proof of
compliance with the Specification and details of tests results have been received and approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge. A certificate shall be applicable to each drum. The tests to be carried out on every
drum at manufacturer‟s premises shall include:
a. High voltage AC insulation pressure test between cores, each core to earth metallic sheath
or armour as applicable;
b. Insulation resistance test;
c. Core continuity and identification;
d. Conductor resistance test.
7.3 Electrical Equipments
Tests to ensure the compliance to respective standards shall be provided for the MCB‟s,relays, fuses
port insulator and other electrical equipments.
i. Electrical Measuring Instruments and Meters
Tests shall be undertaken in accordance with the relevant ISO/IS to ensure accurate operation of all
meters such as Ammeters, Voltmeters, Frequency Meters, Power Factor Meters, kW, kWh &kVAR
meters and multi functional meters.
ii. Pipes
All type of pipes shall be tested in accordance to relevant ISO/IS to ensure quality during entire service
life.
8. SAFETY
The Contractor's obligation with regard to site safety are detailed in Section 1.6 of these
specifications.
9. TRAINING OF OWNER'S STAFF

The contractor must allow for providing quality control training to Owner's personnel during the
construction period for a total of five (5) man/woman months (each trainee for a period on site of
approximately one month), the suitable accommodation with lodging & transportation will be provided
by the contractor .
10. PROJECT COMPLETION
10.1 Based upon completion manuals prepared under 'Planning , Design and
Engineering Services" , the Contractor (or consortium of contractors) shall carry out
completion related activities of the project :
a) Final inspection of civil structures upon completion
b) Reservoir impoundments at specified rates, surveillance during impound and
remedial action, if any
c) Dry and wet testing of gates and other hydro-mechanical equipment
d) completion of the project as a wholeThe Contractor shall fully involve the
owner's site team during above process so that the team is fully trained with
functioning of different components and equipment‟s of the project.
10.2 Full documentation of completion activities shall be maintained and same shall
be submitted to the owner as a complete report.
11 EXPERIENCE AND QUALIFICATION OF STAFF

For all operation and maintenance works, the Contractor shall provide skilled staff, which has adequate
qualifications and sufficient experience of similar works. CV of General Manager, Shift-in-charge, will
have to be got approved from the Employer mentionedin scope of work
1. The requirement mentioned in scoope of work is minimum only. The Contractor will
arrange extra work force, as and when required, so as to smoothly run the operation and
maintenance including preventive maintenance, repairs etc. and general cleanliness of the
installations.
2. The Contractor will have to maintain adequate transportation facilities for daily patrolling of
the pipe line and will ensure regular watch on pipe line.
3. The above staff strength is exclusive of leave reserve required for different category of
staff. The Contractor shall ensure availability of the personnel given in the above table for
all seven days in a week The Contractor shall make appropriate arrangements for
maintenance of items like road work, buildings, arboriculture, patrolling and maintenance of
civil structures, vehicle operations and other activities defined to fulfill its obligations under
O&M Contract.
12 SPARE
PARTS
All spare parts used for the equipment in the maintenance of the system must be from the manufacturer
of the equipment or, if the equipment itself has been made with parts from othermanufacturers, the
parts must be of the same make as used in the equipment supplied and installed.
All spare parts shall be packed for long storage under the climatic conditions prevailing at the Site. Each
spare part shall be labeled on the outside of its packing with its description, number and purpose and,
if more than one spare is packed in a single case, a general description of the case contents shall be
shown on the outside and a packing list enclosed.
13 ALL OTHER BUILDINGS
The Contractor shall carry out ordinary repairs to buildings during the O&M period. The repairs may
include but not limited to the following items:
i. Easing of doors and windows, monsoon repairs to roofs, attention to drains, rain water spouts,
attention to plinth protection.
ii. External white or color wash, external or internal painting, internal distempering, renewal of
approach roads within the campus.
iii. Repairs to other official buildings must be carried out during May to June except for white and
color washing work, which should be done in September and October after monsoon in
residential buildings.
Following repairs prior to onset of monsoon are essential:
i. Any faults in the electric installation, leakages, earthing, exposed wire ends and any hazards on
this account to the users/inmates of the buildings, should be taken care of suitably; wiring, which
is damaged or outlived, should be replaced.
ii. Damaged sanitary lines should be replaced and choked lines cleared.
iii. Proper drainage of the area around the building should be ensured to avoid stagnation of rain
water/ house effluent, in order to prevent malarial conditions. Where courtyards exist in the
buildings, their drainage into the outer drains should be ensured. Any choked drains should be
cleared properly.
iv. Leaking roofs should be attended to immediately with suitable repairs/ treatment, as the case may
be. The rain waterspouts should also be cleared of blockages, etc. The roof should be swept clean
of leaves, debris, etc., if any.
v. The plaster on outer walls of the building, which is exposed to weather, should be repaired before
rains in order to prevent dampness inside. Where plinth protection has been provided, it should be
checked and the damaged portions, if any, should be repaired before rains.
vi. Damaged flooring should be repaired/ replaced as per requirement, in order to prevent dampness
inside the rooms, etc., during rains.
vii. Periodic repairs of damaged floors, door/window fittings, water taps, water coolers, furniture,
desert coolers, electric circuits, must be taken up on complaints using the material of same quality
as used during construction.
14 ROADS
14.1 General:
The works shall be carried out in conformity with the relevant Specifications to the required level, grade
and lines using approved materials. The works shall be carried out using light duty machinery or
manual means provided the quality of the end product does not suffer. In execution of maintenance
works, a reference is made to the IRC publications: “Manual for Maintenance of Roads” for guidance and
compliance wherever applicable. Wherever the Specification is not clear, good Engineering practice
shall be adopted in the construction tothe satisfaction of the Employer‟s Representative.
14.2 Maintenance Work of Road During O&M Period:
• Repairing potholes and undulations found in the roads and road cuts.
• Repairing edges of the pavement.
• Repairs to shoulders at least 1.5 m on either side of road and to maintain them inproper
gradient i.e. 3%.
• Ensuring that the pavement and the shoulders at least 1.5 m on either side are keptclear of
any obstruction.
• Keeping a check on the encroachment and damage to the Government property.
• Cleaning and repairing of roadside and catch water drains.
• Jungle clearance to have proper site clearance.
• Cleaning of roads by removing dead animals, fallen trees, stones etc.
• Maintaining the kilometer stones, road signs and caution boards, drums etc. fixed onthe road
in a good state of repairs. This will generally involve the following activities:
a) Fixing of dislocated boards and stones.
b) Periodical painting
c) Repairs to boards such as welding or tightening of nuts and bolts.
d) Fixing of new boards where necessary.
• Maintaining all diversion in good condition.
• Maintaining speed humps nicely.
• Maintenance of cross drainage (CD) Works: This will generally involve the following
activities:
i) Clearing of the silt of waterway.
ii) Repairs to the damaged portions of the CD works.
iii) Repairs to cut off walls, apron, parapet walls etc.
iv) Painting of culverts and bridges.
v) Reporting of any serious abnormality and conditions to the ExecutiveEngineer.
vi) Maintaining the u/s and d/s of waterway clean by cutting of vegetation, excavation
etc.
• Maintenance of Signs:
The signs along with the posts shall be maintained in proper position, and kept clean and legible at all
times. Damaged signs shall be replaced immediately. All signs shall be inspected at least twice a year.
Special care shall be taken to see that weeds, shrubbery, mud etc. are not allowed to obscure any sign.
• Maintenance of arboriculture: This will generally involve the following activities:
i) Watering of plants at required intervals.
ii) Re-plantation without any additional cost in place of dead plants or damagedplants
iii) Inter cultural operation such as hoeing and weeding etc.
iv) Pruning and trimming and cutting of old big trees for required growth.
15 RESTORATION OF RAIN CUTS
Earthwork for restoration of rain cuts in embankments (including balancing reservoir) and
shoulders shall be made using suitable material and compacting the same.
Materials
The material used for restoration of rain cuts shall be got approved from Employer‟s Representative and
shall in general be as specified for earth work in embankment in section 3 Construction Operation
The area affected by rain cuts shall be cleared of all loose soil and benched. The width of the benches
shall be at least 300 mm and they shall extend continuously for a sufficient length.The height of the
benches shall be in the range of 150-300 mm.
Fresh material shall be deposited in layers not exceeding 250 mm loose thickness and compacted so as to
match with the benching at moisture content close to the optimum. Compaction shall be carried out using
suitable equipment such as plate compactors and rammers or by suitable implements handled manually.
The finished work shall conform to alignment, levels and slopes as indicated in the approved drawing.
16 MAINTENANCE OF EARTHEN SHOULDER

Scope
The work of maintenance of earthen shoulder shall include making up the irregularities/lossof material
on shoulder to the design level by adding fresh approved soil and compacting it with appropriate
equipment, or stripping excess soil from the shoulder surface, as required.
Material
The material to be added to the shoulder, if required, shall be select soil as specified forshoulder
works.
Construction Procedure
1) Making up of the earthen shoulder by adding extra soil and compacting the same;and/or
2) Stripping a layer of soil to achieve the required grade and level
Wherever extra earth is required to be added, the earthen shoulder shall be stripped and loosened to
receive fresh soil. The deficiency of thickness shall be made up in layers of loose thickness not exceeding
250 mm. Water shall be added, if required, to attain the optimum moisture content and the layer
compacted by 80 to 200 kN smooth wheel roller, vibratory roller, hand roller, plate vibrator or hand
rammer to obtain at least 94% maximum dry density in accordance with IS:2720 (Part 8). The finished
surface shall have the specified cross slope and line in accordance with the drawing. The side shall be
trimmed to the required slope with the help of grader or manual methods using hand tools.
Wherever the earth is required to be excavated from the shoulder, this shall be done either using
equipment like grader or by manual means using hand tools. The resulting surface shall be uniform and
have a field density of at least 94% maximum dry density obtained in accordance with IS:2720 (Part 8).
If the surface is not uniformly compacted, it shall be excavated to a depth of 150 mm and the soil mixed
with water if required and compacted at moisture content close to the optimum to achieve 94% of
maximum density as stated above.
17 MISCELLANEOUS WORKS
The Contractor under this scope of work is also required to maintain the road in a clean condition, which
includes the cleaning of stones, fallen trees, dead animals, etc., as and when noticed by the patrolling
teams or as directed by the Employer‟s Representative.
The pipe culverts and the other cross drainage structures built or rehabilitated under the Contract will be
regularly inspected and suitable cleaning, grading works will be done to ensure against impounding near
the structures. The structural damages will be repaired or dismantled and re-constructed considering the
extent of damage as per directions of Employer‟s Representative.
The Contractor will also take up the works required for yearly maintenance of the sign boards,
hectometer, kilometer and five kilometer stones and road marking, ensuring that they are in good shape
and suited for the purpose for which they are installed.
18 PENALTIES FOR FAILURE TO ACHIEVE THE FUNCTIONAL

GUARANTEES
In case of failure to supply the required quantity of water, liquidated damages shall be imposed for
such failure to meet the performance criteria, as described in the following. The Employer will be
entitled to recover any such damages from the monthly progress payments to be made to the
Contractor in the month in which the failure occurred, or at any time thereafter from the subsequent
monthly progress payments.
19 PAYMENTS
The Contractor, at the time of bidding, will be responsible to ensure the completeness and adequacy of
his Bid Price to fulfill the entire responsibilities as described above. His bid price, as quoted in the
Schedule of Prices, shall include all costs for carrying out all O&M responsibilities, except for the
following item for which the Employer will bear the cost
(i) The cost of electric power consumed, office buildings, and other public facilities within
the campus will be paid by the Contractor and shall be reimbursed by the Employer as per
the following condition. deducting the cost of 2 times the units consumed in excess of the
guaranteedconsumption.
(ii) The guarantees for power consumption would come into effect after the commissioning of
the system.
20 HANDING OVER OF THE SYSTEM

After completion of operation & Maintenance period Contractor shall Hand Over the entire system to
Employer in fully operational & maintained condition. Contractor shall hand over all the equipment‟s
installed at all the PMC as well as quality control laboratories installed for aforesaid work. If desired
Employer may ask Contractor to arrange for performance tests on the system or component of the
system to ascertain the performance of the system. Cost of such tests shall be borne by the Contractor
and no claim for payment shall be entertained bythe Employer on this account.
Contractor shall also provide Tools and Tackles listed in following table in three sets to the Employer
at the time of handing over of the system to the Employer.
SN Particulars Per Qty
1 Trolley mounted Portable Generating of 5 kVA No 1
2 Tripod with Chain Pulley Blocks of 1 Ton capacity No 2

Single phase Welding Set, 250 amp., 220 Volt, air cooled stud
type, wheel mounted with 15 mtr welding cable, 2 mtr. welding
3 No 1
cable for earthing, one welding holder, one welding screen with
glass and 3 cable lugs, one pair hand gloves and one wire brush
Portable Hand Drill (Heavy Duty) of capacity 13 mm to 23 mm
4 No 1
with ½” drill chuck but without drill bits and drill stand.
5 Pipe wrench 10”, 14”, 18”, 24” and 36” of ISI mark Set 2
6 Wheel mounted hand trolly around 0.2 cum capacity Nos 20
7 Shovels for removing silt Nos 20
8 Oil & Greese gun for oiling gates/ hoisting system etc Nos 4
9 Nylone rope of minimum 1” dia M 100
Nos at each
10 Additional keys for O&M of Head/cross regulator gates 2
HR/CR
SECTION – VI
General Condition of Contract

INDEX
Clause Particulars Page No.
Clause 1 Security Deposit/Performance security.
Clause 2 Compensation for delay.
Clause 2A Incentive for early completion
Clause 3 Risk & Cost Clause.
Clause 4 Contractor remains liable to pay compensation, if action not taken under
clause 3
Clause 5 Extension of time.
Clause 6 Final Certificate.
Clause 7 Payments of Intermediate Certificate to be regarded as advance.
Clause 7A Time Limit for Payments of Final Bills.
Clause 8 Bills to be submitted on completion of specified stage of work.
Clause 8A Contractor to be given time to file the objection to the Measurement

recorded by the department.
Clause 8B Recovery of cost of preparation of the Bill.
Clause 9 Bills to be on printed forms.
Clause 9 A Payment of Contractor‟s Bills to Banks.
Clause 10 : Stores supplied by Government
Clause 10 A Rejection of materials procured by the Contractor.
Clause 10 B Penal Rate in case of excess consumption.
Clause 10 C Hire of Plant & Machinery.
Clause 11 Works to be executed in accordance with specifications, Drawing Orders

etc.
Clause 12
Clause 12A
Clause 13 No compensation for alteration in or restriction of work to be carried out.
Clause 14 Action and compensation payable in case of bad work.
Clause 15 Work to be open to inspection: Contractor or his responsible Agent to be

present.
Clause 16 Notice to be given before any work is covered up.
Clause 17 Contractor liable for damage done and for-imperfections.
Clause 18 Contractor to supply Plant, Ladders, Scaffolding etc.
Clause 19 Work not to be sub-let, Contract may rescind and Performance Security
and Performance Forfeited for subletting, bribing or if Contractor Becomes
insolvent.
Clause 20 Sums payable by way of compensation to be considered as reasonable
compensation without reference to actual loss.
Clause 21 Changes in Constitution of firm.
Clause 22 Works to be under direction of Engineer-in-Charge.
Clause 23 Standing Committee for Settlement of disputes.
Clause 23 A Contractor to indemnify for infringement of Patent or design.
Clause 24 Imported Store articles to be obtained from Government.
Clause 25 Lump-Sums in estimates
Clause 26 Action where no Specification.
Clause 27 Definition of work.
Clause 27 A Definition of Engineer-in charge.
Clause 28 Clause 28.
Clause 29 Payments at reduced rates on account of items of work not accepted and
not completed to be at the discretion of the Engineer-in-charge.
Clause 29A
Clause 30
Clause 31 Contractor to adhere to labour laws/regulation.
Clause 32 Withdrawal of work from the Contractor.
Clause 33 Clause 33.
Clause 34 Protect works.
Clause 35 Contractor liable for settlement of claims caused by his delays.
Clause 36 A: Clause 36 A.
Clause 36 B: Clause 36 B.
Clause 36 C Payments of Sales Tax, and any other taxes.
Clause 36 D
Clause 36 E
Clause 37 Refund of Performance Security.
Clause 38 Fair Wage Clause.
Clause 39 Contractor to engage technical staff.
Clause 39A Clause 39A.
Clause 40 Safety Code:
Clause 41 Near Relatives barred from tendering.
Clause 42 Retired Gazetted Officers barred for 2 years
Clause 43 Quality Control.
Clause 43A Clause 43A.
Clause 44 Death of Contractor.
Clause 45 Price Variation Clause.
Clause 45A Price Variation in installation of elevators, supply / installation of Central

Air Conditioning and Central Evaporating Cooling Works.
Clause 46 Force Majeure.
Clause 47 General Discrepancies and errors.
Clause 48 Post payment Audit and Technical Examination.
Clause 48 A Pre Check or Post Check of Bills.
Clause 48 B Check Measurements.
Clause 49 Dismantled Materials.
Clause 50 Recovery from Contractors.
Clause 51 Jurisdiction of Court.

CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
Clause 1: Securi t y Deposit/Performance security
The Security deposit @ 10% of the gross amount of the running bill shall be deducted from
each running bill and shall be refunded as per rules on completion of the contract as per terms and
conditions. The earnest money deposit shall however be adjusted while deducting security deposit from
the first running bill of the contactor there will be no maximum limit of security deposit.
A contractor may, however, elect to furnish bank guarantee of any acceptable form of security
for an amount equal to the full amount of security deposit @ 10% of the work order before or at the time
of executing the agreement. In the case, earnest money may be refunded only after furnishing of the
bank guarantee as above. During the execution of the work if costof work exceeds as shown at the time
of furnishing bank guarantee, balance security deposit shall be deducted from the Running Account
Bills.]
All compensation of other sums of money payable by the contractor to Government under the
terms of his contract may be deducted from or paid by the sale of a sufficient part of his Security
Deposit, or from interest arising there from, or from any sums, which may be due or may become due
to the contractor by the Government on any account whatsoever, and in the event of his security
deposit being reduced by reason of any such deduction or sale as aforesaid, the contractor shall within
ten days thereafter, make good in cash or Bank Guarantee of Nationalized/Scheduled bank, as aforesaid,
any sum or sums which may have been deducted from or raised by sale of his Security Deposit or any
part thereof.
In case of Bank Guarantee of any Nationalized/Scheduled Bank is furnished by the Contractor

to the Government, as part of the Security Deposit and the bank goes into liquidation or, for any reason,
is unable to make payment against the said bank guarantee, the loss caused thereby shall fall on the
contractor and contractor shall forthwith, on demand, furnish additional security to the Government to
make good the deficit.
The liability or obligation of the bank under the Guarantee Bond shall not be affected or
suspended by any dispute between the Engineer-in-charge and the contractor, and the payment, under
the Guarantee Bonk by the bank to the Government shall not wait till disputes are decided. The bank
shall pay the amount under the Guarantee, without any demur merely on a demand from the
Government stating that the amount claimed is required to meet the recoveries due or likely to be due
from the contractor. The demand, so made, shall be conclusive as regards to amount due and payable
by the bank, under the guarantee limited to the amount specified in the Guarantee Bond. The
guarantee will not be discharged due tothe change in the constitution of the bank or the contractor.
The Bank Guarantee shall remain valid upto the specified date unless extended on
demand by the Engineer-in-charge, which shall include the period of completion of the contract and
the defect removal period as per terms of the Agreement. Bank‟s liability shall stand automatically
discharged unless a claim in writing is lodged with the Bank within the period stated in the Bank
Guarantee including the extended period, as the case may be. In case the date of expiry of the Bank
Guarantee is a holiday, it will be deemed to expire on the close of the next working day.
Government is not concerned with any interest accruing to the contractor on any form
of security (primary of collateral) lodged by him with the bank or any sums
payable to sureties obtained by the Bank as counter guarantee to secure its own position. These will be
the matters between the Bank and the Contractor.
(Amended vide order no. F.2(1)FD/G&T-SPFC/2017 Jaipur dated 18.12.2020, dtd 17.02.2021, dtd
23.03.2021, dtd 12.01.2022)
Clause 2: Compensation for delay

The time allowed for carrying out the work as entered in the tender, shall be strictly observed by
the Contractor and shall be reckoned from the 10th day after the date of written order to commence
the work given to the Contractor. If the Contractor does not commence the work within the period
specified in the work order, he shall stand liable for the forfeiture of the amount of Earnest Money
and Security Deposit. Besides, appropriate action may be taken by the Engineer In-charge /
competent authority to debar him fromtaking part in future tenders for a specified period or black list
him. The work shall, throughout the stipulated period of completion of the contract be, proceeded with
all due diligence, time being essence of the contract, on the part of the Contractor. To ensure good
progress during the execution of work the Contractor shall be bound, in all cases in which the time
allowed for any work exceeds one month ( save for special jobs ), to complete 1/8 of the whole of
the work before 1/4 of the whole time allowed under the contract has elapsed, 3/8 of the work before
1/2 of such time has elapsed and 3/4 of the work before 3/4 of such time has elapsed. If the
Contractor fails to complete the work in accordance with this time schedule in terms of cost in
money, and delay in execution of work is attributableto the contractor the contractor shall be liable to
pay compensation to the Government at every time span as below:-
A Time Span of 1/4th 1/2th 3/4th Full

full stipulated
period
B Work to be 1/8th 3/8th 3/4th Full
completed in
(Rs .................. ) (Rs ............... ) (Rs ................. ) (Rs ............... )
terms of money
C Compensation payable Delay up to one fourth period of the prescribed time span – 2.5% of the
by the contractor for work remained unexecuted
delay attributable to Delay exceeding one fourth period but not exceeding half of the prescribed
contractor at the stage time span – 5% of the work remained unexecuted.
of : Delay exceeding half of the prescribed but not exceeding three fourth of the
time span – 7.5% of the work remained unexecuted
Delay exceeding three fourth of the prescribed of the time span – 10% of
the work remained unexecuted
Note: - In case delayed period over a particular span is split up and is jointly attributable to Government
and contractor, the competent authority may reduce the compensation in proportion of delay attributable to
Government over entire delayed period over that span after clubbing up the split delays attributable to
Government and this reduced compensation would be applicable over the entire delayed period without
paying any escalation.
Following illustrations is given :-

(1) First time span is 6 months, delay is of 30 days which is split over as under :- 5 days (attributable
to Government) +5 days (attributable of contractor) + 5 days (attributable to Government) +5
days (attributable to contractor) + 5 days (attributable to Government) + 5 days (attributable to
contractor)
Total delay is thus clubbed to 15 days (attributable to Government) and 15 days (attributable to
contractor).
The normal compensation of 30 days as per clause 2 of agreement is 2.5% which can be reduced as
2.5*15/30=1.25% over 30 days without any escalation by competent authority.
Note : The compensation, levied as above, shall be recoverable from the Running Account Bill to be
paid immediately after the concerned time span. Total compensation for delays shall not exceed 10
percent of the total value of the work.
The contractor shall, further, be bound to carry out the work in accordance with the date and
quantity entered in the progress statement attached to the tender.
In case the delay in execution of work is attributable to the contractor, the span wise
compensation, as laid down in this clause shall be mandatory. However, in case the slow progress in
one time span is covered up within original stipulated period, then the amountof such compensation
levied earlier shall be refunded. The Price escalation, if any, admissible under clause 45 of
Conditions of Contract would be admissible only on such rates and cost of work, as would be
admissible if work would have been carried out in that particular time span. The Engineer-in-charge
shall review the progress achieved in every time span, and grant stage wise extension in case of
slow progress with compensation, if the delay is attributable to contractor, otherwise without
compensation.
However, if for any special job, a time schedule has been submitted by the Contractor before
execution of the agreement, and it is entered in agreement as well as same has been accepted by the
Engineer-in-charge, the Contractor shall complete the work within the said time schedule. In the event
of the Contractor failing to comply with these conditions, he shall be liable to pay compensation as
prescribed in forgoing paragraph ofthis clause provided that the entire amount of compensation to be
levied under the provisions of this Clause shall not exceed 10% of the value of the contract. While
granting extension in time attributable to the Government, reasons shall be recorded for each delay.
Clause 2A: Incentive for early completion:
In the event that the Project (cost more than Rs. 50 crore) Completion Date occursprior to
the Scheduled Completion Date (after taking into account any time extension approved by the
competent authority for delays not attributable to the contractor), the Contractor shall be entitled to
receive a payment of incentive equivalent to 0.03% (zero point zero three percent) of the Contract
Price for each day by which the Project Completion Date precedes the Scheduled Completion
Date, but subject to a maximum of 3% (three per cent of the Contract Price). Provided, however,
that the payment of incentive, if any, shall be made only after the issue of the Completion Certificate.
Note: Contract Price for calculation of above incentive means Original Cost of Work, plus cost
of Additional and Extra items, if any, but excluding price variations/ escalations granted, if any.]
Clause 3: Risk & Cost Clause
The Engineer-in-charge or the Competent Authority defined under rules may, without prejudice
to his rights against the Contractor, in respect of any delay or inferior workmanship or otherwise, or to
any claims for damages in respect of any breaches of the contract and without prejudice to any right or
remedies under any of the provisions of this contract or otherwise, and whether the date for completion
has or has not elapsed, by notice in writing absolutely determine the contract in any of the following
cases:-
(i) If Contractor having been given by the Engineer-in-charge, a notice in writing to rectify,
reconstruct or replace any defective work or that the work is being performed in any inefficient or
otherwise improper or unworkman like manner, shall omit to comply with the requirements of
such notice for a period of seven days, thereafter, or of the Contractor shall delay or suspend the
execution of the work so that either in the judgment of the Engineer-in-charge (which shall be
final and binding) he will be unable to secure completion of the work by the date for completion
or he has already failed to complete the work by that date,
(i) If the Contractor, being a company, shall pass a resolution of the Court shall makean order
that the company shall be wound up or if a receiver or a manager, on behalf of a creditor,
shall be appointed or if circumstances shall arise, which entitle the Courtor Creditor to appoint a
receiver or a manager or which entitle the Court to make a winding up order,
(ii) If the Contractor commits breach of any of the terms and conditions of this contract,
(iii) If the Contract or commits any acts mentioned in Clause19 hereof.
When the Contractor has made himself liable for action under any of the cases aforesaid, the
Engineer-in-charge on behalf of the Governor of Rajasthan shall have powers:-
(a) To determine or rescind the contract, as aforesaid (of which determination or rescission notice in
writing to the Contractor under the hand of the Engineer-in-charge shall be conclusive evidence),
upon such determination or rescission, the earnest money, full security deposit of the contract
shall be liable to be forfeited and shall be absolutely atthe disposal of Government.
(b) To employ labour paid by the Department and to supply materials to carry out the work or any
part of the work, debiting the Contractor with the cost of the labour and the price of the
materials (of the amount of which cost and price certified by the Engineer-in-charge shall be
final and conclusive against the Contractor) and crediting him with the value of the work done in
all respects in the same manner and at the same rates, as if it had been carried out by the Contract
or under the terms of this contract. The certificate of the Divisional Officer, as to the value of the
work done, shall be final and conclusive evidence against the Contractor provided always that
action under the sub-clause shall only be taken after giving notice in writing to the Contractor.
Provided also that if the expense incurred by the department are less than amount payable to
the Contractor athis agreement rates, the difference shall not be paid to the Contractor.
(c) After giving notice to the Contractor to measure up the work of the contractor and to
take such part thereof, as shall be unexecuted out of his hands and to give it to another Contractor
to complete, in which case any expenses which may be incurred in excess of the sum which would
have been paid to the original Contractor, if the whole work had been executed by him (of the
amount of which excess, the certificate in writing of the Engineer-in-charge shall be final and
conclusive shall be borne and paid by the original Contractor and may be deducted from any
money due to him by Government under this contract or on any other account, whatsoever, or from
his Earnest Money, Security Deposit, Enlistment Security or the proceeds of sales thereof, or a
sufficient part thereof as the case may be. In the event of any one or more of the above courses
being adopted by the Engineer In-charge, the Contractor shall have no claim to compensation for
any loss sustained by him by reason of his having purchased or procured any materials or entered
into any materials or made any advances on account or with a view to the execution of the work or
the performance of contract. And. in case action is taken under any of provisions aforesaid, the
Contractor shall not be entitled to recover or be paid, any sum for any work thereof or actually
performed under this contract unless and until the Engineer In-charge has certified, in writing, the
performance of such value and the value payable in respect hereof, and he shall only be entitled to
be paid the value so certified.
Clause 4:Contractor remains liable to pay compensation, if action not taken under
Clause 3
(i) In any case in which any of the powers conferred by Clause 3 hereof, shall have not been
exercised. The non exercise thereof shall not constitute waiver of any of the conditions hereof.
And such power shall, not withstanding be exercisable in the event of any future case of default
by the Contractor for which, by any Clause or Clauses hereof, he is declared liable to
compensation amounting to the whole of his Security Deposit / Earnest Money / Enlistment
security and the liability of the Contractor for past and future compensation shall remain
unaffected.
Powers to take possession of or require removal, sale of Contractor's Plant.
(ii) In the event of the Engineer In-charge putting in force Powers vested in him under the
preceding Clause 3 he may, if he so desires. Take possession of all or any tools. Plants.
Materials and stores, In or upon the works or the site. Thereof, or belonging to the contractor or
procured by him and intended to be used for the execution of the work or any part thereof.
Paying or allowing for the same in account, at the contract rates or in case of these not being
applicable at current market rates to be certified by the Chief Engineer or duly authorized
Engineer (whose certificate thereof shall be final and conclusive). Otherwise the Engineer
In-charge may by notice in writing to the Contractor or his clerk of the works foreman or
other authorized agent require him to remove such tools, plant, materials or stores from the
premises (within a time to be specified in such notice). And in the event of the Contractor
failing to comply with any requisition the Chief Engineer or other duly authorized Engineer
may remove them at the Contractors expenses sell them by auction or private sale onaccount of
the Contractor and at his risk in all respects and the certificate of the Chief Engineer or other
duly authorized Engineer as to the expense of any such removal and the amount of the
proceeds and expense of any such sale shall be final and conclusive against the Contractor.
Clause 5:Extension of Time
If the Contractor shall desire an extension of time for completion of the work on the ground of his
having been unavoidably hindered in its execution or on any other grounds he shall apply, in writing to
the Engineer In-charge within 30 days of the date of the hindrance on account of which he desires such
extension as aforesaid and the Authority Competent to grant extension under the rules / delegations of
powers or other duly authorized Engineer shall if in his opinion ( which shall be final ) reasonable
grounds be shown therefore authorize such extension of time if any as may in his opinion be necessary
or proper, if the period of completion of contract expires before the expiry of the period of one month
provided in this Clause the application for extension shall be made before the expiry of the period
stipulated for completion of the contract. The competent authority shall grant such extension at each
such occasion within a period of 30 days of receipt of application from Contractor and shall not wait for
finality of work. Such extensions shall be granted in accordance with provisions under clause ( 2 ) of
this agreement.
Clause 5A: Monthly Return of Extra Claims

Contractor has to submit a return every month for any work claimed as extra. The Contractor shall
deliver the return in the office of the Executive Engineer and obtain Receipt Number of the Receipt
Register of the day on or before 10th day of every month during the continuance of the work covered
by this contract, a return showing details of any work claimed as extra by the contract which value
shall be based upon the rates and prices mentioned in the contract or in the Schedule of Rates in force
in the District for the time being. The Contractor shall be deemed to have waived all claims, not
included in such return, and will have no right to enforce any such claims not included, whatsoever be
the circumstances.
Clause 6: Final Certificate

On completion of the work, the Contractor shall send a registered notice to the Engineer In- charge
giving the date of completion and sending a copy of it to the officer accepting the contract, on behalf of
the Governor and shall request the Engineer In-charge to give him a certificate of completion, but no
such certificate shall be given nor shall the work be considered to be complete until the contractor shall
have removed from the site on which the work shall be executed, all scaffolding, surplus materials and
rubbish and cleared off the dirt from all wood work, doors, walls, floors, or other parts of any building
in, upon or about which the work is to be executed or of which he may have possession for the
execution thereof, he had filled up the pits. If the contractor shall fail to comply with the
requirements of this Cla1me as to removal of scaffolding, surplus materials, and rubbish and cleaning
off dirt and fining of pits on or before the date fixed for completion of the work, the Engineer In- charge
may, at the expense of the contractor, remove such scaffolding, surplus materials, and the rubbish and
dispose or the same, as he thinks fit. and clean off such dirt and till the pits, as aforesaid, and the
contractor shall forthwith pay the amount of all expenses, so incurred, and shall have no claim in
respect of any such scaffolding or surplus materials, as aforesaid, except for any sum actually rea1ised
by the sale thereof. On completion, the work shall be measured by the Engineer In-charge he or through
his sub-ordinates, whose measurements shall be binding and conclusive against the contractor.
Provided that is subsequent to the taking of measurements by the subordinate as aforesaid the Engineer
In-charge had reason to believed at the measurements taken by his subordinates are not correct the
Engineer In- charge shall have the power to cancel the measurements already taken by his
subordinates and acknowledged by the Contractor and to take measurements again, after giving
reasonable notice to the Contractor and such re-measurements shall be binding on the Contractor.
Within ten days of the receipt of the notice, Engineer In-charge shall inspect the workand if
there is no visible defect on the face of the work, shall give the Contractor, a
certificate of completion. If the Engineer In-charge finds that the work has been fully completed, it shall
be mentioned in the certificate so granted. If, on the other hand it is found that there are certain visible
defects to be removed-that -the certificate to be granted by Engineer In-charge shall specifically mention
the details of the visible defects along with the estimate of the cost for removing these defects. The
final certificate of work shall be given after the visible defects pointed out as above have been
removed.
Clause 7: Payment on Intermediate Certificate to be regarded as advance

No payments shall be made for works estimated to cost less than rupees twenty five thousand, till
after the whole of the works shall have been completed and a certificate of completion given. But in the
case of works estimated to cost more than Rupees twenty five thousand the contractor shall on
submitting the bill therefore, be entitled to receive a monthly payment proportionate to the part,
thereof, then approved and passed by the Engineer In-charge, whose certificate of such approval and
passing of sum, so payable shall be final and conclusive Running Account Bill shall be paid within IS
days from presentation. But all such intermediate payments shall be regarded as payments by way of
advance against the final payment only and not as payments for work actually done and completed, and
shall not preclude the requiring of bad unsound and imperfect or unsafe work to be removed and taken
away and re-constructed or re-erected, or considered as an admission of the due performance of the
contract, or any part thereof, in any respect, or the accruing of any claim, nor shall it conclude,
determine, or effect in anyway the powers of the Engineer In-charge under these conditions or any of
them to the final settlement and adjustment of the accounts or otherwise or in any other way vary or
affect the contract. The final bill shall be made/submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date
fixed for completion of the work other wise the Engineer In-charge's certificate of the measurement and
of the total amount payable for the work accordingly shall be final and binding on all parties.
Clause 7 A: Time Limit for Payments of Final Bills

The final bill shall be paid within 3 months on presentation by the contractor after Issuance of final
completion certificate in accordance with clause 6 of the conditions of contract. If, there shall be any
dispute about any item(s) or the work, then the undisputed item(s) only, shall be paid within the
said period of 3 months. If a final bill (which contains no disputed item or disputed amount of any
item ) is not paid within the period of 3 months from presentation of final bill or 6 months from the date
of receipt of registered notice regarding completion or work in accordance with clause 6 of the
conditions of the contract, the defects, if any, shall be brought to the notice or the higher authority. The
period of 3 months shall commence from the date of rectification of the defects. The higher authority
shall ensure that in no case final bill should be left unpaid after 9 months from the receipt of registered
notice regarding completion of work. The contractor shall submit a memorandum of the disputed
item along with justification in support within 30 days from the disallowance there of, and if be fails to
do 50, his claims shall be deemed to have been fully waived and absolutely extinguished.
Clause 8: Bills to be submitted on completion of specified stages of work
In case of lump sum contracts, bills will be submitted by the contractor on completion on
various stages of work as specified in the contract document. The claim as far as admissible,
authorized or paid, if possible, before expiry of 10 days from the presentation of the bill. The claims
for additions and alterations. If any, may also be included in the billsif their measurements have been
recorded and checked.
Clause 8A:Contractor to be given time to file objection to the Measurement recorded
by the Department
Before taking any measurement of any work, as have been referred to in preceding Clauses 6, 7
& 8, the Engineer In-charge or a subordinate, deputed by him, shall give reasonable notice to the
contractor. If the Contractor fails to be present at the time of taking measurements after such notice or
fails to sign or to record the difference within a week from the date of measurement in the manner
required by the Engineer In-charge then in any such event the measurement taken by the Engineer In-
charge or by the subordinates deputed by him as the case may be, shall be final and binding on the
contract and the contractor shall have no right to dispute the same.
Clause 8B: Recovery of cost of preparation of Bill
In case of contractors of Class “AA” and “A” do not submit the bill within time fixed, the
Engineer In-charge may prepare the bill as per provision of Clause 8 of the Conditions of Contract but
deduction @ 0.50% of amount of such bills shall be made and credited to the General Revenue on
account of preparation of bill.
Clause 9: Bills to be on printed forms
The Contractor shall submit all bills on the printed forms, to be had on application, at the office
of the Engineer In-charge and the charges in the bills shall always be entered at the rates specified in the
tender or in the case of any extra work ordered in pursuance of these conditions, and not mentioned or
provided for in the tender, at the rates hereinafter provided for such work.
Clause 9A: Payments of contractor's Bills to Banks
Payments due to the Contractor may if so desired by him, be made to his Bank instead of
direct to him. provided that the contract has furnished to the Engineer In-charge ( i
) an authorization in the form of a legally valid document, such as a power of Attorney conferring
authority on the Bank to receive Payments and ( ii ) his own acceptance of the correctness of the account
made out, as being due to him, by Government, or his signature on the bill or other claim preferred
against government before settlement by the Engineer In- charge of the account or claim, by payment to
the bank. While the receipt given by such bank shall constitute a full and sufficient discharge for the
payment, the Contractor should whatever possible present his bill duly receipted and discharged through
his Banker. Nothing herein contained, shall operate to create in favours of the Bank any rights vis-à-vis
the Governor.
Clause 10: Stores supplied by Government
If the specification of estimate of the work provides for the use of any special of material to be
supplied from Engineer In-charge store or if, it is required that contract« shall use certain stores to be
provided by the Engineer In-charge specified in the schedule or memorandum hereto annexed the
Contractor shall be bound to procure and shall be supplied such materials stores as are from time to
time, required to be used by him for the purpose of the contract only, and the value of full quantity of
materials and stores, so supplied, at the rates specified in the said schedule or memorandum, may be
set off or which may be deducted from any sum, then due to the after become due, to the contractor
under the contract or otherwise or against or from the performance guarantee and/or Security Deposit or
the proceeds of sale, if the same is help in government securities, the same or a sufficient portion
thereof being in
this case, sold for this purpose. All materials supplied to the Contractor, either from departmental stores
or with the assistance of Government, shall remain the absolute property of Government. The
Contractor shall be the trustee of the Stores / Materials, so supplied / procured, and these shall not, on
any account, be removed from the site of work and shall be, an times, open to inspection by the
Engineer In-charge Any such material, unused and in perfectly good condition at the time of completion
or determination or rescinding of the contract, shall be returned to the Divisional Officer's store, if, by a
notice in writing under his hand, he shall be so require, and if on service of such notice, the contract fails
to return the materials, so required, he shall be liable to pay the price of such materials in with the
provision of Clause 10 B ibid. But the Contractor shall no be entitled to return any such materials, unless
with such consent, an shall have no claim for compensation on account of any such materials, so
supplied to him as aforesaid being unused by him, or for any wastage in or damage to any such
materials. For the stores returned by die Contractor, he shall be paid for, at the price originally
charged excluding storage charges, in case of materials supplied from departmental stores and actual
cost including freight, cartage, taxes etc., paid by the Contractor, in case of supplies received with the
assistance of Government, which, however- , should in no case exceed market rate prevailing at the time
the materials are taken back. The decision of the Engineer In-charge, as to the price of the stores
returned, keeping in view its condition etc. shall be final and conclusive. In the event of breach of the
aforesaid condition, the Contractor shall, addition to throwing himself open to account for
contravention of the tenure of the license or permit and / or for criminal breach of trust, pay to the
Government, all advantages or profits resulting, or which in the usual course, would result to him by
reason of such breach, Provided that the Contractor shall, in no case be entitled to any compensation or
damage on account of any delay in supply, or non-supply thereof, all or any such materials and stores.
Clause 10A: Rejection of material procured by the Contractor
The Engineer In-charge shall have full powers to require the removal from the premises of all
materials which in his opinion, are not in accordance with the specifications and, in case of default, the
Engineer In-charge shall be at liberty to employ other person(s) to remove the same without being
answerable or accountable for any loss of damage, that may happen or arise to such materials to be
substituted thereof, and in case of default, Engineer In-charge may cause the same to be supplied and all
costs, which may attend such removal and substitution, are to be born by the contractor .
Clause 10B: Penal rate in case of excess consumption

The contractor shall also be charged for the materials consumed in excess of the requirements
calculated on the basis of standard consumption approved by the department, at double of the issue rate
including storage and supervision charges or market rate whichever is higher . A Material Supply and
Consumption Statement, in prescribed Form RPWA 35A, shall be submitted with every Running Bill,
distinguishing material supplied by the Government and material procured by the Contractor himself.
The recovery for such material shall be made from Running Account Bill next after the consumption and
shall not be deferred. Certificate of such nature shall be given in each Running Account Bill.
Clause 10C: Hire of Plant and Machinery
Special plant and Machinery, required for execution of the work, may be issued to the
contractor , if available, on the rates of hire charges and other- terms and conditions as per
departmental Rules, as per Schedule annexed to these conditions, Rates of such plant & machinery shall
be got revised periodically so to bring them at par with market rate.
Clause 11: Works to be executed in accordance with Specification, Drawings, Order
etc.
The contractor shall execute the whole and every part of the work in the most - substantial and
satisfactory manner, and both as regard materials and otherwise in strict accordance with the
specifications. The contractor shall also conform exactly, fully and faithfully to the designs, drawing and
instructions in writing relating to the Work signed by the Engineer In-charge and lodged in his office,
and to which contractor shall be entitled to have access at such office, or on the site of the work for the
purpose of inspection during office hours and the contractor shall if he so requires, be entitled at, his
own expense to make or cause to be made copies of specification, and of all such designs, drawings
and instructions as aforesaid. A certificate of executing works as per approved design and specifications
etc. shall be given on each Running Account Bill.
The specifications of work, material, methodology of execution, drawings designs shall be signed by the
Contractor and Executive Engineer while executing agreement and shall formpart of agreement.
Clause 12 :
The Engineer In-charge shall have power to make any alterations, omissions or additions to or
substitutions for the original specifications, drawing, designs and instructions, that may appear to him to
be necessary during the progress of the work and the contractor shall carry out the work in accordance
with any instructions which may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer In-charge, and such
alteration, omission, , additions or substitutions shall not invalidate the contract and any altered or
substituted additional work, which the contract may be directed to do in the manner above specified, as
part of the work, shall be carried out by the contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which
he agreed to do the main work. The time for the completion of work shall be extended in the proportion
that the altered, additional or substituted work bears to the original contract work, and the certificate of
the Engineer In-charge shall be conclusive as to so proportion. The rates for such additional, altered
or substituted work under this clause shall be worked out in accordance with the following provision in
their respective order.
i. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the
contract for the work, the contractor is bound to carry out the additional, altered or
substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the contract for the work.
ii. If the rates for the additional altered or substituted work are not specifically provided in
the contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for a similar class of
work as are specified in the contract for the work.
iii. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work can not be determined in
the manner specified in the sub-clauses (i) to (ii) above, then the rates for such
composite work item shall be worked out on the basis of the concerned Schedule of
Rates of the District/area specified above minus/plus the percentage which the total
tendered amount bears to the estimated cost of the entire work put to tender. Provided
always that if the rate for a particulars part or parts of the item is not in the Schedule
of Rates the rate for such partor parts will be determined by the Engineer In-charge on
the basis of the prevailing market rates when the work was done.
iv. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work item cannot be determined in
the manner specified in sub-clauses (i) to (iii) above, then the
contractor shall within 7 days of the date of receipt of order to carry out the work,
inform the Engineer In-charge of the rate which it is his intention to charge for such
class of work supported by analysis of the rate or rates claim and the Engineer In-
charge shall determine the rate or rates on the basis of prevailing market rates, and pay
the contractor accordingly. However, the Engineer In-charge, by notice in writing, will
be at liberty to cancel his order too carry out such class of work and arrange to carry
it out in such manner as he may consider advisable. But under no circumstances, the
contractor shall suspend the work on the plea of non-settlement of rates on items falling
under the clause.
v. Except in case of items relating to foundation, provision contained in sub- clauses (i) to
(iv) above shall not apply to contract or substituted items as individually exceed the
percentage set out in the tender documents under clause 12A.
For the purpose of operation of clause 12(v) the following works shall be treated aswork
relating to foundations:-
a) For buildings, compound wall plinth level or 1.2 meters (4 ft.) above ground level whichever is
lower, excluding items above flooring and D.P.C. but including base concrete below the floors.
b) For abutments, piers, retaining wall of culverts and bridges, walls of water reservoir and the
bed of floor level.
c) For retaining walls, where floor levels is not determinate 1.2 meters above the average
ground level or bed level.
d) For roads, all items of excavation and filing including treatment of sub base and soling work.
e) For water supply lines, sewer lines underground storm water drains and similar work, all items
of work below ground level except items of pipe work for proper masonry work.
f) For open storm water drains, all items of work except lining of drains.
g) Any other items of similar nature which Engineer In-charge may decide relating to foundation.
The rate of any such work, except the items relating to foundations, which is in excess of the
deviation limit, shall be determined in accordance with the provisions contained in clause 12A.
Clause 12A:
The quantum of additional work for each item shall not exceed 50% of the original quantity given in
the agreement and the total value of additional work shall not exceed 20% of the total contract
value unless otherwise mutually agreed by the Engineer In-charge and the Contractor. This limit shall
not be applicable on items relating to foundation work which shall be executed as per original rates of
provision of clause 12 ( i ) to ( iv ).
In case of contract substituted items or additional items, which results in exceeding the
deviation limit laid down in this clause except items relating to foundation work, which the contractor
is required to do under clause 12 above, the contractor shall within 7 days from the receipt of
order, claim revision of the rate supported by proper analysis in respect of such items for quantities in
excess of the deviation limit notwithstanding the fact that the rates for such items exist in the tender
for the main work or can be derived in accordance with the provision of sub clause ( ii ) of clause
12 the Engineer In-charge, may revise their
rates having regards to the prevailing market rates and the contractor shall be paid in accordance with
the rates so fixed. The Engineer In-charge shall, however, be at liberty to cancel his order to carry out
such increased quantities of work by giving notice in writing to the contractor and arrange to carry it
out in such manner as he may consider advisable. But under no circumstances the contractor shall
suspend the work on the plea of non-settlementof rates of items failing under this Clause.
All the provision of the preceding paragraph shall equally apply to the decrease in rates of
items for quantities in excess of the deviation limit notwithstanding the fact that the rates for such items
exist in the tender for the main work or can be derived in accordance with the provisions of sub-
clause ( ii ) of the preceding clause 12 and the Engineer In-charge may revise such rates having regard to
the prevailing market rates unless otherwise mutually agreed by the Engineer In-charge and the
contractor.
Clause 13: No compensation for alterations in or restriction of work to be carried out.
If, at any time after the commencement the work, the Government shall, for any reason whatsoever, not
require the whole woke, thereof, as specified in the tender to be carried out, the Engineer In-charge
shall give notice, in writing of the fact to the Contractor, who shallhave on claim to any payments of
compensation, whatsoever, on account of any profit or advantage, which he might have derived from
the execution of the work in full but which he did not derive in consequence of the full amount of the
work not having been carried out. Neither, shall he have any claim for compensation by reason of
alterations having been made in the original specifications, drawings and design and instruction, which
shall involve any curtailment of the work, as originally contemplated.
Provided, that the Contractor shall be paid the charges for the cartage only, of materials actually brought
to the site of the work by him for bonafide use and rendered 'surplus as a result of the abandonment or
curtailment of the work or any portion thereof, and taken them back by the Contractor provided,
however, that the Engineer-in- charge shall have, an all such cases tile option of taking over all or
any such materials at their purchase price .or at local market rates whichever may be less. In the
case of such stores, having been issued from Government Stores, charges recovered, including
storage charges shall be refunded after taking into consideration any deduction for claim on account
of any deterioration or damage while in the custody of the contractor, and in this respect the decision
of the Engineer In-charge shall be final.
Clause 14: Action and compensation payable in case of bad work
If , it shall appear to the Chief Engineer or any authorized authority or the Engineer In- charge or his
subordinates in-charge of the work, or to the committee of retired officer / officers appointed by the
State government, for the purpose that any work has been executed with unsound, imperfect or
unskillful workmanship, or with material of any inferior description, or that any materials or articles
provided by him for the execution of the work are unsound or of a quality inferior to that contracted, or
otherwise not in accordance with contract, the Contractor shall on demand in writing from the Engineer
In-charge, specifying the work / materials or articles complained of, notwithstanding that the same may
have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, will rectify or remove and reconstruct the work,
so specified in whole or in part, as the case may be, remove the materials or articles, so specified and
provide other proper and suitable materials or articles at his own cost and inthe event of his failing
to do so, within a period to be specified by the Engineer In-charge in his demand, as aforesaid, then
the contractor shall be liable to pay compensation, at the rateof one percent, on the tendered amount
of work for every week not exceeding ten percent,
while his failure to do so shall continue, and in the case of any such failure, the Engineer In- charge may
rectify or remove and re-execute the work or remove and replace with others, the materials or articles
complained; as the case may be, at the risk and expense, in all respects of the contractor.
Clause 15: Work to be open to inspection: contractor or his responsible Agent to be

present
All work, under or in course of execution or executed in pursuance of the contract, shall, at all
times, be open to inspection and supervision of the Engineer In-charge and his superior officers e.g.
Superintending Engineer, Additional Chief Engineer, Chief Technical Engineer, Chief Engineer, and his
subordinates and another authorized agency of the Government and the Contractor shall, at all times
during the usual working hours, and at all other times at which reasonable notice of the intention of the
Engineer In-charge or his subordinate and any other authorized agency of Government or committee
of retired officers
/ officers appointed by the State Government for the purpose to visit the works shall havebeen given to
the contractor, either himself be present to receive orders and instructions or have a responsible agent,
duly accredited in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's agent shall be
considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the Contractor himself.
Clause 16: Notice to be given before any work is covered up
The contractor shall give not less than seven days notice, in writing, to the Engineer In- charge or his
Subordinate In-Charge of the work, before covering up or otherwise placing beyond the reach of
measurement, any work in order that the same may be measured, and correct dimensions thereof, be
taken before the same is so covered up or placed beyond the reach of measurement and shall not cover
up or place beyond the reach of measurement any work without the consent in writing of the Engineer
In-charge of the work,. and if, any work shall be covered up or placed beyond the teach of measurement
without such notice having been given or consent obtained, the same shall be uncovered at the
contractor's expense or in default, thereof, no payment or allowance shall be made for such work or for
the materials which the same was executed.
Clause 17: Contactor Liable for damage done and for imperfections
If the contractor or his work people or servants shall break, deface, injure or destroy any part of a
building, in which they may be working or any building, road, fence, enclosure or cultivated ground
contiguous to the premises on which the work or any part of it is being executed, or if any damage shall
happen to the work, while in progress, from any cause whatsoever, or any imperfections become
apparent in it, within a period specified in clause 37, after a certificate, final or otherwise of its
completion, shall have been given by the Engineer In-charge, may cause the slime to be made good by
other 'workmen and deduct the expense ( of which he certificate of the Engineer In-charge shall be
final ) from any sumsthat may be then, or at any time thereafter, may become due to the Contractor, or
from his security deposit, or the process of sale there-of, or of a sufficient portion thereof.
Clause18: Contract to supply Plant, Ladders, Scaffolding etc.
The contractor shall arrange and supply, at his own cost, all material (except such special materials, if
any, as may, in accordance with the contract, be supplied from the Engineer In- charge's store) plants,
tools, appliances, implements, ladders, cordage, tackle, scaffolding and temporary works requisite or
proper for tile proper execution of the work, whether
original, altered, or substituted, and whether included in the specification or other documents,
forming part of the contract or referred to in these conditions or not, of which may be necessary for
the purpose of satisfying or complying with the requirements of the Engineer In-charge, as to any matter
as to which, under these conditions, he is entitled to be satisfied or which he is entitled to require,
together with carriage thereof, to and from the work. The contractor shall also arrange and supply,
without charge, the requisite number of persons with the means and materials, necessary for the purpose
of setting out work and counting, weighing an assisting in the measurement or examination at any time
and from time to time of the work, or materials. Failing his so doing, the same may be provided by the
Engineer In-charge, at the expenses of the contractor, and the expenses may be deducted from any
money due to the contractor under the contract, or from his performance guarantee and / or Security
Deposit, or the proceeds of sale thereof, or a sufficient portion thereof.
The contractor shall also provide all necessary fencing and lights required to protect the public from
accident and shall be bound to bear the expenses of defence of every suit, actionor other proceeding at
law, that may be brought by any person for- injury sustained owing to neglect of the above precautions,
and to pay any damages and costs, which may be awarded in any such suit action proceeding. To
any such person or which may, with the consent of the contractor, be paid to compromise any claim
by any such person.
Clause 19: Work not be sub-let Contract may be rescinded and Security Deposit and
Performance Forfeited for sub-letting, bribing or if contractor becomes insolvent
The contract shall not be assigned or sublet without the written approval of the Chief Engineer , and if
the contractor shall assign or sublet his contract or attempt so to do or become insolvent or commence
any insolvency proceedings or mark any composition with his creditors, or attempt so to do, or if any
bribe, gratuity, gift, loan, requisite reward or advantage, pecuniary or otherwise, shall either, directly or
indirectly, be given, promised or offered by the contractor or any of his servants or agents, to any
public officer or person, in the employ of Government, in any way, relating to his office or
employment, or it, any such officer or person shall become, in any way, directly or indirectly,
interested in the contract,the Chief-Engineer may, thereupon, by notice, in writing, rescind the contract
and the performance guarantee and security deposit of the contactor shall thereupon stand forfeited and
be absolutely at the disposal of Government, and the same consequences shall be ensure as if the
contract had been rescinded under clause 3 hereof and in addition the contractor shall not be
entitled to recover or be paid for any work, therefore, actually performed underthe contract.
Clause 20: Sums payable by way of compensation to be considered as reasonable

compensation without reference to actual loss.
All sums payable by way of compensation under any of these conditions shall be considered as
reasonable compensation to be applied to the use of Government without reference to the actual loss or
damage sustained and whether or not any damage shall have been sustained.
Clause 21: Changes in Constitution of firm
Where the Contractor is a partnership firm, the previous approval, in writing, of the Engineer In-
charge shall be obtained before any change is made in the constitution of the firm. Where the
Contractor is an individual or a Hindu undivided family business concern, such approval, as aforesaid,
shall likewise be obtained before the Contractor enters into any partnership agreement where under the
partnership firm would have the right to carry out the work thereby undertaken by the Contractor.
If, previous approval, as aforesaid, is not
Obtained, the contract shall be deemed to have been: assigned in contravention of Clause 19 hereof, and
the same action may be taken, and the same consequences shall ensure, as provided in the said clause
19.
Clause 22: Works to be under direction of Engineer-in-charge

All the works, to be executed under the contract, shall be executed under the direction and subject to the
approval, in all respect, of the Engineer-in-charge of the Government of Rajasthan for the time being,
who shall be entitled to direct, at what point or points, and in what manner, they are to be commenced
and from time to time, carried on.
Clause 23: Standing Committee for Settlement of Disputes
If any question, difference or objection, whatsoever shall arise in any way, in connection with or
arising out of this instrument, or the meaning of operation of any part thereof, or the rights, duties or
liabilities of either party then, save in so far, as the decision of any such matter, as herein before
provided for, and been so decided, every such matter constituting a total claim of Rs. 50,000/- or
above, whether its decision has been otherwise provided for and whether it has been finally decided
accordingly, or whether the contract should be terminated, or has been rightly terminated, and as regards
the rights or obligations of the parties, as the result of such termination, shall be referred for decision to
the empowered Standing Committee, which would consist of the followings:-
(i) Administrative Secretary concerned.
(ii) Finance Secretary or his nominee, not below the rank of Deputy Secretary.
(iii) Law Secretary or his nominee, not below the rank of Joint Legal
Remembrance.
(iv) Chief Engineer-cum-Addl. Secretary of the concerned department.
(v) Chief Engineer concerned (Member-Secretary)
The Engineer-in-charge, on receipt of application along with non-refundable prescribed fee, (the fee
would be two percent of the amount in dispute, not exceeding Rs. One lac) from the Contractor, shall
refer the disputes to the committee, within a period of three months from the date of receipt of
application.
Procedure and Application for referring cases for settlement by the Standing Committee shall be as
given in Form RPWA 90.]
Fookn ftldks fulrkj.k gsrq lvsf.max devsh ds le{k j[kk tkuk gs] new work process
(online) ds vurxzr vf/k'kk"kh vfhk;ark ds }kjk dk;z dh izxfr ,o afcy ds lr;kiu dh fnukad ls 90 fnol dh le; lhek esa baftfu;j
bapktz ds le{k izlrqr fd;k tk ldrk gsa
(Amended vide F.3(2)FD/GF&AR/2020 Jaipur dated13.09.2021)
Clause 23A: Contractor to indemnify for infringement of Patent or design.

Contractor shall fully indemnify the Governor of Rajasthan against any action, claim or proceeding,
relating to infringement or use of any patent or design, or any alleged patent or design, rights, and shall
pay and royalties, which may be payable in respect of any article or part thereof, included in the
contract, in the event of any claims made under or action brought against Government. In respect of
any such matters, as aforesaid, the Contractor shall be, immediately, noticed thereof, and the
Contractor shall be at liberty, at his own expense, to settle any dispute or to conduct any litigation, that
may arise there from provided
that the Contractor shall not be liable to indemnify the Governor of Rajasthan, if the infringement of
patent or design, right is the direct result of an order passed by the Engineer In-charge in this behalf.
Clause 24: Imported Store articles to be obtained from Government
The contractor shall obtain from the stores of the Engineer In-charge, all imported store articles, which
may be required for the work or any part thereof, or in making up articles required thereof, or in
connection therewith, unless he has obtained permission writing, from the Engineer In-charge, to obtain
such stores and articles from else-where. The value of such stores and articles, as may be supplied to the
Contractor by the Engineer In-charge, will be debited to the contractor, in his account, at the rates shown
in the schedule attached to the contract, and if they are not entered in the schedule, they will be
debited at cost price, which for the purposes of this contract, shall include the cost of carriage and all
other expenses whatsoever, which shall have been incurred in obtaining delivery of the same at the
stores aforesaid plus storage charges.
Clause 25: Lump-Sums in estimates
When the estimate, on which a tender is made includes lump sums, in respect of parts of the work., the
Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of the item of work involved, orthe part of the work
in question at the same rates, as are payable under the contract for such items or if the part of the work in
question is not, in the opinion of the Engineer In-charge, capable of measurement, the Engineer In-
charge may at his discretion pay the lump sum amount entered in the estimate and the certificate in
writing of the Engineer In-charge shall be final and conclusive with regard to any sum or sums
payable to him under the provisionsof this clause.
Clause 26: Action where no Specification
In case of any Class of work for which there is no such specification as is mentioned in Rule I, such
work shall be carried out in accordance with the detailed specification of the department and also in
accordance with the instructions and requirement of the Engineer In- charge.
Clause 27: Definition of work
The expression 'work' or 'works' where used in conditions shall unless there be something either in
subject or context repugnant to such construction be considered and taken to mean the works by or
by virtue of the contract to be executed, whether temporary or permanent and whether original,
altered, substituted or additional.
Clause 27-A :
The term "Engineer In-charge" means the Divisional Officer who shall supervise and be in charge of the
work and who shall sign the contract on behalf of the Governor.
No claims for increase of rate will be entertained, if the orders for starting work are delayed.
Clasue28:
It cannot be guaranteed that the work will be started immediately after the tenders have been received.
Clause 29: Payment at reduced rates on account of items of work not a completed and
not to be at the discretion of the Engineer In-charge
The rates for several items of work estimated to cost more than Rs. l000/- agreed within will be valid
only when the item concerned is accepted as having been completed fully in accordance with the
sanctioned specifications. In case where the items of work are not accepted as so completed the
Engineer In-charge may make payment on account of such items at such reduced rates as he may
consider reasonable in preparation of final or on account bills, and his decision in the matter shall be
final and binding.
Clause 29 A: Payments at Part rates
The rates for several items of work may be paid at part rates provisionally in running bills in proportion
to the quantum of items executed at the discretion of Engineer In-charge. In case of item rates, if the
rate quoted for certain items are very high in comparison to the average/overall tendered premium then
the payment at running stages shall not be made more than the average sanctioned premium. The
deferred payment, will however be released after successful completion of the work.
Clause 30: Contractor's percentage, whether applied to net or gross amount of bills
The percentage referred to at page 13 of the tender will be deducted / added from / to the gross
amount of bill before deducting the value of any stock issued.
Clause 31: Contractor to adhere to labour laws / regulation
The contractor shall adhere to the requirements of the Workmen Compensation Act and labour
legislation in force from time to time and be responsible for and shall pay any compensation to his
workmen which would be payable for injuries under the Workmen's Compensation Act, hereinafter
called the said Act. If such compensation is paid by the Stateas principal employer under sub-section (
i ) of section 12 of the said Act, On behalf of the Contractor, it shall be recoverable by the State from the
contractor under sub-section ( 2 ) of the said section. Such compensation shall be recovered in the
manner laid down in clause I of the conditions of contract.
Note : All Contracts with Government shall require registration of workers under the Building &
other Construction Workers ( Regulation of Employment & Conditions of Services ) Act, 1996 and
extension of benefit to such workers under the Act. Deductions of cess at source will be made as per
provisions of the said Act, in force from time to time.
Clause 32: Withdrawal of work from the Contractor

If the Engineer In-charge shall at any time, and for any reasons whatever, including inability to
maintain prorate progress, think any portion of the work should not be executed or should be
withdrawn from the contractor, he may by notice in writing to that effect, require the contractor not to
execute the portion of the work specified in the notice or may withdrawfrom the contract the portion
of work so specified and the contractor shall not be entitled to
any compensation, by reason of such portion of work having been withdrawn from him. The Engineer-
in-charge may supplement the work by engaging another agency to execute such portion of the work at
the cost of the original contractor, without prejudice to his rights under clause 2. He shall also be
competent to levy compensation for delay in progress. The recovery of excess cost shall be made
from next available running bill or any other claimand shall not be deferred.
Clause 33 :
The contract includes clearance, levelling and dressing of site with in a distance of 15meter soft he
building on all sides except where the building adjoins another building.
Clause 34 : Protect works

The contractor shall arrange to protect, at his own cost, in an adequate manner, all cut stone work and
other work, requiring protection and to maintain such protection, as long as work is in progress. He
shall remove and replace this protection, as required by the Engineer-in- charge, from time to time. Any
damage to the work, so protected, no matter how it may be caused, shall be made good by the
Contractor free of cost.
All templates, forms, moulds, cantering, false works and models, which in the opinion of the Engineer-
in-charge, are necessary for the proper and workman like execution of the work, shall be provided by
the Contractor free of cost.
Clause 35: Contractor liable for settlement of claims caused by his delays
If the progress of the work has fallen so much in arrears as to prevent other contractors on the
work, from carrying out their part of the work within the stipulated time, he will beliable for the
settlement of any claim, put in by any of these contractors for the expenses of keeping their labour
unemployed to the extent considered reasonable by the Engineer-in- charge.
Clause 36A:
The liability, if any, on account of quarry fees, royalties, octroi and any other taxes andduties in
respect of materials actually consumed on public work, shall be borne by theContractor.
Clause 36B:
The cost of all water connection, necessary for the execution of work, and the cost of water consumed
and hire charges of meters and the cost of electricity consumed in connection with the execution
of work, shall be paid by the Contractor, except where otherwise specifically indicated.
Clause 36C: Payment of Sales Tax, and any other Taxes

Royalty or other tax on materials, issued in the process of ful-filling contract payable to the Government
under rules in force, will be paid by the Contractor himself.
Clause 36 D:
In respect of goods and materials procured by the Contractor, for use in works under the contract, sales
tax will be paid by the Contractor himself. But in respect of all such goods manufactured and supplied
by the Contractor and works executed under the contract, the responsibility of payment of sales tax
would be that of the Engineer-in-charge.
Clause 36E:
If any rates of Tax are increased or decreased, a new tax is introduced in India only, an existing Tax is
abolished, or any change in interpretation or application of any Tax resulting from a change or
Introduction in India only due to any National or State Statute, Ordinance, Decree or other law or any
regulation or bye-law of any local or other duly constituted authority in India only, in the course of
performance of contract, which was or will be assessed on the Contractor, in connection with the
performance of the Contract, an equitable adjustment of the Contract price shall be made to fully take
into account any such change by addition to the Contract Price or deduction there from, as the case may
be.
However, these adjustments would be restricted to direct transactions between the Owner and
Contractor only those items which are included in bid. Further, no adjustment of the Contract Price shall
be made on account of variation in deemed export benefits, if any. Any increase or decrease which is
included in price variation formula incorporated in the contract shall not be accounted for this purpose.
Such increase including GST shall not be made in the extended period of contract for which the
contractor alone is responsible for delay as determined by authority for extension of time.
Clause37: Refund of Performance Guarantee and Security Deposit
The Performance Guarantee and/or Security Deposit will be refunded after the expiry of the period as
prescribed below:-
(a) In case of contracts relating to hiring of trucks and other T &P transportation including
loading, unloading of materials, the amount of Performance Guarantee/Security Deposit
is refundable along with the final bill.
(b) Supplies of material: As per provisions of the G.F.& A.R.
(c) Ordinary repairs: 3 months after completion of the work provided the final bill has been
paid.
(d) Original works/special repairs works: Security deposit will be refunded six months after
completion, or expiry of one full rainy season, or after expiry of defect liability period as
defined in the special condition of agreement, whichever is later provided the final bill has
been paid.]
(e) In case of PWD original works/special repairs works costing more than Rs. 10.00 lacs,
partial amount of Security Deposit will be refunded during the defect liability period @
20% of SD amount after lapse of one year of completion and thereafter 20% of original
amount of SD at the end of each subsequent year. The remaining amount of SD be refunded
after the expiry of defect liability period.
The defect liability period shall be 5 years from completion of design, build components.
Clause38: Fair Wage Clause
The Contractor shall pay not less than fair wages/minimum wages to labours engaged by
him on the works as revised from time to time by the Government, but the Government
shall not be liable to pay anything extra for it except as stipulated in price escalation clause
(clause 45) of the agreement.
Explanation: "Fair Wage" means minimum wages for time or piece work, fixed or
revised, by the State Government under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948.
The Contractor shall, notwithstanding the provisions of any contract to the contrary, cause
to be paid fair wages to labourers indirectly engaged on the work, including any labour
engaged by his sub- contractors in connection withthe said work as if the labourers have
been immediately or directly employed by him.
In respect of all labourers, immediately or directly employed on the work, for the
purpose of Contractor's part of this agreement, the Contractor shall comply with or cause
to be complied with the Public Works Department Contractor's Labour Regulations made,
or that may be made by the Government from time to time in regard to payment of wages,
wage period, deductions from wages, recovery of wages not paid and unauthorized
deduction, maintenance of wages register, wage card publication of scale or wages and
other terms of employment, inspection and submission of periodic returns and other
matters of like nature.
(a) The Engineer In-charge shall have the right to deduct from the money due to the
Contractor, any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the loss
suffered by a worker or workers by reasons of no fulfilment of the conditions of the
contract for the benefit of the worker or work~ non- payment of wages or of
deductions made there from, which are not justifiedby the terms of the contract or as
a result of non-observance of the aforesaid regulations.
(b) Vis-à-vis tile Government of Rajasthan, the contractor shall be primary liable for all
payment to be made and for the observance of the regulations aforesaid without
prejudice to his right to claim indemnity from his subcontractors.
(c) The regulations aforesaid shall be deemed to be part of this contract and any breach
thereofsha1l be deemed to be breach of the contract.
Clause 39: Contractor to engage technical staff
The contractor shall to engage the technical staff as follows on the contract works
(a) For works costing Rs. 100.00 Lac and above - One Graduate Engineer
(b) For works costing between Rs. 50.00 Lac to Rs. 100.00 Lac - One qualified diploma holder
having experience of not less than 3 years.
(c) For works costing between Rs. 15.00 Lac and Rs. 50.00 Lac- One Qualifieddiploma holder.
The technical staff should be available at site, whenever required by Engineer In-charge to take
instructions.
Clause 39A:
The Contractor shall comply With the provisions of the Apprenticeship Act, 1961, and the Rules and
Orders issued, there under, from time to time, if he fails to do so, his failure will be a breach of
contract The Contractor shall also be liable for any pecuniary liability arising on account of any
violation by him of the provisions of the said Act.
Clause 40: Safety Code
The contractor shall follow the safety code of the Department.
Clause 41: Near Relatives barred from tendering :
The contractor shall not be permitted to tender for works in circle in which his near relative is
posted as Divisional Accountant or as an officer in any capacity between the grades of the
Superintending Engineer and Assistant Engineer (both inclusive). He shall also intimate the names of
persons, who are working with him in any capacity, or are subsequently employed by him and who
are near relatives to any gazetted officer in the Organization/ Department. Any breach of this condition
by the Contractor would render him liable to be removed from the approved list of contractors of the
Department. If such facts is noticed (a) before sanction of tender, his offer shall be declared invalid
and earnest money shall be forfeited, (b) after sanction of the tender then the tender sanctioning
authority may at his discretion forfeit this earnest money, performance guarantee, security deposit and
enlistment deposit and the work/ remaining work may allot to any registered contractor onthe same
rates as per rules.
Note : By the term 'near relative' is meant wife, husband, parents and grand-parents, children and grand
children, brothers and sisters, uncles and cousins and their corresponding in-laws.
Clause 42 : Retired Gazetted Officers barred for 2 years
No Engineer of Gazetted rank or other Gazetted Officer, employed in Engineering or Administrative
duties in an Engineering Department of the Government of Rajasthan, is allowed to work as a Contractor
for a period of 2 years of his retirement from Government service without the previous permission of
Government of Rajasthan. The contract is liable to be cancelled, if either the Contractor or any of his
employee is found, at any time, to be such a person, who had not obtained the permission of
Government, as aforesaid, before submission of the tender or engagement in the contractor's service,
as the case may be.
Clause 43 : Quality Control
The Government shall have right to exercise proper Quality Control measures. The Contractor shall
provide all assistance to conduct such tests.
Clause 43 A :
The work (whether fully constructed or not) and all materials, machines, tools and plant, scaffolding,
temporary buildings and other things connected therewith, shall be at the risk of the contractor until
the work has been delivered to the Engineer-in-charge, and a certificate from him, to the effect,
obtained.
Clause 44 : Death of Contractor
Without prejudice to any of the rights or remedies under the contract, if the Contractor dies, the legal
heirs of the Contractor or the Chief Engineer or duly authorised Engineer shall have the option of
terminating the contract without any compensation.
Clause 45 : Price Variation Clause: Applicable

• Price variation clause shall be applicable in case of lump sum contracts estimated to
more than Rs.100 crore with stipulated completion period of more than 18 months.
If, during the progress of the contract of value exceeding Rs. 50 lac (accepted tendered
amount minus cost of material supplied by the department), and where stipulated completion period is
more than 3 months (both the conditions should be fulfilled), the price, of any materials/
bitumen/diesel and petrol/ cement/steel incorporated in the works (not being materials to be supplied
by the department) and/or wages of labour increases or decreases, as compared to the price and/or
wages prevailing at the last date of submission of bids, the amounts payable to contractors for the work
shall be adjusted for increase or decrease in the rates of materials (excepting those materials
supplied by the department)
/labour/ bitumen/diesel and petrol/ cement/ steel.]
uksV % ewY; fopyu dh x.kuk gsrq bl DykWt 45 esa uhps fn;s x;s lw= ¼A½ ls ¼F½ rd rFkk
DykWt 45A esa tks lw= fn;s x;gs S]a mueas Hkh DykWt 45 ,oa 45, eas fd;s x;s mDr
la'kks/kuvuqlkj “Last date of Submission of bid” dks gh vk/kkj frfFk ekurs gq,
rnuq#i gh la'kks/ku le>k tkdj ewY; fopyu dh x.kuk dh tkosA
Increase or decrease in the cost of labour/material/diesel and petrol/cement/steel shall be
calculated quarterly and cost of bitumen shall be calculated on monthly basis in accordance with the
following formula:-
(A) Labour
PL (IL1 – IL0)
VL = 0.75 x x R
100 IL0
VL = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration due to
change in rates for labour.
R = The value of the work done in rupees during the quarter under consideration
excluding the cost of materials supplied by the department and excluding other items
as mentioned in this clause.
IL0 = The average consumer price index for industrial workers (whole sale prices) for the
quarter in which tenders were opened/negotiated (as published in Reserve Bank of
India Journal/Labour Bureau Shimla, for the area).
IL1 = The average consumer price index for industrial workers (whole sale prices) for the
quarter of a calendar year under consideration (as published in Reserve Bank of India
Journal /Labour Bureau Shimla, for the area).
PL = Percentage of labour components.
Note : In case of revision of minimum wages by the Government or other competent authority,
nothing extra would be payable except the price escalation permissible under this clause.
(B) Material (excluding material supplied by the department).
PM (LM1 – LM0)
VM = 0.75 x x R
100 LM0
VM = Increase or decrease in the cost during the quarter under consideration due to change
in rates of material.
LM0 = The average wholesale price index (all commodities) for the quarter in which
tenders were opened/negotiated (as published in Reserve Bank of India
Journal/Economic Adviser to Government of India, Ministry of Industries, for the
area).
LM1 = The average wholesale price index (all commodities) for the quarter under
consideration (as published in Reserve Bank of India Journal/Economic Adviser to
Government of India, Ministry of Industries, for the area).
P = Percentage of material components (excluding materials supplied by the
Department).
[(C) Bitumen
DELETED
(D) Petroleum
Pf ( Fi – F0)
Vf = 0.75 x x R
100 F0
Vf = Increase or decrease in the cost of the work during the quarter under consideration
due to change in the rates for fuel and lubricants.
F0 = The average wholesale price Index of High speed Diesel (HSD) as published by the
Economic Adviser to Govt. of India, Ministry of Industry on the day of opening of
tender/negotiations.
Fi = The average wholesale price Index of H.S.D. for the quarter under consideration as
published weekly by the Economic Adviser to the Government of India, Ministry of
Industry.
Pf = Percentage of fuel and lubricants component excluding fuel and lubricants supplied
by the departments (Specified in the sanctioned estimate for the work).
R = Total work done during the quarter as prescribed under this clause.
Note : For application of this clause price of HSD is chosen to indicate fuel and lubricant
component.
(E) Cement
Pc (Lc1 – Lc0)
Vc = 0.75 x x R
100 Lc0
Vc = Increase or decrease in the cost during the quarter under consideration due to change
in rates of Cement
excluding the cost of Cement supplied by the department and excluding other items
Lc0 = The average wholesale price index (Cement) for the quarter in which tenders were
opened/negotiated (as published in Reserve Bank of India Journal/Economic Adviser
to Government of India, Ministry of Industries, for the area).
Lc1 = The average wholesale price index (cement) for the quarter under consideration (as
published in Reserve Bank of India Journal/Economic Adviser to Government of
India, Ministry of Industries, for the area).
Pc = Percentage of cement components (excluding Cement supplied by the Department).
(F) Steel
Ps (Lsi – Lso)
Vs = 0.75 x XR
100 Lso
VS = Increase or decrease in the cost of work during the quarter under consideration dueto change
in the rates of steel.
R = The value of the work done in rupees during the quarter under consideration excluding the
cost of steel supplied by the department and excluding other items as mentioned in this
clause.
LS0 = The average wholesale price index for the quarter in which tenders were opened/negotiated
(as published by the Economic Adviser to the Government of India, Ministry of
Industries).
LSI = The average whole sale price Index for the quarter under consideration (as published by the
Economic Adviser to Government of India, Ministry of Industries).
PS = Percentage of steel components (excluding steel supplied by the Department).]
1[Clause 45A : Price Variation in installation of elevators, supply/installation of

Centrally Air Conditioning and Central Evaporating Cooling Works.
DELETED
General Conditions for admissibility of Escalation
1. The exact percentage of labour/material (excluding materials to be supplied by the
department)/bitumen/diesel and petrol/cement/steel component for the work shall be
approved by the authority while sanctioning the detailed Estimates.
2. The breakup of components of labour/materials (excluding materials to be supplied by

the department)/bitumen/diesel and petrol/cement/steel as indicated in Clause 45 have
been predetermined as below:-
(a) Labour - 1 2 percent
(b) Material - 1 4 percent
(c) Diesel and Petrol - 2 4 Percent
(d) Cement - 28 Percent
(e) Steel - 22 percent
Total - 100
3. While allowing price escalation the following shall be deducted from the value ofwork
done (R):
(a) Cost of material supplied by the Department.
(b) Cost of services rendered as per Clause 34.
(c) Secured Advance/any advance added earlier but deducted now after work is
measured.
(d) Cost of extra items, the rates for which have been worked out based onmarket
rates/mutually agreed rates.
4. The first statement of escalation shall be prepared at the end of three months in which the
work was awarded and the work done from the date of start to the end of thisperiod shall
be taken into account. For subsequent statement, cost of work done during every quarter shall
be taken into account. At the completion of work, the work done during the last quarter or
fraction, thereof, shall be taken into account.
5. For the purpose of reckoning the work done during any period, the bills prepared during the
period shall be considered. The dates of recording measurements in the Measurement Book by
the Assistant Engineer shall be the guiding factor to decide the bills relevant to any period.
The date of completion, as finally recorded by the competent authority in the Measurement
Book, shall be the criterion.
6. The index relevant to any quarter, for which such compensation is paid, shall be the arithmetical
average of the indices relevant of the calendar month.
7. Price adjustment clause shall be applicable only for the work that is carried out within the
stipulated time, or extension thereof, as are not attributable to the contractor.
8. If during the progress in respect of contract works stipulated to cost Rs.50 lacs or less, the value
of work actually done excluding cost of material supplied by the Department, exceeds Rs. 50
lacs and completion period is more than 3 months then escalation would be payable only in
respect of value of work in excess over Rs.50 lacs, from the date of satisfying both the
conditions.
9. Where originally stipulated period is 3 months or les but actual period of execution exceeds
beyond 3 months on account of reasons not attributable to contractor, escalation amount would
be payable only in respect of extended period if amount of
work is more than Rs.50 lacs.
10. In case the contractor does not make prorata progress in the first or another time span and the
short fall in progress is covered up by him during subsequent time span within original
stipulated period then the price escalation of such work expected to be done in the previous
time span shall be notionally given based upon the price index of that quarter in which such
work was required to be done.
11. No claims for price adjustment other than those provided herein, shall entertained.
12. If the period of completion including extended period attributable to Government exceeds 3
months but cost does not exceeds more than Rs.50 lacs, no escalation is admissible.
13. Similarly, if cost of works increases more than Rs.50 lacs but completion period including
extended period attributable to government is less than 3 months.] no escalation is admissible.
14. No provisional escalation is payable on the basis of indices of the previous quarter in absence
of non-publication of indices for concerned quarter by the RBI.
15. Escalation is always payable quarterly and no provisional escalation is payable monthly or
fortnightly.
16. In case at the time of executing agreement, both the conditions (completion period 3 months
and amount of work Rs.50 lacs for admissibility of price escalation are not fulfilled and
subsequent due to additional work and extension of time attributable to Government, both the
conditions become fulfilled, in that case the escalation shall be payable from the date of
satisfying both the conditions and only for work done beyond Rs.50 lacs and in period of
work beyond 3 months.
17. The contractor shall for the purpose of this conditions keep such books of account and
other documents as are necessary to show the amount of any increase climbed or reduction
available and shall allow inspection of the same by a duly authorized representative of
Government and further shall at the request of the Engineer-in-charge furnish, verified in such
a manner as the Engineer-in- charge may require any documents so kept and such other
information as the Engineer-in-charge may require.
18. Price variation clause shall be applicable in case of lump sum contracts estimated to more than
Rs.100 crore with stipulated completion period of more than 18 months.
19. The component of operation and maintenance (O&M) cost included in the contract price shall
not be subject to price variations. The price may be adjusted by the use of prescribed formula
(or formulae) which breaks down the total price into components.
20. The amount of price variation in case of lump sum contracts will be made by adding or
deducting, as the case may be, from the payments made at the stages of work specified in the
contract document.
Clause 46: Force Majeure
Neither party shall be liable to each other, for any loss or damage, occasioned by or arisingout of acts
of God such as unprecedented floods, volcanic eruptions, earthquake or other invasion of nature and
other acts.
Clause 47: General Discrepancies and Errors
In case of percentage rate tenders, if there is any typographic or clerical error in the rates shown by the
Department in the 'G' Schedule the rates as given in the Basic Schedule ofRates of the Department
for the area shall be taken as correct.
Clause 48: Pre Payment Audit & Technical Examination
The Government shall have right to cause an audit and technical examination of the works and the
final bills of the Contractor including all supporting voucher, abstracts, etc. to be made within 2
years after payment of the final bill and if as a result of such audit and technical examination any sum
if found to have been over paid in respect of any work done by the Contractor under the Contract or
any work claimed by him to have been done by him under the Contract and found not to have been
executed or executed below specifications, the Contractor shall be liable to refund the amount of over
payment and it shall be lawful for Department to recover the same from him in the manner prescribed in
Clause 50 or in any other manner legally permissible and if it is found that the Contractor was
paid less than what was due to him under the Contract in respect of any work executed by him under it,
the amount of such under-payment shall be duly paid by the Government to the Contractor.
Clause 48 A : Pre check or Pre Check of Bills
The Government shall have right to provide a system of pre-check of Contractors bills by a specified
Organization, and payment by an Engineer or an Accounts Officer /Sr. Accounts Officer/Chief Accounts
Officer / Financial Advisor, as the Government may in its absolute discretion prescribe. Any over
payments/excess payments detected, as a result of such pre- check or pre check of Contractor's bills can
be recovered from the Contractor's bills, in the manner, herein before provided and the contractor will
refund such over/excess payments.
Clause 48 B: Check Measurements
The Department reserves to itself the right to prescribe a scale of check measurement of work, in
general, or specific scale for specific works- or by other special orders (about which the decision of the
Department shall be final) Checking of measurement by superior officer shall supersede measurements
by the subordinate officer, and the former will become the basis of the payment. Any over / excess
payments detected as a result of such check measurement or otherwise at any stage up to the date of
completion and the defect removal period specified else-where in this contract, shall be recoverable from
the Contractor, as any other dues payable to the Government
Clause 49: Dismantled materials
The contractor in course of the work should understand that all materials e.g. stone bricks, steel and
other material obtainable in the work by dismantling etc. will be considered as the property of the
Government and will be disposed off to the best advantage of the Government as per direction of the
Engineer In-charge.
Clause 50: Recovery from Contractor
Whenever any claim against the contractor for the payment of a sum of money arises out ofor under
the contract, the Department shall be entitled to recover such sum by appropriating, in part or whole
of the Performance Guarantee and / or Security Deposit, Security Deposit at the time of the enlistment
of the Contractor. In the event of security being insufficient or if no
security has been taken then the balance or the total sum recoverable as the case may be, shall be
deducted from any sum then due or which at any time there after may become due to the contractor,
under this or any other contract with the Government of Rajasthan. Should thissum be not sufficient
to cover the full amount recoverable, the contractor shall pay to the Department on demand the balance
remaining dues.
The Department shall further have the right to affect such recoveries under Public Demands Recovery
Act.
Clause 51: Jurisdiction & Court
In the event of any dispute arising between the parties hereto in respect of any of the matters comprised in
this agreement, the same shall be settled by a competent Court having jurisdiction over the place where
agreement is executed and by no other court, after completion of proceedings under
Clause23ofthisContract.
Transparency act
Annexure A : Compliance with the Code of Integrity and No Conflict of Interest

Any person participating in a procurement process shall –
i. Not offer any bribe, reward or gift or any material benefit either directly or indirectly in exchange for
an unfair advantage in procurement process or to otherwise influence the procurement process.
ii. Not misrepresent or omit that misleads or attempts to mislead so as to obtain a financial or other benefit
or avoid an obligation.
iii. Not indulge in any collusion, Bid rigging or anti-competitive behavior to impair the transparency,
fairness and progress of the procurement process.
iv. Not misuse any information shared between the procuring entity and the Bidders with an intent to gain
unfair advantage in the procurement process.
v. Not indulge in any coercion including impairing or harming or threatening to do the same, directly or
indirectly, to any party or to its property to influence the procurement process.
vi. Not obstruct any investigation or audit of a procurement process.
vii. Disclose conflict or interest, if any and
viii. Disclose any previous transgressions with any entity in India or any other country during the last three
years or any debarment by any other procuring entity.
Conflict of Interest:-
The Bidder participating in a bidding process must not have a Conflict of interest. A conflict of
interest is considered to be a situation in which a party has interests that could improperly influence
that party's performance of official duties or responsibilities, contractual obligations, or compliance
with applicable laws and regulations.
1. A Bidder may be considered to be in conflict of interest with one or more parties in a bidding
process if, including but not limited to;
a) have controlling partners/shareholders in common; or
b) receive or have received any direct or indirect subsidy from any of them; or
c) have the same legal representative for purpose of the Bid; or
d) have a relationship with each other, directly or through common third parties, that puts them in a
position to have access to information about or influence on the Bid of another Bidder, or influence the
decisions of the procuring entity regarding the bidding process; or
e) The Bidder participates in more than one Bid in a bidding process. Participation by a Bidder in more
than one Bid will result in the disqualification of all Bids in which the Bidder is involved. However,
this does not limit the inclusion of the same subcontractor, not otherwise participating as Bidder, in
more than one Bid; or
f) the Bidder or any of its affiliates participated a consultant in the preparation of the design or technical
specifications of the Goods, Works or Services that are the subject of the Bid; or
g) Bidder or any of its affiliates has been hired (or is proposed to be hired) by the procuring entity as
engineer-in-charge/consultant for the contract.
ANNEXURE B: DECLARATION BY THE BIDDER REGARDING QUALIFICATIONS
Declaration by the Bidder
Declaration to my/our Bid submitted to ............................... for procurement of...................... in

response to their Notice inviting Bids No ........................................... I/we hereby declare under section
7 of Rajasthan Transparency in Procurement Act, 2012 that:
1. I/we possess the necessary professional, technical financial and managerial resources and
competence required by the Bidding Document issued by the Procuring Entity.
2. I/we have fulfilled my/our obligation to pay such of the taxes payable to the Union and the
State Government or any local authority as specified in the Bidding Document.
3. I/we are not insolvent in receivership, bankrupt or being wound up, not have my/our affairs
administered by a court or a judicial officer not have my/our business activities suspended
and not the subject or legal proceeding for any of the foregoing reasons.
4. I/we do not have, and our directors and officers not have, been convicted or any criminal
offence related to my/our professional conduct or the making of false statements or
misrepresentations as to my/our qualifications to enter into a procurement contract within a
period of three years preceding the commencement of this procurement process, or not have
been otherwise disqualified pursuant to debarment proceedings.
5. I/we do not have a conflict of interest as specified in the Act, Rules and the bidding
document, which materially affects fair competition.
Signature of bidder
Name :
Designation :
Address:
Annexure C: Grievance Redressal during Procurement Process
The designation and address of the First Appellate Authority is Chief Engineer Water resources
Rajasthan, Bhawani singh road, Jaipur. The designation and address of the Second Appellate
Authority is Secretary, water resources department, Secretariat Jaipur.
(1) Filling an appeal
If any Bidder or prospective bidder is aggrieved that any decision, action or omission of the
Procuring Entity is in contravention to the provisions of the Act or the Rules or the Guidelines
issued there under, he may file an appeal to First Appellate Authority, as specified in the
bidding document within a period of ten days from the date of such decision or action,
omission, as the case may be, clearly giving the specific ground or grounds on which he feels
aggrieved.
Provided that after the declaration of a Bidder as successful the appeal may be filed only by a
Bidder who has participated in procurement proceedings.
Provided further that in case a Procuring Entity evaluates the Technical Bids before the
opening of the Financial Bids, an appeal related to the matter of Financial Bids may be filed
only by a Bidder whose Technical Bid is found to be acceptable.
(2) The officer to whom an appeal is filed under para (1) shall deal with the appeal as
expeditiously as possible and shall endeavor to dispose it of within thirty days from the date
of the appeal.
(3) If the officer designated under Para (1) fails to dispose of the appeal filed within the period
specified in Para (2), or if the Bidder or prospective bidder or the Procuring Entity is
aggrieved bidder by the order passed by the First Appellate Authority, the Bidder or
prospective bidder or the Procuring Entity, as the case may be, may file a second appeal to
Second Appellate Authority specified in the Bidding Document in this behalf within fifteen
days from the expiry of the period specified in Para (2) or of the date of receipt of the order
passed by the First Appellate Authority, as the case may be.
(4) Appeal not to lie in certain cases
No appeal shall lie against any decision of the Procuring Entity relating to the following
matters, namely:-
(a) Determination of need of procurement.
(b) Provisions limiting participation of Bidders in the Bid Process.
(c) The decision of whether or not to enter into negotiations.
(d) Cancellation of a procurement process.
(e) Applicability of the provision of confidentiality.
(5) Form of Appeal

(a) An appeal under Para (1) or (3) above shall be in the annexed from along with as
many copies as there are respondents in the appeal.
(b) Every appeal shall be accompanied by an order appealed against, if any, affidavit
verifying the facts state in the appeal and proof of payment of fee.
(c) Every appeal may be presented to the Appellate Authority or Second Appellate
Authority, as the case may be a person or through register post or authorized
representative.
(6) Fee for filing appeal
(a) Fee for first appeal shall be rupees Five thousand five hundred and for second appeal
shall be rupees ten thousand which shall be non-refundable.
(b) The fee shall be paid in the form of the demand draft or banker's cheque of a
Scheduled Bank in India payable in the name of appellate authority concerned
(7) Procedure for disposal of appeal
(a) The First Appellate Authority or Second Appellate Authority, as the case may be
upon filing of appeal, shall issue notice accompanied by copy of appeal, affidavit and
documents, if any to the documents and fix date of hearing.
(b) On the date fixed for hearing, the First Appellate Authority or Second Appellate
Authority, as the case may be, shall, -
(ii) hear all the parties to appeal present before him; and
(iii) Peruse or inspect documents, related records or copies thereof relating to the matter.
(c) After hearing the parties, perusal or inspection of documents and relevant records or
copies thereof relating to the matter, the Appellate Authority concerned shall pass an
order in writing and provide the copy of order to the parties to appeal free of cost.
(d) The order passed under sub-rule (c) shall also be placed on the State Public
Procurement Portal.
FORM NO. 1
[See rules 83]
Memorandum of Appeal under the Rajasthan Transparency in Public

Procurement Act 2012
Appeal No. ........................................... of .............................................
Before the .....................................................................(First / Second Appellate Authority)
1. Particulars of appellant:
(i) Name of the appellant:
(ii) Official address, if any :
(iii) Residential address:
2. Name and address of the respondent (s):

(i)
(ii)
(iii)
3. Number and date of the order appealed against

and name and designation of the officer/authority
who passed the order (enclosed copy) or a
statement of a decision, action or omission of
the Procuring Entity in contravention to the provisions
of the act by which the appellant is aggrieved.
4. If the Appellant proposes to the represented
by a representative, the name and postal address
of the representative.
5. Number of affidavits and documents enclosed with the appeal:
6. Grounds of appeal:
............................................................................................................................. ........
.....................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................... (Supported by an
affidavit)
7. Prayer:
............................................................................................................................. ........
....................................................................................................................... ..............
...............................................
Place : ......................................
Date : ......................................
Appellant's Signature
Annexure D : Additional Conditions of Contract
1. Correction of arithmetical errors.
Provide that a Financial Bid is substantially responsive; the Procuring Entity will correct
arithmetical errors during evaluation of Financial Bids on the following basis.
(i) If there is a discrepancy between the unit price and the total price that is obtained by
multiplying the unit price and quantity, the price shall prevail and the total price shall
be corrected, unless in the opinion of the Procuring Entity there is an obvious
misplacement of the decimal point in the unit price, in which case the total price as
quoted shall govern and the unit price shall be corrected.
(ii) If there is an error in a total corresponding to the addition or subtraction of subtotals,

the subtotals shall prevail and the total shall be corrected and
(iii) If there is a discrepancy between word and figures, the amount in words shall
prevail unless the amount expressed in words is related to an arithmetic error, in
which case the amount in figures shall prevail subject to (i) and (ii) above.
If the Bidder that submitted the lowest evaluated Bid does not accept the correction
of errors, its Bid shall be disqualified and its Bid Security shall be forfeited or its Bid
securing Declaration shall be executed.
2. Procuring Entity's Right to Vary Quantities
(1) At the time of award of contract, the quantity of Goods, works or services
originally specified in the Bidding Document may be increased or decreased by a
specified percentage, as allowed in the item no. 26 of Schedule of Powers issued by
Rajasthan Finance Department and its latest amendment issued during execution of
works. Such increase shall not result in exceeding fifty percent, of the total value of
work (Clause 73 of RTPP act). It shall be without any change in the unit prices or
other terms and conditions of the Bid and the condition of contract.
(2) If the Procuring Entity does not procure any subject matter of procurement of
Procures less than the quantity specified in Bidding Document due to change
Circumstances, the Bidder shall not be entitled for any claim or compensation
Except otherwise provided in the conditions Contract.
Progress Statement referred to in Clause 2 of Conditions of Contract
Name of Work Date from which Date by which Monthly rate

the work should be the work should of Progress
commenced be completed
The Contractor has been informed that his tender has been accepted.
Signature of Engineer-in-charge Signature of Contractor
Date .................. Date ............................

For Filling in the Progress Statement Form
1. Columns 2, 3 and 4 must be initiated and dated by the Contractor.
2. Column 4 must be initiated and dated by the Chief Engineer or other duly authorized
Engineer also.
3. The date in column 2 should correspond to the date on which the order to commence work is
given to the contractor read with Clause 2 of the conditions of contract.
4. The date in column 3 must correspond to the period state in Sub Clause (e) of the
Memorandum below "Tender for works".
5. Column 4. This will ordinarily be worked out proportionately; thus if Rs. 25000/- is the cost
of the whole or portion of work tendered for, and 6 months period of completion, then the
monthly rate of progress should be Rs. 4,000/-. If necessary, quantities may also be specified
in this column at the discretion of the Chief Engineer.
6. The Certificate as to intimation of acceptance of tender printed at the foot of the form, must
be signed and dated both by the Chief Engineer or other duly authorized Engineer and the
Contractor.
ANNEXURETO APPENDIX XI
RAJASTHAN PUBLIC WORKS DEPARTMENT CONTRACTORS

LABOUR REGULATIONS
1. Short title: These regulations may be called "The Rajasthan Public Works Department
Contractor's-Labour Regulations."
2. Definition: These regulations unless otherwise expressed or indicated, the following words
and expressions shall have the meaning hereby assigned to them respectively, that is to say :-
(i) "Labour" means a minimum worker employed by a Rajasthan P.W. Department
contractor directly or indirectly through a sub-contractor or other person or by an
agent on his behalf.
(ii) "Fair Wage" means minimum wages for time or piece work fixed or revised by the
State Government under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948,
(iii) "Contractor" shall include every person whether sub-contractor or headman or
Agent employing labour on the work taken on contract.
(iv) "Wages" shall have the same meaning as defined in the Payment of Wages Act and
includes time and piece rate wages.
3. Display of Notice regarding wages etc. : The contractor shall

(a) before he commences his work on contract, display and correctly maintain and continue to
display and inconspicuous places on the work notices in English and the correctly maintain in
Hindi by the majority of the workers giving the rate of wages which have been certified by
the Executive Engineer-, the Superintending Engineer, the Chief Engineer or Labour
Commissioner, as fair wages and the hours of works for which such wages are earned, and
(b) send a copy of such notices to the Certifying Officers.
4. Payment of Wages:
(i) Wages due to every worker shall be paid to him direct.
(ii) All wages shall be paid in current coin or currency or in both.
5. Fixation of wage periods:

(i) The contractor shall fix the wage periods in respect of which the wages shall be
payable.
(ii) No wage period shall exceed one month.
(iii) Wages of every workman employed on the contract shall be paid before the expiry of
ten days after the last day of the wage period in respect of which the wages are
payable.
(iv) When the employment of any worker is terminated by or on behalf of the contractor,
the wages earned by him shall be paid before the expiry of the day succeeding the
one on which his employment is terminated.
(v) All payments of the wages shall be made on a working day except when the work is
completed before the expiry of the wage period, in which case, final payments shall
be made within 48 hours of the last working day.
Note: The term "working day" means a day on which the labour is employed in progress.
6. Wage Book and Wage Slips etc.

(i) The Contractor shall maintain a Wage Book of each worker in such form as may be
convenient but the same shall include the following particulars :-
(a) Rate of daily or monthly wages.
(b) Nature of work on which employed.
(c) Total number of days worked during each wage period.
(d) Total amount payable for the work during each wage period.
(e) All deductions made' from the wages with an indication in each case of the
ground for which the deduction is made.
(f) Wages actually paid for each wage period.
(ii) The contractor shall also maintain a wage slip for each worker employed on the
work.
(iii) The Executive Engineer may grant an exemption from the maintenance of the wage
books and wages slips to a contractor who, in his opinion, may not directly or
indirectly employ more than 50 persons on the work.
7. Fines and deductions which may be made from wages :-

(i) The wages of a worker shall be paid to him without any deductions of any kind
except those authorized, namely the following:-
(a) Fines.
(b) Deductions for absence from duty i.e. from the place or places where, by the terms of
his employment, he is required to work. The amount of deduction shall be in
proportion to the period for which he was absent.
(c) Deductions for damages to or loss of goods expressly entrusted to the employed
person for custody or for loss or any other deductions of money, which he is required
to account where such damages or losses are directly attributable to his neglect or
default.
(i-a) The Rajasthan Government may, from' time to time, allow deductions other than
those specified in clause I above.
(ii) No fines shall be imposed on a worker and no deductions for damage or loss shall be made
until worker has been given an opportunity of showing cause against each fine or deductions.
(iii) The total amount of fines which may be imposed in anyone wage period on a worker, shall
not exceed an amount equal to three paisa in rupee of the wage payable to him in respect of
that wage period.
(iv) No fine imposed on any worker shall be recovered from him by installments or after the
expiry of 60 days from the date on which it was imposed.
8. Register of fines etc. : The contractor shall maintain a register of fines and of all deductions
for damage or loss. Such register shall mention the reasons for which fine was imposed or
deduction for damage or loss was made.
The Contractor shall maintain both in English and local Indian Language, a list approved by
the Labour Commissioner clearly stating the acts and omission for which penalty of fine may
be imposed on a workman and display it in a good condition in a conspicuous place of the
work.
9. Preservation of Register: The wage register, the wage card and the register fines deductions
required to be maintained under these regulations, shall be preserved for 6 months after the
date of the 1st entry made in them.
10. Powers of Labour Welfare Officer to make investigation of enquiry: The Labour Welfare
Officer or any other person, authorized by the State Government on their behalf, shall have
power to make enquiries with a view to ascertaining and enforcing due and proper observance
of the fair wage clauses and provisions of the regulations. He shall investigate into any
complaint regarding default made by the Contractor or Sub-Contractor in regard to such
provisions.
11. Report of Labour Welfare Officer: The Labour Welfare Officer or other person, authorized
as a aforesaid, shall submit a report of the result of his investigation or enquiry to the
Executive Engineer concerned indicating the extent, if any, to which the default has been
committed with a note that necessary deductions from the contractors bill be made and the
wage and other dues be paid to the labour concerned Incase an appeal is made by contractor
under clause 12 of these regulations, actual payment to Labours will be made by the
Executive Engineer after the Labour Commissioner had given decision on Such appeal.
12. Appeal against the decision of Labour Welfare Officers: Any person aggrieved by the
decision and recommendation of the Labour Welfare Officer or other persons, so authorized,
may appeal against such decision to the Labour Commissioner within 30 days· from the date
of decision forwarding simultaneously a copy of his appeal to Executive Engineer concerned
but subject to such appeal the decision of the Officer shall be final and binding upon the
contractor.
12-A No party shall be allowed to be represented by a lawyer during any investigation, enquiry,
appeal or any other proceedings.
13. Inspection of Wage Books and Slips: The Contractor shall allow inspection of the wage
books and wage slips and register of fines and deductions to any of his workers or to his agent
at a convenient time and place after due notice is received or to the Labour Welfare Officer or
any other person authorized by the State Government on his behalf.
14. Submission of Returns: The Contractor shall submit periodical returns, as may be specified
from time to time.
1. Amendments: The State Government may, from time to time, add to or amend these regulations and on
any questions as to the application, interpretational effect of these regulations, the decision of the
Labour Commissioner to the Government of Rajasthan or any other person authorized by the State
Government in that behalf, shall be-final.
SCHEDULE OF FAIR WAGE TO BE GIVEN BY EXECUTIVE ENGINEER
LIST OF ACTS AND COMMISSION FOR WHICH FINE CAN BE IMPOSED
1. Willful insubordination or disobedience whether alone or in combination with another.

2. The fraud or dishonesty in connection with the contractors business or property of the Rajasthan
P.W.D.
3. Taking or giving bribes or any illegal gratification.
4. Habitual late attendance.
5. Drunkenness; fighting, riot or disorderly or indecent behavior.
6. Habitual negligence.
7. Smoking near or around the area where combustible or other materials are stocked.
8. Habitual indiscipline.
9. Causing damage work in progress or to property of the Rajasthan P.W.D. or the contractor.
10. Sleeping on duty.
11. Malingering or sowing down work.
12. Giving of false information regarding name, age, father's name.
13. Habitual loss of wage cards supplied by the employers.
14. Unauthorized use of employer's property or manufacturing or making of unauthorized articles at
the work places.
15. Bad workmanship in construction and maintenance by skilled workers which is not approved by
the department and for which contractors are compelled to undertake rectification.
16. Making false complaints and/or misleading statement.
17. Engaging, in trade within the premises of the establishment.
18. Any delinquency of business affairs of the employers.
19. Collection or canvassing for the collection of any money within the premises of an establishment
unless authorized by the employer.
20. Holding meeting inside the premises without previous sanction of the employer.
21. Threatening or intimidating any workman or employee during the working hours within the
premises.
Section VI B: Special Conditions of Contract
Section VI B: Special Conditions of Contract
Definitions
In the Contract, as here in after defined. The following words and expressions shall have themeaning hereby
assigned to them, except where the context otherwise required.
1.1 "Approved" shall mean approval in writing including subsequent written confirmation of
previous verbal approval.
1.2 "Bill of Quantities" (BOQ) shall mean the bill of quantities included in the contract
(s) or as approved by the Owner during execution for the Works.
1.3 "Certificate of Completion" Shall mean the certificate (s) to be issued according to Clause 6
hereof.
1.4 "Construction Equipment" shall -mean all appliances/equipment and things of whatsoever
nature including all related spares of wearing parts in or about the execution, required for
completion or maintenance of the works but does not include materials or other things intended
to from part of or to be incorporated into the Permanent works.
1.5 "Contract" shall mean the Agreement between the Owner and the Contractor duly signed by the
parties thereto through their authorized representatives for the execution of the Works together
with all the documents annexed/attached therewith.
1.6 "Contract Price" shall mean the price of the work package of the successful Bidder as
accepted by the Owner.
1.7 "Contractor" shall mean M/s having its registered office at
and include its legal representative's successors and permitted assigns.
1.8 "Contractor's work programme" shall mean the programme showing the order of sequence in
which the Contractor intends to carry out the works within the time for completion stipulated in
the contract for completion of the works.
1.9 The word "Cost" shall be deemed to include overhead cost whether incurred on or off the
site.
1.10 "Day" shall mean calendar day.
1.11 “Defects Liability Period” shall have the meaning as set forth in Clause 37E ofGCC.
1.12 “Drawings” shall include maps, plans sketches and tracing of prints thereto referred to and
incorporated in Contract and modification of such drawings approved in writing by the
Owner/Engineer-in-charge and such other drawings as may from timeto time be approved in
writing by the Owner/Engineer-in-charge in connection withthe execution of the contract.
1.13 “Effective Date” shall mean the date on which the Contract shall come into effect as provided in
clause 2 hereof.
1.14 “Engineer” or "Engineer-in-charge” The term means as expressed in clause 27A of General
conditions of contract.
1.15 Engineer-in-charge Representative” shall mean the person (s) nominated from time to time
by the Engineer-in-charge to perform such duties as may be assigned to him/them.
1.16 "Expatriate" shall mean any person who is not a resident of India but who is required in
India for performance of the Works with mutual consent in pursuance tothe Contract.
1.17 "Final Acceptance Certificate" shall mean the certificate(s) to be issued according to
Clause-6 of GCC hereof.
1.18 "Foreign Currency" shall mean a Currency other than Indian Rupee.
1.19 "Month" shall mean calendar month.
1.20 "Onshore Component" shall mean the component of Contract price expressed inIndia Rupees
and to be paid in Indian Rupees by the Owner for work done pursuant to the contract.
1.21 "Order to Commence" shall mean the order 'to' be given by the Owner to the Contractor to
commence execution of the Works as provided in clause 2 of GCC.
1.22 "Owner"/ “Employer” shall mean the Government of Rajasthan, through Additional
Chief Engineer, Water Resources Zone, Udaipur, India or Chief Engineer / Additional Chief
Engineer in-charge of the project, and shall include its successors and assigns.
1.23 “Owner design consultant (ODC)” shall mean Investigation Design & Research (IDR) wing
of department, Jaipur or MNIT, Jaipur or any IIT or as approved by the owner and GSI. The cost
of ODC shall be borne by the contractor.
1.24 "Permanent Works" shall mean the permanent works to be executed in accordance with the
Contract.
1.25 "Project Area" shall mean the area to be indicated/approved by the Owner and shown in the
drawing included in Technical Bid or during project period
1.26 "Project Officer" shall mean the Government of Rajasthan, through Superintending Engineer,
Water Resources Rajasthan in charge of the project and shall include its successors and assigns.
1.27 "Section of Works” shall mean a part of the Works specifically identified as such in the Special
Conditions.
1.28 "Site" shall mean the land and other places on, under in or through which the permanent works
or Temporary Works of the Contract are to be executed and any other lands and places to be
provided by the Owner or acquired by the contractor for work space or for any other purpose, for
the performance of the contract.
1.29 "Specifications" shall mean the technical specifications of the civil works, Tunnel work
infrastructure work, Hydro Mechanical work and, Equipment included in the Contract.
1.30 "Sub-Contractor" shall mean any person of Firm or Company (other than the Contractor) and
the legal representatives' successors and permitted assigns of such person of Firm or Company
engaged with prior written consent of the Owner/ Engineer-in-charge.
1.31 "Temporary Works" shall mean all temporary works wherever required in or about the
execution of the Works.
1.32 "Week" shall mean seven consecutive days.
1.33 "Works" shall mean and include all the permanent and the temporary works to be
executed, all items and things to be supplied/done and services and activities to be Performed by
the Contractor pursuant to and in accordance with the contract but shall not include the
Contractor‟s construction equipment, its related spares and wearing parts.
1.34 G.C.C. shall mean General Condition of Contract.
1.35 I.T.T. shall mean Information to Tendered.
1.36 Tenderer shall mean Individual or firm participating in bidding.
1.37 Management meeting "shall mean meeting with representatives of contractor &
department
2 Interpretation of Contract Document

2.1 Special conditions shall be read in conjunction with General Conditions TechnicalSpecifications,
Bill of Quantities, project profile along with Drawings and other
Documents forming part of this contract wherever permissible or the context so requires.
2.2 Notwithstanding the sub-division of the contract into several contract documents every part of
each shall be deemed to be supplementary to and complementary of every other part and shall
be read with and into the contract so far as it may be practicable to do so or context so requires.
2.3 In the contract unless otherwise stated specifically, the singular shall include the plural and
vice versa wherever the contract so requires. Words importing person shall include incorporate
companies/ registered association/body of individuals/firm of partnership as applicable in
context thereof.
2.4 All headings and marginal notes to the clauses/Articles of the General condition or to the
Specification or to any other document forming part of the Contract are solely forthe purpose of
giving a concise indication of the general subject matter thereof and not a summary of the
contents thereof, and they shall never be deemed to be part thereof or be used in the
interpretation or construction thereof.
2.5 If during the course of execution of the Works any discrepancy or inconsistency, error or
omission in any of the provisions of the Contract is discovered which has any effect on
the execution of the Works, and need to be clarified the same shall bereferred to the Engineer-
in-charge who shall give his decision and issue instructions directing the manner in which the
Works are to be carried out. Any and all decisions and/or orders of the Engineer-in-charge shall
be deemed decision and/ or orders of the Owner. However, such decisions shall not prevent the
Contractor from seeking recourse under clause 23 hereunder. The Contractor shall carry out the
Works in accordance with such decisions and/or instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
2.6 Where any provision of the General conditions is repugnant to or at variance with any provision
of the Special Condition, then the provisions of the Special Condition shall be deemed to
override the provision of the General conditions and shall to the extent of such repugnancy or
variation, prevail.
2.7 Wherever it is mentioned in the contract that the Contractor shall perform certain work or
provide certain facilities, it is understood that the Contractor shall do so at his cost and the
contract price shall be deemed to have included the cost of such performances and provisions so
mentioned.
2.8 The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the applicable standards, specifications
contained herein or approved by owner and codes referred to. Wherethe contract stipulates.
Requirement in additions to those contained in the standards, codes and specifications, those
additional requirements shall also be satisfied.
3 Assignment and sub-letting

3.1 Except as provided hereinafter no part of the contract or any share of interest therein shall in any
matter or degree be transferred, assigned, or sub-let by the Contractor directly or indirectly to
any person, firm or company whatsoever without the prior consent in writing to the Owner for
which the contractor shall give a written request
to the owner at least 30 days in advance of the proposed date transfer, assignment or sub-letting.
Such request for transfer, assignment or sub-letting shall contain:
a) Contractor‟s certification regarding the financial soundness of the proposed transferee,
assignee or sub-contractor for the work.
b) Its scope and estimated value in relation to the Contract Price.
c) Experience of the transferee assignee or sub-contractor, in the related areas of work.
d) The manpower, equipment, materials and other resources available with the transferee,
assignee or sub-Contractor for the work.
e) Domicile of the proposed transferee, assignee or sub-Contractor and particulars of its other
existing operations or contracts if any in India. Within four weeks of the date of the receipt
of request for consent pursuant to this Article 3.1, the Owner after evaluating the capability
of the sub- Contractor shall either give consent in writing thereof or communicate its refusal
with reasons. In the event of the Owner failing to communicate its refusal within the above
said four weeks period, the Contractor shall be entitled to proceed as if the Owner had
granted consent to such request.
3.2 Notwithstanding the provisions contained in Article 3.1 above the consent of the Owner shall
not be required in respect of the following transfer, assignment, sub- contracting or sub-letting.
a) Any change in favor of the Contractor‟s bankers of any moneys due under the Contract or
the subrogation of insurers to the Contractor‟s right to receive payments due under the
Contract;
b) Sub-contracts for the supply of construction materials such as steel and cement and
consumables such as explosives, oil and petroleum products procured within India;
c) Sub – contracts with sub-contractors and supplies named in the Contract;
d) Sub-Contracts for Construction Equipment and Temporary Works;
e) Sub-contracts for clearance and /or transportation
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein the Contractor shall remain solely
responsible for and shall obtain all permits, licenses, approvals and authorization as may be
required under all applicable law and regulations and revised if any in respect of any award
or performance of any transfer, sub- contract, sub-letting or assignment pursuant thereto.
3.3 Notwithstanding any transfer, assignment or sub-letting with the approval of the Owner as
aforesaid, the Contractor shall be and shall remain solely responsible and liable to the Owner for
the quality, proper and expeditious execution and performance of the Works and for due
performance and observance of all the conditions of the Contract in all respects, as if such
transfer, assignment or sub-letting has not taken place and as if the work so transferred,
assigned or sublet has been done directly bythe Contractor.
3.4 If any such transferee, assignee or sub- contractor engaged upon the Works, executes and work,
which in the opinion of the Engineer-in-charge is not in accordance with the Contract, the
Owner may by written notice to the Contractor request him to terminate such sub-contract and
the Contractor upon the receipt of such notice shall terminate such sub-contract and dismiss such
sub-contractor and the latter shall forthwith leave the works failing which the Owner shal1
have the right to remove
such sub-contractor from the site. In such cases no liability whatsoever will beattached to the
Owner, nor will the Owner bear the cost of such sub- contract.
3.5 Any action taken by the Owner under this Article shal1 not relieve in any manner whatsoever the
Contractor of any of his liabilities' and obligations under the Contract including· time for
Completion or give rise to any right to compensation/extension of time or otherwise.
4. LANGUAGE
4.1 The Language of the Contract be English.
4.2 Further documents and correspondence in respect of the work may be in either in Hindi &
English.
5. GOVERNING LAW JURISDICTION

The Contract shall be construed and interpreted in accordance with and governed by the Laws
of India. Any action taken or proceeding initiated of any of the terms of this Agreement
shall be only in the Court of Competent Jurisdiction at uadipur.
6. CONTRACTOR'S EMPLOYEES
6.1 The Contractor shall provide an employee on the site in connection with the execution of the
works and performance of its obligations under the Contract:
a) Only such technical personnel as are skilled and experienced in their respective calling and
such sub-agents, foremen and leading hands as are competent to do or give proper supervision to
the work they are required to perform or supervise, and
b) Such skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour as is necessary for the .proper and timely
execution of the Works.
c) The Engineer- in- charge shall be at liberty to object to and require the Contractor to remove
forthwith from the Works any person employed by the Contractor of its sub- contractors in or
about the execution of the Works who in the reasonable opinion of the Engineer- in- charge
misconducts himself, or is incompetent of negligent in the proper performance of his duties or
whose employment is otherwise considered by the Engineer-in-charge to be undesirable then
such person shall be removed by the contractor. Any person so removed from the, Works shall
be replaced as soon aspossible by a competent substitute at the cost of the Contractor.
7. CARE OF WORKS
7.1 The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the care of the Works or any Section or part of
the Works from the Date of Order to Commence as defined in clause 2 of GCC until the Date of
Completion as defined in clause 6 of GCC, and in the event that any damage of loss shall occur to
any work during such period as aforesaid from any cause whatsoever save and except the loss or
damage caused by any of the Excepted Risks as defined below, the same shall be made good and at
the cost of the Contractor and to the satisfaction of the Owner. The Contractor shall also be liable for
sub-contractors or any of their Work occasioned by it or by any of its sub-contractors or any their
personnel or dueto reasons attributable to them in the course of any operations carried out by it or by
its sub-contractors for the purpose of completing any outstanding work or complying with its
obligations under Article 37E (Defects Liability Period) of GCC. Excepted Risks for the above
purpose shall mean the following:
a) War, invasion, act of foreign 'enemy, hostilities or war like operations (Whether war be
declared or not), civil war, rebellion, revolution, insurrection, mutiny, civil commotion, military
or usurped power, martial law, conspiracy, confiscation, commandeering by a group of malicious
persons or persons acting on behalf of or in connection with any political organization,
requisition or destruction or damage by order of any government de-dure or de-facto or by any
public, municipal or local authority;
b) Ionizing, radiations or contamination by radioactivity from any nuclear' fuel or from any
nuclear wastage, from the combustion of nuclear fuel, except when arising from radioactive
sources used in the normal course of the carrying out of the Contract by the Contactor;
c) Earth quake (fire and shock) for the portion exceeding the ceilings provided in the insurance
policy as per Article 8 thereof.
7.2 In the event of insurance cover becoming available for any of the Except Risks during the subsistence
of the contract, the Contractor shall within 4 working days of date of receipt of request in writing
of the Owner, arrange such insurance cover at the cost of the Owner. The risks in respect of which
the insurance cover so becomes available shall be deemed to have been deleted from the definition of
Excepted Risks set out herein above during the period of availability of such insurance cover from
the fifth working day after request by the Owner to the Contractor as stated above, The cost of
such additional insurance shallbe reimbursed to the Contractor by the Owner. In case the Contractor
fails to arrange the said additional insurance cover in time, as requested by the Owner, the
Contractor shallbe liable for loss or damage arising from such events or causes.
7.3 Till such time the whole or part of the Works are handed over to the Owner in later than72 hours
of the happening of the occurrence of any of the Excepted Risks resulting in damage or loss to any
of the Works as a consequence thereof notify in writing the Owner about the same and, within 15
days of the happening of the occurrence, the Contractor shall give a second notice and such notice
shall contain particulars of the events, constituting Excepted Risks, evidence in support thereof and
the extent of damage or loss to the Works as a consequence thereof. In the event of the
Contractor failing to give notice in accordance with the provisions of Article 7.2 the Contractor
shall bear the lossor damage if any arising out of any alleged Excepted Risks.
7.4 In the event of any loss or damage to the Works from the Date of Order to Commenceuntil the
Date of Completion, arising from any of the Excepted Risks, the same shall be made good by the
Contractor at the cost of the Owner and in such cases the costs payable by the Owner to the
Contractor shall be at the same applicable rate as set out in the Contract.
7.5 In the event of any loss or damage to the Works arising as a consequence of any of such Excepted
Risks during Defects Liability period, the same shall if required by the Owner be made good by
the Contractor at the cost of the Owner. The costs payable by the Owner pursuant to this Article 7.4
shall be at the rates mutually agreed.
7.6 Notwithstanding the provisions of Article 7.3 or Article 7.4 hereof but subject to Article
7.1 thereof, wherever any Excepted Risk is insured and/or is insurable in accordance with Article 7.1
above the Owner shall not be required to pay any costs for making good the loss or damage to
the Works arising as a Consequence of the Excepted Risks to the extent payments are receivable
from the Insurance Company for such losses or damages and 'in
such an event, the Owner shall pay the difference of cost for making good the loss or damage if any
to the Works over and above as the payment for Loss/ damages is receivable by the Contractor
from Insurances for such losses or damages.
8. Section: Contract Data
SN Subject Data
1 Bill of Quantity Bill of quantity means the details of quantities quoted by bidder in
price bid and schedule 1 to 5.
The component wise activities are to be assessed and prices are to
be filled by bidder in these schedules(1 to 5)
The bidder shall submit item wise details of quantities asp per
requirement of work to the owner for approval.
2 Schedules i. Schedules means details given in price bid under schedule
1 to 5. These schedules contain indicative breakup of all
project components.
ii. Owner has given breakup of project in the schedules 1 to 5
in the financial bid. Contractor needs to develop the further
breakup for calculating the cost of each activity to arrive at
the total cost of project.
iii. Total cost of each schedule (schedule 1 to 5) of the project
will be freezed at the time of acceptance of financial
proposal. Contractor shall submit detailed design, drawing,
estimated quantities and rates of activities of each
component of project for all schedules after acceptance of
bid. In case, if there is any variation in quantity due to
inclusion of new activity as per design requirement/
deletion of original activity during the design stage, no
variation in the total cost of the schedule except as
mentioned in clause for cost/price adjustment shall be
allowed.
iv. After finalization of the design and drawings of the project
/ component, contractor will submit the revised activity
schedule with quantity estimation and rates keeping the
total cost of respective schedule same as accepted by the
owner at the of acceptance of financial proposal of the
successful bidder. This revised activity schedule is to be
approved by the owner. On the basis of approved revised
activity schedule, revised payment schedule will be framed
and finalized by the owner .
3 Specifications In addition to the provision given in GCC, relevant international
codes, Industrial specifications shall be referred. Engineer in
Charge shall decide the priority of adoption of specifications and
changes will be done accordingly without additional cost .
4 Procuring Entity‟s Administrative Department

designation and Water Resources Department Rajasthan, Jaipur
address are:
5 The work or work Where ever “work / project / scheme” is mentioned in document, it
is: stands for;
“Planning,Design and Construction of Zawar Anicut with
feeder channel and tunnel for diversion of water to Daya
Dam Tehsil - Sarada, Udaipur District in the State of
Rajasthan India on Engineering, Procurement and
Construction (E.P.C) single Responsibility turn-key basis
,including 8 years O&M.
6 The sections of the where ever sections of work / component of works / sub
works are ( if component mentioned in the document , shall mean the various
any): components as per scope of work - Section- VB,
7 The site is: Zawar anicut near Tehsil Sarada District Udaipur traversing
through forest area and the rest of alignment passes along forest
boundaries, revenue land and private land . The work site is
located in enclosed Index Map
8 The contractor and To be named by the contractor

his address are:
9 Engineer-in- Executive Engineer,
charge‟s Water Resources Division Salumber
Designation and
address and
communication Nodal officer will be Executive Engineer, Water Resources Division
details are” Salumber
10 The contractor‟s To be named by the contractor

Representative‟s
name and
communication
details are:
11 The commence/ As per work order
start date is:
12 Defect liability Five years after date of completion of design build components as
period (DLP)/ per scope of work
Defect notification
period (DNP) is
13 The language of the The Language of the Contract be English. Further documents and
Contract is: Correspondence in respect of the work may be in either in Hindi
&English.
14 Possession Contactor would have to finalize the project plan in consultation
of site with Engineer in Charge. The contractor would submit this detailed
plan with complete design and details of land either Government/
Forest/ Personal to be acquired permanently / temporarily for
approval.
After getting approval of plan, contractor would prepare the
documents required for permanent acquisition of the land and
would assist to Engineer in charge and LAO for speedy acquisition
of land. After issuance of award, compensation of land would be
paid by the Employer.
The proposal for acquisition of temporary land/right of way / crop
compensation will be made by the contractor.
15 Requirement of As per the scope of work in Sec- V B and technical Specifications

designing by the
contractor
16 Performance Performance security shall be @10% in case of procurement of
Security works.
Provided that, during the period commencing from the date of
commencement of the Rajasthan Transparency in Public
procurement (second amendment) rules, 2020 to 31.03.2023, in
case of procurement of works, the successful bidders at the time of
signing of the contract agreement, may submit option for
deduction of performance security from his each running and final
bill at the rate of 10% of the amount of the bill.
(FD notification F.2(1)/G&T(SPFC)/2017 notification dated
18.12.2020 &amended vide dated 12.01.2022)
 Beyond 31.03.2023, FD notifications, if issued in this regard,
shall prevail.
17 Refund of As mentioned in GCC -37.
Performance
Security
18 Additional In addition to Performance security, an additional performance
performance security shall also be taken from the successful bidder in case of
security the unbalanced bid. The additional performance security shall be
equal to fifty percent of unbalanced bid amount. {Positive
difference of eighty five percent of Estimated bid value (Rs 121.51
Cr.) minus Bid amount quoted by the bidder.}
The additional performance security shall be deposited through e-
Grass, Demand draft, Banker‟s cheque, Government securities or
Bank Guarantee and shall be refunded after successful completion
of the entire work.
(FD notification F.2(1)/G&T(SPFC)/2017 notification dated
22.10.2021)
19 Commencement of A mentioned in work order.
the works
20 Third Party Quality Up to the satisfaction of Employer, quality / efficiencies are to be
Inspections as per tested in presence of authorized officers in the designated
ISO 17020 by a laboratories / IIT/ CPAT / RITES/ , any laboratory etc as decided by
Departmental the employer at the expenses of contractor including cost of sample
Authority or QCI collection, transportation etc.
approved/ All the expenses of travel, lodging & boarding of experts /
accredited bodies authorized officers for quality inspection are to be borne by the
contractor.
The employer may choose to get the above test done at
manufacturing/fabrication/ production unit/premises.
21 Issue of Procuring Preliminary design, drawings, investigations etc, available with the
Entity‟s equipments department shall be provided to prospective bidders after
and materials, if submission of written request to procurement entity.
any
22 The normal As per prevailing labor, industrial/Forest & Environment laws,
working hours at rules and directions.
the Site and Days
of rest shall be:
23 Compensation (1) For design build part Prorate progress is to be maintained by
/Damages for delay the contractor otherwise penalty shall be imposed as per SCC
clause 9.19 (c).
(2) For operation and maintenance period Penalty shall be imposed
as indicated Technical Specification, sub section- O& M
24 Price Variation (1) Bidder shall be required to quote lump sum Design Build Cost
for implementing the project for all project components as
detailed in Employer‟s Requirements and Scope of Work in
Section V B.
(2) Annual O&M Cost: The Bidder shall quote annual cost for
O&M (other than Power Cost) of the Project components. No
price variation shall be paid for O&M part of the contract.
25 Insurance for
works and
contractor‟s
equipments
Amount of liability INR 5.00 crore or actual damage assessed for the occurrence up
insurance to Contract Completion Date
Period for which Comprehensive insurance covering all kind of damages until issue
insurance required of works completed Certificate for Design-Build.
26 Insurance injury to
persons and
damage to
property.
Amount of INR 5.00 crore (Rs five crore) or actual damage assessed for the
insurance required occurrence up to Contract Completion Date
for injury to
persons and
damage to property
27 Insurance for All persons working at site should be insured.
contractor‟s Labour law should be compiled strictly.
personals
Amount of liability INR 2.00 crore or actual damage assessed for the occurrence up
insurance to Contract Completion Date
Period for which Comprehensive insurance covering all kind of damages until issue
insurance required of Final Payment Certificate for Design-Build and O&M period.
Amount of fire as per cost of Design Build in Contract Price
extended cover
insurance required
9. SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

9.1 Power Consumption Charges:
A. Connection for all office buildings campus (Offices) constructed under the scope of this
work, shall be applied in the name of department of concerned Assistant Engineer. The
filing & connection charges as per prevailing rates of DISCOM shall be paid by the
contractor.
B. Power consumption charges upto completion of O&M period, for all office buildings under
scope of work as per AVVNL bills shall be paid by the contractor.
9.2 Cost Adjustments:

The bidder shall quote the amount of different components in the price bid schedules 1 to 5. The
length of tunnel, number of shaft, inlet and outlet structures of tunnel, length of feeder channel
twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover and their CD works and length of overflow and Non
overflow of Zawar anicut ,plinth area of residential and non-residential buildings etc are
tentative.
These all the features are to be finalized after detailed survey, investigation and design of the
scheme by the bidder.
Cost quoted by the contractor against the following components would be adjusted and paid
as under:-
A. Variation in length of Tunnel portion, t e m p o r a r y a n d permanent steel

structure ISMB support and rock bolts etc .
As per present preliminary estimation, in various reaches as under:
 Length of tunnel 4000 m


Permanent steel structure ISMB support
Tunnel 2000 m. (50 % of tunnel
length)
 Rock bolt
Tunnel 4000 m. (100 % of tunnel
length)
Formula for Excess/saving (+/-) = (+/-){Total cost of schedule of tunnel/4000 m} x

variation in length of tunnel
B. Variation in length of twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover etc .
As per present preliminary estimation, in various reaches as under:
 Length of cut and cover 3060 m

Formula for Excess/saving (+/-) = (+/-){Total cost of schedule of cut and cover /3060 m} x
variation in length of cut and cover.
9.3 Deployment of personals during operation period: Contractor shall provide details of
each personal/expert along with his monthly salary and wages in price bid schedule
4. In case of non-deployment of personal as per deployment schedule, employer may
impose penalty at the double rate of his salary.
9.4 List of equipment’s: Employer may ask to deploy specific equipment which is required
for execution of project as per construction schedule and efficient operation and
maintenance of system & these equipment‟s are to be arranged /provided by the Bidder.
9.5 Liquidated Damages during O&M period: Shall be leviable as described in the
Technical Specifications” in section “operation and maintenance”.
9.6 List of vendors for HEM equipment’s: Procurement entity shall decide to select
the specification of equipment and shall select suitable vendor. Until unless not meeting
the design requirement of aforesaid work, with prior approval from owner, bidder may
select vendor among the latest list of vendors approved by the PHED or AVVNL or
approved vendor list of State Government Department. However, any equipment
required but not covered in the vendor list, bidder shall submit with full
credentials of vendor for prior approval from procurement entity.
9.7 Protection of environment : The contractor shall comply with all applicable national,
State and local environment laws and regulations. The Contractor shall:(a) establish all
operational systems for managing environmental impacts;(b ) carry out all of the
monitoring and mitigation measures as per law and regulatory statutes. Requirement(c )
Contractor shall submit monthly reports on the implementation and monitoring of such
measures to the Employer. (d) Contractor shall comply relevant laws.
9.8 Progress report : Contractor will provide:

1. During design build period, contractor will submit fortnightly progress report
prepared on project management software mentioning target activities and
achievement.
2. For monitoring of project, a monthly review meeting shall be conducted in office
of procurement entity. Team leader of contract shall attend all the meetings.
During operation and maintenance period, all the reports shall be submitted ondaily
basis.
9.9 System Handing over

Contractor will hand over the system to Engineer in charge or his representative in good
condition. At the time of handing over:
1. He will provide additional spare parts for 6 months after completion of operation and
maintenance.i.e. 8 yrs.
2. Perform required test for checking the system efficiency and functionality.
3. Provide list of replaceable spares, address of service centre of OEM and spare parts
dealer.
4. Operation manual and service manual.
5. All tools & tackles, vehicles, accessories, furniture‟s, furnishings, hardware, software etc
procured for this project are to be handed over to the Engineer in Charge.
6. All bills, guarantee cards and licenses etc
9.10 Contract management : Contractor will use the suitable computer operated software
MS Project/Prima viera to manage the contract.
9.11 Software’s : As far as possible, Contractor will use open source software‟s or if
commercial software‟s are used they should be well accepted and compatible with
prevailing software‟s. Contractor shall purchase software license in the name of
procuring entity.
9.12 Operation and maintenance manual: Shall prepare and submit Operation and
maintenance manuals as per direction of Engineer in Charge.
9.13 Mandatory spares: Contractor shall maintain three months stock of mandatory spares
at the site as suggested by original equipment manufacturer (OEM)
9.14 Prior Site Visit by Contractor

The contractor shall be deemed to have visited the project area, make himself
wellacquainted with the terrain and requirement of the project planning, design,
assess the type of structures with quantity and frame his proposal accordingly. The
contractor carefully examined the Site and surrounding, to have satisfied himself to
the nature and conditions of the railways, roads, bridges and culverts, means of
transport and communications, whether by land, water or air, and 'as to possible
interruption theirs,examined and satisfied himself as to the site for obtaining sand,
stone to and their-accessand progress for the Site, to have made inquiries for other
construction materials, the sites for disposal of surplus materials, the available
accommodation as and whenever required. Depots and such other building as may be
necessary for executing and completing the Works, to have made local and
independent inquiries as to the sub-soil water and variation thereof river flow
conditions, to have made expert and independent inquiries as to thegeology of the
area and variation thereof Storms, prevailing winds, climatic conditions and all
other similar facts/parameters affecting the works including law & order.
Any neglect or omission or failure on the part of the contractor in obtaining necessary and
reliable information upon the foregoing or any other matter affecting the Contract shall not
relieve him from any risks or liabilities or the entire responsibility for the completion of the
Works in accordance with the Contract.
9.15 Mobilization Advance
Mobilization advance shall be payable on request of contractor to make mobilization advance,payment

to the contractor (@9% per annum interest compounded annually basis ) to assist in defraying the initial
expenses that necessarily being incurred by the contractor for mobilization.The total of such advance
payment and number and timing of installments is stated here under.
Note:
1. The Bidder shall demonstrate that the advance payment had been used for the purpose
specified above by supplying copies of invoices or other documents to the Engineer in
Charge.
2. If scheduled completion period is extended by any reason, the Bidder has to extend the
B.G. up to extended period plus 3 months.
3. An simple interest rate @ 9% annual shall be charged on the advance amount from the
Bidder.
4. Recovery of advances: Advance plus interest shall be recovered in installments at least
@ 20% of gross bill value starting from 1st R.A. Bill of work.
5. It is to be noted by Bidder that there shall be no relation between issue of advance and
completion period.
9.16 CHANGE OF SCOPE

a) The Owner may, not withstanding anything to the contrary contained in this
Agreement, require the provision of additional works and services which are not
included in the Scope of the Project as contemplated by this Agreement (the
"Change of Scope"). Any such Change of Scope shall be made and the costs thereof
shall be paid to bidder
b) If the bidder determines at any time that a Change of Scope is necessary for providing
safer and improved services to the Users, it shall by notice in writing require the
owner to consider such Change of Scope. The owner shall, within 60 (sixty days)
days of receipt of such notice, either accept such Change of Scope with modifications,
if any, and initiate proceedings or inform the bidder in writing of its reasons for not
accepting such Change of Scope, which decision of the owner shall be final and binding.
However, such decisions shall not prevent the Contractor from seeking recourse under
clause 23 hereunder. The Contractor shall carry out the Works in accordance with such
decisions and/or instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
c) Procedure for Change of Scope: In the event of the owner determining that a Change of
Scope is necessary, it shall issue to the bidder a notice specifying in reasonable
detail the works and services contemplated there under (the "Change of Scope Notice").
Upon receipt of a Change of Scope Notice, the bidder shall, with due diligence,
provide to the owner such information as is necessary, together with preliminary
Documentation in support of:
i. the impact, if any, which the Change of Scope is likely to have on the Project
Completion Schedule if the works or services are required to be carried out
during the Construction Period; and
d) the options for implementing the proposed Change of Scope and the effect, if
any, each such option would have on the costs and time thereof, including a detailed
breakdown by work classifications specifying the material and labour costs
calculated in accordance with the schedule of rates applicable to the works assigned
by the owner to its contractors, along with the proposed premium/ discount on such
rates; provided that the cost incurred by the bidder in providing such information
shall be reimbursed by the owner to the extent such cost is computed on the basis
of WRD and PWB BSR 2022 udaipur district + tender premium..Upon receipt of
information set forth above, if the Owner decides to proceed with the Change
of Scope, it shall convey its preferred option to the bidder. Upon reaching an
agreement, the owner shall issue an order (the "Change of Scope Order") requiring
the bidder to proceed with the performance thereof.
e) Payment for Change of Scope
The Bidder shall, after commencement of work, present to the Owner bills for
payment in respect of the works in progress or completed works based upon on rates
prescribed on the basis of WRD and PWD BSR 2022 udaipur district + tender
premium.
9.17 Project Milestones/Span/compensation for Delay

Being EPC contract, the project involves Survey, investigation, planning and designing of all
the project components including obtaining necessary statutory clearances, land acquisition.In
view of nature of work, time span of full stipulated period for completion of work and
compensation payable for delay attributable to contractor shall be as under:
A Time Span of 1/4th 1/2th 3/4th Full

full stipulated
period
B Work to be 1/8th 3/8th 3/4th Full
completed in
(Rs .................. ) (Rs ............... ) (Rs ................. ) (Rs ............... )
terms of money
C Compensation payable Delay up to one fourth period of the prescribed time span – 2.5% of the
by the contractor for work remained unexecuted
delay attributable to Delay exceeding one fourth period but not exceeding half of the prescribed
contractor at the stage time span – 5% of the work remained unexecuted.
of : Delay exceeding half of the prescribed but not exceeding three fourth of the
time span – 7.5% of the work remained unexecuted
Delay exceeding three fourth of the prescribed of the time span – 10% of
the work remained unexecuted
Note: - In case delayed period over a particular span is split up and is jointly attributable to Government
and contractor, the competent authority may reduce the compensation in proportion of delay attributable to
Government over entire delayed period over that span after clubbing up the split delays attributable to
Government and this reduced compensation would be applicable over the entire delayed period without
paying any escalation.
Following illustrations is given :-

(1) First time span is 6 months, delay is of 30 days which is split over as under :- 5 days (attributable
to Government) +5 days (attributable of contractor) + 5 days (attributable to Government) +5
days (attributable to contractor) + 5 days (attributable to Government) + 5 days (attributable to
contractor)
Section VI C: Contract Forms
Contents
1. Letter of Acceptance. . . . ... . .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. .. .. . .. .. . .. . ..................................
2. Contract Agreement...................................... .................................
3. Performance Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..................................
4. Performance Security Declaration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Advance Payment Security …………………………………………

1. Letter of Acceptance
Letter of Acceptance
[on letterhead paper of the Procuring Entity]
No. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dated...............
To: .......................... [Name and address of the Contractor]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Subject: [Notification of Award for the Works]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
This is to notify you that your Bid dated . . . . [date] . . . . for execution of the [name of
the contract and identification number, as given in the Contract Data] for the Accepted
Contract Amount of the equivalent of [.amount in numbers and words and name of
currency] , as corrected and modified in negotiations and in accordance with the
Instructions to Bidders has been accepted by …. [Designation of the Procuring Entity]. The
date of commencement and completion of the Works shall be:
……………………………………………………………………………………
You are requested to furnish the Performance Security/ Performance Security Declaration within
............................... Days in the form given in the Contract Forms for the same for an amount
equivalent to Rupees …………… within ...................... days of notification of the award valid up to
60 days after the date of expiry of Defects Liability Period and maintenance period, if applicable, and
sign the Contract, failing which action as stated in sub-section 2 of section 42 of the Rajasthan
Transparency in Public Procurement Act, 2012 and Instructions to Bidders shall be taken.
Authorized Signature: ....................................................................................... .................

Name and Title of Signatory: ......................................................................................... .......
Designation:
2. Contract Agreement
Contract Agreement
THIS AGREEMENT made the .............. day of ................................... , ............................. , between
the Governor of Rajasthan/ ................ ……………….. [name of the Procuring Entity if
other than a department of the State Government] hereinafter “the Procuring Entity”) which
expression shall, where the context so admits, be deemed to include his successors in office
and assigns, of the one part, and ........ [name of the Contractor] (hereinafter “the
Contractor”), which expression shall, where the context so admits, be deemed to include his
heirs, successors, executors and administrators, of the other part:
WHEREAS the Procuring Entity desires that the Works known as ........................... [name of
the Contract] .................... should be executed by the Contractor, and has accepted a Bid by the
Contractor for the execution and completion of these Works and the remedying of any defects therein,
and for which the Contractor has submitted
Performance Security for Rupees in the form of
The Procuring Entity and the Contractor agree as follows:

1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively
assigned to them in the Contract documents referred to.
2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this
Agreement. This Agreement shall prevail over all other Contract documents.
a) the Letter of Acceptance;

b) the Bid of the Contractor as accepted alongwith the correspondence done on it, ifany;
c) the Special Conditions of Contract/ Contract Data;
d) the General Conditions of Contract;
e) the Specifications;
f) the Drawings;
g) the Instructions to Bidders;
h) Notice Inviting Bids.
i)
3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Procuring Entity to the Contractor as
indicated in this Agreement, the Contractor hereby covenants with the Procuring Entity to execute
the Works and to remedy defects therein (and, if applicable, maintain the Works for a period of )
in conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.
4. The Procuring Entity hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the
execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of defects
Therein (and, if applicable, maintain the Works for a period of ----------------------------------- ), the
Contract Price or such other sum as may become payable under the provisions of the Contract at
the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.
IN WITNESS whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed in accordance with
the laws of the Central and the State Government the day, month and year first mentioned herein
before.
Signed by Signed by
Name, Designation, Date Name, Designation, Date
for and on behalf of the Governor/ for and on behalf the Contractor
Procuring Entity
in the presence of in the presence of
Witness 1 Witness 1
Witness 2 Witness 2
Signature, Date, Name, Address Signature, Date, Name, Address
3. Performance Security
Performance Security
[Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office]
Beneficiary: ....................... [Name and Address of Procuring Entity] ...............................
Date: ......................................... .................................. .................................. .....................
Performance Guarantee No.: .............................................. .................................. ............
We have been informed that. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [name of the Contractor]

........................
(Hereinafter called "the Contractor") has entered into Contract No .....................................
[Reference number of the Contract] ........................ dated ...................... with you, for the
Execution of................... [Name of contract and brief description of Works] . . . .
(Hereinafter called "the Contract"). Furthermore, we understand that, according to theconditions of
the Contract, a performance security is required.
At the request of the Contractor, we ...................... [name of the Bank] ................. hereby
irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an
amount of Rupees* ................... [amount in figures] ................. (.Rupees………………
. . . . [amount in words] ........................ ) such sum being payable upon receipt by us of your
first demand in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its
obligation(s) under the Contract, without your needing to prove or to show grounds for your demand or
the sum specified therein.
The Guarantor agrees to extend this guarantee for a specified period in response to the Procuring
Entity‟s written request for such extension for that specified period, provided that such request is
presented to the Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.
This guarantee shall expire, no later than the ......................... Day of . . . . , .................................. **,
and any demand for payment under it must be received by us at this office on or before that date.
Seal of Bank and Authorised Signature(s)
The Guarantor shall insert an amount representing the percentage of the Contract Price
specified in the Contract
Insert the date sixty days after the expected completion date, including defect liability
period and maintenance period, if any.
Notes: 1. All italicized text is for guidance on how to prepare this advance payment
guarantee and shall be deleted from the final document.
2. The Procuring Entity should note that in the event of an extension of the time for
completion of the Contract, the Procuring Entity would need to request an extension of
this guarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be in writing and must be made
prior to the expiration date established in the guarantee.
4. Performance Security Declaration
Form of Performance Security Declaration
Date: [insert date (as day, month and year)]
Contract Name and No.: [insert name and number of Contract]
To: [insert Designation and complete
Address of Procuring Entity]

We, the undersigned, declare that:
We understand that, according to your conditions, the Contract must be supported by a Performance
Security Declaration as a guarantee to ensure fulfillment of our all performance obligations under the
Contract for ----------------------------------------------- [insert name of subject matter of procurement.
We accept that we will automatically be suspended from being eligible for bidding in any
contract with you for the period of time of [Procuring Entity to indicate here the period
of time for which the Procuring Entity will declare a Bidder ineligible to be awarded a
Contract if the performance Security Declaration is to be executed] starting on the
date that we receive a notification from you, the ………. [Designation of the
Procuring Entity] that our Performance Security Declaration is executed, if we are in breach
of any of our performance obligation under the conditions of the Contract,
We understand this Performance Security Declaration shall expire after 60 days of completion of our
all obligations under the Contract including Defect Liability, warranty/ Guarantee, operation,
maintenance, etc. in accordance with the conditions of the Contract.
Signed:
[insert signature of person whose name and capacity are shown]
In the capacity of:
[insert legal capacity of person signing the Performance Security Declaration]
Name:
[insert complete name of person signing the Declaration]
Duly authorized to sign the Contract for and on behalf of:
[insert complete name and address of the Bidder]
Dated on day of _, _ [insert date of signing]
Corporate Seal
5. Advance Payment Security
Advance Payment Security
Bank’s Name, and Address of Issuing Branch or Office
Beneficiary: ....................... [Name and Address of Procuring Entity] ...............................
Date: ................................... .................................. .................................. ..........................
Advance Payment Guarantee No.: ......................................... .................................. .........
We have been informed that ................. [name of the Contractor] ..................... (hereinafter
called “the Contractor”) has entered into Contract No ........................ [reference number of
the Contract] ............. dated .................. with you, for the execution of ..................[name of
contract and brief description of Works] ....................... (hereinafter called “the Contract”).
Furthermore, we understand that, according to the Conditions of the Contract, an advance
payment in the sum [name of the currency and amount in figures] ( [amount in
words] ) is to be made against an advance payment guarantee.
At the request of the Contractor, we ...................... [name of the Bank] .................... ……

hereby irrevocably undertake to pay you any sum or sums not exceeding in total an amount of
................................................................................. [name of the currency and amount in figures]
................................................................... ( ..................................................
[amount in words] ..................................................... ) upon receipt by us of your first demand
in writing accompanied by a written statement stating that the Contractor is in breach of its obligation
under the Contract because the Contractor used the advance payment for purposes other than the costs of
mobilization in respect of the Works.
It is a condition for any claim and payment under this guarantee to be made that the advance
payment referred to above must have been received by the Contractor on its account number
[Contractor’s account number] at …….. [name and address of the Bank]
The maximum amount of this guarantee shall be progressively reduced by the amount of the advance
payment repaid by the Contractor as indicated in copies of interim payment certificates which shall be
presented to us. This guarantee shall expire, at the latest, upon our receipt of a copy of the interim
payment certificate indicating that entire amount of the advance payment has been repaid or on ………
[the Intended Completion Date of the Works] , whichever is earlier. Consequently, any
demand for payment under this
guarantee must be received by us at this office on or before that date.
The Guarantor agrees to extend this guarantee for a specified period in response to the Procuring Entity‟s
written request for such extension for that specified period, provided that such request is presented to the
Guarantor before the expiry of the guarantee.
Seal of Bank and Authorised Signature(s)
Notes: 1. All italicized text is for guidance on how to prepare this advance payment
guarantee and shall be deleted from the final document.
2. The Procuring Entity should note that in the event of an extension of the time
for completion of the Contract, the Procuring Entity would need to request an
extension of this guarantee from the Guarantor. Such request must be in
writing and must be made prior to the expiration date established in the
guarantee.
Section – VII: Price Bid
Price Bid
The contractor has to submit price bid in the schedule 1 to 5 enclosed under Bid proposal. The
component wise activities are to be assessed by the bidder and prices are to be filled by bidder in these
schedules (1 to 5)
1. Schedules mean details given in price bid under schedule 1 to 5. These schedules contain
indicative breakup of all project components.
2. The breakup of project provided in the schedules 1 to 5 in the financial bid is indicative only.
Bidder may modify, alter or add /delete sub components of any activity listed in Design, built
& O&M component given in schedule 1 to 5.
3. The total cost of schedule 1 “Survey, investigation, design and planning” is ordinarily 1% of the
total cost of the project/work whereas the total cost of schedule 5“Operation and maintenance
of project for 10 years” should not be less than 1% of the total cost of the project.
4. The items listed above are only indicative. The bidder may add/modify items to give a complete
list of works envisaged under scope of work and further break-up of items.
5. No price escalation shall be entertained for O&M period.
6. Contractor need to develop the further breakup for calculating the cost of each activity to arrive
at the total cost of project.
7. Total cost of each schedule (schedule 1 to 5) of the project i.e. Cost of Design, build and
operate will be freeze at the time of acceptance of financial proposal. Contractor shall submit
detailed design, drawing, estimated quantities and rates of activities of each component of
project for all schedules after acceptance of bid. In case, if there is any variation in quantity due
to inclusion of new activity as per design requirement/ deletion of original activity during the
design stage, no variation in the total cost of the schedule shall be allowed.
8. After finalization of the design and drawings of the project / component, contractor will
submit the revised activity schedule with item wise quantity estimation and rates keeping the
total cost of respective schedule same as accepted by the employer at the of acceptance of
financial proposal of the successful bidder. The contractor will submit revised bill of
quantities and will be approved by the owner. On the basis of approved revised activity schedule,
revised payment schedule will be framed and finalized by the owner in mutual discussion with
the contractor.
Section – VIII: Payment Stages
Payment Stages
Part A: Design Part
SN Activity Stage I Stage II Stage III

1 Activities related to 50% on submission after 50% after its
survey, planning, of making compliance of the approval from
both tunnels and its observations of concern competent
component. Executive Engineer/ SE of authority
department
2 Activities related to 50% on submission after 25 % after its 25% after its
Design & Drawings of making compliance of the vetting from CE approval from
civil structures observations of concern ID&R Jaipur or competent
Executive Engineer/ SE of competent authority
department authority
3 Activities related to 25% on submission after 50% after its 25% after
design & drawings making compliance of the vetting from commissioning
/planning for HEM observations of concern ODC & of system
works etc. Executive Engineer/ SE of thereafter
department approval from
competent
authority
4 Activities related to 50% on submission after 50% after its
other studies, making compliance of the approval from
documentations, observations of concern competent
training & other Executive Engineer/ SE of authority
manuals, model studies, department
etc
Note: For any other activity not covered under above, contractor will submit payment schedule after
ascertaining requirement of work in consultation with department &, submit to owner for approval.
Part B: BUILT Part
a .Civil Works for tunnel from Zawar Anicut ,tunnel,feeder channel and related
structures like VRBs,aqueducts and twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,watch and
ward quarters and Construction and repair of other office buildings and construction of
roads.
As per satisfactory completion of the items envisaged in approved BOQ and recordedin MB
by the department.
b. Civil Works for Infrastructural works of non residential buildings:
Work % payment Remarks
component Stage I Stage II Stage III
Cost of civil 20 50 30 Stage I Construction upto Plinth Level
Work. Stage II Construction upto Roof Level
Stage III Completion of Finishing of all respect
Cost of water 80 10 10 Stage I Installation and laying
supply & Stage II Testing & Commissioning
sanitary Work Stage III Completion of Finishing of all respect
Cost of 80 10 10 Stage I Installation and laying
electrical Work Stage II Testing & Commissioning
Stage III Completion of Finishing of all respect
Cost of 100 Fixing and Procurement
Furnishing
Work
c. Other Miscellaneous works:

1 Providing, laying & commissioning of HT line 1. Stage I: Supply of components with
from GSS to each project site. testing of each unit – 50%
2. Stage II: Installation – 25%
3. Stage III : Commissioning- 25%
2 Employers Office Strengthening 100% after completion of work to the
satisfaction of EIC
d. HEM Works
SN Activity Stage I Stage II Stage III

1 Providing, installation, 50% after Supply of 25 % after 25% after
testing and components with testing Installation commissioning
commissioning of of each unit
Mechanical Equipment
2 Installation of Electrical
50% after Supply of 25 % after 25% after
Equipment components with testing Installation commissioning
of each unit
3 Installation of 50% after Supply of 25 % after 25% after
Instrumentation and components with testing Installation commissioning
Control Equipment of each unit
e. Price schedule for operation and maintenance
Item Cumulative Payment release schedule in % of rate
quoted by bidder
25 % after 50 % after 75 % after end 100 % after
Annual Cost of O&M end of end of of end of
I quarter II quarter III quarter IV quarter
Note: For any other activity not covered under above, contractor will submit payment schedule after
ascertaining requirement of work in consultation with department & submit to owner for approval.
Section IX: Indicative Activity Schedule of Project
SECTION- VIII
SN Activity Cumulative Period
from date of start
of work
1 Submission of Construction program 15 Days

2 Topographic survey of the tunnel alighnement and land 1.5 Month
requirements.
3 Preparing documents for permanent land acquisition & submission 3.0 month
of case for permanent land acquisition for, shafts, cut and cover
portion of tunnel, aqueduct, roads & infrastructure works
envisaged under work and diversion of forest land, if any.
Submission and finalization of design of important civil works

such as tunnels, intake and outlet structures, aqueduct, roads &
infrastructure works and Submission of concrete mix design.
4 Construction of Muttams along tunnels & transferring of bench 5 Month

marks upto each proposed shaft and aqueduct location.
Start construction of tunnels, intake and outlet structures, aqueduct,
roads & infrastructure works etc
5 Finalization of design of HEM works for intake and outlet 6 Month

structures equipment‟s.
6 Start construction of non-residential buildings 6 Month
Start construction of approach roads
7 Complete permanent land acquisition work 6 months
8 Complete construction of non-residential buildings, approach 12 months
roads.
9 Complete 50 % of earthwork/excavation of both tunnels, bed linning 22 months

of tunnels,
10 Start HEM works for intake and outlet structures equipment‟s., 24 months
11 Complete 75 % of earthwork/excavation of both tunnels, bed linning 28 months

of tunnels,
12 Completion of all type of civil works such as Zawar Anicut 36 months
,tunnel,feeder channel and related structures like VRBs,aqueducts
and twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover,watch and ward
quarters and Construction and repair of other office buildings and
construction of roads.
GENERAL ABSTRACT
PRICE BID
Total Cost of Bid
S.No Description of work Cost Quoted by bidder in Indian
Rupees
In Figure In words
1 Planning,Design and Construction of Zawar

Anicut with feeder channel and tunnel for
diversion of water to Daya Dam Tehsil -
Sarada, Udaipur District in the State of
Rajasthan India on Engineering, Procurement
and Construction (E.P.C) single
Responsibility turn-key basis
,including8 years O&M. (Schedule 1 to 5)
Total Cost of Bid

PRICE BID SCHEDULES
Name of work: Planning,Design and Construction of Zawar Anicut with feeder channel and tunnel
for diversion of water to Daya Dam Tehsil - Sarada, Udaipur District in the State of Rajasthan India on
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (E.P.C) single Responsibility turn-key basis,including 8
years O&M.
S. Component Amount Amount Quoted

No. Quoted (Rs. in words)
(Rs in
figure)
1 Survey, Investigation, design and planning.
2 Civil Works
3 Infrastructure Works & Construction facilities
4 Instrumentation
5 O and M of project for eight year after
Completion of project
Total
Note 1. Amount of each schedule as quoted by bidder is freezed.

2. Quantities, item and rates are indicatives, may be increase or decrease as per approved design
and drawing, no addition, deduction shall be made in amount except under condition of variable.
3. Revise BOQ shall be approved by the owner without change in amount of each schedule
4. The total cost of schedule 1 “Survey, investigation, design and planning” is ordinarily
1% of the total cost of the project/work whereas the total cost of schedule 5 “Operation
and maintenance of project for 8 years” should not be less than 1% of the total cost of the
project.
Sub Schedules
Sched Schedule Amount Quoted Amount Quoted
ule (Rs. in figure) (Rs. in words)
No.
1 Survey, Investigation, design and planning.
2.1 Construction of Zawar Anicut
2.2 Twin Barrel Box type RCC cut and cover
2.3 CD works
2.4 Tunnel work
2.5 Intake & outlet structure including HEM work
3.1 Approach road upto all Sites
3.2 Providing, Fixing and Maintenance of Electrification

Work at Tunnel Site,Anicut site and its components
including office premises, residential area, and
Apporach Road
3.3 Construction and O & M of Infrastructure( Buildings)
at Tunnel Site,Anicut site, Residential and Non
Residential Area at Salumber & Sarada including
,Office ,lab, Workshop, canteen At site/ Etc. with all
required Facilities and fixtures as per scope of work.
4 INSTRUMENTATION
5 Operation and maintenance (for eight years )

TOTAL
Amount (Rs. In words)

2. Item of schedule are indicatives, may be revised as per approved design and drawing,
no addition, deduction shall be made in amount except under condition of variable.
3. Revise BOQ/Schedule shall be approved by the owner without change in amount of
each schedule, if required
4. Total cost of schedule -1 is ordinarily 1%
SCHEDULE-1
1 Survey, Investing, design and planning.
SN Sub Item Amount(Rs.)
1 Construction of Pucca bench mark Muttam of size 30x30 x75cm in
cement concrete, transportation and fixing at site complete in all
respect. Transfer of banchmark by DGPS or Total station instrument,
submission of data in hard and soft copy.
2 Survey work in a grid at defined interval using Total Station /DGPS
instrument and preparation of Block level plan showing all permanent
features/utilities including trees, for planning of tunnels alignment and
superimposing it on digitalized map and developing contours at
interval desired by Engineer Incharge.
3 Transfer of all alignment from sajra map to the ground and taking
Levels by Auto level single OR DGPS, Developing L-section and X-
section and submitting in hard copy three sets and soft copy in Auto Cad
format, using layer system, showing all features. (Total length of L-
section and X-section to be measured for payment) L-section of tunnel.
5 Geological investigation (where directed)Checking of retrogression

below spill arrangement, logging of borelog, rock strata classification,
suitability of structure foundation and suggesting remedial measures for
control of excessive seepage from foundation or body of the dam etc.by
the Geological expert having experience more than 15 years and
Submission of final report.
6 Boring NX dia (54.7 mm dia), hole with diamond coring bits including
taking out of core and arranging etc. core in proper order in core boxes
including cost of core boxes. As per relevant I.S. code of practice. These
rates are including Mobilization & demobilization of Rig.
7 Other soil/geological investigations including SPT, soil classificatoin,

dispersivity, swelling pressure, material tests etc. and submission of test
Results with report.
11 Preparation of Georeferenced digital map of project area demarcating
forest/wild life affected area, superimposed over digitized cadastral map
and google image. KML file of project layout and forest/wildlife
affected area is also to be prepared and provided. soft copy of Geo-
Referenced map, KML file with 3 sets of hard copy is to be provided.
12 Preparation of case for diversion of forest-land/clearance of wild life
affected by project area, online submission of applications for diversions
of forest land/ clearance for wild life, pursuing the case in concerned
offices and office of any other authority whenever required representing
the case before the approval/ clearance authority and finally getting first
stage clearance/approval for wildlife/ Forest land clearance
14 Submission of case for Second Stage Forest Clearance diversion
15 Submission of case for acquisition of pemanent land as varoius stages as

per land acquisition act
16 Any other items required for proper and efficient execution and
functioning of the system
Total
Above mentioned activities are tentative only. Bidder is advised to add /delete activities
so as to cover entire scope of work
2. Items of schedule are indicatives, may be revised as per approved design and drawing,
no addition, deduction shall be made in amount except under condition of variable.
3. Revise BOQ/Schedule can be approved by the owner without change in amount of
each schedule
4. Total cost of schedule - 1 is ordinarily 1% of the cost of the work
SCHEDULE-2
Civil Works
2.1 Construction of Zawar Anicut
S.No. Item Amount (Rs.)

1 Construction of Overflow Section
2 Construction of Non-Overflow section
3 Construction of Energy Dissipating structure
2.2 Twin Barrel Box type RCC cut and cover
S.No Item Amount (Rs.)

1 Excavation
2 P.C.C. AND R.C.C.
3 Shuttering
2.3 CD Works
S.No Item Amount (Rs.)
1 Excavation
2 P.C.C. AND R.C.C.
3 Shuttering
2.4 Tunnel Works
SN item Amount(Rs.)
(1)
Excavation work
a
Tunnels (4.00 m. dia. D Shapped)
(2) R.C.C. bed, side and overt linning of tunnels
a Tunnels (4.00 m. dia. D Shapped)
(3) Permanent steel structure Support ISMB Support

(4) HYSD Rock bolt
Total

Above mentioned activities are tentative only. Bidder is advised to add /delete activities so as
to cover entire scope of work
2. Bidder shall submit details of the schedule/item wise breakup for approval of the owner as
per WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur.
3. Revise BOQ shall be approved by the owner
2.5 Intake & outlet structure including HEM work
S.No. Description of Work Amount

1 HEM Works for Intake Structure
Vertical Steel Gates for Service Gate and Stop Log Gate
Embedded Parts
Hoisting of Gate( Screw Type Hoist)
Trashrack
Hoist Bridge with Trestle Structure

Above mentioned activities are tentative only. Bidder is advised to add /delete activities so as to
Cover entire scope of work
per WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur.

3.1 Approach road upto all Sites
SN Sub Item Amount(Rs.)

Construction of approach roads
1.
Total
Above mentioned activities are tentative only. Bidder is advised to add /delete activities so as
to cover entire scope of work
Per WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur.
3. Revise itemwise BOQ shall be approved by the owner
3.2 Providing, Fixing and Maintenance of Electrification Work at Tunnel Site,
Anicut site and its components including office premises, residential area, and
Apporach Road
S.No. Amount(Rs.)
ITEM
Fixing and Maintenance of Electrification Work at Anicut and Tunnel

1
Site including lightning and street lightning for Apporach Road
2 Dewatering arrangement for Tunnel ( Excluding Charges of hiring of

pumping sets, generator, diesel)
3 3 Phase Power connection

4 Power Backup arrangement
Total
Note : Amount of each schedule as quoted by bidder is freezed.
1. Above mentioned activities are tentative only. Bidder is advised to add /delete activities so as to
Cover entire scope of work
2. Bidder shall submit details of the schedule/item wise breakup for approval of the owner
asper WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur.
3.3 Construction and O & M of Infrastructure (Buildings) at Tunnel Site, Anicut
site, Residential and Non Residential Area at Salumber and Sarada including
,Office ,lab, Workshop, canteen at site/ Etc. with all required Facilities and fixtures
as per scope of work.
SN Item Amount
Construction of high class finish RCC framed structure ground floor
building without basement having ceiling height 4.0 m in M-20 grade of
concrete superstructure in brick masonry, first quality vitrified tile
1 flooring, superior quality wall painting, first class grade teak wood
frame, complete electrification water supply and sanitary fittings as per
approved make and specification, complete as per approved design and
drawing.
a Division, Sub divison and site Office building plinth area 2125 sqm
Any other items required for proper and efficient execution and
2
functioning of the system.( Workshop, canteen At sites)
Total

2. Bidder shall submit details of the schedule/item wise breakup for approval of the
owner as per WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur .
4 INSTRUMENTATION
SN Item Amount
1 On Supply of Instruments
a On erection of instruments
b On Testing
Total

2. Bidder shall submit details of the schedule/item wise breakup for approval of the
owner as per WRD BSR 2022 of Udaipur .
5 Operation and maintenance of tunnels (for Eight years)
1 Operation and Maintenance of project for 08 years
SN Amount quoted by bidder for 08 years O&M
O&M payment for year

O&M payment for year (in%)
(Rs.)
1 1 1 Year (8.25% of total O&M cost)

Total 100% of O&M cost
Note: 1.Contractor shall quote the O&M charges for O&M period of Eight
years.
No escalation for O & M part shall be entertained.
2. O&M Charges for Eight year shall not be less that 1.0 % of design build
cost of bid.
SECTION – X
INDICATIVE DRAWINGS
LIST OF INDICATIVE DRAWINGS
 INDEX MAP
 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF LAYOUT OF CONSTRUCTION OF ZAWAR ANICUT
AND TUNNEL
 L-SECTION OF TUNNELS
 PLAN AND SECTION OF ANICUT
 TYPICAL CROSS SECTION OF D- SHAPED TUNNELS
 PLAN AND SECTION OF CUT AND COVER

Financial Bid

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Financial Bid

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Government of Rajasthan

Water Resources Department

Planning,Design and Construction of Zawar Anicut with feeder

E-NIB No.22 /2023-24

Additional Chief Engineer

Section-V : Procuring Entity‟s Requirements

Part A : Project Profile

Section-VIA : General Conditions of Contract

Section-VIB : Special Conditions of the Contract/ Contract Data

Section-VIC : Contract Forms

Section – VII: Price Bid

Section – VIII: Payment Schedule

Section –IX: Indicative Activity Schedule of Project

DSTS999967-110 Dated: 26/05/2023 for Rs.19999.87 Lacs.

c. Planning & designing

B. Main Construction activity:

1 Tunnel Location and Alignment As per Preliminary/indicative

3 Design Discharge of Finished Tunnel 14.05 cumecs

4 Length of Finished Tunnel 4.0 km

5 Diameter of Finished Tunnel Inner 4.0m D shaped

6 Slope of Tunnel 1 in 1500

Over Flow Section-

Twin barrel box type RCC cut and cover

Slope of Finished barrels 1 in 1500

b. Temporary acquisition/crop compensation/Right of way

Cost for social impact assessment study will be borne by contractor.

D. Operation & Maintenance & management of the project components created

Other scope of work includes

Any requirement of work whether requested by the owner or otherwise whether

F. All other activities/infrastructural works, works related to the project as

G. Operation & Maintenance & management of the project components created

g) Providing required spares and maintaining adequate inventory of required

2. PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS DURING O&M

S.N. Nature of Repair Frequency of repair for Frequency of repair

OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The tenderer, shall assume full responsibility of Engineering adequacy, coordination

1. SURVEY AND INVESTIGATION

1.3. Preparation of Schedule of quantities

2. CONSTRUCTION OF BENCHMARK STRUCTURES

3. FIELD SURVEY FOR BLOCK CONTOURING AND PREPARATION OF

1.1 FINE AGGREGATE

1.2 COARSE AGGREGATE

1. PLAIN AND REINFORCED CONCRETE

1.2 Applicable Publications

1 IS: 455 - 1976 Specification for Portland slag cement (third

1.2.1 Other Publications

1.3.2 Fine Aggregates

Limits of deleterious material

(d) Fineness Modulus

1.3.3 Coarse Aggregate

I.S. Sieve description % Passing for graded / normal size aggregate

2.2 Production of Concrete

2.3 Temperature of Concrete and Weather Conditions

2.5 Preparation for Placing Concrete

2.5.2 Placing and Compacting Concrete

2.6 Form work

2.6.2 Form, Centering and Temporary Works

2.6.3 Cleaning and Treatment of Forms

2.6.4 Removal of Forms

2.7 Curing of concrete

2.7.2 Water Curing

2.8 Requirement of concrete construction

2.8.2Concrete in Various components of Bridges, Regular, Escape Aqueducts etc.